Professional Documents
Culture Documents
3
Adams View User's Guide
Corporate Europe, Middle East, Africa
MSC Software Corporation MSC Software GmbH
5161 California Ave, Suite 200 Am Moosfeld 13
University Research Park 81829 Munich, Germany
Irvine, CA 92617 Telephone: (49) 89 431 98 70
Telephone: (714) 540-8900 Email: europe@mscsoftware.com
Email: americas.contact@mscsoftware.com
Japan Asia-Pacific
MSC Software Japan Ltd. MSC Software (S) Pte. Ltd.
KANDA SQUARE 16F 100 Beach Road
2-2-1 Kanda Nishikicho, Chiyoda-ku #16-05 Shaw Tower
Tokyo 101-0054, Japan Singapore 189702
Telephone: (81)(3) 6275 0870 Telephone: 65-6272-0082
Email: MSCJ.Market@mscsoftware.com Email: APAC.Contact@mscsoftware.com
Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com
Support
http://www.mscsoftware.com/Contents/Services/Technical-Support/Contact-Technical-Support.aspx
Disclaimer
This documentation, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used only in accordance with the
terms of such license.
MSC Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document
without prior notice.
The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only, and are not intended
to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. MSC Software Corporation assumes no liability or
responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information contained herein.
User Documentation: Copyright © 2021 MSC Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or distribution of this
document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC Software Corporation is prohibited.
This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC Software suppliers.
Additional terms and conditions and/or notices may apply for certain third party software. Such additional third party software terms
and conditions and/or notices may be set forth in documentation and/or at http://www.mscsoftware.com/thirdpartysoftware (or successor
website designated by MSC from time to time). Portions of this software are owned by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management, Inc.
© Copyright 2021
The MSC Software logo, MSC, MSC Adams, MD Adams, and Adams are trademarks or registered trademarks of MSC Software
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries. FLEXlm and FlexNet Publisher are trademarks or registered trademarks of Flexera Software.
Parasolid is a registered trademark of Siemens Product Lifecycle Management, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
ADAM:V2021.3:Z:Z:Z:DC-VIEW
Documentation Feedback
At MSC Software, we strive to produce the highest quality documentation and welcome your feedback.
If you have comments or suggestions about our documentation, write to us at: documentation-
feedback@mscsoftware.com.
Please include the following information with your feedback:
Document name
Release/Version number
Chapter/Section name
Topic title (for Online Help)
Brief description of the content (for example, incomplete/incorrect information, grammatical
errors, information that requires clarification or more details and so on).
Your suggestions for correcting/improving documentation
You may also provide your feedback about MSC Software documentation by taking a short 5-minute
survey at: http://msc-documentation.questionpro.com.
Note: The above mentioned e-mail address is only for providing documentation specific
feedback. If you have any technical problems, issues, or queries, please contact Technical
Support.
Learning Basics
Overview
3. Select a preset unit system for your model. In all the preset unit systems, time is in seconds and angles
are in degrees. You can set:
• MMKS - Sets length to millimeter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.
• MKS - Sets length to meter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.
• CGS - Sets length to centimeter, mass to gram, and force to Dyne.
• IPS - Sets length to inch, mass to slug, and force to PoundForce.
4. If you do not want any of the preset unit systems, you can change the units as required. Learn about
changing the default units.
5. Select OK.
Adams View creates a new model for you. If you selected to set gravity when creating a new model,
the Gravity Settings dialog box appears. Learn about specifying gravitational force.
Note: If you accidentally exit without saving your work, you can use the Adams View Log file
(aview.log) to recover your work. Learn about using the Adams View log file
See the section Adams File Types for more information on Adams View file types.
2. Specify the directory to be used as your working directory. Adams View saves all files in this directory.
You can change the working directory at any time. Learn about specifying working directory.
3. If you selected to create a new model, do the following:
• In the Model name text box, enter the name you want assigned to the new model. You can enter
up to 80 alphanumeric characters. You cannot include special characters, such as spaces or
periods.
• Select the gravity settings for the new model. You can select:
• Earth Normal - Sets the gravity to 1 G downward.
• No Gravity - Turns off the gravitational force.
• Other - Lets you set the gravity as desired. The Gravity Settings dialog box appears after you
select OK on the Welcome dialog box.
4. Select a preset unit system for your model. In all the preset unit systems, time is in seconds and angles
are in degrees. You can set:
• MMKS - Sets length to millimeter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.
• MKS - Sets length to meter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.
• CGS - Sets length to centimeter, mass to gram, and force to Dyne.
• IPS - Sets length to inch, mass to slug, and force to PoundForce.
5. If you do not want any of the preset unit systems, you can change the units as required. Learn about
changing the default units.
6. Select OK.
Adams View creates a new model for you. If you selected to set gravity when creating a new model,
the Gravity Settings dialog box appears. Learn about specifying gravitational force.
Modeling Process
The steps that you use in Adams View to create a model mirror the same steps that you would use to build a
physical prototype. Click a step below or use the arrows on the right to read the steps sequentially.
Learning Basics 7
Overview
Although we’ve listed the steps that you perform to create a model as though you create the entire model at
once and then test and improve it, we recommend that you build and test small elements or subsystems of
your model before you build the entire model. For example, create a few modeling objects, connect them
together, and then run a simple simulation to test their motion and ensure that you are connecting them
correctly. Once these are modeled correctly, add more complexity to your model. By starting out slowly, you
can ensure that each subsystem works before moving on to the next step. We call this the crawl-walk-run
approach.
Main toolbox
Status bar
8 Adams View
Overview
Note: If you accidentally exit without saving your work, you can use the Adams View Log file
(aview.log) to recover your work. Learn about using the Adams View log file
3. At the bottom of the Plugin Manager, in the text box Licenses, view the number of licenses available.
To unload a plugin:
1. From the Tools menu, select Plugin Manager.
2. In the Load column, next to the plugin you want to unload, clear the selection of Yes.
3. Select OK.
Adams View removes any plugin menus or commands.
Note: You can change the name of the log file through the initialization file .mdi_init. For more
information, see Running and Configuring Adams.
only commands that create links, and remove any duplicate lines that occur if you encounter the same error
again.
To set the type of information displayed in the Display Log File dialog box:
1. Select the Show only lines of type check box and then select one of the following:
• Info - Displays all commands that you have executed in Adams View.
• Warning - Displays non-fatal messages that warn you of possible problems with commands you
entered.
• Error - Displays fatal messages that Adams View did not understand and, therefore, did not
successfully process.
• Fatal - Displays messages that indicated that your model would not simulate.
2. If desired, select Show only lines containing and enter the text that the line must contain in the text
box. You can also enter wildcards. Learn about using wildcards.
3. Select Apply.
Using Wildcards
You can use wildcards to narrow any search, set the type of information displayed in a window, such as the
Database Navigator or the Log file, or specify a name of an object in a dialog box.
You can use a dash (-) to create ranges of characters. For example, [a-f1-4] is the same as
[abcdef1234].
You can use a backslash (\) to include a special character as part of the character set. For example,
[AB\]CD] includes the five characters A, B, ], C, and D.
Here are some examples of more complex patterns and possible matches:
x*y - Matches any object whose name starts with x and ends with y. This would include xy, x1y, and
xaby.
x??y - Matches only those objects with four-character long names that start with x and end with y.
This would include xaay, xaby, and xrqy.
x?y* - Matches all of those objects whose names start with x and have y as the third character. This
would include xayee, xyy, and xxya.
*{aa,ee,ii,oo,uu}* - Matches all those objects whose name contains the same vowel twice in a row.
This would include loops and skiing.
[aeiou]*[0-9] - Matches any object whose name starts with a vowel and ends with a digit. This would
include eagle10, arapahoe9, and ex29.
[^aeiou]?[xyz]* - Matches any object whose name does not start with a vowel and has x, y, or z as the
third letter. This would include thx1138, rex, and fizzy.
You can use quotation marks to identify all objects with a certain naming pattern. The following
example describes how to set a damping ratio of 0.05 to all beams in .model_1 that have ‘_beam’
in the name.
for var=the_beam obj=.model_1."*_beam*" type=Beam
force modify element_like beam &
beam_name = (eval(the_beam).name) &
damping_ratio = 0.05
end !for
Model Browser
Database Navigator
14 Adams View
Overview
Info Window
Learning Basics 15
Overview
16 Adams View
Overview
Function Builder
Learning Basics 17
Overview
18 Adams View
Overview
CMD Version:2 CAD import using CMD file with CMD Version:2 will retain the
Unicode/special characters from object names and display the same names
throughout the interface including the model browser.
Export using CMD file with CMD Version:2 will generate a CMD file that
retains any object names in the session using Unicode/special characters.
CMD Version flag CMD CAD Import using CMD file will replace the Unicode/special Characters
Version:2 is missing from object names with an underscore ('_') and convert them into
traditionally supported Adams names and display those throughout the
interface including the model browser.
Export using CMD file will export the converted names present in Adams
database.
Ribbon Capability
Introduction
The Adams 2021.3 ribbon based style interface and the GUI explained below.
20 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
Main Menu
Main menu divided in to following sections.
Text-based menus
File handling Strip
Selection Strip
Text-based menus
File
Edit
View
Settings
Tools
Important: Those users who customize the Adams View main text menu should be advised that this text
menu's location is .gui.main.mmenu_menu.mbar_refresh. The Adams View main
text menu for the Classic interface style remains .gui.main.mbar as it has been in
previous releases. To learn more about customizing Adams View refer to Customizing Adams
View.
Save Database
Redo
Undo
Selection Strip
Set the view plane to coincident with the xy plane of an object users select
Create Material
This will allow you to change the entity color. Right click on the button for more color
option.
Align & Rotate Tool - Rotating Objects About or Along Grid or Features
f(x) Tool
f( θ ) tool
View Fit
Dynamic Pick
Center
Rotate
Dynamic Translate
Dynamic Zoom
24 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
Solids
Box Tool
Cylinder Tool
Sphere Tool
Frustum Tool
Torus Tool
Link Tool
Plate Tool
Extrusion Tool
Revolution Tool
Learning Basics 25
Ribbon Capability
Plane Tool
Flexible Bodies
Adams Flex
Rigid to Flex
Flex to Flex
MNF XForm
ViewFlex
Construction
Point Tool
Marker Tool
Polyline Tool
Arc Tool
Spline Tool
26 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
Point Mass
Booleans
Unite Tool
Merge Tool
Intersect Tool
Cut Tool
Split Tool
Chain Tool
Features
Chamfer Tool
Fillet Tool
Hole Tool
Boss Tool
Hollow Tool
Learning Basics 27
Ribbon Capability
Connectors
Joints
Primitives
Couplers
Special
General Constraint
Learning Basics 29
Ribbon Capability
Motions
Joint Motions
General Motions
Point Motion
Forces
Applied Forces
Flexible Connections
Bushing Tool
Beam
Special Forces
Contact
Tire
Modal Force
Gravity
Learning Basics 31
Ribbon Capability
Elements
Data Elements
Spline Tool
General Spline
Array
Create/Modify Matrix
Create/Modify String
Create FEMDATA
System Elements
Function
Controls Toolkit
User Defined
Design Exploration
Design Variable
Measures
Object Measures
Point-to-Point Measures
Angle Measures
Orientation Measures
Range Measures
Computed Measure
Function Measure
Display Measures
Instrumentation
Create a Request
34 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
Create/Modify Sensor
Design Evaluation
Adams Insight
Plugins
Controls
Controls
Vibration
Vibration
Durability
Durability
Mechatronics
Mechatronics
Note: Plugins located on this tab may be initially loaded by clicking the corresponding icon. To
unload these plugins or to subsequently reload these plugins one must use the Plugin
Manager located under the Tools menu. To learn more about the Plugin Manager, see section
Loading and Unloading Plugins.
36 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
Machinery
Gear
Create Gear Pair
Planetary Gear
Gear Output
Belt
Create Pully
Create Belt
Belt Actuation Input
Chain
Create Sprockets
Create Chain
Sprocket Actuation Input
Bearing
Create Bearing
Bearing Output
Cable
Create Cable
Motor
Create Motor
Cam
Create Follower Motion
Create Cam Profile
Construct Cam System
Learning Basics 37
Ribbon Capability
Simulation
Setup
Import ACF
Simulate
Interactive Controls
Scripted Controls
Results
Review
Animation Controls
38 Adams View
Ribbon Capability
Adams PostProcessor
Adams PostProcessor
Model Browser
Browse
The browse tab is the default tab. It depicts a hierarchy of all the objects in the database. It has nine top level
folders that contain the objects by type. The objects that do not fit into the first eight categories, are included
in the "All Other" folder.
Learning Basics 39
Ribbon Capability
Groups
The Groups tab allows the user to gather database objects together.
Filters
The Filters tab enables you to create and save complex searches which can update dynamically.
To learn more about the model browser see section Model Browser.
Status Toolbar
View Setup Strip
Toggle visibility
Window layout
Information Strip
Stop command
Setting Preferences
Rotation Sequences
Adams View uses three orientation angles to perform three rotations about the axes of a coordinate system.
You specify the order in which axes are rotated about as a sequence of three numbers (1,2,3), which
correspond to x-, y-, and z-axes, respectively. For example, a rotation order of 312 produces rotations about
the z-, then x-, and then y-axis. Adams View provides you with a set of 24 rotation sequences from which to
choose. The most commonly used rotation sequence, body 313, is the default sequence.
The figure below shows how successive rotations defined by the rotation angles orient the axes. Dashed lines
represent original orientations and solid lines represent new and unchanged orientations.
Learning Basics 41
Setting Preferences
The first angle rotates the coordinate system about its z-axis. This repositions the x-axis and the y-
axis (see a in figure).
The second angle rotates the coordinate system about its new x-axis (x´) to reposition the new y-axis
(y´) and the z-axis (see b in figure).
The third angle rotates the coordinate system about its new z-axis (z´) to reposition the new x-axis
(x´) and the second new y-axis (y´´).
Together and in sequence, these rotations define the orientation of the coordinate system (see c in figure).
The right-hand rule defines the direction of positive rotation about each axis. For example, if you are looking
down the initial z-axis, positive rotations are counterclockwise and negative rotations are clockwise.
Unit Labels
To enter units other than the default in text boxes, you can use either simple unit labels or composed unit
labels.
Any unique abbreviation for a simple unit label is acceptable. For example, you can abbreviate radians in the
following ways, since none of the abbreviations conflict with abbreviations for any other units:
radians = radian = radia = radi = rad = ra = r
There are three exceptions for entering unique aliases:
Here are some examples of unit labels associated with a number within text boxes:
1mm
1.2 inch (spaces are not significant)
24in (you can use abbreviations)
A composed unit label is always enclosed in parentheses to eliminate ambiguity. Here are some tips and
examples of composed unit labels:
To indicate torque, enter: 3.3 (newton*meter)
To indicate composed acceleration, enter: 9.8 (meter/sec**2)
To indicate angular acceleration, enter : PI (rad/sec**2)
To indicate multiplication with a dash, enter: (fun(1)*3)(in - lbf)
You cannot include parentheses inside of composed units. Therefore, the following is incorrect:
1.2 (inch / (sec*deg))
Instead, enter the following:
1.2 (inch / sec/deg)
Tip: In general, if you see units associated with numbers in the information window, command
file, log file, and so on, you should be able to take that unit string and use it in a text box
without error.
Interface Style
The user is provided with the option to switch 'Classic' View interface. This options provided under the main
menu Settings → Interface style → Classic. If user wants to switch back to the new ribbon based view then
select Settings → Interface style → Default.
To save settings:
1. Set the display of your model and any other Adams View settings, as desired.
2. From the Settings menu, select Save Settings.
48 Adams View
Model Browser
Model Browser
The Model Browser window can be divided into three sections, based on the three tabs:
Browse
Group
Filters
These three tabs are discussed in detail in separate sections, later in this chapter.
To dock the undocked Model Browser, double-click on its control bar. The browser gets docked on
its previous location.
To dock the undocked Model Browser on a different (right/left) location, click on the browser’s
control bar and drag the window where you want to dock the window; when you get close enough,
the browser will jump into the docking position.
To move the undocked Model Browser, click on its control bar and drag anywhere on your screen.
Right-click Menus
When you click right mouse button, different shortcut menus appear depending on the tab and the entity
selected in the Model Browser. The menus can be divided in three types:
Shortcut menu: Appears, when you right-click in the free space in the Model Browser.
Context menu for single selection: Appears, when you right-click on a single entity in the Model
Browser.
Context menu for multiple selection: Appears, when you right-click after selecting multiple entities.
Learning Basics 51
Model Browser
Shortcut Menu
When you click in the free space of any tab of the Model Browser a shortcut menu appears. The options in
this menu differ in different tabs but some common functionality is described below:
To expand all nodes in the Model Browser tree, select Expand All from the shortcut menu.
To collapse all nodes in the Model Browser tree, select Collapse All from the shortcut menu.
To refresh the Model Browser, select Refresh from the shortcut menu.
To sort the objects in the Model Browser by either type or name, point to Sort Entities by on the
shortcut menu and click either Type or Name, as required.
Note that the Browse section provides only one option: Sort Entities by Name.
The options under the context menus for single and multiple selection differ depending on the current tab
(Browse, Groups, or Filters) and are discussed in the respective sections.
Browse Tab
The browse tab is the default tab. It depicts a hierarchy of all the objects in the database. It has nine top level
folders that contain the objects by type. The objects that do not fit into the first eight categories are included
in the "All Other" folder.
52 Adams View
Model Browser
A drop down menu at the top of the browse tab displays currently active model. The browse tab has a quick
search box that enables you to specify search criteria and find matching objects in the database.
Modifying Objects
The Model Browser lets you modify database objects.
To modify objects:
1. Right-click on the object, and then select Modify. Based on the object type selected the relevant
Modify window appears.
2. Modify the specified values as required and click OK.
Creating Measure
The procedure of creating object measure is described below. Read About Measures for more information on
object measures.
Renaming Objects
You can rename an object in the model browser.
To activate/deactivate objects:
1. Right-click on the object to Activate/Deactivate, and then select (De)activate. The
Activate/Deactivate window appears.
2. Choose one from the following:
To deactivate the object and its dependents, deselect the Object Active checkbox.
To deactivate only the dependents of selected object, deselect the Object’s Dependent Active
checkbox.
54 Adams View
Model Browser
To reactivate a deactivated object and its dependents, select the Object Active checkbox.
To reactivate the deactivated dependents of an object, select the Object’s Dependent Active
checkbox.
3. Click OK.
Hiding/Showing Objects
You can change object display preferences.
Groups Tab
The groups tab enables you to create and manage groups in the database. Group creation and modification
is supported along with the facility to drag-drop members across groups.
Grouping Objects
The Groups tab enables you to select and group database objects based on your preferences. It is shown below.
2. Provide the required information in the fields in the Group Create window, and then click OK. The
new group gets created.
Modifying Groups
The Model Browser lets you modify the object groups.
To modify groups:
1. Right-click on the group, and then select Modify. The Group Modify window appears.
2. .Modify the specified values as desired and click OK.
To empty a group:
1. Right-click on the group, and then select Empty. All the objects get removed from the group.
Sorting Groups
You can sort groups by either name or type.
To sort groups:
Right-click in the free space in Groups tab, and then point to Sort by and select Name or Type as required.
The groups will get sorted.
Quick Search
The quick search box will also be present at the bottom of the groups tab. It functions in exactly the same
way as on the Browse Tab, but only displays group names or those items present in groups.
Filters Tab
The Filters tab enables you to create and save complex searches which can update dynamically.
56 Adams View
Model Browser
Filtering Objects
You can select search criteria in the filter input area located at the bottom of the browser window, and type
text in the search text field for this search.
To create a filter:
1. Right-click in the free space in Filter tab, and then select New Filter. The Filter Creation window
appears.
2. Type the name of the filter and click Add Filter. The filter gets added.
3. In the Filter text box, enter the name of the objects that you want to display. Type any wildcard that
you want to include.
4. From the pull-down menu below Filter text box, select the type of object or objects that you want to
display in the Model Browser.
5. To only display active or inactive objects, set the pull-down menu below the Filter objects to either
Active Objects or Inactive Objects.
6. Select the Dynamic check box if you want the filter to update automatically when new objects that
meet the filter specifications are added.
7. Press Enter.
Learning Basics 57
Model Browser
Combining Filters
You can create a new filter by combining two filters. One of the three operators: AND, OR, or NOT can be
used for combining the filters.
AND: Creates a filter that consolidates the two filters as: F 1 ∩ F 2 , only the common objects of
both filters will be in the resulting filter.
OR: Creates a filter that consolidates the two filters as: F 1 ∪ F 2 , all objects of both filters will be
in the resulting filter.
NOT: Creates a filter that consolidates the two filters as: F 1 – F 2 , only the objects that are in F 1
but not in F 2 , will be in the resulting filter.
58 Adams View
Model Browser
To combine filters:
1. Select the two filters to combine and right-click on them.
2. From the right-click menu that appears, point to Combine and select one condition from AND, OR,
or NOT, as required.
The new filter will be created, satisfying the condition selected.
The order of the filter combination is determined by the order in which the filters appear in the list from the
bottom to top. For example, if two filters A and B are selected for combination such that A appears above B
in the list, then the filter created with an AND operation between the two will be B_AND_A (and will be so
named as the default). In order to create a filter A_AND_B, the list needs to be sorted first (using the 'Sort
Filters' option from the context menu that pops up when the list is right-mouse clicked.).
The filter operations AND and OR are inherently commutative and as such the order of the filter created by
a combination of these do not matter as far as the result is concerned. For example, the filter created with the
combinations (A AND B) and (B AND A) will yield the same result. The filter combination NOT however
is not commutative and the order here can be determined by the sorting method as explained above.
Models
Learn about working with Model in a Modeling database:
Creating Models
Displaying Models in the Database
Merging Models
Renaming a Model
Modifying a Model's Comments
Printing Models
Deleting a Model
Viewing Model Topology Map Through Information Window
Creating Models
You can store more than one Model in a Modeling database. You may find it helpful to store multiple models in
the same database because it lets you:
Keep multiple versions of the same mechanical system in the same file.
Store models of subsystems in one file that you want to combine and simulate as a whole.
Compare results between models.
1. On the Main Menu → File handling Strip → select Create a new model .
4. Select the Comments tool on the dialog box and enter comments you want associated with the
model. Learn about Comments.
5. Select OK.
Merging Models
You can merge one Model in your Modeling database into another model. For example, you can merge a
subsystem, called the source model, which you want to work on separately, into the base destination model
when you are ready to work on them as a whole. Adams View maintains the source model and does not
change it after the merge operation.
This is helpful for merging two subsystems stored in the same database into a single model. It allows you to
work on each subsystem individually and merge them together when you are ready to work on them as a
whole.
As you merge models, you can:
Enter a set of translations and rotations that Adams View applies to the source model. Adams View
first rotates the model then translates it.
Specify whether Adams View merges parts with the same name into one part, or copies and renames
the duplicate objects before merging them into the destination model.
Place all merged objects into a group. Learn more about Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
To merge models:
1. On the Tools menu, select Merge Two Models.
The Merge Two Models dialog box appears.
2. In the Base Model Name text box, enter the name of the destination model.
3. In the Model to be merged text box, enter the name of the source model that you want to merge into
the destination model.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
4. Specify the translations to apply to the source model before merging it with the destination model.
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention for entering
translational positions. Learn more about Coordinate Systems in Adams View.
5. Specify the angular position of the parts and polylines in the source model.
Adams View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate system and applying
three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed 313 Euler angles. You can change the
convention for entering orientation angles.
29
Models
6. If desired, enter a new or existing group into which Adams View adds all merged objects.
7. Set the pull-down menu to either merge parts that have the same name (Merge) or rename the parts
before merging the models (Rename).
8. Select OK.
Renaming a Model
Adams View lets you change the name of a Model.
To rename a model:
1. On the Model Browser right click on the model you want to rename and select Rename.
The Rename Object dialog box appears.
2. Enter a new name for the model.
3. Select OK.
3. Select the Comments tool on the dialog box and enter any comments you want associated with
the model. Learn about Comments.
4. Select OK.
Printing Models
Adams View prints the currently displayed Model as it appears in the currently active View window. You can set
various print options, such as specifying color and orientation.
Before printing, be sure to check which view window is the active window and what the magnification of
your model is in the view window. You might also want to check the font that Adams View is using for
printing text. Learn about Setting Screen and Printer Fonts.
30 Adams View
Models
To cancel printing:
Select Cancel or press the Esc key.
Deleting a Model
You can remove a Model and all its objects from the Modeling database. When you delete a model, Adams View
removes the following objects from the modeling database:
Parts
Geometry
Markers
Joints
Forces
Simulation results
Data elements and System elements
Design variables
It does not remove plots, interface changes, or design variables that belong to the modeling database.
To delete a model:
1. Do one of the following:
31
Models
• On the Model Browser menu, right-click on the Model name you want to delete, and then select
Delete.
• On the Edit menu, select Delete.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the model you want to delete. Learn about selecting objects.
3. Select OK.
If you selected Delete from the Build menu, Adams View asks you to confirm the deletion of the
model.
4. Select Delete.
Part ground
Is connected to:
LINK_1 via JOINT_2 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_6 via JOINT_1 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_1 via FORCE_1 (Single_Component_Force)
Part LINK_1
Is connected to:
LINK_5 via JOINT_3 (Revolute Joint)
ground via JOINT_2 (Revolute Joint)
ground via FORCE_1 (Single_Component_Force)
32 Adams View
Models
Part LINK_5
Is connected to:
LINK_1 via JOINT_3 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_6 via JOINT_4 (Revolute Joint)
Part LINK_6
Is connected to:
LINK_5 via JOINT_4 (Revolute Joint)
ground via JOINT_1 (Revolute Joint)
tool .
Unconnected Parts:
LINK_1
Constraints tool .
Note: You can also view model topology through the Database Navigator.
33
Models (Classic Interface)
Creating Models
You can store more than one Model in a Modeling database. You may find it helpful to store multiple models in
the same database because it lets you:
Keep multiple versions of the same mechanical system in the same file.
Store models of subsystems in one file that you want to combine and simulate as a whole.
Compare results between models.
4. Select the Comments tool on the dialog box and enter comments you want associated with the
model. Learn about Comments.
5. Select OK.
Merging Models
You can merge one Model in your Modeling database into another model. For example, you can merge a
subsystem, called the source model, which you want to work on separately, into the base destination model
when you are ready to work on them as a whole. Adams View maintains the source model and does not
change it after the merge operation.
This is helpful for merging two subsystems stored in the same database into a single model. It allows you to
work on each subsystem individually and merge them together when you are ready to work on them as a
whole.
As you merge models, you can:
Enter a set of translations and rotations that Adams View applies to the source model. Adams View
first rotates the model then translates it.
Specify whether Adams View merges parts with the same name into one part, or copies and renames
the duplicate objects before merging them into the destination model.
Place all merged objects into a group. Learn more about Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
To merge models:
1. On the Tools menu, select Merge Two Models.
The Merge Two Models dialog box appears.
2. In the Base Model Name text box, enter the name of the destination model.
3. In the Model to be merged text box, enter the name of the source model that you want to merge into
the destination model.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
4. Specify the translations to apply to the source model before merging it with the destination model.
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention for entering
translational positions. Learn more about Coordinate Systems in Adams View.
5. Specify the angular position of the parts and polylines in the source model.
Adams View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate system and applying
three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed 313 Euler angles. You can change the
convention for entering orientation angles.
35
Models (Classic Interface)
6. If desired, enter a new or existing group into which Adams View adds all merged objects.
7. Set the pull-down menu to either merge parts that have the same name (Merge) or rename the parts
before merging the models (Rename).
8. Select OK.
Renaming a Model
Adams View lets you change the name of a Model.
To rename a model:
1. On the Build menu, point to Model, and then select Rename.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the model you want to rename.
The Rename Object appears.
3. Enter a new name for the model.
4. Select the More button to display the Database Navigator and rename another object in the
database.
5. Select OK.
3. Select the Comments tool on the dialog box and enter any comments you want associated with
the model. Learn about Comments.
4. Select OK.
Printing Models
Adams View prints the currently displayed Model as it appears in the currently active View window. You can set
various print options, such as specifying color and orientation.
36 Adams View
Models (Classic Interface)
Before printing, be sure to check which view window is the active window and what the magnification of
your model is in the view window. You might also want to check the font that Adams View is using for
printing text. Learn about Setting Screen and Printer Fonts.
To cancel printing:
Select Cancel or press the Esc key.
Deleting a Model
You can remove a Model and all its objects from the Modeling database. When you delete a model, Adams View
removes the following objects from the modeling database:
Parts
Geometry
Markers
Joints
Forces
Simulation results
Data elements and System elements
37
Models (Classic Interface)
Design variables
It does not remove plots, interface changes, or design variables that belong to the modeling database.
To delete a model:
1. Do one of the following:
• On the Build menu, point to Model, and then select Delete.
• On the Edit menu, select Delete.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the model you want to delete. Learn about selecting objects.
3. Select OK.
If you selected Delete from the Build menu, Adams View asks you to confirm the deletion of the
model.
4. Select Delete.
Part ground
Is connected to:
LINK_1 via JOINT_2 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_6 via JOINT_1 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_1 via FORCE_1 (Single_Component_Force)
38 Adams View
Models (Classic Interface)
Part LINK_1
Is connected to:
LINK_5 via JOINT_3 (Revolute Joint)
ground via JOINT_2 (Revolute Joint)
ground via FORCE_1 (Single_Component_Force)
Part LINK_5
Is connected to:
LINK_1 via JOINT_3 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_6 via JOINT_4 (Revolute Joint)
Part LINK_6
Is connected to:
LINK_5 via JOINT_4 (Revolute Joint)
ground via JOINT_1 (Revolute Joint)
Unconnected Parts:
LINK_1
Note: You can also view model topology through the Database Navigator.
39
Modeling Database
Modeling Database
Adams View stores all your work in Modeling database.
Learn more:
About the Adams View Modeling Database
Creating a Modeling Database
Opening a Modeling Database
Saving Modeling Database
Saving the Current Modeling Database with a New Name
Object Name Length Limit
Names of objects in the database use a hierarchical naming structure. For example, a block built on the
ground part is named .model_1.ground.block.
Save Settings, on the Settings menu to save any preferences you set, Adams View reads these and changes the
interface accordingly. Learn about Saving and Restoring Settings.
customization changes you made. To save the model data in another format, export the data as explained in
Exchanging Data in Adams. To save your preferences, see Saving and Restoring Settings.
Database Navigator
The Database Navigator helps you view, select, and modify objects in your Modeling database.
Learn more:
About the Database Navigator
Viewing Objects
Showing, Hiding, and Selecting Objects in the Database Navigator
Managing the Select List
Filtering Objects in the Database Navigator
Sorting Objects in the Database Navigator
Setting Highlighting in the Database Navigator
Changing Objects
Setting Appearance of Objects Through the Database Navigator
Renaming Objects Through the Database Navigator
Adding Comments Through the Database Navigator
Viewing Information About Your Model
Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator
Viewing the Associativity of Objects
Viewing Object Information Through the Database Navigator
To use the Up and Down arrow keys to select a continuous set of objects:
1. In the tree list, click on the first object, hold down the Shift key, and then use the Up or Down arrows
to select a block of objects.
2. Select OK.
To toggle highlighting:
Select Highlighting.
Tip: For transparency, the higher the value, the more transparent the object is, allowing other
objects to show through. The lower the value, the more opaque the object is, covering other
objects. However, setting the transparency of objects can have a negative impact on
graphical performance if you are using a graphics card without hardware acceleration for
OpenGL. Instead of setting an object’s transparency, consider setting the object’s render
mode to wireframe.
3. To set the scope of the appearance changes, you can select either:
• Object - Only apply to the selected object.
• Siblings - Apply changes to all objects of the same type that are children of the parent of the
selected object.
• All - Apply changes to objects matching the filter you set in the Filter text box.
4. Select Apply.
47
Database Navigator
To rename an object:
1. From the Database Navigator pull-down menu, select Rename.
2. From the Tree list, select the object to rename.
3. In the text box that appears to the right, type a new name for the object.
4. Select Apply.
with a joint motion, and then select to view the associativity of that motion, you see a joint listed in the right
window, as shown below.
With Auto Navigate selected, you can just select that joint from the right window to view its associativity. If
it were not selected, you would have to select the joint from the tree list to view its associativity. In addition,
when you select the joint in the right window, the Database Navigator also highlights it in the tree list.
Information Window
Adams View uses the Information window to display many different types of information about your model,
Simulation, or motion data. In addition to just viewing information about your model, you can perform a
variety of operations in the Information window. For example, you can display additional information about
the current object's parent or child, print the information, display information about a different object in the
database, and more.
Learn more:
Displaying Information
Displaying Object Information and Accessing the Information Window
Displaying Parent and Children Information
Displaying an Object's Modify Dialog Box
51
Information Window
Managing Information
Clearing the Information Window
Saving Information in the Information Window
Displaying a Text File in the Information Window
Copying Text in the Information Window
Setting the Information Mode
Tip: You may want to zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor
over just that object.
To use the Database Navigator to display information about objects in the Information window:
1. On the
1. On the Status Toolbar, select the Info tool from the Information Strip.
To display object information once you've displayed the Information window, do one of the
following:
In the text box at the top of the Information window, enter the name of the object, and then select
Apply.
52 Adams View
Information Window
If the object name already appears in the Information window, place the text cursor in the name of
the object, and then select Apply.
the children of the object, its geometry, whether or not comments are associated with it, and its attributes,
such as its color and visibility.
you create it. Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move the cursor.
You can also define Design variables or Expressions for these setting values.
To select a default tool so you can use it several times or set the display in all view windows:
Double-click the tool with the left mouse button.
types of commands that appear on shortcut menus depend on the type of object required in the text box. The
table below shows the different menu commands that appear for each type of object.
Be sure to enter the entire name of the object, including its model and parent, if the name of the
object is not unique within the entire database. For example, if you had two markers called mar_1
on two different parts, you need to enter .model_1.par_1.mar_1 to uniquely identify the marker.
Learn about the Adams View modeling database hierarchy.
Browsing Directories
You can use the Select File dialog box to browse for a file.
To browse for a file:
1. Right-click a text box that requires a file name to display a shortcut menu.
2. Select Browse to display the Select File dialog box.
3. Double-click the directory that contains the file.
4. In the File Name box, type the file name you want to open, or highlight the file in the list.
5. Select Open.
Tip: Clear the text box, if necessary, and double-click to display the File Selection dialog box
Validates the information you have entered in the text box. This is particularly helpful if you entered
a function in the text box. Adams View also automatically validates the information when you move
the cursor out of the text box.
On the Status Toolbar, from the View Setup Strip, select the Coordinate Window tool .
The coordinate window appears in the lower right corner of the screen. You can move and size it as
you do any window in your operating system.
Tip: Press the F4 key to toggle the display of the coordinate window.
OR:
Resizing Columns
You can change the size of any column in a table. In addition, in the Location table, you can resize all columns
equally.
To resize a column:
1. Point to the right border of the column heading that you want to resize. The cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow.
2. Drag the cursor until the column is the desired size.
3. Release the mouse button
On the Main Menu → File handling Strip select the Undo tool .
Type Ctrl + Z.
61
Adams View Interface
On the Main Menu → File handling Strip, select the Redo tool .
Type Ctrl + Shift + Z.
Canceling Operations
You can cancel any operation that you started in Adams View. For example, you can exit from a dialog box
or from a drawing operation or stop a simulation or animation.
Press the Esc key or from the Status Toolbar → Information Strip → Stop command .
Managing Messages
Types of Messages
Adams View displays informational messages, errors, warnings, and faults in the following interface elements.
Couplers
Data elements
Equations (System elements)
Forces
Gears
Joints
Markers (Note that markers belong to parts and, therefore, by default, inherit screen icon display
options for parts.)
Motion
Part (also called Bodies)
Points
Point-Curve Constraints
To browse for or create a color, right-click the Color text box, and then select Browse or Create.
1. Set Name Visibility Option to whether or not you want the names of objects of the selected type
displayed in the view. Refer to Step 3 for an explanation of the choices.
2. Select OK.
65
Adams View Interface
Display Options
Setting Part Display
You can set a View window so it displays a particular part in the current Model. You will find this helpful
when you want to compare or work with different parts at the same time.
To use a dialog box to toggle on and off the display of view accessories:
1. Click the view window whose accessories you want to change.
2. On the View menu, select View Accessories, and then select the accessories that you want to turn on
or off from the View Accessories dialog box that appears.
3. Enter the title you want displayed in the currently active view window, and then press Enter.
4. On the Window menu in the View Accessories dialog box, select Exit.
To use tools in the Main menu to toggle on and off the display of view accessories:
1. If you want to change the view accessories for only one view window, click that view window.
2. On the Main Menu, from the Status Toolbar , select a view accessory tool. Double-click any
of the tools to apply the accessory changes to all view windows. Note that the tool must be on top of
the tool stack to double-click it.
3. Select the buttons Icons or Grid on the Main toolbox to toggle on and off the display of screen icons
and the working grid.
66 Adams View
Adams View Interface
Tip: Type a lowercase g while the cursor is in the view window to toggle on and off the display
of the working grid in the active view window
Type a lowercase v to toggle on and off the display of screen icons.
1. From the Adams Toolbar, right-click the Toolbar tool , and then select Registry Editor.
67
Adams View Interface
The color appears in the Current color box and its color values appear in the Red, Green, and Blue
color value sliders.
3. Select OK.
To create a color:
1. From the Settings menu, select View Background Colors.
The Edit Background Color dialog box appears.
2. If desired, select a color near to the color that you want to create from the palette of preset background
colors.
The color appears in the Current color box, and its color values appear in the Red, Green, and Blue
color value sliders. Adams View creates the color by mixing the red, green, and blue light percentages
as specified in the color value sliders.
3. Change the color values for the color in the Red, Green, and Blue color value sliders, as desired.
As you change the color values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.
4. Select OK.
Spacing - Enter the spacing between each point in the grid in the x and y directions in length
units.
See Rectangular Working Grid Size and Spacing.
• For a polar coordinate system, set the following:
Maximum Radius - Enter the radius of the working grid from its origin to its outermost circle.
Circle Spacing - Enter the amount of space between each circle in the working grid. The smaller
the spacing, the more circles Adams View defines.
Radial Increments - Enter the number of lines radiating from the origin of the working grid.
Adams View spaces the lines equally around the working grid. The lines do not include the axes.
The number of lines (N) determines the angle increment between lines (q), as shown in the
formula:
θ = 360×/N
For example, if you specify 8 lines, the angle increment between the lines is 45.
See Polar Working Grid Sizing and Spacing.
5. Select the color and weight (thickness) of each object in the grid. You can also set the color of the
objects to Contrast, which indicates that Adams View should select a color that contrasts with the
color currently set for the view background. Setting the color to Contrast is particularly helpful when
you set each of your view windows to a different background color or when you frequently change
the view background.
The colors listed for the working grid elements are the same colors provided for setting the color of
objects. The colors do not include any new colors that you created.
The weight values are from 1 to 3 screen pixels.
6. Select OK.
3. Set Set Orientation to how you want to orient the working grid. You can set its orientation by picking
points or by aligning it with the screen plane. Note that if you select Pick for orientation, you will
also set the location of the working grid.
View Options
Setting Up the Window Layout
By default, Adams View displays the front of your model in the entire main window. Adams View also
provides 12 View window layouts for the Main window. The layouts vary from a single view window of your
model up to six windows. Each window displays a different view of your model. Adams Views displays the
current model (if there is one) into any of the views that are empty.
You select the layout you’d like for your main window from a palette of layouts or from the Window Layout
Tool Stack on the Main Toolbox. The palette and tool stack contain the same set of view layouts. If you display
the palette, you can keep it open so that you can quickly select another layout.
To select a layout:
1. Do one of the following:
• On the View menu, select Layout to display the Window Layout palette.
73
Adams View Interface
Tip: Type one of the following uppercase letters while the cursor is in a view window to change to
the corresponding view:
F - Front view
T - Top view
R - Right view
I - Iso
center about which Adams View rotates the view. You can also reposition the model so that the origin (0,0)
of the window is again at the center of the window.
2. Click the left mouse button on the point in the model that you want at the center of the window.
To return the origin (0,0) of the window to the center of the window:
On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Origin.
1. On the Main Menu → View Manipulation Strip, select the Translate Z tool .
2. Place the cursor in the view window and click and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Drag the cursor in the window as follows:
• To increase perspective, drag the cursor upward.
• To decrease perspective, drag the cursor downward.
4. When the window contains the desired perspective, release the mouse button.
Rotate XY tool to rotate the view about the screen’s x- and y-axes at the same time.
2. Place the cursor in the view window, hold down the left mouse button, and move the cursor to rotate
the view in the specified direction. As you move the cursor, the view changes.
3. When the window contains the desired view, release the mouse button.
Tip: Type a lowercase r while the cursor is in the view window to rotate the view about
the x- and y-axes and type a lowercase s to rotate (spin) the view about the z-axis.
On the Main toolbox, in the Increment box, enter the amount by which you want to increment the
view rotations. You can enter any value, but we suggest that you use a value between 0 and 360. Try
5.
As you rotate the view, hold down the Shift key. Holding down the Shift key limits Adams View to
the increments you specified. To rotate the view continuously, release the Shift key.
Tip: Type a lowercase e when the cursor is in the view window. e stands for entity orient.
For example, if you have two blocks as shown in the figure below, you can rotate the view to see the front of
the first block, BLOCK_2, by selecting the center of mass of BLOCK_2 as the center of the view and
selecting two points along the edges of BLOCK_2 that define the new view. In the figure, the points that you
would select are indicated with X’s.
• To shrink the display of the model, move the cursor in toward the center of the window.
4. When the model is at the desired magnification, release the mouse button.
Tip: Type a lowercase z while the cursor is in the window to dynamically zoom the view.
On the Main Menu → View Manipulation Strip, select the Fit tool .
To select a default tool so you can use it several times or set the display in all view windows:
Double-click the tool with the left mouse button.
types of commands that appear on shortcut menus depend on the type of object required in the text box. The
table below shows the different menu commands that appear for each type of object.
Be sure to enter the entire name of the object, including its model and parent, if the name of the
object is not unique within the entire database. For example, if you had two markers called mar_1
on two different parts, you need to enter .model_1.par_1.mar_1 to uniquely identify the marker.
Learn about the Adams View modeling database hierarchy.
Browsing Directories
You can use the Select File dialog box to browse for a file.
To browse for a file:
1. Right-click a text box that requires a file name to display a shortcut menu.
2. Select Browse to display the Select File dialog box.
3. Double-click the directory that contains the file.
4. In the File Name box, type the file name you want to open, or highlight the file in the list.
5. Select Open.
Tip: Clear the text box, if necessary, and double-click to display the File Selection dialog box.
Validates the information you have entered in the text box. This is particularly helpful if you entered
a function in the text box. Adams View also automatically validates the information when you move
the cursor out of the text box.
Tip: Press the F4 key to toggle the display of the coordinate window.
OR:
Resizing Columns
You can change the size of any column in a table. In addition, in the Location table, you can resize all columns
equally.
To resize a column:
1. Point to the right border of the column heading that you want to resize. The cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow.
2. Drag the cursor until the column is the desired size.
3. Release the mouse button
Canceling Operations
You can cancel any operation that you started in Adams View. For example, you can exit from a dialog box
or from a drawing operation or stop a simulation or animation.
Press the Esc key or select the Stop tool on the Status bar.
Managing Messages
Types of Messages
Adams View displays informational messages, errors, warnings, and faults in the following interface elements.
In addition, you can set the size of the icons either in current units or as a factor of their current size.
Learn more about how to set the display of screen icons by database and object type.
Setting Screen Icon Display by Database
Setting Screen Icon Display by Object Type
For information on quickly toggling the display of all screen icons, see Displaying View Accessories. For
information on setting the display of icons for individual objects, see Setting Object Appearance.
To browse for or create a color, right-click the Color text box, and then select Browse or Create.
1. Set Name Visibility Option to whether or not you want the names of objects of the selected type
displayed in the view. Refer to Step 3 for an explanation of the choices.
2. Select OK.
96 Adams View
Adams View Interface (Classic Interface)
Display Options
Setting Part Display
You can set a View window so it displays a particular part in the current Model. You will find this helpful
when you want to compare or work with different parts at the same time.
Note: You can also use the tools in the Main toolbox to set the display of these items. If you use the
tools, you can change the accessories for all view windows at once but you cannot change the
view title.
To use a dialog box to toggle on and off the display of view accessories:
1. Click the view window whose accessories you want to change.
2. On the View menu, select View Accessories, and then select the accessories that you want to turn on
or off from the View Accessories dialog box that appears.
3. Enter the title you want displayed in the currently active view window, and then press Enter.
4. On the Window menu in the View Accessories dialog box, select Exit.
To use tools in the Main toolbox to toggle on and off the display of view accessories:
1. If you want to change the view accessories for only one view window, click that view window.
2. On the Main toolbox, from the Toggle Tool Stack, select a view accessory tool. Double-click any of
the tools to apply the accessory changes to all view windows. Note that the tool must be on top of the
tool stack to double-click it.
97
Adams View Interface (Classic Interface)
3. Select the buttons Icons or Grid on the Main toolbox to toggle on and off the display of screen icons
and the working grid.
Tip: Type a lowercase g while the cursor is in the view window to toggle on and off the display
of the working grid in the active view window
Type a lowercase v to toggle on and off the display of screen icons.
1. From the Adams Toolbar, right-click the Toolbar tool , and then select Registry Editor.
Positive - Positive parallax viewing produces images that appear to be within the
space of the monitor. For engineering purposes where objects are often cut off
by the window borders or partially obscured by dialog boxes, positive parallax
viewing produces images that are less confusing to the viewer and are, therefore,
easier to view.
Negative - Negative parallax viewing produces images that appear to float in
space in front of the display. Viewing floating images that are partially obscured
by interface items produces confusing cues to the viewer. While the image
appears in front of the screen, the interface items appear to be on the screen but
these interface items can obscure part of the image. These conflicting inputs can
be confusing and lead to extra strain.
Eye Position Use with Negative parallax viewing and use it to control how far the image floats in
front of the screen.
To create a color:
1. From the Settings menu, select View Background Colors.
The Edit Background Color dialog box appears.
2. If desired, select a color near to the color that you want to create from the palette of preset background
colors.
The color appears in the Current color box, and its color values appear in the Red, Green, and Blue
color value sliders. Adams View creates the color by mixing the red, green, and blue light percentages
as specified in the color value sliders.
3. Change the color values for the color in the Red, Green, and Blue color value sliders, as desired.
As you change the color values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.
4. Select OK.
Spacing - Enter the spacing between each point in the grid in the x and y directions in length
units.
See Rectangular Working Grid Size and Spacing.
• For a polar coordinate system, set the following:
Maximum Radius - Enter the radius of the working grid from its origin to its outermost circle.
Circle Spacing - Enter the amount of space between each circle in the working grid. The smaller
the spacing, the more circles Adams View defines.
Radial Increments - Enter the number of lines radiating from the origin of the working grid.
Adams View spaces the lines equally around the working grid. The lines do not include the axes.
The number of lines (N) determines the angle increment between lines (q), as shown in the
formula:
θ = 360×/N
For example, if you specify 8 lines, the angle increment between the lines is 45.
See Polar Working Grid Sizing and Spacing.
5. Select the color and weight (thickness) of each object in the grid. You can also set the color of the
objects to Contrast, which indicates that Adams View should select a color that contrasts with the
color currently set for the view background. Setting the color to Contrast is particularly helpful when
you set each of your view windows to a different background color or when you frequently change
the view background.
The colors listed for the working grid elements are the same colors provided for setting the color of
objects. The colors do not include any new colors that you created.
The weight values are from 1 to 3 screen pixels.
6. Select OK.
3. Set Set Orientation to how you want to orient the working grid. You can set its orientation by picking
points or by aligning it with the screen plane. Note that if you select Pick for orientation, you will also
set the location of the working grid.
View Options
Setting Up the Window Layout
By default, Adams View displays the front of your model in the entire main window. Adams View also
provides 12 View window layouts for the Main window. The layouts vary from a single view window of your
model up to six windows. Each window displays a different view of your model. Adams Views displays the
current model (if there is one) into any of the views that are empty.
You select the layout you’d like for your main window from a palette of layouts or from the Window Layout
Tool Stack on the Main Toolbox. The palette and tool stack contain the same set of view layouts. If you display
the palette, you can keep it open so that you can quickly select another layout.
To select a layout:
1. Do one of the following:
104 Adams View
Adams View Interface (Classic Interface)
• On the View menu, select Layout to display the Window Layout palette.
• Select the Window Layouts tool stack.
2. Select a layout.
3. If you used the palette, select Close to close it. You can keep it open to quickly switch between layouts.
Tip: Type one of the following uppercase letters while the cursor is in a view window to change to
the corresponding view:
F - Front view
T - Top view
R - Right view
I - Iso
center about which Adams View rotates the view. You can also reposition the model so that the origin (0,0)
of the window is again at the center of the window.
2. Click the left mouse button on the point in the model that you want at the center of the window.
To return the origin (0,0) of the window to the center of the window:
On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Origin.
1. On the Main toolbox, from the Translate Tool Stack, select the Translate Z tool .
106 Adams View
Adams View Interface (Classic Interface)
2. Place the cursor in the view window and click and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Drag the cursor in the window as follows:
• To increase perspective, drag the cursor upward.
• To decrease perspective, drag the cursor downward.
4. When the window contains the desired perspective, release the mouse button.
1. On the Main toolbox, in the Increment box, enter the amount by which you want to increment the
view translations.
2. As you translate the view, hold down the Shift key. Holding down the Shift key limits Adams View
to the increments you specified. To translate the view continuously, release the Shift key.
Tip: Type a lowercase r while the cursor is in the view window to rotate the view about
the x- and y-axes and type a lowercase s to rotate (spin) the view about the z-axis.
Tip: Type a lowercase e when the cursor is in the view window. e stands for entity orient.
2. Position the cursor in the window you want to zoom and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Move the cursor in the window:
• To enlarge the display of the model, move the cursor toward the outside of the window. Do not
move the cursor outside of the window or Adams View turns dynamic zooming off.
• To shrink the display of the model, move the cursor in toward the center of the window.
4. When the model is at the desired magnification, release the mouse button.
Tip: Type a lowercase z while the cursor is in the window to dynamically zoom the view.
Types of Parts
Adams View provides you with four different types of parts that you can create:
Rigid Bodies
Flexible bodies - Basic Adams View provides you with the ability to create Discrete Flexible Link. For
more functionality, you can purchase Adams Flex. For information on purchasing Adams Flex, see
your MSC sales representative, and for information on using Adams Flex, refer to Adams Flex online
help.
Point mass
FE part beam
In addition, Adams View provides a ground part that is already created for you.
Degrees of Freedom
Each rigid body that you create can move within all Degrees of freedom; a point mass can move within three
translational degrees of freedom. You can constrain the movement of parts by:
Adding them to the ground part, which means they are fixed to the ground and cannot move in any
direction. Each time you create geometry, Adams View gives you the option to add it to ground,
create a new part, or add it to an existing part.
Adding constraints, such as joints, to define how the parts are attached and how they move relative
to each other.
Naming Conventions
As you create parts, Adams View automatically generates names for them based on their type and the number
of objects of that type in your model. For example, when you create a point mass, Adams View names it
POINT_MASS_1. For all rigid bodies, except points and coordinate system markers, Adams View uses the
name PART regardless of the type of geometry. For example, if you create a box, Adams View names it
PART_1. When you create a second box, Adams View names it PART_2, and so on. You can rename your
parts. Learn about Renaming Objects Through Menu Commands.
Rigid Bodies
The most common type of part in your model is a Rigid body. Adams View provides a library of geometry
that you can use to create rigid bodies. A part can be made up of many different geometric objects. There are
two types of geometry that you can use to create rigid bodies.
Construction geometry
Solid geometry
Each time you create geometry, you can select to do one of the following:
Create a new part containing the geometry.
Add the geometry to an existing part.
Building Models 87
Parts
Add the geometry to ground. You add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or
influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a car driving around a
race track, the geometry that defines the race track can be added to ground. (You can also fix parts
temporarily to ground using a fixed joint.
In addition, you specify the location of the geometry in space. You can select to define the location of the
geometry:
Graphically, by picking locations on the screen or by selecting an object on the screen that is at the
desired location.
Precisely, by entering coordinate locations.
Learn more techniques for creating and placing objects.
Also See Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack to learn more about creating rigid body geometry.
Notes: Using planar parts does not limit your use of three-dimensional contacts. If you can
simplify your contacts to two-dimensional representations, however, you will usually
realize speed improvements.
A planar body is implicitly constrained to move in a plane at a fixed global value of z. Any
force applied to the planar part in the global z direction is discarded. The same applies to
torques about the global x- and y-axes. It is not possible to measure the reaction forces
required to constrain the planar part to stay in plane. If such forces are desired, you must
substitute the equivalent part and planar joint combination.
Parameterization
As you create rigid bodies in your model, you can define them so that the location or orientation of one object
affects the location or orientation of another body. This is called parameterizing your model.
Parameterizing your model simplifies changes to your model because it helps you automatically size, relocate,
and orient objects. For example, if you parameterize the geometry of two links to the location of a point, when
you move the point, the link geometry changes accordingly, as shown in the figure below.
Example of Parameterizing Locations
The ways in which you can build parameterization into your model while creating rigid bodies include the
following:
Attach objects to points so that when you change the location of the points, the body locations and
orientations update accordingly.
As you create a point, Adams View gives you the option to attach other nearby objects to the point.
The help that explain how to create points also explain how to attach objects to them.
Define design variables to represent values of your rigid body geometry, such as the length or width
of a link. You can create design variables for any values you specify for a rigid body. Design variables
are needed when you run tests on your model, such as design studies. Learn about Using Design
Variables.
Create expressions that calculate the values of your rigid bodies, such as the length or width of a box.
You can specify expressions for any values you specify for a rigid body geometry. For more
information on creating expressions, see Adams View Function Builder online help.
You can also parameterize your model after you build it. For more information on parameterization, see
Improving Your Model Designs
Display the Coordinate window so that you can view the coordinate values as you place points.
Learn about Working with the Coordinate Window.
Be sure to set the current units to those required for your model. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate
System.
Review the different tools for drawing and placing objects in Tools and Techniques.
The Model Navigator only highlights those objects that are appropriate for the operation you are currently
performing. For example, when you are aligning the faces of two parts, the Model Navigator only highlights
faces. It does not highlight edges or points. In addition, if you are chaining together wire geometry, the Model
Navigator only highlights wire geometry.
Finally, when you are defining a direction, the Model Navigator lets you select points, edges, or faces. When
you select an edge or face, the Model Navigator then lets you select the direction along the object that you
want to define since edges and faces don't provide unique direction.
To improve performance you can turn off the Model Navigator.
Note: If the Working grid is on, when you draw, move, resize, or reshape geometry, the geometry
automatically snaps to the grid points. Learn about turning on and off the working grid.
2. In the upper box, enter the coordinates at which to place the object.
3. Select the element (Working grid, global coordinate system, or modeling object) to which the
coordinates are relative. By default, the coordinates are relative to the working grid.
4. In the lower box, enter the object to which the coordinates are relative. You only need to enter an
object if you selected that the coordinates are relative to an object.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
5. Select Apply.
Building Models 91
Orientation Methods
Orientation Methods
Orientation
Orientation of rigid or flexible body using three rotation angles. Adams View orients the body starting from
the initial coordinate system and applying three successive rotations.
Depending on the convention you select, the rotations occur about space-fixed or body-fixed axes in any
combination of the x, y, and z axes. By default, you supply body 313 (body-fixed z, x, z) angles.
Adams View applies your orientation angles with respect to the coordinate system in the Orientation Relative
To or Relative To text box.
Adams View applies the location coordinates in the coordinate system you identify in the Location Relative
To or Relative To text box.
92 Adams View
Orientation Methods
Note that this does not completely dictate the orientation of the coordinate system. Adams View positions
the coordinate system with an arbitrary rotation about the axis. If you must completely control the coordinate
system orientation, select Orientation or In Plane Orientation.
By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system. You can use the DEFAULTS
ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING command to change this convention.
For example, selecting either X_AXIS_XY_PLANE or X_AXIS_XZ_PLANE directs the x-axis. The plane-
convention setting does not affect this parameter.
You can also direct the axis graphically using the marker’s position handle. Simply point the appropriate axis
on the marker in the desired direction.
In Plane Oriention
Orientation of the rigid or flexible body by directing one of the axes and locating one of the coordinate planes.
In Plane Orientation
To define an axis and a plane, you need three points. You can enter either two or three locations, however. If
you enter three locations, the axis points from the first location to the second and the plane is parallel to the
plane defined by the three locations. If you enter only two locations, Adams View uses the location you
specified in the Location text box as the first point and the other two locations as the second and third points.
Adams View applies the location coordinates in the coordinate system in the Relative To text box.
By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system marker and locate the zx plane. You can use the
DEFAULTS ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING command to change this
convention. For example, selecting X_AXIS_XY_PLANE directs the x-axis and orients the xy plane.
Construction Geometry
You can create several types of Construction geometry. You draw construction geometry normal to the screen
or the working grid, if you turned it on.
Creating Points
To create a point:
1. From the Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack, select the Point Tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• Whether you want the point added to ground or to another part in your model.
• Whether you want to attach nearby objects to the point. For information on attaching objects,
see Parameterization.
3. If you selected to add the point to another part in your model, select the part.
4. Place the cursor where you want the point to be located and click the left mouse button.
Tip: If you want to place the point at the location of another object, as you create the point, right-
click near the object. Adams View displays a list of objects near the cursor. Select the object at
whose location you want to place the point. Adams View creates the point at that location.
If you want to specify precise coordinates, right-click away from the object. A dialog box for
entering the location of the point appears. For information on using the dialog box, see Entering
Precise Location Coordinates.
Creating Markers
To create a marker:
1. From the Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack, select the Marker Tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• Whether you want the marker added to: (a) Ground (b) Another part in your model (including
a flexible body); or (c) Curve (only available with Adams Solver (C++)) (Learn about switching
solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.)
• How you want to orient the marker. Set Orientation to the desired orientation method. When
adding a marker to a curve, the orientation is prescribed implicitly.
3. Do one of the following:
• If you selected to add the marker to a part, select the part to which you want to add the marker.
98 Adams View
Construction Geometry
• If you selected to add the marker to a curve, select the spline curve onto which you want to add
the marker (splines and data-element curves are all considered curves).
4. Place the cursor where you want the marker to be located and click.
5. If you selected to orient the marker to anything other than the global or view coordinate system, select
the directions along which you want to align the marker’s axes. Do this for each axis that you selected
to specify.
Adams View draws the marker, aligning its axes as specified.
Tip: To reorient the marker, use the Align & Rotate tool from the Move tool stack, select Align One
Axis, and then follow the prompts:
Tip: While creating the polyline, you can remove the last line segment that you created by clicking
its endpoint. You can continue removing line segments in the reverse order that you created
them.
To draw a circle:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Arc Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part or add the geometry to an existing part. By
default, Adams View creates a new part.
• If desired, set the radius of the circle.
100 Adams View
Construction Geometry
• Select Circle.
3. Click where you want the center of the circle and then drag the mouse to define the radius of the
circle. If you specified the radius of the circle in the settings container, Adams View maintains that
radius regardless of how you drag the mouse.
4. When the radius is the desired size, click.
Creating Splines
To create a spline by selecting points on the screen:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Spline Tool .
Tip: If you make a mistake, click the last location you defined. You can continue removing locations
by clicking on each location in the reverse order that you defined them.
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Spline Tool .
Creating a Box
To create a box:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Box Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the geometry
to an existing part or ground.
• If desired, set any of length, height, or depth dimensions of the box.
3. Place the cursor where you want a corner of the box and click and hold down the left mouse button.
4. Drag the mouse to define the size of the box. If you specified any of the length, height, or depth
dimensions of the box in the settings container, Adams View maintains those dimensions regardless
of how you drag the mouse.
5. Release the mouse button when the box is the desired size.
Creating a Cylinder
To create a cylinder:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Cylinder Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
102 Adams View
Creating Solid Geometry
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the geometry
to an existing part or ground. By default, Adams View creates a new part.
• If desired, set the length or radius dimensions of the cylinder in the settings container.
3. Click and hold down the mouse where you want to begin drawing the cylinder.
4. Drag the mouse to size the cylinder. If you specified any of the length and radius dimensions of the
cylinder in the settings container, Adams View maintains those dimensions regardless of how you
drag the mouse.
5. When the cylinder is the desired size, click.
Creating a Sphere
To create a sphere:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Sphere Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the geometry
to an existing part or ground. By default, Adams View creates a new part.
• If desired, set the radius of the sphere.
3. Click where you want the center of the sphere.
4. Drag the mouse to size the sphere. If you specified a radius dimension for the sphere in the settings
container, Adams View maintains that dimension regardless of how you drag the mouse.
5. When the sphere is the desired size, click.
Creating a Frustum
To create a frustum:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Frustum Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the geometry
to an existing part or ground.
• If desired, set the length or radii of the frustum.
3. Click where you want to begin drawing the frustum.
4. Drag the mouse to size the frustum. If you specified the length or radii of the frustum in the settings
container, Adams View maintains those dimensions regardless of how you drag the mouse.
5. When the frustum is the desired size, click.
103
Creating Solid Geometry
Creating a Torus
To create a torus:
Creating a Link
To create a link:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Link Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the geometry
to an existing part or ground.
• If desired, set any of the length, width, or depth dimensions of the link.
3. Place the cursor where you want to begin drawing the link, and click.
4. Drag the mouse until the link is the desired size and then release the mouse button. If you specified
the length, width, and depth of the link in the settings container, Adams View maintains those
dimensions regardless of how you drag the mouse.
Creating a Plate
To create a plate:
3. Place the cursor where you want the first corner of the plate and click the left mouse button.
4. Click at each corner of the plate. You must specify at least three locations.
5. Continue selecting locations or right-click to close the plate.
Note: If the distance between any two adjacent points is less than two times the radius of the corner,
Adams View cannot create the plate.
Creating an Extrusion
To create an extrusion based on an existing curve profile:
4. Click at each vertex in the profile; then right-click to finish drawing the profile.
Learn to extrude existing construction geometry along a path.
Creating a Revolution
To create a revolution by selecting points to define the profile:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Revolution Tool .
Tip: Be sure to draw the profile so that it does not intersect the line you drew to define the
axis of revolution.
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Revolution Tool .
3. Click each piece of the wire geometry to be chained. As you move the cursor around the main
window, Adams View highlights those objects in your model that can be chained.
4. After selecting the geometry to be chained, right-click to create the chained geometry.
Extrusion Limits
You can only select to extrude a profile whose extrusion would have the following properties:
Same dimensions. For example, you cannot extrude a profile that would have mixed dimensions. See
an Example of Mixed Dimensions.
Edge or face shared by only one face. See an Example of Objects with Shared edges and faces.
No intersecting lines.
Objects with these properties are called manifold. If the object extruded did not have these properties, it
would be non-manifold.
If the result of an extrusion is an object that is non-manifold, you receive the following error message when
you try to create the extrusion:
107
Combining Geometry
3. In the settings container, do the following (you can ignore all other settings):
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the extruded geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• Select Along Path.
• Select Analytical to create the revolution using the Analytical Method. Clear to use the Non-
analytical Method.
4. Select the construction geometry to be extruded.
5. Select the construction geometry defining the path along which you want to extrude the geometry.
Combining Geometry
Once you have created individual parts of Solid geometry, you can combine them into one part to create
complex, solid geometry, referred to as constructive, solid geometry or CSG. Adams View creates the solid
geometry using Boolean operations, such as union and intersection.
2. Select the solid geometry to be combined. As you move the cursor, Adams View highlights those
objects that can be combined. The second part you select is combined into the first part.
2. Select the solid geometry to be combined. As you move the cursor, Adams View highlights those
objects that can be combined. The second part you select is combined into the first part.
108 Adams View
Adding Features to Geometry
Cutting a Solid
To create a part from the difference of two solids:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Cut Tool .
2. Select the solid geometry to be cut. As you move the cursor, Adams View highlights those objects that
can be cut. The second part you select is cut from the first part.
Splitting a Solid
To split a complex solid:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Split Tool .
2. Select the solid geometry to be split. Adams View highlights those objects in your model that can be
split.
Tip: To create a hole or boss at a specific location, create a temporary marker at the desired location
for the hole or boss, and select it in Step 4.
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Hollow Tool .
Merging Geometry
To merge two rigid body geometry:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Merge Tool .
2. Select the geometry to be merged. Adams View highlights those objects in your model that can be
merged as you move the cursor around the modeling window. The second geometry that you select
is combined into the first.
110 Adams View
Adding Features to Geometry
Adams View combines the selected geometry and deletes the second.
Discrete Flexible Links
A discrete flexible link consists of two or more rigid bodies connected by beam force elements. You indicate
the following and Adams View creates the appropriate parts, geometry, forces, and constraints at the
endpoints:
Endpoints of the link
Number of parts and the material type
Properties of the beam
Types of endpoint attachments (flexible, rigid, or free)
The following figure shows a flexible link composed of rigid bodies whose cross-section geometry is
rectangular.
For more information on beam force elements, see Adding a Massless Beam. Also note the caution about the
asymmetry of beams explained in that section.
Learn more:
Types of Flexible Link Geometry
Positioning Flexible Links
About Number of Beams Created
Creating Flexible Links
Modifying Flexible Links
your own cross-section based on area and inertia properties that you enter. If you enter area and inertia
properties yourself, Adams View creates short angular geometry to represent the link.
The pre-defined cross-section geometry that you can select includes:
Solid rectangular
Solid circular
Hollow rectangular
Hollow circular
I-beam
Adams View uses the cross-section geometry to calculate the following:
Area and area moments of inertia (Ixx, Iyy, Izz) for the beams.
Mass, mass moments of inertia (Ixx, Iyy, Izz), and center-of-mass Markers for the rigid bodies.
Note that Adams View does not directly use the geometry to account for stress on the beam. Therefore, any
stress values are based on the area and area moments.
For links with axisymmetric cross-sections, such as solid and hollow circular sections, the orientation of the
cross section is not critical and so Adams View does not require the use of an orientation marker.
tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Flexible Bodies, and then select Discrete Flexible
Link.
The Discrete Flexible Link dialog box appears.
2. Define the overall properties of the flexible link as explained in the table below.
3. Define the length of the link and its flexibility at its ends as explained in the table below.
4. Select one of the following to define the geometry of the link or specify the area and area moments of
inertia of the flexible link, and then select OK.
• Solid Rectangle
• Solid Circle
• Hollow Rectangle
• Hollow Circle
• I-Beam
• Properties
Orient Marker - The marker that defines the orientation (z-axis) of link. For information on setting
the orientation of the geometry, see Positioning Flexible Links.
Base - The width of the rectangle (dimension in local y direction).
Height - The height of the rectangle (dimension in local z direction).
Solid Circle
Diameter - Diameter of the circular cross-section.
Hollow Rectangle
Orient Marker - The marker that defines the orientation (z-axis) of the link. See Positioning Flexible
Links on setting the orientation of the geometry.
Base - The outer width of the rectangular shell.
Height - The height of the outer rectangular shell.
Thickness - Uniform width of the wall of the rectangular shell.
116 Adams View
Discrete Flexible Links
Hollow Circle
Diameter - Outer diameter of the circular shell.
Thickness - Width of the wall of the circular shell.
I-Beam
Orient Marker - The marker that defines the orientation of the link. See Positioning Flexible Links
for information on setting the orientation of the geometry.
Base - Enter the width of the I-beam.
Height - Enter the height of I-beam.
Flange - Enter the width of the flange of the I-beam.
Web - Enter the width of the web of the beam.
117
Discrete Flexible Links
Properties
Enter values in the following text boxes to create your own custom-shaped cross-section:
Orient Marker - The marker that defines the orientation (z-axis) of the link. For information on
setting the orientation of the link, see Positioning Flexible Links.
X Section Area - Specify the uniform area of the beam cross section. The centroidal axis must be
orthogonal to this cross section.
Link Mass - Enter the total mass of all the link segments combined.
Link Segment Inertias - Specify the area moments of inertia for the link.
Ixx - Enter the torsional constant, also referred to as torsional shape factor or torsional stiffness
coefficient. It is expressed as unit length to the fourth power. For a solid circular section, Ixx is
identical to the polar moment of inertia J = (πr4/2). For thin-walled sections, open sections, and
noncircular sections, consult a handbook.
Iyy, Izz - Enter the area moments of inertia about the neutral axes of the beam-cross sectional areas
(y-y and z-z). These are sometimes referred to as the second moments of area about a given axis.
They are expressed as unit length to the fourth power. For a solid circular section, Iyy=Izz = (πr4/4).
For thin-walled sections, open sections, and noncircular sections, consult a handbook.
Note: The example of an elliptical cross-section below is only one example of many cross-sections
that you can create using the Properties option.
118 Adams View
Point Masses
Point Masses
Point masses are points that have mass but no inertia properties or angular velocities. They are
computationally more efficient when rotational effects are not important.
For example, you could use point masses to represent the concentrated masses in a net. You could then
represent the ropes between the masses as forces or springs. The following figure shows a model of a net with
point masses.
1. Click the Bodies tab. From the Construction container, click the Point Mass tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Point Mass, and then select either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a point mass to modify.
The Create/Modify Point Mass dialog box appears. Both dialog boxes contain the same options.
3. If you are creating a point mass, enter a name for the point mass.
4. Set the mass of the point mass in the dialog box and adjust its location as desired. By default, Adams
View places the point mass in the center of the main window with a mass of 1 in current units.
5. Select the Comments tool on the dialog box and enter any comments you want associated with
the point mass. Learn about Comments.
6. Select OK.
119
Creating Trace Spline
3. Reset the simulation by selecting the Simulation Reset tool from either the Simulation container
on the Main toolbox or the Simulation palette. See Interactive Simulation Palette and Container dialog box
help.
4. Select the Results tab. In Review section, select Create Trace Spline icon.
Tip: The following are some tips on creating splines from traces:
When you trace an object, the point/circle should move in a smooth, even path or the trace
ends up looking like scribbles on the screen.
If the path is closed, you should simulate for one cycle only.
If the trace is uneven or complex, you can get a strange looking curve as a result. As an
alternative to the Create Trace Spline menu command, you can use the Command
Navigator to execute the command: geometry create curve point_trace. It lets you create a
polyline instead of a spline, which works better if the trace is uneven or complex. In that
case, the motion of the cam or slot is transferred through the traced curve and gives the
desired follower motion.
122 Adams View
Creating Trace Spline
Overview of Constraints
Constraints define how parts (rigid bodies, Flexible bodies, or Point mass) are attached to one another and how
they are allowed to move relative to each other. Constraints restrict relative movement between parts and
represent idealized connections.
Types of Constraints
Adams View provides a library of constraints including:
Idealized joints
Primitive joints
Motions generators
Higher-pair constraints
The following figure shows some of the different types of idealized joints that Adams View supports.
For example, a revolute joint removes all three translational DOF and two of the rotational DOF between
two parts. If each part had a point on the joint that was on the centerline of the revolute pin, then the two
points would always remain coincident. They would only rotate with respect to one another about one axis:
the centerline of the revolute joint.
The total number of DOF in a model is equal to the difference between the number of allowed part motions
and the number of active constraints in the model. When you run a simulation of your model, Adams Solver
calculates the number of DOF in your model as it determines the algebraic equations of motion to be solved
in your model. You can also calculate the DOF in your model before running a simulation as explained in
Verifying Your Model.
For a list of the DOF that the different constraints in Adams View remove, see the following:
DOF Removed by Idealized Joints
DOF Removed by Primitive Joints
DOF Removed by Higher-Pair Constraints
DOF Removed by Motion
If you created your model in exploded view, which lets you create individual parts and then assemble
them together into a model, you can specify the parts to be connected by the constraint and then
select a different location for the constraint on each part. When you assemble the parts into a model,
Adams View joins the parts together at the location on the first part that you selected. Learn about
Performing Initial Conditions Simulation.
Point-Curve Constraints
The point-curve constraint restricts a fixed point defined on one part to lie on a curve defined on a second
part. The first part is free to roll and slide on the curve that is fixed to a second part. The curve on the second
part can be planar or spatial or open or closed. The first part cannot lift off the second part; it must always
lie on the curve. A point-curve constraint removes two translational Degrees of freedom from your model.
When you specify the location of the point-curve constraint on the first part, Adams View creates a marker at
that location. The marker is called the I marker. The I marker can only translate in one direction relative to
the curve. The I marker, however, is free to rotate in all three directions.
You can use the point-curve constraint to model a Pin-in-slot mechanism or a Simple Cam Follower
mechanism where a lever arm is articulated by the profile of a revolving cam.
When modeling a pin-in-slot mechanism, the point-curve constraint keeps the center of the pin in the center
of the slot, while allowing it to move freely along the slot and rotate in the slot.
4. Select the curve or edge along which the point will travel. The curve can be closed or open. Note that
when you select a closed curve, Adams View highlights only a portion of the curve. Adams View will
use the entire curve.
Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.
1. Display the Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify
Dialog Boxes.
2. Assign a unique ID number to it. Learn about Adams Solver IDs.
3. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the cam that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify the cam. Learn about Comments.
4. Set the basic properties as explained in the table below.
128 Adams View
Overview of Constraints
Ref Marker Name Enter marker that is fixed on the part containing the curve on which the point
must move. Adams Solver uses the reference marker to associate the shape
defined by the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The curve
coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the reference
marker.
129
Overview of Constraints
Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact on the curve is
specified.
Leave blank. Adams View uses the coordinate system of the part containing
the curve.
5. Set the initial conditions as explained in the table below, and then select OK.
Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact on the curve is
specified.
Leave blank. Adams View uses the coordinate system of the part containing the
curve.
130 Adams View
Overview of Constraints
Results Note
In addition to the forces generated by this constraint, the result set will also contain the entry "A" which is
the position along the curve at which the constraint is acting. This is a normalized length measured from -
1.0 (one end of the curve) to 1.0 (opposite end of the curve).
Curve-Curve Constraints
A curve-curve constraint restricts a curve defined on the first part to remain in contact with a second curve
defined on a second part. The curve-curve constraint is useful for modeling cams where the point of contact
between two parts changes during the motion of the mechanism. The curve-curve constraint removes two
Degrees of freedom from your model.
An example of a curve-curve constraint is a valve lifter where a cam lifts a plate-like object. The point of
contact between the plate and the cam changes depending on the position and shape of the cam.
The two curves of the constraint, which you define by selecting edges in your model, must lie in the same
plane. You can initially select curves that are not in the same plane, but Adams Solver moves the parts during
Simulation to ensure that the two curves are constrained to the same plane of motion with respect to each
other. Both curves can be open or closed.
The curves always maintain contact, even when the dynamics of the model might actually lift one curve off
the other. You can examine the constraint forces to determine if any lift-off should have occurred. If your
results require an accurate simulation of intermittent contact, you should model the contact forces directly
using a vector force.
The curve-curve constraint models only one contact. Therefore, if the curves have contact at more than one
point, you need to create a curve-curve constraint for each contact, each with a initial condition displacement
near the appropriate point. Learn about Higher-Pair Constraints Initial Conditions.
131
Overview of Constraints
Note: Instead of defining a curve by selecting a curve on a part, you can also use a curve element that
you create to define the curve. To specify a curve element, you can create geometry for the
curve and select that geometry as you create the cam or modify the cam to reference the curve
element. Learn about Creating and Modifying Curve Data Elements.
1. From the Joint palette or tool stack, select the 2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool .
2. In the settings container, for each part, set whether or not you will be selecting an edge or curve:
• Curves - Splines, chains, and data element curves are all considered curves.
• Edge - An edge is one of the wireframe outlines drawn on a solid. For example, you can use a
Parasolid object representing a cam that you imported into Adams View.
3. Select a curve or edge that will travel along a second curve.
4. Select the curve along which the first curve will travel. The curve can be closed or open. Note that
when you select a closed curve, Adams View highlights only a portion of the curve. Adams View will
use the entire curve.
Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.
1. Display the Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Assign a unique ID number to it. Learn about Adams Solver IDs.
3. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the cam that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify the cam. Learn about Comments.
4. Set the basic properties as explained in the table below.
132 Adams View
Overview of Constraints
5. Set the initial conditions as explained in the table below, and then select OK. Learn about Higher-Pair
Constraints Initial Conditions.
133
Overview of Constraints
Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact (displacement) on
the first curve (I curve) is specified.
Leave blank. Adams View uses the coordinate system of the part containing
the curve.
J Ic Ref Marker Name You can:
Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact (displacement) on
the second curve (J curve) is specified.
Leave blank. Adams View uses the coordinate system of the part containing
the curve
Results Note
In addition to the forces generated by this constraint, the result set will also contain the entries "A1" and
"A2":
A1 is the position along the I part's curve at which the constraint is acting. This is a normalized
length measured from -1.0 (one end of the curve) to 1.0 (opposite end of the curve).
A2 is the position along the J part's curve at which the constraint is acting. This is a normalized
length measured from -1.0 (one end of the curve) to 1.0 (opposite end of the curve).
It is generally easier to select a closed curve, if possible. Open curves represent modeling difficulties
when the point on the follower part approaches one of the end points of the open curve.
Define curves that cover the entire expected range of motion of the cam.
Adams Solver stops a Simulation if the contact point moves off the end of an open curve. Therefore,
be sure that the curve you define covers the expected range of motion of the contact point.
Avoid defining an initial configuration with the initial point of contact near to one of the end points
of the curve.
Avoid curve-on-curve constraints that have more than one contact point.
Adams Solver requires that your model contain a unique contact point during simulation. If there is
more than one contact point, Adams Solver may be unable to find the correct contact point or may
even jump from one contact point to the next. It also may have difficulties finding the correct
solution. One way to ensure that contact points are unique is to specify curve shapes that are convex.
The following figure shows two curves, the first is convex and the second is nonconvex. Note that for
a convex curve, any line segment connecting two arbitrary points on the curve lies in the domain of
the curve (it does not intersect the curve). The same is not true for nonconvex curves.
You can create more than one contact using the same curve.
It is easy to over-constrain a model using the curve-to-curve constraint. For example, in a cam-
follower configuration, the cam should usually be rotating on a cylindrical joint, not a revolute joint.
If the follower is held by a translational joint and the cam by a cylindrical joint, the curve-to-curve
cam between the follower and cam prevents the cam from translating along the axis of rotation,
which is the axis of the cylindrical joint. A revolute joint would add a redundant constraint in that
direction.
General Constraints
Available with Adams Solver (C++) only
You can create a general constraint that defines an arbitrary constraint specific to a model. As its name implies,
it is more general than the Idealized joints, which describe physically recognizable combination of constraints
that are used to connect bodies together. You can also use the general constraint to equivalently define an
existing idealized joint. Read more about the GCON statement in Adams Solver (C++) help.
We advise that you use the general constraint with caution. Be sure to read the Known Limitations in the
GCON statement.
tool .
• To modify a general constraint, from the Edit menu, select Modify. From the Database
Navigator that appears, select the general constraint to modify.
138 Adams View
Overview of Constraints
Note: You cannot enter the Adams ID for the marker; you must enter the name of the marker.
Learn about Adams Solver IDs.
6. Select OK.
Joints
Idealized Joints
Primitive Joints
Couplers
About Gears
Idealized Joints
Note: The joints you can attach to flexible bodies depend on the version of Adams Solver you are
using (C++ or FORTRAN). In addition, Adams Solver (C++) does not support point masses.
For a summary of which joints and forces are supported on flexible bodies, see Table of
Supported Forces and Joints in the Adams Flex online help. Also refer to the Adams Flex online
help for more information on attaching joints and forces to flexible bodies.
Adams View supports two types of idealized joints: simple and complex. Simple joints directly connect bodies
and include the following:
Revolute Joints. See Revolute Joint Tool.
Translational Joints. See Translational Joint Tool.
Cylindrical Joints. See Cylindrical Joint Tool.
Spherical Joints. See Spherical Joint Tool.
Planar Joints. See Planar Joint Tool.
Constant-Velocity Joints. See Constant-Velocity Joint Tool.
Screw Joints. See Screw Joint Tool.
Fixed Joints. See Fixed Joint Tool.
Hooke/Universal Joint. See Hooke/Universal Joint Tool.
Complex joints indirectly connect parts by coupling simple joints. They include:
Gears. See Gear Joint Tool.
Couplers. See Coupler Joint Tool.
You access the joints through the Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks.
140 Adams View
Joints
Parts that the joint connects. You can also switch which part moves relative to another part.
What type of joint it is. For example, you can change a revolute joint to a translational joint. The
following are exceptions to changing a joint's type:
• You can only change a simple idealized joint to another type of simple idealized joint or to a joint
primitive.
• You cannot change a joint's type if motion is applied to the joint. In addition, if a joint has
friction and you change the joint type, Adams View displays an error.
Whether or not forces that are applied to the parts connected by the joint appear graphically on the
screen during an animation. Learn about Setting Up Force Graphics.
For a screw joint, you can also set the pitch of the threads of the screw (translational displacement
for every full rotational cycle). Learn about screw joints.
If you specify initial conditions, Adams View uses them as the initial velocity of the joint during an assemble
model operation regardless of any other forces acting on the joint. You can also leave some or all of the initial
conditions unset. Leaving an initial condition unset lets Adams View calculate the conditions of the part
during an assemble model operation depending on the other forces acting on the joint. Note that it is not the
same as setting an initial condition to zero. Setting an initial condition to zero means that the joint will not
be moving in the specified direction or will not be displaced when the model is assembled, regardless of any
forces acting on it.
If you impose initial conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with those on a part that the joint connects,
the initial conditions on the joint have precedence over those on the part. If, however, you impose initial
conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with imparted motions on the joint, the initial conditions as
specified by the motion generator take precedence over those on the joint.
Note: If the initial rotational displacement of a revolute or cylindrical joint varies by anywhere from
5 to 60 degrees from the actual location of the joint, Adams Solver issues a warning message
and continues execution. If the variation is greater than 60 degrees, Adams View issues an
error message and stops execution.
Note: For translational, revolute, and cylindrical joints, you might find it easier to use the joint
motion tools to impose motion. Learn about Creating Point Motions Using the Motion Tools.
3. Enter a name for the motion. Adams View assigns a default name to the motion.
4. Enter the values for the motion as explained in Options for Point Motion Dialog Box, and then select
OK.
Note: Using Adams Solver (C++), you can apply joint friction to joints if they are attached to
flexible bodies; using Adams Solver (FORTRAN), you cannot. In addition, Adams Solver
(C++) does not support point masses.
For a summary of which joints and forces are supported on flexible bodies, see Table of
Supported Forces and Joints in the Adams Flex online help. Also refer to the Adams Flex online
help for more information on attaching joints and forces to flexible bodies.
The Create/Modify Friction dialog box appears. The options in the dialog box change depending on the
type of joint for which you are adding friction.
3. Enter the values in the dialog box for the type of joint as explained below, and then select OK.
• Cylindrical Joint Options
• Revolute Joint Options
• Spherical Joint Options
• Translational Joint Options
• Universal/Hooke Joint Options
The joint velocity determines the instantaneous friction regime for a joint. The following is a block diagram
of the friction regimes available in Adams Solver.
145
Joints
LuGre Formulation
LuGre friction model is a type of state variable friction models, where extra state variables (internal states) are
introduced to determine the level of friction. For LuGre friction model, the microscopic average bristle
deflection z of the contact surface is adopted as the state variable. Therefore, the friction can be considered
as the forces produced by the bending bristles. In 1D translational joint cases, the friction is given by
F = σ 0 z + σ 1 z· + σ 2 v (1)
where σ 0 is the bristle stiffness, σ 1 is the microscopic damping, and σ 2 is the viscous friction coefficient.
Notice that z· ≠ v since z represents the average deflection rate of the bristle while v is the velocity of the
contact body. To determine the value of z, an additional differential equation is used in the formulation
v
z· = v – σ 0 --------------- z (2)
F ss ( v )
where
α
v-
– ---
vs
F ss ( v ) = F d + ( F s – F d )e Fd = μd N Fs = μs N (3)
N is the normal contact force, Fs and Fd are the maximum static friction and dynamic friction, μ d and μ s
are dynamic and static frictional coefficients, respectively. Fss(v) represents the steady-state LuGre friction for
a specific v, where z· = 0 and z=const.
For 1D revolute joint cases, the frictional forces between the pin and hole result in the frictional torque, which
is given by
M = F ⋅ R p = ( σ 0 z + σ 1 z· + σ 2 ω ) ⋅ R p
· 2
= ( σ0 zθ + σ1 zθ + σ2 ω ) ⋅ Rp (4)
146 Adams View
Joints
z
where Rp is the pin radius, z θ is the angular displacement, z θ = ------ . Based on Eq. (2), the additional
Rp
differential equation is obtained as
ω 2
z·θ = ω – σ 0 ------------------ z ⋅ R p (5)
M ss ( ω )
where
ωR α
– ---------p-
vs
M ss ( ω ) = M d + ( M s – M d )e Md = μd N ⋅ Rp Ms = μs N ⋅ Rp (6)
M ss ( ω ) represents the steady-state LuGre frictional torque for a specific ω , where z·θ = 0 and
z θ =const.
In the cases where only dry friction is considered, σ 2 , which determines whether viscous friction is
considered in the model, should be zero. Stribeck velocity vs is always small and is used to determine the range
of Stribeck effect. Stribeck effect decay exponent α is used to determine the decay speed (the shape of
Stribeck effect curve), as shown in above figure. Different α values between 0.5 and 2 are recommended in
the literature, and α =2 is the default in Adams.
Symbol: Description:
Scalar quantity
Vector quantity
Summing junction:
c=a+b
Multiplication junction:
c=axb
Relationship Between the Inputs Option and Switches Used in the Block Diagrams
into an equivalent frictional torque and frictional force acting along the common axis of translation and
rotation.
149
Joints
The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.
The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity of
the joint.
The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the joint,
and the range is > 0.
Transition Velocity Defines the absolute velocity threshold for the transition from static friction
Coefficient to dynamic friction. If the absolute relative velocity of the joint marker is at or
above TRANSITION_VELOCITY_COEFFICIENT *
STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY, then the dynamic friction
coefficient is applied. Between STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY
and TRANSITION_VELOCITY_COEFFICIENT *
STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY the coefficient of friction is
transitioning from the static coefficient of friction to the dynamic coefficient
of friction.
Default: 1.5
Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.
Preload
Reaction Force
Bending Moment
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a Static
equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.
Formulation Defines the formulation that Adams uses to calculate the frictional force.
Default: original
Bristle Stiffness Defines the stiffness coefficient of the bristle and is the coefficient σ 0 in the
Coefficient LuGre formulation.
Default: 1e4
Default: 1e2
Default: 0
Default: 1e-3
Default: 2
The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.
The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity of
the joint.
The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the joint,
and the range is > 0.
155
Joints
Default: 1.5
Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.
Preload
Reaction Force
Bending Moment
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a Static
equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.
Formulation Defines the formulation that Adams uses to calculate the frictional force.
Default: original
Bristle Stiffness Defines the stiffness coefficient of the bristle and is the coefficient σ 0 in the
Coefficient LuGre formulation.
Default: 1e4
Default: 1e2
Default: 0
Default: 1e-3
Default: 2
The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.
The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity of
the joint.
The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the joint,
and the range is > 0.
159
Joints
Default: 1.5
Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.
Preload
Reaction Force
160 Adams View
Joints
Default: original
Bristle Stiffness Defines the stiffness coefficient of the bristle and is the coefficient σ 0 in the
Coefficient LuGre formulation.
Default: 1e4
Default: 1e2
Default: 0
Default: 1e-3
Default: 2
moment is converted into an equivalent joint force using the friction arm (Rn). Frictional force (Ffrict) is
applied along the axis of translation in the direction that the FRD block computes.
162 Adams View
Joints
The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.
The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity of
the joint.
The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the joint,
and the range is > 0.
Transition Velocity Defines the absolute velocity threshold for the transition from static friction
Coefficient to dynamic friction. If the absolute relative velocity of the joint marker is at or
above TRANSITION_VELOCITY_COEFFICIENT *
STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY, then the dynamic friction
coefficient is applied. Between STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY
and TRANSITION_VELOCITY_COEFFICIENT *
STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY the coefficient of friction is
transitioning from the static coefficient of friction to the dynamic coefficient
of friction.
Default: 1.5
Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.
Preload
Reaction Force
Bending Moment
Torsional Moment
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a Static
equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.
Formulation Defines the formulation that Adams uses to calculate the frictional force.
Default: original
165
Joints
Default: 1e4
Default: 1e2
Default: 0
Default: 1e-3
Default: 2
The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.
The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity of
the joint.
The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the joint,
and the range is > 0.
168 Adams View
Joints
Default: 1.5
Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.
Preload
Reaction Force
Bending Moment
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a Static
equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.
Formulation Defines the formulation that Adams uses to calculate the frictional force.
Default: original
Bristle Stiffness Defines the stiffness coefficient of the bristle and is the coefficient σ 0 in the
Coefficient LuGre formulation.
Default: 1e4
Default: 1e2
Default: 0
Default: 1e-3
Default: 2
Primitive Joints
Note that joint primitives are only available from the Joint palette, not the Joint tool stack on the Main toolbox.
Couplers
Creating Couplers
When you create a coupler, you can only create a two-joint coupler. You select the driver joint, the joint to
which the second joint is coupled, and the coupled joint, the joint that follows the driver joint. To specify the
relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or to create a three-joint coupler, you modify the coupler.
To create a coupler:
Modifying Couplers
When you modify a coupler joint, you can:
Set the number of joints being coupled together.
Change the joints being coupled together.
173
Joints
Select which joint is the driver joint and which are the coupled joints.
Specify the relationship between the joints as linear or nonlinear.
If you specify a linear relationship, enter scales for the coupled joints.
If you specify a nonlinear relationship, enter the parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine
COUSUB, COUXX, COUXX2 or you can also specify an alternative library and name for the user
subroutine. See the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help. Learn about specifying your
own routine with ROUTINE Argument.
You can also modify coupler properties using the Table Editor.
About Gears
Gears in Adams View connect two of the parts, which are called the geared parts, by coupling together the
allowable Degrees of freedom in two joints.
174 Adams View
Joints
The coupled joints are attached to the third part, called the carrier part. The joints can be translational,
revolute, or cylindrical joints. Using different combinations of joint types and orientations, you can model
many different physical gears, including spur, helical, planetary, bevel, and rack-and-pinion.
When you create the joints to be geared together, you must create them so the first part you select is a geared
part and the second part is the carrier part. Therefore, the I marker parameters of the joints must belong to
the geared parts and the J marker parameters must belong to the carrier part. In addition, the CV marker
must belong to the carrier part.
The gear uses the location of the CV marker to determine the point of contact or mesh of the two geared
parts. The direction of the z-axis of the common velocity marker points in the direction of the common
motion of the geared parts. This is also the direction in which the gear teeth forces act.
The location of the CV marker is constant with respect to the carrier part. Its location does not change when
the direction of power flows through the gear changes.
An Adams gear joint does not model backlash.
Note: If you encounter a warning message that the gear has a suspicious configuration, the z-
axis of the CV marker is probably oriented incorrectly.
7. Select OK.
where:
q1 and q2 are the rotational or translation displacement variables defined by the allowable Degrees of
freedom in the geared joints.
S1 and S2 represent scalar multipliers that act to couple these displacements together. S1 and S2 are
defined indirectly by the spatial relationship between the locations of the joints with respect to the
common velocity marker.
You do not explicitly define the scalar multipliers (gear ratio) when creating a gear. Instead, Adams View
automatically determines the gear ratio as the distance between the origin of the common velocity marker
and the origins of the coupled joints. The gear ratio is shown below.
176 Adams View
Joints
The figure also shows a specific case of creating a spur gear. For this gear, the general equation is:
a ⋅ θA = b ⋅ θB
Types of Motion
Adams View provides you with the following types of motion:
Joint Motion - Prescribes translational or rotational motion on a translational, revolute, or cylindrical
joint. Each joint motion removes one degree of freedom (DOF) from your model. Joint motions are
very easy to create, but they limit you to motions that are applied to the above listed joints and
movements in only one direction or rotation.
Point Motion - Prescribes the movement between two parts. When you create a point motion, you
specify the direction along which the motion occurs. You can impose a point motion on any type of
idealized joint, such as a spherical or cylindrical.
Point motions enable you to build complex movements into your model without having to add
joints or invisible parts. For example, you can represent the movement along an arc, of a ship in the
ocean, or a robot’s arm.
For more on point motions, see About Creating Point Motions.
Function expression - You can use Adams View function expressions to specify the exact movement
applied to a joint as a function of time. For example, using function expressions you can define a
motion function that holds the joint in a fixed position, as well as one that moves the joint with the
required force to produce a constant velocity. To learn more about function expressions, see Function
Builder and Adams View Function Builder online help.
Note: If you make your function a function of displacements or forces, Adams View issues an
error and stops execution. These types of functions contain a VARVAL (function that
returns variable name), and although a VARVAL is allowed in the function, Adams View
issues a warning. The motion function containing the VARVAL will not give correct
velocities, accelerations, or reaction forces in a joint, and may have trouble converging to
a solution.
Parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine - You can create a much more complex
motion by creating a MOTSUB User-written subroutine and entering the values to be passed to the
subroutine to determine the motion. For more on creating subroutines and passing values to them,
see the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver help.
2. In the settings container, specify the speed of the motion in displacement units per second. By default,
Adams View creates a rotational motion with a speed of 30 degrees per second and a translational
motion with a speed of 10 millimeters per second.
To enter a function expression or user-written subroutine, right-click the Speed text box, point to
Parameterize, and then select Expression Builder to display the Adams View Function Builder. For
information on using the Function Builder, see Function Builder and Adams View Function Builder online
help.
3. Use the left mouse button to select the joint on the screen to which the motion will be applied.
Note: You can also modify joint properties using the Table Editor.
If you selected Function, enter the following in the Function (time) text box that appears:
• Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in radians.)
• Function expression:
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the More tool
to display the Adams View Function Builder. For information on using the Function Builder, see
Function Builder and Adams View Function Builder online help.
If you selected Subroutine, enter the parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine
MOTSUB and its ID or you can specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine in
the Routine text box. For more on subroutines, see the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online
help. Learn about specifying your own routine with ROUTINE Argument.
5. Set Type to Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration to specify how motion magnitude is defined.
6. In the Displacement IC or Velocity IC text boxes, enter the initial conditions for displacement or
velocity. The text boxes that appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.
Applying Point Motion
Note: You can also modify point motion using the Table Editor.
177
Motion
Note: You can also modify point motion using the Table Editor.
4. Enter the following in the F(time) text boxes. The text boxes that appear depend on how the
magnitude of the motion is defined.
• Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in radians.)
• Function expression
• Parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine MOTSUB or you can specify an alternative
library and name for the user subroutine in the Routine text box. See the Subroutines section of
the Adams Solver online help. Learn about specifying your own routine with ROUTINE Argument.
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the More tool to
display the Function Builder.
5. In the Disp. IC or Velo. IC text boxes, enter the initial conditions for displacement or velocity. The
text boxes that appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.
• Initial displacement defines the translation of the first part in units of length relative to the second
part. You can set displacements on any point motion whose magnitude is defined as velocity or
acceleration.
• Initial velocity defines the velocity of the first part with respect to the second part in units of length
per unit of time. You can set initial velocity on any point motion whose magnitude is defined as
acceleration.
Forces
Overview
Applied Forces
Flexible Connectors
Modal Forces
Overview
Forces define loads and compliances on parts. Forces do not absolutely prohibit or prescribe motion.
Therefore, they do not add or remove degrees of freedom (DOF) from your model. Some forces can resist
motion, such as spring dampers, and some can try to induce motion.
Adams View provides the following types of forces:
Applied forces
Flexible connectors - Note that flexible connectors resist motion and are simpler and easier to use
than applied forces because you only supply constant coefficients for the forces. The forces include
Beams, Bushings, translational spring dampers, and torsion springs that provide compliant force
relationships.
Special forces - Special forces are forces that are commonly encountered, such as tire and gravity
forces.
Contacts - Specify how parts react when they come in contact with each other when the model is in
motion.
See Create Forces Palette and Tool Stack dialog box help for more information.
• Spline functions that allow the force to depend on data stored in lookup tables. Examples of
these include motors using torque-speed curves or nonlinear bushings whose stiffness is not
entirely linear.
• Impact functions that make the force act like a compression-only spring-damper that turns on
and off as bodies intermittently contact one another.
Enter parameters that are passed to User-written subroutines that are linked to Adams View. You
can enter parameters for all types of applied forces. You can also enter parameters to a subroutine for
the field flexible connector to create a nonlinear force between two parts. For more information on
how to use subroutines to define your force magnitudes, see the Subroutines section of the Adams
Solver online help.
Applied Forces
Applied forces are forces that define loads and compliances on parts so they move in certain ways. Adams
View provides a library of applied forces that you can use. Applied forces give you a great deal of flexibility,
but they require work to model simple forces. Instead of using applied forces, you may want to consider using
the flexible connectors, which model several commonly used force elements, or special forces, which provide
environmental and complex forces.
Applied forces can have one, three, or six components (three translational and three rotational) that define
the resultant force. For example, a single-component force or torque defines the force using a single
181
Forces
component, while a multi-component force or torque defines the force using three or more components. The
following figure shows all six possible force components associated with a particular coordinate system’s x-,
y-, and z-axes.
Single-Component Forces
To create a single-component force:
1. From the Create Forces tool stack or palette, select either:
• to create a single-component force.
• to create a single-component torque.
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• The number of parts and the nature of the force direction. You can select the following:
• Space Fixed
• Body Moving
• Two Bodies
Learn about Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces.
• How you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current Working grid, if it is
displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model,
such as along an edge or normal to the face of a part.
• The characteristics of the force. You can select the following:
• Constant force/torque - Enter a constant force or torque value or let Adams View use the
default value.
• Spring-Damper - Enter stiffness and damping coefficients and let Adams View create a function
expression for damping and stiffness based on the coefficient values. (Not available when you are
using the Main toolbar to access the force tool.)
• Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you, which, in effect, creates a force with zero
magnitude. After you create the force, you modify it by entering a function expressions or
parameters to a SFOSUB User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams View. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about specifying a routine
with ROUTINE Argument.
3. Do one of the following depending on whether you are creating a single-component force or torque:
• For a single-component force, select the action body. If you selected to create a torque between
two parts, select the reaction body and then select the points of application on the two bodies. Be
sure to select the point of application on the action body first.
• For a single-component torque, select the action body. If you selected to create a torque between
two parts, select the reaction body and then select the points of application on the two bodies. Be
sure to select the point of application on the action body first.
4. If you selected to orient the force along a direction vector on a feature, move the cursor around in
your model to display an arrow representing the direction along a feature where you want the force
oriented. When the direction vector represents the desired orientation, click.
183
Forces
magnitude of If you selected Function, enter the following in the Function (time) text box that
the force appears:
Constant force value
Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the Function text box, select the More button
to display the Function Builder.
Body moving - Applies the single-component force to one part, or action body, that you select.
Adams View automatically applies the reaction force to ground. You specify a direction for the force.
The direction can change during the simulation because the coordinate system marker used to define
the force direction is attached to the action body. You can attach the direction marker to a different
part when you modify the force.
Two bodies - Applies the single-component force to two parts that you select, at two locations that
you select. Adams View defines the direction based on the line of sight between the two locations
you selected.
187
Forces
Multi-Component Forces
To define more complex forces, you can use multi-component forces. Multi-component forces apply
translational and/or rotational force between two parts in your model using three or more orthogonal
components. The following lists the different types of multi-component forces:
Three-component force
Three-component torque
Six-component general force
A multi-component force applies an action force to the first part you select, which is called the action body.
Adams View automatically applies a corresponding reaction force to the second part you select, which is
called the reaction body. If you define the force characteristics as bushing-like, Adams View generates
equations to represent a linear spring-damper in the specified component directions.
To define the points of application of the multi-component force, Adams View creates a marker for each part.
The marker belonging to the action body is the action marker, and the marker belonging to the reaction body
is the reaction marker. Adams View keeps the reaction marker coincident with the action marker at all times.
The reaction marker is often referred to as a floating marker because its location is not fixed relative to the
body to which it belongs. Action and reaction markers are also referred to as I and J markers.
Adams View also creates a third marker called a reference (R) marker that indicates the direction of the force.
You define the orientation of the reference marker when you create a multi-component force. You can align
the marker to the working grid, if it is turned on, or to the global coordinate system. You can also orient the
marker using any feature in your model, such as along an edge of a part.
Example of Action and Reaction Force Movement
The following figure illustrates the movement of reaction forces and the placement of the reference marker.
The figure shows a ball bouncing on a board. As the ball bounces, its location changes relative to the board.
The reaction forces applied to the board also change location because the reaction (J) marker moves with the
ball. The reaction forces applied to the board do not change direction because the reference (R) marker
belongs to the stationary board.
188 Adams View
Forces
Tip: You can use the Info command to see the markers that Adams View creates for a multi-
component force. You can also see the markers when you modify the force. Learn about
Displaying Object Information and Accessing Information Window.
Fr = –Fa
189
Forces
where r is the reaction force applied to the reaction body. If you apply the force to a part and ground, Adams
Solver does not calculate the reaction forces.
Tr = –Ta
where T r is the reaction torque applied to the reaction body. If you apply the torque to a part and ground,
Adams Solver does not calculate the reaction torques.
2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you select the two parts to which the force will be applied and the
common point of application on each part. The first part you select is the action body; the second
part is the reaction body.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you select the two parts to which the force is applied and a different
location for the force on each part. If the markers defining the locations of the forces are not
coincident and aligned, the forces may be nonzero at the beginning of the simulation.
The table summarizes the bodies and locations you specify as you create a force.
Tip: To precisely orient your force, first orient the Working grid so its x-, y-, and z-axes align with
the desired force axes. Then, use the Normal To Grid orientation method when you create
the force. Learn about the Working Grid dialog box
Note: It is assumed that elements which cannot have force on the J marker (that is, action-
only forces and torques) do not use type 2 or 3.
193
Forces
Example:
mdi graphic_force &
object = MY_FORCE &
type = -1 &
Current_type = Setting_var
Flexible Connectors
Bushings
Creating Bushings
To define a bushing, you need to create two markers, one for each part. The marker on the first part that you
specify is called the I marker. The marker on the second part that you specify is called the J marker.
Learn about Constitutive Equations for Bushings.
To create a bushing:
1. From the Create Forces tool stack or palette, select the Bushing tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• How you want the force applied to parts. You can select the following:
• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
194 Adams View
Forces
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
• How you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes of the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y, and z-axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model,
such as the face of a part. The direction vector you select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams
View automatically calculates the x- and y-axes.
• The translational and rotational stiffness and damping properties for the bushing.
3. Click the bodies.
4. Click one or two force-application points depending on the location method you selected.
5. If you selected to orient the force along a direction vector using a feature, move the cursor around in
your model to display an arrow that shows the direction along a feature where you want the force
oriented. Click when the direction vector shows the correct z-axis orientation.
Modifying Bushings
The following procedure modifies the following for a Bushing:
The two bodies to which the forces are applied.
Translational and rotational properties for stiffness, damping, and preload.
Force graphics.
Learn about Constitutive Equations for Bushings.
To modify a bushing:
1. Display the Modify Bushing dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Enter the values in the dialog box as explained the table below, and then select OK.
195
Forces
Action Body - Change the action body to which the force is applied.
Reaction Body - Change the body that receives the reaction forces.
Change the properties For the translational force applied by the bushing, enter:
of the force
Three stiffness coefficients.
Three viscous-damping coefficients. The force due to damping is zero
when there are no relative translational velocities between the markers on
the action and reaction bodies.
Enter three constant force (preload) values. Constant values indicate the
magnitude of the force components along the x-, y-, and z-axeis of the
coordinate system marker of the reaction body (J marker) when both the
relative translational displacement and velocity of the markers on the
action and reaction bodies are zero.
For the rotational (torque) properties, enter:
Note: A bushing has the same constitutive relation form as a field element. The primary difference
between the two forces is that non diagonal coefficients (Kij and Cij, where i is not equal to
j) are zero for a bushing. You only define the diagonal coefficients (Kii and Cii) when creating
a bushing. For more on field elements, see Field Element Tool.
where:
Fx, Fy, and Fz are measure numbers of the translational force components in the coordinate system
of the J marker.
x, y, and z are measure numbers of the bushing deformation vector in the coordinate system of the J
marker.
Vx, Vy, and Vz are time derivatives of x, y, and z, respectively.
F1, F2, and F3 are measure numbers of any constant preload force components in the coordinate
system of the J marker.
Tx, Ty, and Tz are rotational force components in the coordinate system of the J marker.
a, b, and c are projected, small-angle rotational displacements of the I marker with respect to the J
marker.
wx, wy, and wz are the measure numbers of the angular velocity of the I marker as seen by the J
marker, expressed in the J marker coordinate system.
T1, T2, and T3 are measure numbers of any constant preload torque components in the coordinate
system of the J marker.
197
Forces
The bushing element applies an equilibrating force and torque to the J marker in the following way:
where:
δ is the instantaneous deformation vector from the J marker to the I marker. While the force at the
J marker is equal and opposite to the force at the I marker, the torque at the J marker is usually not
equal to the torque at the I marker because of the moment arm due to the deformation of the
bushing element.
For the rotational constitutive equations to be accurate, at least two of the rotations (a, b, c) must be small.
That is, two of the three values must remain smaller than 10 degrees. In addition, if a becomes greater than
90 degrees, b becomes erratic. If b becomes greater than 90 degrees, a becomes erratic. Only c can become
greater than 90 degrees without causing convergence problems. For these reasons, it is best to define your
bushing such that angles a and b remain small (not a and c and not b and c).
You can specify the damping and stiffness values as coefficients or use splines to define the relationships of
damping to velocity or stiffness to displacement. You can also set the stiffness value to 0 to create a pure
damper or set the damping value to 0 to create a pure spring.
You can also set a reference length for the spring, as well as a preload force. By default, Adams View uses the
length of the spring damper when you create it as its reference length.
Stiffness Coefficient and enter a stiffness value for the spring damper.
No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damper.
Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of force to
deformation. Learn about Splines.
Damping Select one of the following:
Damping Coefficient and enter a viscous damping value for the spring
damper.
No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring.
Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of force to
velocity. Learn about Splines.
Length and preload In the Preload text box, enter the preload force for the spring damper.
of spring Preload force is the force of the spring damper in its reference position.
Select either:
• Default Length to automatically use the length of the spring damper
when you created it as its reference length.
• Length at Preload and enter the reference length of the spring at its
preload position.
Note: If you set preload to zero, then displacement at preload is the same as the
spring’s free length. If the preload value is non-zero, then the
displacement at preload is not the same as the spring’s free length.
Set graphics Set any of the following:
Graphics - Specify whether coil spring graphics are always on, always off,
or on whenever you have defined a spring coefficient.
Force Display - Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one
of the parts, both, or none. By default, Adams View displays the force
graphic on the action body.
Damper Graphic - Specify whether cylinder damper graphics are always
on, always off, or on whenever you have defined a damping coefficient.
Torsion Springs
A torsion spring force is a rotational spring-damper applied between two parts. It applies the action torque
to the first part you select, called the action body, and applies an equal and opposite reaction torque to the
second part you select, called the reaction body.
Adams View creates a marker at each location. The marker on the first location you specify is called the I
marker. The marker on the second location that you specify is called the J marker. The right-hand rule defines
a positive torque. Adams View assumes that the z-axes of the I and J markers remain aligned at all times.
The following linear constitutive equation describes the torque applied at the first body:
torque = -CT*da/dt - KT*(a-ANGLE) + TORQUE
Adams Solver automatically computes the terms da/dt and a. The term a is the angle between the x axes of
the I and the J markers. Adams Solver takes into account the total number of complete turns.
You can specify the damping and stiffness values as coefficients or use a spline to define the relationship of
damping to velocity or stiffness to displacement. You can also set the stiffness value to 0 to create a pure
damper or set the damping values to 0 to create a pure spring. Learn about defining Splines.
You can also set the rotation angle of the torsion spring when it is in its preload state and any preload forces
on the spring. By default, Adams View uses the rotation angle of the torsion spring when you create it as its
preload angle.
201
Forces
1. From the Create Forces tool stack or palette, select the Torsion Spring tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• How you want the force applied to parts. You can select the following:
• 1 location
• 2 bodies - 1 location
• 2 bodies - 2 locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
• How you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes of the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y, and z-axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model,
such as the face of a part. The direction vector you select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams
View calculates the x- and y-axes automatically.
• The torsional stiffness (KT) and torsional damping (CT) coefficients.
3. Click the bodies, unless Adams View is automatically selecting them (1 location method).
4. Click one or two force-application points, depending on the location method you selected.
5. If you selected to orient the force along a direction vector using a feature, move the cursor around in
your model to display an arrow that shows the direction along a feature where you want the force
oriented. Click when the direction vector shows the correct z-axis orientation.
Beams
A beam creates a linear translational and rotational force between two locations that define the endpoints of
the beam. It creates markers at each endpoint. The marker on the action body, the first part you select, is the
I marker. The marker on the reaction body, the second part you select, is the J marker. The forces the beam
produces are linearly dependent on the relative displacements and velocities of the markers at the beam’s
endpoints.
See Beam example of two markers (I and J) that define the endpoints of the beam and indicates the twelve
forces (s1 to s12) it produces.
The x-axis of the J marker defines the centroidal axis of the beam. The y-axis and z-axis of the J marker are
the principal axes of the cross section. They are perpendicular to the x-axis and to each other. When the beam
is in an undeflected position, the I marker has the same angular orientation as the J marker, and the I marker
203
Forces
lies on the x-axis of the J marker. Adams View applies the following forces in response to the translational and
the rotational deflections of the I marker with respect to the J marker:
Axial forces (s1 and s7)
Bending moments about the y-axis and z-axis (s5, s6, s11, and s12)
Twisting moments about the x-axis (s4 and s10)
Shear forces (s2, s3, s8, and s9)
You can use a field element instead of a beam to define a beam with characteristics unlike those that the beam
assumes. For example, a field element can define a beam with a nonuniform cross section or a beam with
nonlinear material characteristics.
Caution: By definition a beam is asymmetric. Holding the J marker fixed and deflecting the I marker
produces different results than holding the I marker fixed and deflecting the J marker by the
same amount. This asymmetry occurs because the coordinate system frame that the
deflection of the beam is measured in moves with the J marker.
where:
Fx, Fy, and Fz are the measure numbers of the translational force components in the coordinate
system of the J marker.
x, y, and z are the translational displacements of the I marker with respect to the J marker measured
in the coordinate system of the J marker.
Vx, Vy, and Vz are the time derivatives of x, y, and z, respectively.
Tx, Ty, and Tz are the rotational force components in the coordinate system of the J marker.
a, b, and c are the relative rotational displacements of the I marker with respect to the J marker as
expressed in the x-, y-, and z-axis, respectively, of the J marker.
wx, wy, and wz are the measure numbers of the angular velocity of the I marker as seen by the J
marker, expressed in the J marker coordinate system.
Note: Both matrixes, Cij and Kij, are symmetric, that is, Cij=Cji and Kij=Kji. You define the
twenty-one unique damping coefficients when you modify the beam.
where:
E = Young’s modulus of elasticity for the beam material.
A = Uniform area of the beam cross section.
L = Undeformed length of the beam along the x-axis.
Py = 12EIzz ASY/(GAL2)
Pz = 12EIyy ASZ/(GAL2)
ASY = Correction factor (shear area ratio) for shear deflection in the y direction for Timoshenko
beams.
205
Forces
ASZ = Shear area ratio for shear deflection in the z direction for Timoshenko beams.
Note: Beams may be also defined to support nonlinear geometric behavior. For details, see the
BEAM documentation for Adams Solver (C++).
Adams Solver applies an equilibrating force and torque at the J marker on the reaction body, as defined by
the following equations:
L is the instantaneous displacement vector from the J marker to the I marker. While the force at the J marker
is equal and opposite to the force at the I marker, the torque is usually not equal and opposite, because of the
force transfer.
Creating Beams
To create a beam:
1. From the Create Forces palette or tool stack, select the Massless Beam tool .
2. Select a location for the beam on the first part. This is the action body.
3. Select a location for the beam on the second part. This is the reaction body.
4. Select the direction in the upward (y) direction for the cross-section geometry.
Modifying Beams
After you’ve created a Beam, you can modify the following:
Markers between which the beam acts.
Stiffness and damping values.
Material properties of the beam, such as its length and area.
Learn about Constitutive Equations for Beams.
To modify a beam:
1. Display the Force Modify Element Like Beam dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. In the New Beam Name text box, enter a new name for the beam, if desired.
3. In the Solver ID text box, assign a unique ID number to the beam.
4. Enter any comments about the beam that might help you manage and identify the beam.
5. Enter values for the beam properties as explained in the table below, and then select OK.
206 Adams View
Forces
207
Forces
where:
where:
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to
right. The damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero
entries; that is, r1 through r21 each default to zero.
The damping matrix should be positive semidefinite. This ensures that
damping does not feed energy into the model. Adams Solver does not
warn you if the matrix is not positive semidefinite.
210 Adams View
Forces
By definition, the beam lies along the positive x-axis of the J marker. Therefore,
the I marker must have a positive x displacement with respect to the J marker
when viewed from the J marker. In its undeformed configuration, the orientation
of the I and the J markers must be the same.
When the x-axes of the markers defining a beam are not collinear, the beam
deflection and, consequently, the force corresponding to this deflection are
calculated. To minimize the effect of such misalignments, perform a static
equilibrium at the start of the simulation.
When the beam element angular deflections are small, the stiffness matrix
provides a meaningful description of the beam behavior. When the angular
deflections are large, they are not commutative; so the stiffness matrix that
produces the translational and rotational force components may not correctly
describe the beam behavior. Adams Solver issues a warning message if the beam
translational displacements exceed 10 percent of the undeformed length.
Field Elements
A field element applies a translational and rotational action-reaction force between two locations. Adams
View creates markers at each location. The marker on the first location you specify is called the I marker. The
marker on the second location you specify is called the J marker. Adams View applies the component
translational and rotational forces for a field to the I marker and imposes reaction forces on the J marker.
The field element can apply either a linear or nonlinear force, depending on the values you specify after you
create the field.
To specify a linear field, enter values that define a six-by-six stiffness matrix, translational and
rotational preload values, and a six-by-six damping matrix. The stiffness and damping matrixes must
be positive semidefinite, but need not be symmetric. You can also specify a damping ratio instead of
specifying a damping matrix.
To specify a nonlinear field, use the User-written subroutine FIESUB to define the three force
components and three torque components and to enter values to pass to FIESUB. (See the Adams
Solver Subroutines online help.)
211
Forces
For a nonlinear field, the following constitutive equations are defined in the FIESUB subroutine:
Adams Solver applies the defined forces and torques at the I marker. In the linear and nonlinear equations:
Fx, Fy, and Fz are the three translational force measure numbers.
Tx, Ty, and Tz are the three rotational force measure numbers associated with unit vectors directed
along the x-, y-, and z-axes of the J marker.
K is the stiffness matrix.
x0, y0, z0, a0, b0, and c0 are the free lengths.
212 Adams View
Forces
x, y, z, a, b, and c are the translational and the rotational displacements of the I marker with respect
to the J marker expressed in the coordinate system of the J marker.
Vx, Vy, and Vz are the scalar time derivatives of x, y, and z, respectively.
x, y, and z are the measure numbers of the angular velocity of the I marker as seen by the J marker,
expressed in the J marker coordinate system.
C is the damping matrix.
F1, F2, F3, T1, T2, and T3 are the translational and rotational pre-tensions.
Adams Solver computes all variables and time derivatives in the J marker coordinate system.
Adams Solver applies an equilibrating force and torque at the J marker, as defined by the following equations:
Fj = - Fi
Tj = - Ti - L Fi
L is the instantaneous displacement vector from the J marker to the I marker. While the force at the J marker
is equal and opposite to the force at the I marker, the torque is usually not equal and opposite, because of the
force transfer.
The stiffness matrix is multiplied by displacements (both linear and angular) to give the forces (both linear
and torsional). Here (x, y, z) is the displacement vector and (a, b, c) are the displacement angles. F and T are
the force and torque vectors.
[ | ] [ x ] [ Fx ]
[ Force/Length | Force/Angle ] [ y ] [ Fx ]
[ | ] [ z ] [ Fx ]
-----------------|--------------- =
[ | ] [ a ] [ Tx ]
[ Torque/Length | Torque/Angle ] [ b ] [ Ty ]
[ | ] [ b ] [ Tz ]
The terms are the force components along the x-, y-, and z-axis of the J marker
and the torque components about the x, y-, and z-axis of the J marker,
respectively. Entering values for Force Preload and Torque Preload is optional
and defaults to six zero entries.
Stiffness matrix In the Stiffness Matrix text box, define a six-by-six matrix of stiffness
coefficients. The following matrix shows the values to input.
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right. Learn
about Defining the Elements of the Stiffness and Damping Matrices for field
elements.
Note: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for the
stiffness matrix.
216 Adams View
Forces
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right. Learn
about Defining the Elements of the Stiffness and Damping Matrices for field
elements.
To enter a damping ratio that defines the ratio of the damping matrix to
the stiffness matrix, select Damping Ratio and enter the value. If you
enter a damping ratio, Adams Solver multiplies the stiffness matrix by
the ratio to obtain the damping matrix. Do not enter a ratio without
also entering a stiffness matrix.
Note: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for the
damping matrix.
Modal Forces
A modal force, or MFORCE, allows you to distribute a force to one or more, or all nodes of a flexible body.
The force can vary in time or position and can even be made dependent on a state variable. Examples of
modal force applications are pressures on journal bearings, simulating magnetically induced fields, or the
modeling of airfoil flutter. Modal forces are a special class of forces called distributed loads that can only be
applied to flexible bodies.
For a detailed overview of distributed loads and a tutorial that steps you through an example of adding modal
forces to your model, see Modeling Distributed Loads and Predeformed Flexible Bodies.
Adams View provides three options for defining MFORCEs on flexible bodies. All options require additional
work outside of Adams View to complete the definition and simulation of modal forces.
217
Forces
Reference and scale a load case defined in the flexible body's modal load matrix. This option can
only be used in Adams View on flexible bodies that have been built with Modal Neutral File (MNF)
that contains modal load case information. For more information on flexible bodies, their modal
load matrix, and how to generate modal load case information in an MNF, see Creating Loadcase
Files.
Specify the modal force as a product of a modal load case and scale function defined in a User-
written subroutine. The scale function can depend on time or the state of the system. The load case
can only be a function of time.
Directly specify the components of a modal force in a User-written subroutine. Each component can
depend on time or the state of the system. This option is only available in Adams Solver (C++).
The last two options provide much more capability in defining modal forces. To take advantage of
these options, however, you need to develop a MFOSUB routine that is built into the Adams Solver.
For more information, see the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help.
More than one modal force can be defined on a flexible body. For each modal force defined on a flexible body
a modal force icon appears at its local part reference frame. You can transfer modal forces from one flexible
body to another.
Learn more:
1. Creating a Modal Force
2. Modifying a Modal Force
3. Copying and Deleting a Modal Force
4. Viewing Modal Preloads of Flexible Bodies
1. From the Main toolbox, from the Create Forces tool stack, select the Modal Force tool .
The Create/Modify Modal Force dialog box appears.
2. In the Create Modal Force dialog box, specify the following:
Options in Create Modal Force Dialog Box
218 Adams View
Forces
Note: You can use the Info command to see the floating marker that Adams View
creates when you reference a reaction part. Learn about Displaying Object
Information and Accessing Information Window.
Select how you want Select the following from Define Using:
to define the modal
force. Function - Lets you select the modal load case and scale function of the
MFORCE. Note that you cannot select Function when defining an
MFORCE on a flexible body that does not contain any modal load case
information in its corresponding MNF.
Subroutine - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be
passed to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute the
modal load case and scale function whose product is the modal force
applied to the flexible body. The scale function can depend on time or the
state of the system. The load case can only be a function of time.
Force - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be passed
to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute the modal
force on the flexible body. Each component of the modal force can
depend on time or the state of the system. (Adams Solver (C++) only.
Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box
help.)
To use a subroutine, you need to build a version of the Adams Solver that
contains your version of the MFOSUB routine that quantifies the modal
force. For more information, see the Subroutines section of the Adams
Solver online help.
You can also specify an alternative library and name for the user
subroutine in the Routine text box. Learn about specifying your own
routine with ROUTINE Argument.
3. If you select to specify a flexible body with modal load case information, you also specify:
220 Adams View
Forces
• Load Case - Lets you select a modal load case label from a list. The list of modal load case labels
is generated from the MNF. Learn about Creating Loadcase Files.
• Scale Function - Lets you specify an expression for the scale factor to be applied to the modal
load case.
4. Select OK.
To modify a MFORCE:
1. Display the Create/Modify Modal Force dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Follow the instructions in the dialog box help.
3. Select OK.
Note: When you copy a MFORCE that has a reaction part specified or as a result, a Floating
marker referenced, Adams View also creates a new floating marker.
In addition, when you delete a MFORCE that has a reaction part specified, Adams View
does not delete its referenced floating marker.
To review the modal preloads using the Flexible Body Modify dialog box:
1. Double-click the flexible body to display the Flexible Body Modify dialog box.
221
Forces
2. From the Flexible Body Modify dialog box, select Modal ICs.
The Modify Modal ICs... dialog box appears. Preloads for the flexible body appear in the last column.
3. Review the preloads, and then select Close.
Note: To create a contour or vector plot of a modal force, the MNF of the associated flexible
body must contain nodal masses. You can use the MNF browser to check if the MNF
contains nodal masses, see Browsing an MNF or an MD DB.
Because modal forces can depend on the state of the system, you must run a simulation
before viewing the results of a modal force.
Note: Contact defined between planar geometry (for example, circle to curve) must be constrained
to lie in the same plane. You usually accomplish this using planar joints or an equivalent set of
Constraints that enforce the planarity.
Failure to enforce planarity will result in a run-time error when the bodies go out of plane
during a Simulation.
You can also create your own contact force model by entering parameters to a User-written subroutine.
Supported Geometry in Contacts
Two-Dimensional Contacts
Adams View supports two-dimensional contact between the following geometry:
Arc
Circle
Polylines
Splines
Point
Plane
For flexible bodies, only point-to-plane and point-to-curve contacts are supported, where the point is on the
flexible body. Adams Solver (C++) can treat multiple points per CONTACT statement. Adams Solver
(FORTRAN) can only treat one point per CONTACT statement.
Note: You cannot have contacts between a point and another point and a plane and another plane.
Three-Dimensional Contacts
Adams View supports three-dimensional contact between the following solid geometry:
Sphere
Cylinder
Frustum
Box
Link
Torus
Extrusion
Revolution
Constructive, solid geometry (geometry combined from several geometries)
Adams View 225
Contacts
Limitations
The contact code in Adams is designed to work with intersection volumes that are "thin", that is, that the
penetration squared is less than the area of contact. If this condition is violated, then the contact behavior is
unpredictable.
The below rule explains this condition:
If area > 2*d*d then contact force is calculated
If area < 2*d*d then contact force set to zero
where:
area = contact area
d = penetration
This condition was added to prevent the contact force from becoming excessively large or from being applied
in an unexpected direction.
Creating/Modifying Contact Forces
1. Select Forces Tab → Special Forces Container → click Create a Contact icon .
Tip: You can change the direction of the force on some geometry (for example, circle, curve, plane,
and sphere) by selecting the Change Direction tool .
226 Adams View
Contacts
• Slip_Velocity
• Penetration
Learning More about the Contact Detection Algorithm
To greatly simplify the contact detection algorithm, Adams Solver assumes that the volume of intersection
between two solids will be much, much less than the volume of either solid. This means that, for example for
a sphere in a V-groove, the Adams Solver algorithm breaks down when the two contact volumes merge into
one. This assumption is not as drastic as it may first appear. The reason is that most users are interested in
contact between rigid bodies (that is, bodies that do not undergo a large deformation). Also, rigid bodies
generally do not penetrate very far into one another. Note that we do not recommend that you use the contact
detection algorithm in the modeling of very soft bodies.
After contact occurs between two solids, Adams Solver computes the volumes of intersection. There may be
only one volume of intersection, or there may be multiple volumes of intersection (this would correspond to
multiple locations of contact). In this discussion, we assume that there is only a single volume of intersection.
The algorithm is the same for every intersection volume.
Once there is contact, Adams Solver finds the centroid of the intersection volume. This is the same as the
center of mass of the intersection volume (assuming the intersection volume has uniform density).
Next, Adams Solver finds the closest point on each solid to the centroid. The distance between these two
points is the penetration depth.
Adams Solver then puts this distance into the formula:
F = K*(distance)n
where:
K - material stiffness
n - exponent
F - force
to determine the contact force due to the material stiffness (there can also be damping and friction forces in
the contact).
For example, if you apply this algorithm to a sphere on a plate, the intersection volume is some type of
spherical shape with a flat side. The centroid of this volume can be computed (this is where most of the time
is spent in the algorithm). It will be below the plate and inside the sphere. The nearest point on the plate (to
the centroid) and the nearest point on the sphere (to the centroid) can also be computed. In this case, the line
between them will pass through the center of the sphere (this will also be the direction in which the contact
force acts).
Again, the algorithm can handle the case of a sphere in a V-groove. There will be two volumes of intersection
and two separate forces will be applied to sphere and to the V-groove (equal and opposite forces).
Contact Friction Force Calculation
Adams Solver uses a relatively simple velocity-based friction model for contacts. Specifying the frictional
behavior is optional. The figure below shows how the coefficient of friction varies with slip velocity.
Coefficient of Friction Varying with Slip Velocity
Adams View 233
Contacts
μ (-vs) = μ s
μ (vs) = - μ s
μ (0) = 0
μ (-vd) = μ d
μ (vd) = - μ d
μ (v) = -sign(v). μ dfor |v| >vd
μ (v) = -step(|v|,vs, μ s, vd, μ d) sign(v) for vs < |v| < vd
μ (v) = step(v,-vs, μ s,vs,- μ s) for -vs < v < vs
where:
V: Slip velocity at contact point
vs: STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY
234 Adams View
Contacts
vd: FRICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY
μ s: MU_STATIC
μ d: MU_DYNAMIC
Material Contact Properties Table
The table below shows material types and their commonly used values for the dynamic coefficient of friction
and restitution.
References
The friction values used in the material interaction table are generalized values based on the following
references:
Bowden & Tabor, "The Friction and Lubrication of Solids," Oxford.
Fuller, "Theory and Practice of Lubrication for Engineers," Wiley.
Ham & Crane, "Mechanics of Machinery," McGraw-Hill.
Bevan, "Theory of Machines," Longmans.
Shigley, "Mechanical Design," McGraw-Hill.
Rabinowicz, "Friction and Wear of Materials," Wiley.
Contact Parameters for Parts with Small Mass
This document gives a method for estimating contact stiffness and damping parameters in Adams for parts
with small mass.
The default contact stiffness and damping coefficients in Adams are:
Stiffness = 1.0E+05 N/mm
Damping = 10.0 N-s/mm
These coefficients were chosen for parts whose mass is on the order of 1.0 Kg and which are made of steel.
Call this part the "default part".
For parts with small mass these coefficients should be reduced to optimize Adams Solver performance and to
minimize the chance of simulation failure.
In the following discussion, assume that:
M = Part mass
R = Average dimension (size) of part (order of magnitude is sufficient)
236 Adams View
Contacts
g = gravitational acceleration
G = G force (1 G = M*g)
Since steel has a density of about 8000 Kg/m^3, the default part would have a radius of about 30 mm
(assuming it is spherical).
The expression for the contact spring force is:
e
F = Kx
where:
F = Contact force
K = Contact Stiffness
x = penetration
e = exponent (default value in Adams is 2.2)
We would like to calculate the contact force in G's on the default part when its penetration is 0.1% of its
radius:
We choose a penetration of 0.1% because most well behaved contact models do not exceed this amount.
To compute the appropriate stiffness for a small part, we specify that it should experience the same G force
when it has a penetration of 0.1% of its radius.
Assume the following small part properties:
M = 4.0e-06 Kg
R = 1 mm
e = 2.2
We need to solve the following equation for K:
5*M*g = K*(0.001)^2.2
We get:
K ≅ 800N ⁄ mm
When both parts in contact are moving, the reduced mass may give a more accurate estimate of stiffness.
The reduced mass is given by:
M1 M2
M = ---------------------
M1 + M2
The contact damping coefficient for small parts should be calculated using critical damping.
The expression for critical damping is:
Adams View 237
Contacts
C = 2 KM
For the small part given above, the damping is:
The values for stiffness and damping are order of magnitude estimates. They can be tuned further (via
experiment) to refine performance.
238 Adams View
Contacts
System Elements
System elements allow you to add your own algebraic and differential equations, and corresponding states,
to your model. Adams Solver solves your equations simultaneously with the equations it generates from other
modeling elements.
Your user-defined equations can depend on any states in the model, such as time, part motions, forces, or
other user-defined states. In turn, you can reference your states in forces, system elements, and other
modeling elements.
System elements enable you to model system components that are not as easily represented by standard
Adams View modeling objects, such as parts, constraints, and forces. They are useful for modeling components
or subsystems that have dynamics of their own. You can use system elements to represent a control system,
for example, or to model the dynamics of an electro-mechanical, hydraulic, or pneumatic actuator. You can
also use system elements to compute simulation output. For example, you might calculate the energy
dissipated in a damper.
The system elements are listed in the table below.
system_tutorial.cmd - Contains an Adams View command file that builds a model containing the
elements listed above.
system_tutorial.txt - Describes the model and its construction.
The path to the files is /install_dir/aview/examples/user_guide, where install_dir is where the Adams software
is installed.
You define each of these arrays using an array data element stored in the current Modeling database. All array
sizes must be consistent with the definition of the system elements. Do not define arrays with zero-size and
zero-valued partial-derivative matrices. Adams Solver correctly formulates the system equations based on
those arrays and derivatives that do exist.
y· = f ( y, q, q· , t )
where:
0 = F ( y, y·, q, q· , t )
Function expressions access the state variable using the function DIF(i1) and the derivative using DIF1(i1).
In each case, i1 specifies the name of the differential equation that defines the variable. User-written
subroutines access the value and derivative by calling the subroutine SYSFNC. For more information on
functions, see Adams View Function Builder online help. For more information on subroutines, see the Subroutines
section of the Adams Solver online help.
tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to System Elements, point to Differential Equation,
and then select either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a differential equation to modify.
The Create/Modify Differential Equation dialog box appears. Both dialog boxes contain the same options.
3. If you selected New, change the name of the differential equation element, if desired.
4. Set Type to either Explicit or Implicit to indicate that the function expression or User-written
subroutine defines the explicit or implicit form of the equation. Learn about Ways to Define
Differential Equations.
5. Do either of the following:
• Set Definition to Run-time Expression, and, in the y' = text box, enter a function expression that
Adams Solver evaluates during a Simulation. In the function expression, the system variable
DIF(i) is the value of the dependent variable that the differential equation defines, and DIF1(j) is
the first derivative of the dependent variable that the differential equation defines.
Select the More button to display the Function Builder and build an expression. See Function
Builder and Adams View Function Builder online help.
• Set Definition to User Written Subroutine and in the y' = text box, enter parameters that are
passed to a user-written subroutine DIFSUB or specify an alternative library and name for the user
subroutine in the Routine text box. Learn about Adams Solver Subroutines. Learn about specifying
routines with ROUTINE Argument.
6. In the Initial Conditions text box, specify:
• The initial value of the differential equation at the start of the simulation.
• Optionally, if you are defining an implicit equation, an approximate value of the initial time
derivative of the differential equation at the start of the simulation. (You do not need to supply a
second value when you enter a explicit equation because Adams Solver can compute the initial
time derivative directly from the equation.)
241
System Elements
7. Adams Solver might adjust the value of the time derivative when it performs an initial conditions
simulation. Entering an initial value for the time derivative helps Adams Solver converge to a desired
initial conditions solution.
8. Select whether or not Adams should hold constant the value of the differential equation during static
and quasi-static Simulations. Learn about Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to System Elements, point to General State
Equation, and then select either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a system element to modify.
The Create/Modify General State Equation dialog box appears. Both dialog boxes contain the same options.
3. If you selected New, change the name of the general state equation element, if desired, and assign a
unique ID to it.
4. Set up the GSE by filling in the following text boxes:
• In the U Array (Inputs) text box, specify the array element that defines the input variables for the
GSE. The U array is optional. When not specified, there are no system inputs. The number of
inputs to the GSE is inferred from the number of variables in the U array.
• In the Y Array (Outputs) text box, specify the array element that defines the output variables for
the GSE.
• In the User Function Parameters text box, specify the parameters that are to be passed to the
User-written subroutines that define the constitutive equations of a GSE, viz., Equations (1), (2),
and (3).
Three user subroutines are associated with a GSE:
• GSE_DERIV is called to evaluate fc() in Equations 1.
• GSE_UPDATE is called to evaluate fd() in Equations 2.
• GSE_OUTPUT is called to evaluate g() in Equations 3.
See the Subroutines help in the Adams Solver online help.
242 Adams View
System Elements
If you specified a user function, in the Interface Function Names, enter function names to use other
than the standard names GSE_DERIV, GSE_UPDATE, and GSE_OUTPUT.
5. Set States to the type of system to define:
• Continuous Systems
• Discrete Systems
• Sampled Systems
• None (No options appear; defines a Feed-Forward Only System)
The dialog box changes depending on the type of system. See the next tables for the values to enter
depending on the systems you are creating. For a sampled system, you enter both continous and
discrete values.
6. Add or change any comments about the GSE that you want to enter to help you manage and identify
it.
7. Select OK.
Options for Defining Continuous and Sampled Systems
When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the continuous states are
initialized to zero.
Static Hold Indicate whether or not the continuous GSE states are permitted to change
during static and quasi-static simulations.
243
System Elements
When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the discrete states are
initialized to zero.
First Sample Time Specify the Simulation time at which the sampling of the discrete states is to
start. All discrete states before the first sample time are defined to be at the initial
condition specified. The default is zero.
Sample Specify the sampling period associated with the discrete states of a GSE. This
Function/Sample User tells Adams Solver to control its step size so that the discrete states of the GSE are
Parameters updated at:
last_sample_time + sample_period
In cases where an expression for the sampling period is difficult to write, you can
specify it in a user-written subroutine GSE_SAMP. Adams Solver will call this
function at each sample time to find out the next sample period.
Select the More button to display the Function Builder and build an
expression. See Function Builder and Adams View Function Builder online help.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to System Elements, point to Linear State Equation,
and then select either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a linear state equation to modify.
The Part Create Equation Linear State Equation or Part Modify Equation Linear State Equation dialog box appears.
Both dialog boxes contain the same options.
244 Adams View
System Elements
3. If you selected New, change the name of the linear state equation element, if desired, and assign a
unique ID number to it.
4. Add or change any comments about the equation element that you want to enter to help you manage
and identify the element.
5. Enter the arrays and matrices in the next text boxes as explained below.
• X State Array Name - Enter the array element that defines the state array for the linear system. The
array must be a states (X) array. It cannot be used in any other linear state equation, general state
equation, or transfer function.
• U Input Array Name - Enter the array element that defines the input (or control) array for the
linear system. Entering an inputs (U) array is optional. The array must be an inputs (U) array. If
you enter an inputs (U) array, you must also specify either a B input matrix, a D feedforward
matrix, or both.
The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there are elements in the inputs
(U) array.
• Y Output Array Name - Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output
variables for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is optional. If you enter an outputs
(Y) array, you must also specify a C output matrix or a D feedforward matrix. The corresponding
matrix elements must have the same number of rows as there are elements in the outputs (Y) array.
It also must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state equation,
general state equation, or transfer function.
• IC Array Name - Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial conditions for
the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The IC array must have the same number of
elements as the states (X) array (equal to the number of rows in the A state matrix). When you do
not specify an IC array, Adams Solver initializes all states to zero.
• A State Matrix Name - Enter the matrix data element that defines the state transition matrix for
the linear system. The matrix must be a square matrix (same number of rows and columns), and
it must have the same number of columns as the number of rows in the states (X) array.
• B Input Matrix Name - Enter the matrix data element that defines the control matrix for the
linear system. The B input matrix must have the same number of rows as the A state matrix and
the same number of columns as the number of elements in the inputs (U) array.
Entering a B input matrix is optional. If you enter a B input matrix, you must also include an
inputs (U) array.
• C Output Matrix Name - Enter the matrix data element that defines the output matrix for the
linear system. The C output matrix must have the same number of columns as the A state matrix
and the same number of rows as the number of elements in the outputs (Y) array. Entering a C
output matrix is optional. If you enter a C output matrix, you must also include an outputs (Y)
array name.
• D Feedforward Matrix Name - Enter the matrix data element that defines the feedforward matrix
for the linear system. The D feedforward matrix must have the same number of rows as the
number of elements in the Y output array and the same number of columns as the number of
elements in the inputs (U) array.
245
System Elements
When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a Y output matrix and an
inputs (U) array.
6. Set Static hold to yes to hold states at the constant value determined during static and quasi-static
simulations; no if they can change. Learn about Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.
7. Select OK.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to System Elements, point to Transfer Function, and
then select either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a system element to modify.
3. The Create/Modify Transfer Function dialog box appears. Both dialog boxes contain the same options.
4. If you selected New, change the name of the transfer function element, if desired.
5. Enter the arrays for the transfer function in the next three text boxes as explained below:
• Input Array Name (U) - Enter the array that defines the input (or control) for the transfer
function. The array must be an inputs (U) array. If you specified the size of the array when you
created it, it must be one.
• State Array Name (X) - Enter the array that defines the state variable array for the transfer
function. The array must be a states (X) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state
equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specified the size of the array when
you created it, it must be one less than the number of coefficients in the denominator.
• Output Array (Y) - Enter the array that defines the output for the transfer function. The array
must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state equation, general state
equation, or transfer function. If you specify the size of the array when you created it, its size must
be one.
6. In the Denominator Coefficients and Numerator Coefficients text boxes, specify the coefficients of
the polynomial in the numerator and denominator of the transfer function. List the coefficients in
order of ascending power of s, starting with s to the zero power, including any intermediate zero
coefficients. The number of coefficients for the denominator must be greater than or equal to the
number of coefficients for the numerator. The number of coefficients for the denominator must be
greater than or equal to the number of coefficients for the numerator.
246 Adams View
System Elements
7. Select Check Format and Display Plot to display a plot of the transfer function. (see Plots Transfer
Function dialog box help)
8. Select whether or not Adams should hold constant the value of the transfer equation during static and
quasi-static Simulations. Learn about Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.
9. Select OK.
You are defining the following algebraic equation that has no solution:
V = V + 1
When Adams Solver tries to solve this equation using the Newton-Raphson iteration, the solution diverges
and a message appears on the screen indicating that the solution has failed to converge.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to System Elements, point to State Variable, and
then select either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a system element to modify.
The Create/Modify State Variable dialog box appears.
3. If you selected New, change the name of the state variable element, if desired
4. Set Definition to either of the following:
• Run-time Expression
• User written subroutine
Learn more about Ways to Define State Variables.
5. If you selected:
• Run-time Expression, enter the function expression that defines the variable. Select the More button
to display the Function Builder and build an expression. See Function Builder and Adams View
Function Builder online help.
• User written subroutine, enter constants to the User-written subroutine VARSUB to define a
variable. See the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help.
6. If desired, select Guess for F(1, 0..), and then specify an approximate initial value for the variable.
Adams Solver may adjust the value when it performs an Initial conditions simulation. Entering an
accurate value for initial conditions can help Adams Solver converge to the initial conditions solution.
Data Elements
Arrays
248 Adams View
Data Elements
Types of Arrays
There are four types of arrays:
General/Initial Conditions - Define an array of constants used as initial conditions for a system
element or User-written subroutine.
States (X) and Outputs (Y) - Designate the state or output variable arrays for a system element, such
as a linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. Adams Solver computes these
values during a Simulation.
To use the arrays, you reference them in function expressions. You can reference the array as the state or
output variable array of only one system element in a model (for example, only one linear state
equation or one general state equation).
Learn about System Elements.
Inputs (U) - An array that groups together a set of variables used to define the inputs for a system
element. Adams View computes variable values from the specified variable data elements.
The inputs (U) and the initial conditions arrays can exist independently, and do not need to be
referenced by another system element.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the array values. Function
expressions use the function ARYVAL (ARRAY_NAME, COMPONENT) to access the values.
ARRAY_NAME specifies the name of the array, and COMPONENT specifies the position of the
desired value in the array definition.
You should note that you can only access states (X), outputs (Y), and inputs (U) arrays in functions
because the initial condition array is not accessible in the model definition. You can access the initial
condition array in a user-written subroutine. To access all the elements of an array, call the
subroutine SYSARY. To access one element of an array in a subroutine, call the subroutine SYSFNC.
See the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help.
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the Array tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Array, and then select
either New or Modify.
2. If you selected:
• New, the Create/Modify Solver Array dialog box appears, and you should continue with Step 3.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element array to modify. The Create/Modify
Solver Array appears. Continue with Step 4.
3. If creating the array, accept the default name or assign a new name.
Tip: You might find it easier to track which array element goes with which system element
if you name the array elements and the corresponding system elements with like names.
For example, the states (X) array that goes with general state equation GSE_100 would
be ARRAY_100; the inputs (U) array would be ARRAY_101; and the outputs (Y) array
would be ARRAY_102.
4. Select the type of array that you want to define. Learn about the Types of Arrays. The dialog box
changes depending on the selection you make.
5. Depending on the type of array you are creating or modifying, enter or change the values in the dialog
box as explained in the next table, and then select OK.
250 Adams View
Data Elements
Strings
A string element defines a character string that you can refer to later in the execution of Adams View or
Adams Solver. The character string cannot be broken and continued on the next line. It can, however, be
longer than a single line. You can use the GTSTRG subroutine to retrieve the character string in a User-
written subroutine. For example, you could use a string element to pass a file name to a user-written
subroutine. For more information, see the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help.
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the String tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to String, and then select
either New or Modify
2. If you selected:
• New, the Create/Modify String dialog box appears, and you should continue with Step 3.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element string to modify. The Data Element
Modify String Element dialog box appears. It contains the same options as the Data Element
Create String Element dialog box.
3. In the Name text box, enter the name that you want assigned to the string.
4. In the String text box, enter the string values.
5. Select OK.
Curves
Learn more:
About Data Element Curves
Uses for Data Element Curves
Steps in Defining Curves
Using Curve Elements in Your Model
Creating and Modifying Curve Data Elements
251
Data Elements
Function expression - You can use the curve element as the input to a function, such as CURVE (B-
Spline fitting method). See Spline Functions in Adams View Function Builder online help.
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the Curve tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Curve, and then select
either New or Modify.
2. If you selected:
• New, the Data Element Create Curve dialog box appears and you should continue with Step 4.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element curve to modify. The Data Element
Modify Curve dialog box appears. It contains the same options as the Data Element Create Curve
dialog box.
3. If creating the curve, accept the default name or assign a new name.
4. Assign a unique ID number to the curve element, if desired.
5. Add or change any comments about the curve element to help you manage and identify it.
6. Set Closed to no to create an open curve or yes to create a closed curve.
7. Set the pull-down menu in the middle of the dialog box for how you want to define the curve (either
from a matrix or a User-written subroutine). The dialog box changes depending on the selection you
made. Learn more about Defining Data Element Curves.
8. If you are entering values using a matrix, enter values in the dialog box as explained in the table below,
and then select OK.
255
Data Elements
9. If you are entering values using a subroutine, enter values in the dialog box as explained in the table
below, and then select OK.
Maximum Parameter - Enter the maximum value of the curve parameter for
a user-written curve.
Splines
A spline creates a continuous function from a set of data points.
Learn about:
About Data Element Splines
Ways to Create Splines
Curve-Fitting Techniques
Creating Splines Using the Spline Editor
Creating Splines Using the General Method
Modifying Splines
256 Adams View
Data Elements
Note: Large number of values pasted into user interface fields or data tables may result in application
instability. MSC recommends users to enter no more than 1 million data points at a time.
Entering a user-defined file causes Adams Solver to call the User-written subroutine
SPLINE_READ, which you must provide. For more on how to define a SPLINE using a user-
defined file, see the example in SPLINE_READ of the Adams Solver Subroutines online help.
Results of a simulation - You can also use the results of a Simulation as input to a spline by
referencing Result set components. For more on result set components, see About Simulation
Output.
Numerical values directly input in the dialog box - You can directly input x, y, and, optionally, z
values in the dialog box.
General Procedures
Displaying the Spline Editor and Setting the View
Setting Spline Units and Dimensions
Specifying Linear Extrapolation
Plotting a Spline:
Setting the View of the Spline Plot
Viewing a Three-Dimensional Plot in the Spline Editor
Editing Spline Plot Data
Changing Plotting Methods and Recomputing the Plot
Transferring Plot to Adams PostProcessor
258 Adams View
Data Elements
Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the Spline tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Spline, and then select
New.
To set units:
Set X Units, Y Units, Z Units to the desired units. Select no_units if you do not want units
associated with the values.
Note: In the Adams View database and command language, units specification for splines can
be done in either of two ways: via parameters "x_units", "y_units" and "z_units"; or
by a single "units" parameter. If the Spline has this "units" parameter defined, it will
be mapped to the Y Units field in this dialog.
To view the curve that Adams View generates from the data points:
Select Spline Curves.
If creating a 3D spline, you can view a 3D plot of the curves.
Data Points - Using the 3D button next to Symbols displays the 3D spline using the raw data points
(that is, the points represented by the curve symbols in the 2D plot). This is the same plot you see
when you select to view a 3D plot in tabular view.
Spline Representation - Using the 3D button next to Spline Curves displays a 3D plot using the
spline representations Adams View generates from the raw data points. Each of the curves in the 2D
plot represents one of the rows in the 3D preview plot.
Note: Changing the number of points only changes the display of the curve, making it smoother or
more coarse. It does not change the number of data points in the curve.
To paste text:
Right-click the cell where you want to insert the text, and then select Paste.
To resize a column:
1. Point to the right border of the column heading that you want to resize. The cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow.
2. Drag the cursor until the column is the desired size.
3. Release the mouse button.
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the Spline tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Spline, and then select
General.
The Data Element Create Spline dialog box appears.
2. Accept the default name or assign a new name.
3. Assign a unique ID number to the spline, if appropriate.
4. Add any comments about the spline that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it.
5. Set Linear Extrapolate to yes to extrapolate a spline by applying a linear function over the first or last
two data points. By default, for user-defined files, Adams Solver extrapolates a spline that exceeds a
defined range by applying a parabolic function over the first or last three data points. For RPC III or
DAC files, the default method of extrapolation is zero-order (constant). Learn about spline
extrapolation in Curve-Fitting Techniques in Adams View.
6. Depending on how you are creating the spline, enter or change the values in the dialog box as
explained in the next table, and then select OK. See General Method for Creating Splines for available
options.
266 Adams View
Data Elements
To create a spline
from: Do the following:
File 1. Set the pull-down menu to File.
2. Enter the name of the file.
3. If desired, enter the block within the file from which you want Adams
View to take the data. The block must be specifically named in the file.
4. Set the channel from which to take the data. This option is for use with
time response data in RPC III files only. See Adams Durability online help.
Result set components 1. Set the pull-down menu to Result Set Component.
2. Select the result set components to be used for the x and y values.
Numerical input 1. Set the pull-down menu to Numerical.
2. Enter the x, y, and, optionally, z values in the text boxes. Note the
following:
• Specify at least four x and y values. The maximum number of x values,
n, depends on whether you specify a single curve or a family of curves.
• Values must be constants; Adams Solver does not allow expressions.
• Values must be in increasing order:
• x1 < x2 < x3, and so on.
Modifying Splines
The method you use to modify a spline (Spline Editor or general method) depends on the input to the spline.
Numerical values or Result set components - If the input for the spline data points was numerical
values or result set components, then when you select to modify the spline, Adams View displays the
Spline Editor because it provides the most convenient method for directly editing values.
File - If the method of input for the spline data points was a file, Adams View displays the Data
Element Modify Spline dialog box, for you to change the file or interpolation method using the general
method.
Note that because you do not always modify splines using the same method that you used to create them,
you cannot change the input to the spline data points without first deleting the spline and making it again.
For example, if you created a spline using the result set component TIME as the x values, and you want to
change the spline to reference the result set component that defines the force on a part, you would have to
delete the spline and create it again referencing the new component. In addition, if you defined spline data
points using direct numerical values and you want to instead reference a file, you must delete the spline and
make it again using the general method.
267
Data Elements
To modify a spline:
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the Spline tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Spline, and then select
Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select a data element spline to modify.
The Spline Editor or Data Element Modify dialog box appears.
3. Follow the instructions in Creating Splines Using the Spline Editor or Creating Splines Using the General Method,
as appropriate.
Using this table, you can determine the force when deflection equals -0.33, and the force when deflection
equals -0.17. You cannot, however, determine the force when the deflection is -0.25. To determine the force
at any deflection value, Adams View creates a continuous function that relates deflection and force. The
continuous approximation is then used to evaluate the value of the spring force at a deflection of -0.25. If you
input two sets of values (x and y) using a spline data element, you can define the curve that the data represents.
You would then use the spline data element in a function or subroutine that uses cubic spline functions to fit
a curve to the values. The curve allows Adams View to interpolate a value of y for any value of x.
Procedure
Briefly, the steps that you’d perform to use the spline data element to define the force deflections are:
1. Create the spline using the spline editor or the general method.
2. Build a simple nonlinear spring-damper, and then modify it to use the spline. To use the spline in the
spring-damper definition, under Stiffness and Damping in the Spring-Damper Modify dialog box,
change the stiffness coefficient to Spline: F= f(defo). Adams View builds a function expression for
you, using AKISPL and modeled spring length as free length.
Note: You can also use a single- or multi-component force to define the force deflections. In
this case, you would select Custom as you create the force, and then modify the force
by entering a function expression, such as:
-akispl(dm(.model_1.PART_1.MAR_4,.model_1.ground.MAR_2)
- 200.0, 0.0, .model_1.SPLINE_1)
You can use the Function Builder for assistance in building the expression
a cubic polynomial to interpolate between points. If the spline data has two independent variables (3D
spline), Adams View first uses a cubic interpolation method to interpolate between points of the first
independent variable and then uses a linear method to interpolate between curves of the second independent
variable.
So, to perform the linear interpolation on a 2D spline, the workaround is to convert it into 3D spline.
The suggestion here is to edit the data such that the ‘Z’ which is the second independent variable will have
all the values of first independent variable, ‘X’. The ‘Y’ will represent the dependent data in the following
form: Y1-1,Y2-1,Y3-1 and so on.
To use this 3D spline, such that the function uses only second independent data, you should keep the first
independent variable as zero; for example:
FUNCTION = AKISPL(0,time,SPLINE_1, 0)
An example of linear interpolation is as follows:
2D spline data:
0 0
1 75
1.5 60
2 120
3 130
3D spline data of the above values in spline editor will looks like as follows:
270 Adams View
Data Elements
Matrices
When creating or modifying a data element matrix, you can specify its values:
Using Full Format
Using Sparse Format
Using Result Set Components
Using Data Files
Note that the specifications for the format of the data file are case-sensitive. Uppercase letters and a lowercase
x must be used to indicate MATRIXx.
The second record contains only an integer n, right-justified within the first five spaces (the I5 FORTRAN
format). It tells how many matrices are contained in the file. The next several records (one or more) contain
the alphanumeric names (eight characters or less) of all of the matrices in the file. The names are listed
sequentially, four to a line, in eight-character fields separated by ten blanks. That is, the FORTRAN format
for the records containing the matrix names is A8, 10X, A8, 10X, A8, 10X, A8.
Sets of contiguous records define each matrix. Without any intervening blank lines, the blocks of records
begin immediately after the last line of matrix names. The first record in each block contains the name of the
matrix in the first eight characters of the line. The code searches through the file until it finds the block of
records corresponding to the name of the matrix element.
The first record of the block contains the type of matrix (either FULL or SPARSE ) within the second eight
spaces on the record. If the type is FULL, the next eight spaces (from 17 through 24) contain the string
CORDER or RORDER to indicate that the values are listed by column or by row, respectively. Otherwise,
if the type is SPARSE, the space is left blank. Learn about Matrix Format Types.
The numerical values specified on the first record of the block include the:
Number of rows M in the matrix.
Number of columns N.
Total number of entries to be assigned values from the file.
If the matrix type is SPARSE, then the total number of entries must be less than or equal to (generally much
less than) M x N. If the matrix is FULL, the total number must be equal to M x N.
For a matrix in the ADAMSMAT format, the values for M, N, and the total number of entries must
be right justified in the fields 25 to 29, 30 to 34, and 35 to 39, respectively.
For a matrix in the ADAMSMAT2 format, the values for M, N, and the total number of entries
must be separated by spaces.
The final entry on the first line of the block of records defining each matrix is the format specification for the
records containing the values of the matrix. Beginning in column 40, 41 spaces are allowed for the character
string containing the FORTRAN format specification, which must include delimiting parentheses. The lines
of data begin on the next record and continue with successive records until the code has read into storage
either M x N values if the matrix is full or the total number specified if the matrix is sparse.
273
Data Elements
For a full matrix, the code simply reads matrix entries sequentially from the file. If the matrix is sparse,
organize the data in triplets; Adams View reads the row and column indexes followed by the corresponding
entry in the matrix. One triplet follows another until Adams View has read the specified total number of
values into the storage arrays.
If the file contains another matrix, the block of records defining its structure and containing its values must
follow immediately after the last line of data for the previous matrix.
Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams View model if multiple matrices
are to be read from the same file.
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the Matrix tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Matrix, and then select
either New or Modify.
278 Adams View
Data Elements
2. If you selected:
• New, the Create Matrix dialog box appears, as shown in Create/Modify Matrix Dialog Box, and you
should continue with Step 3.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element matrix to modify. The Create/Modify
Matrix dialog box appears.
3. In the Matrix Name text box, accept the default name or enter a new name.
4. Select the units that you want assigned for values in your matrix. Select no_units if you do not want
units associated with the values. If you set the units for your matrix values, Adams View automatically
performs any necessary unit conversions if you ever change your modeling units.
5. Select Full Matrix to enter all the values for the M x N array or enter names of Result set components.
6. Select either of the following:
• To specify that matrix values are arranged in order by columns, select Enter Input Ordered by
Columns.
• To specify that matrix values are arranged in order by rows, select Enter Input Ordered by Rows.
7. Select User Entered Numbers to enter the values yourself.
8. In the Row Count and Column Count text boxes, enter the number of rows and columns in the
matrix.
9. In the Values text box, enter the values in the matrix in either row or column order depending on the
order you selected in Step 6. You can separate the values using a comma or by pressing Enter after each
value.
10. Select OK.
1.364 0.000
0.000 0.000
– 3.546 4.008
0.000 0.7999
enter the following in the text boxes:
Row Count - 4
Column Count - 2
Values - 1.364, 0.000, 0.000, 0.000, -3.546, 4.008, 0.000, 0.7999
Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams View model if multiple matrices
are to be read from the same file.
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the Matrix tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Matrix, and then select
either New or Modify.
2. If you selected:
• New, the Create Matrix dialog box appears, as shown in Create/Modify Matrix dialog box, and you
should continue with Step 3.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element matrix to modify. The Create/Modify
Matrix dialog box appears.
3. In the Matrix Name text box, accept the default name or enter a new name.
4. Select the units that you want assigned for values in your matrix. Select no_units if you do not want
units associated with the values. If you set the units for your matrix values, Adams View automatically
performs any necessary unit conversions if you ever change your modeling units.
5. Select Sparse Matrix to enter the row position, column position, and value for only nonzero values.
6. Enter the following:
• Row Index - Enter the row numbers, separated by commas, in your matrix containing nonzero
values. Enter the row number each time there is a value in the row.
• Column Index - Enter the column numbers, separated by commas, containing nonzero values.
Enter the column number each time there is a value in the column.
• Values - Enter the nonzero values in your matrix starting with the first column. Separate each
value with a comma.
7. Select OK.
Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams View model if multiple matrices
are to be read from the same file.
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the Matrix tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Matrix, and then select
either New or Modify.
2. If you selected:
• New, the Create Matrix dialog box appears, as shown in Create/Modify Matrix dialog box, and you
should continue with Step 3.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element matrix to modify. The Create/Modify
Matrix dialog box appears.
3. In the Matrix Name text box, accept the default name or enter a new name.
4. Select the units that you want assigned for values in your matrix. Select no_units if you do not want
units associated with the values. If you set the units for your matrix values, Adams View automatically
performs any necessary unit conversions if you ever change your modeling units.
5. Select either of the following:
• To specify that matrix values are arranged in order by columns, select Enter Input Ordered by
Columns.
• To specify that matrix values are arranged in order by rows, select Enter Input Ordered by Rows.
6. To obtain the values from the results of a Simulation, select Result Set Component.
7. In the Result Set Component Names text box, enter the name or names of the components.
8. Select OK.
Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams View model if multiple matrices
are to be read from the same file
281
Data Elements
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the Matrix tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Matrix, and then select
either New or Modify.
2. If you selected:
• New, the Create Matrix dialog box appears, as shown in Create/Modify Matrix dialog box, and you
should continue with Step 3.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element matrix to modify. The Create/Modify
Matrix dialog box appears.
3. In the Matrix Name text box, accept the default name or enter a new name.
4. Select the units that you want assigned for values in your matrix. Select no_units if you do not want
units associated with the values. If you set the units for your matrix values, Adams View automatically
performs any necessary unit conversions if you ever change your modeling units.
5. Select From a File.
6. Enter the name of the file containing the matrix values and the name of the matrix in the file. The
name of the matrix is necessary even if the file contains only one matrix. You will need to create
additional matrices to read other matrices from the same file.
7. Select OK.
Defining FE Model Data for Output
You can also set up Adams View to produce data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains
for input to subsequent finite-element or fatigue-life analysis for use in third-party products. You use the
Settings → Solver → Output → More → Durability (see Solver Settings - Output dialog box help) command
to specify the type of file to produce. Adams View will not output to any files unless you specify the format.
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the FEMdata tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to FEMdata, and then select
either New or Modify.
The Create FEMDATA dialog box appears.
2. In the Name text box, enter the name of the FEMDATA element in the modeling database to create
or modify.
3. Set Type to the information you want to output, and then enter the values in the dialog box as
explained in the FEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table, depending on the type of format.
282 Adams View
Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit
4. In the File text box, enter the output file name for the FEM data. You can specify an existing
directory, root name, and/or extension. By default, the file name will be composed of the Adams run
ID and body ID according to the type of data and file format that you specified in the Solver →
Settings → Output → More → Durability Files.
5. Specify the start and end times for outputting the data:
• From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is the start of the
simulation.
• To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search of a peak load. The default
is to output to the end of the simulation.
6. Select OK.
Step 3 - Create Other Control and Filter Blocks and Connect Them
Once you have created the input blocks, you can then create controls blocks and specify how they
interconnect with each other and input functions. The input to a control or filter block must be given as the
name of another existing control block or input block. The output of controls blocks can be referenced in
function expressions. Each control block maintains a state variable value. The name of the Adams state
variable can be found using the Database Navigator for a PID block (see Picture of Database Navigator with
PID Block). This value is then referenced in elements, such as forces, by simply typing in the element name
as the function expression. See Picture of referencing element.
284 Adams View
Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit
Second-Order Filter
The second-order filter block is used to create a second-order filter by specifying the undamped natural
frequency and the damping ratio. You can parametrize the undamped natural frequency or damping ratio
constant with an Adams View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the frequency or
damping ratio of the associated block.
285
Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit
PID Controller
The PID controller is used to create a general proportional-integral-derivative control block. Two inputs are
necessary for this block: the proportional input and the derivative input. You must specify the derivative state
for input to this block that is consistent with the proportional state. For example, if the proportional input
is the measured x position of a part, the derivative input should be the linear velocity in the x direction.
This block automatically creates the integrated state of the proportional input for use as the integrated input.
You can parameterize the P, I, and D gains of this block with Adams View real design variables to quickly
study the effect of changing control gains.
Switch
The switch is a convenient means to "zero" the signal into any block. Connect the switch at a point in the
feedback loop to quickly see the change from open loop control to closed loop control. The switch takes any
control block as its input.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, select Controls Toolkit.
The Create/Modify Standard Controls Block dialog box appears.
2. Select an icon representing the type of block that you want to create. The choices in the Create
Controls Block dialog box change to those for creating the selected control block. Learn about the
different types of blocks.
3. Enter the block name, all required inputs, and all required parameters. Inputs to controls blocks are
required to be existing controls blocks, with the exception of the input function block. Learn about
the options for each control block:
• Input-Signal Function Block
• Summing Junction Block
• Gain Block
• Integrator Block
• Low-Pass Filter Block
• Lead-Lag Filter Block
• User-Defined Transfer Function Block
• Second-Order Filter Block
• PID Controller
286 Adams View
Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit
• Switch Block
4. Select OK.
where:
x is the linearized system state array.
287
Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit
Adams Linear uses plant inputs and outputs to identify which variables to consider system inputs and outputs
when generating state matrices. A control design program can use these matrices to design a controller for the
system. The resulting controller can then be included in the model using variables, arrays, transfer functions,
linear state equations, or general state equations. See the LINEAR command in the Adams Solver online help.
not explicitly specified. If too many states are specified, Adams Solver identifies and discards the redundant
states.
Plant states are a list of variables. The variables contain expressions that specify the states that are to be used
in linearizing the system. Plant state objects are defined in the model. The LINEAR command can instruct
Adams Solver (C++) to use a specific plant state object for generating the linear model. A model can contain
any number of plant state objects. You can use any one of them with the LINEAR command.
For more information, see the Adams Solver (C++) LINEAR command.
For theoretical details, see the white paper in Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016460.
For an example of using PSTATE, see Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016414.
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the Plant State tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements → Plant → Plant State, and then
select New.
2. Enter the name you want assigned to the plant state.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the plant state.
4. In the Comments text box, add or change any comments about the plant state to help you manage
and identify the plant state.
5. Enter the list of variables. To help you create a variable for a plant state object, select Create State
Variable for Plant State. You can set values for the state variables in the Create State Variable for Plant
State dialog box.
6. Select OK.
2. In the Interactive Simulation palette, right-click the Compute Linear Modes tool , and then
select the Compute Linear Modes with Pstate tool .
Select Tool
Main Menu -> Selection Strip
Selects modeling object such as parts or forces. Selecting the object deselects any currently selected object. If
you select a rigid body, Adams View selects the entire body including its geometry.
2. Position the cursor on the screen where you want a corner of the selection box and drag the mouse to
draw a rectangle that encloses or touches the objects that you want to select.
3. Release the mouse button.
The selected objects appear with a thicker line width. If the object is a rigid body, its hotpoints and
the object position handle appear on the body so that you can rotate and position the body’s
geometry.
290 Adams View
Selecting Objects
The current objects in the select list appear in the Select List Manager window.
To add or remove multiple objects to and from the select list based on search criteria:
1. In the Name Filter text box, enter the name of the objects that you want to add to or remove from
the select list. Type any wildcards that you want included.
2. Set Type Filter to the type of object or objects that you want to add or remove. To display all the
different object types, select Browse.
3. In the Scope text box, limit the scope of objects to be added or removed to only objects belonging to
a certain object by entering the name of the parent object.
4. Select Add or Remove.
Deselecting Objects
To deselect objects:
From the Edit menu, select Deselect All.
Tip: Ctrl + D.
Select Tool
Main toolbox -> Select tool
Selects modeling objec such as parts or forces. Selecting the object deselects any currently selected object. If
you select a rigid body, Adams View selects the entire body including its geometry.
To add or remove multiple objects to and from the select list based on search criteria:
1. In the Name Filter text box, enter the name of the objects that you want to add to or remove from
the select list. Type any wildcards that you want included.
2. Set Type Filter to the type of object or objects that you want to add or remove. To display all the
different object types, select Browse.
3. In the Scope text box, limit the scope of objects to be added or removed to only objects belonging to
a certain object by entering the name of the parent object.
4. Select Add or Remove.
Deselecting Objects
To deselect objects:
From the Edit menu, select Deselect All.
Tip: Ctrl + D.
Display Options
Displaying the Table Editor
Setting Types of Objects Displayed in the Table Editor
Sorting Objects in the Table Editor
MARKER_[23]*
5. Select the categories of information or set the type of object that you want displayed and select OK.
The following figure shows an example of displaying information about markers. In the example, you
first select Markers from the bottom of the Table Editor. When the Markers Table Editor Filters
dialog box appears, you set the types of information to display about markers. The result in the Table
Editor is a listing of six markers.
Note: When you sort the Table Editor, Adams View sets the values displayed in cells back to
those stored in the Modeling database. Therefore, you lose any changes that you made
to cells and did not apply to your modeling database
To copy an object:
1. Select the row containing the object you want to copy.
2. Right-click a cell in a row that is not selected. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Copy
Object.
Adams View creates a duplicate of the object. It places the object in the last row of the Table Editor.
Note: The operations you perform with the Table Editor are not stored in your Modeling
database until you apply them. Learn Applying Changes in the Table Editor.
Note: The operations you perform with the Table Editor are not stored in your Modeling
database until you apply them. Learn Applying Changes in the Table Editor.
300 Adams View
Editing Objects Using the Table Editor
To delete an object:
1. Select the row containing the object you want to delete.
2. Right-click a cell in the row. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Delete Object.
Adams View deletes the object from the Table Editor.
Note: The operations you perform with the Table Editor are not stored in your Modeling
database until you apply them. Learn Applying Changes in the Table Editor.
Note: The operations you perform with the Table Editor are not stored in your modeling
database until you apply them. Learn Applying Changes in the Table Editor.
To quickly enter an object's full name and information field into the input box:
1. Place the cursor in the input box where you want the object name to be inserted.
2. Select the Object Name & Field tool f(x) on the Table Editor.
3. Select any cell in the row containing the object whose name you want to input.
Adams View inserts the object's full name and field information into the cell.
For more information on building functions, see the Adams View Function Builder online help. For
information on parameterizing your model, see Improving Your Model Designs.
4. Select the Cell Variable tool to create a variable representing the current contents of the cells.
Adams View updates the cells with the information in the input box.
Basics 303
Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes
To apply changes:
From the Table Editor, select Apply.
Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object. Learn about Defining a Zoom Area.
Tip: Double-click the object to display its modify dialog box or select the object and then
enter Ctrl + e.
Copying Objects
You can copy any selected objects within the same model. Adams View creates an identical copy of the
selected object. Adams View assigns a default name to the duplicated object using the copied object name as
the base name and appending _2 to the name. For example, if Adams View copies a rigid body called
PART_1, it assigns the new object the name PART_1_2.
Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object.
Deleting Objects
You can delete any object that you created in the current modeling database, including deleting a model.
Learn about Deleting a Model.
306 Adams View
Working with Objects
You can delete any object that has a graphical representation on the screen, such as a rigid body or link, by
selecting them first and then deleting them. You can also select objects that do not have graphical
representations by searching for them through the Database Navigator and then deleting them.
Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object.
4. To rename another object, select the More button to display the Database Navigator.
5. Select OK.
Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object.
2. In the Comment Text section of the dialog box, enter the comments that you want associated with
the object.
3. Select Time or Date to add the time and date when you created the comments.
4. Select OK.
Learn about:
About activation status
Activating and deactivating objects
To change the activation status of an object on the screen and its children:
1. Right-click the object you want to activate or deactivate.
311
Working with Objects
Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object.
or
312 Adams View
Working with Objects
Note: The pull-down menu Expand Groups is only present to provide backward
compatibility. We recommend that you not use it.
2. Enter a name for the group of objects. Adams View assigns a default name for you.
3. Add any comments about the group that you want to enter to help you manage and identify the
group.
4. Specify the objects to be included in the group as explained in the table below.
You can select an object on the screen or browse for an object in the Database
Navigator. If you select objects to group using the shortcut menu, Adams View
enters commas between the objects.
5. Specify whether or not the group of objects is active during a simulation. You can enter an expression
that evaluates to 0 (not active) or 1 (active) or enter 1 or 0. If you do not specify a value, Adams View
uses the activation status you set using the Activate and Deactivate commands as explained in
Activating and Deactivating Objects.
6. Select OK.
To ungroup objects:
1. From the Model Browser, select Groups tap. Right click under the Groups and select Delete.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, select Ungroup.
The Delete Group dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name of the group of objects you want to ungroup.
3. Select OK.
313
Working with Objects
Tip: Right-click the object on the screen, point to the name of the object, and then select
Appearance.
7. Set Color Scope to the color you want used for the objects and set which elements of the objects
should be affected by the selected color. You can select:
• Polygon Fill - Sets the color of those areas of a graphic that can be shaded (they include sides of
a cylinders, frustums, boxes, and so on).
• Edge - Sets the color of the lines making up the edges of the facets of a graphic that can be shaded.
• Outline - Sets the color of the lines that make up those graphics that cannot be shaded or filled
like the coil of a spring damper.
• All - Sets the selected color for all elements of an object.
To browse for a color in the Database Navigator or create a new color, right-click the Color text box,
and select Browse or Create.
8. Set the Render choices to:
• Filled - Adds shading to a solid fill to give a more realistic appearance. It does not show edges. The
light source is from the upper left.
• Wireframe - Shows only the edges of objects so that you can see through the objects. Helps you
select points and edges.
9. Set how transparent the object or objects are. The higher the value, the more transparent the object
is, allowing other objects to show through. The lower the value, the more opaque the object is,
covering other objects.
Tip: Setting the transparency of objects can have a negative impact on graphical
performance if you are using a graphics card without hardware acceleration for
OpenGL. Instead of setting an object’s transparency, consider setting the object’s render
mode to wireframe.
10. In the Icon Size text box, enter the size you want for the icons or, in the Icon Scale text box, enter
the amount by which you want to scale the icons. The scale factor is relative to the current size set. A
scale factor of 1 keeps the icons the same size. A scale factor less than 1 reduces the size of the icons
and a scale factor greater than 1 increases the size of the icons. Note that these changes take precedence
over the size you specify globally for the modeling database as explained in Setting Screen Icon Display.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Materials, and then select either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a material type to modify, and then select
OK.
The Create/Modify Material dialog box appears.
3. Change the default name assigned to the new material type, if desired.
4. Enter the values for Young’s Modulus, Poisson’s Ratio, and mass density.
5. Select the Comments tool on the dialog box and enter any comments you want associated with
the material type. Learn about Comments.
6. Select OK.
• To modify a color, set Color to the the color that you want to modify. You can also select
Background to edit the color of the view window background. The selected color appears in the
Old color box.
• To create a new color, select New Color. The Create New Color dialog box appears. Enter the name
of the color, and then select OK.
3. Select Color Picker, and then select a color.
The selected color appears in the New color box.
4. Select OK.
Tip: You can define a custom color by clicking the closest basic color in the Basic Color palette and
then modifying it.
Tip: There are sixteen Custom Color squares that you can fill with colors that you want to use
throughout the current session of Adams View. To store a custom color, select a Custom Color
square, define a color, and then select Add to Custom Colors. The colors are only available for
the current session of Adams View.
318 Adams View
Measuring Distance Between Positions
• Model Name if you want to calculate the distance based on the current configuration of a model.
• Analysis Name if you’d like to calculate the distance based on a configuration, frame, or Simulation
time from a particular simulation.
5. The elements in the dialog box change depending on your selection.
6. Enter the options in the dialog box as explained in the table below and select OK. As you set options,
remember that you can use the shortcut menu that appears when you hold down the right mouse
button in a text box to select an object from the screen or a list.
• All to calculate the aggregate mass of all the bodies in your model.
3. If you selected to calculate the aggregate mass of only a selected set of parts, select Select. A list of parts
in your model appears. Select the desired parts. Tips To select objects:.
4. In the Relative to text box, if desired, enter another coordinate system, with respect to which you'd
like calculations to be relative. By default the calculations are relative to the global coordinate system.
5. Set Info Window to one of the following:
• Replace to replace existing information.
• Append to append existing information.
• None
6. Select how you want the output displayed. You can display it in the information window and to a file.
7. If you want to save the results to a file, in the File Name text box, enter the name of the file in which
you want to save the information. If you want the information written to a directory other than the
one from which you are running Adams View, enter the path.
8. Select OK.
Method 2: From the Model Browser
1. Select multiple objects from Model Browser
3. In the New Ground text box, enter a new or existing part to be ground.
4. Select OK.
322 Adams View
Defining a New Ground Part
Moving Objects
Using Object Position Handle
The Object position handle is a powerful tool for translating and rotating various objects in your model.
Tip: To gain more precise control on the rotation angles, move the mouse away from the
center of the position handle as you rotate the object. The farther you move the mouse
away from the position handle, the smaller Adams View makes the angles of rotation.
Tip: You can also locate the global position handle by entering precise locations as explained
in Exact Position Tool - Moving Objects Exactly. If other objects are also selected, Adams View
moves them to positions relative to the new position of the global position handle.
To reset the global position handle to the default location for the selected object:
Select Reset from the Object Handle Settings dialog box.
Tip: You can also delete the global position handle just as you would any object as explained
in Deleting Objects.
Tip: To gain more precise control on the rotation angles, move the mouse away from the
center of the position handle as you rotate the object. The farther you move the mouse
away from the position handle, the smaller Adams View makes the angles of rotation.
Tip: You can also locate the global position handle by entering precise locations as explained
in Exact Position Tool - Moving Objects Exactly. If other objects are also selected, Adams View
moves them to positions relative to the new position of the global position handle.
To reset the global position handle to the default location for the selected object:
Select Reset from the Object Handle Settings dialog box.
328 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools
Tip: You can also delete the global position handle just as you would any object as explained
in Deleting Objects.
You can position an object incrementally using the By Increments tool . It lets you specify the angle
of rotation or the translational distance. The next two sections explain how to translate and rotate objects by
increments:
Rotating Object by Increments
Translating Object by Increments
2. From the Object Manipulation Strip, select the By Increments tool . The settings in the
3. In the Distance text box, set the amount by which you want to incrementally translate the object.
4. Select the appropriate translation arrows to translate the object along the x- or y-axis of the view
coordinate system. Adams View translates the object each time you select an arrow.
If more than one object is selected or you’ve created a global position handle, Adams View moves the first
object you selected or the handle to the specified location and moves all other selected objects to positions
relative to the first selected object or the handle.
2. From the Main Menu → Object Manipulation Strip → Exact Position tool . The settings
As you translate the objects, you can rotate an object that you select during the translation operation or
translate all objects currently selected. In addition, you can translate a copy of the selected objects instead of
the actual objects.
1. From the Main Menu → Object Manipulation Strip, select the Point-to-Point tool .
4. Select an axis or define the vector along which to translate the object by selecting two points on the
screen.
1. From the Object Manipulation Strip, select the Align & Rotate tool .
Note: Adams View rotates the object so that the first axis points toward the first object,
and the second axis points as closely as possible towards the second object.
Depending on the locations that you selected, it may not be possible for both axes to pass
through the locations. Adams View orients the object so that the first axis passes through
the first location, and the plane defined by the two axes passes through the second
location. This means that the second axis comes as close as possible to the second
location, but may not pass through it.
The objects must be in shaded render mode to mate their faces. See Rendering mode.
1. From the Object Manipulation Strip, select the Mate Faces tool .
Note: Four of the tools in the Move tool stack are not explained here because they are shortcuts to
other operations or apply more to parameterization. The tools are:
You can position an object incrementally using the By Increments tool . It lets you specify the angle of
rotation or the translational distance. The next two sections explain how to translate and rotate objects by
increments:
Rotating Object by Increments
Translating Object by Increments
5. Select the appropriate rotation arrows to rotate the object. Adams View rotates the object each time
you select an arrow.
2. From the Move Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select the By Increments tool . The settings in
the Main toolbox container change as shown below
.
3. In the Distance text box, set the amount by which you want to incrementally translate the object.
4. Select the appropriate translation arrows to translate the object along the x- or y-axis of the view
coordinate system. Adams View translates the object each time you select an arrow.
If more than one object is selected or you’ve created a global position handle, Adams View moves the first
object you selected or the handle to the specified location and moves all other selected objects to positions
relative to the first selected object or the handle.
2. From the Move Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select the Exact Position tool . The settings
in the Main toolbox change as shown below.
340 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools (Classic Interface)
As you translate the objects, you can rotate an object that you select during the translation operation or
translate all objects currently selected. In addition, you can translate a copy of the selected objects instead of
the actual objects.
1. From the Move Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select the Point-to-Point tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• If desired, select Selected to translate the currently selected objects.
• If desired, select Copy to translate a copy of the selected object or objects.
• Select From To from the pull-down menu.
3. If you did not choose Selected in the settings container, select the object that you want to translate.
4. Select the first point on the screen from which to translate the object or objects.
5. Select the second point on the screen to which to translate the object.
Align & Rotate Tool - Rotating Objects About or Along Grid or Features
Main toolbox -> Move tool stack -> Align & Rotate Tool
Rotates objects about an axis or aligns them with the axes of other objects. You can set the alignment in the
following ways:
About - Rotates an object about the axis of another object.
Align - Rotates an object about its axis to align it with another object.
Align Same As - Aligns an object to the orientation of another object.
Align One Axis - Orients an axis of an object to be in the same direction as the axis of another
object. This is useful if the axis of a joint or force is defined by a marker in your model.
Align Two Axes - Orients an object so it is the same direction as the axis of another object and
rotates the object about that axis to place a second axis in the plane defined by the two directions.
You can rotate an object that you select during the rotate operation or rotate all objects currently selected. In
addition, you can rotate a copy of the selected objects instead of the actual objects.
Note: Adams View rotates the object so that the first axis points toward the first
object, and the second axis points as closely as possible towards the second
object.
Depending on the locations that you selected, it may not be possible for both axes to pass
through the locations. Adams View orients the object so that the first axis passes through
the first location, and the plane defined by the two axes passes through the second
location. This means that the second axis comes as close as possible to the second
location, but may not pass through it.
3. If you do not enter a reference coordinate system, Adams View moves the objects about the default
coordinate system.
4. Then, either:
• If you know the destination coordinates of the objects you are moving, enter the destination
coordinates into the C1 through C3 (for translation) and A1 through A3 (for rotation) text boxes,
and then select OK.
• Use the Rotate and Translate dials to move the objects by incremental values.
From the Object Manipulation Strip, select the Precision Move tool .
If you specify the Relative to the option for rotations, objects rotate in place (their locations do not
change) and their rotations are with respect to the coordinate system specified in the Relative to the
text box.
If you specify the About the option for rotations, the objects rotate about the origin of the
coordinate system specified (their locations change) and the rotations are with respect to the
coordinate system specified in the About the text box.
Translations are with respect to the coordinate system defined as either Relative to the or the About
the.
Examples
Example 1
Rotate a marker (MAR2) 180 degrees relative to the y axis of the coordinate system that MAR1 defines:
1. Set Relocate the to marker, and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set Relative to the, and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. Set the increment value to 180.
4. Click the y cube on the Rotate dial
.
Example 2
Rotate a marker (MAR2) 45 degrees about the y axis of MAR1:
1. Set Relocate the to marker , and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set About the , and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. Set the increment value to 45.
4. Click the y cube on the Rotate dial.
348 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box
4. Select OK.
Example
Move a marker (MAR2) to (0, -4, -4) in another marker's (MAR1) coordinate system.
1. Set Relocate the to marker , and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set Relative to the , and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. In the C1 through C3 text boxes, enter:
• C1: 0
• C2: -40
• C3: -40
4. Select OK.
View - Adams View defined view, such as front, right, or left. Use the Database Navigator to select the
name of the view.
Entity - Any entity, including those that are not on the screen. Entities also include the working grid
and gravity.
Screen - The plane of the screen. When you select to move objects relative to the screen, the
Precision Move dialog box changes. Learn about Translating and Rotating Objects Using Screen Coordinates.
You can specify two options for the reference coordinate system: Relative to the or About the:
If you specify the Relative to the option for rotations, objects rotate in place (their locations do not
change) and their rotations are with respect to the coordinate system specified in the Relative to the
text box.
If you specify the About the option for rotations, the objects rotate about the origin of the
coordinate system specified (their locations change) and the rotations are with respect to the
coordinate system specified in the About the text box.
Translations are with respect to the coordinate system defined as either Relative to the or the About
the.
Examples
Example 1
Rotate a marker (MAR2) 180 degrees relative to the y axis of the coordinate system that MAR1 defines:
1. Set Relocate the to marker, and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set Relative to the, and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. Set the increment value to 180.
4. Click the y cube on the Rotate dial
354 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box (Classic Interface)
Example 2
Rotate a marker (MAR2) 45 degrees about the y axis of MAR1:
1. Set Relocate the to marker , and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set About the , and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. Set the increment value to 45.
4. Click the y cube on the Rotate dial.
For example, if you want to ensure that two markers, which you want to connect using an inplane joint, are
in the same plane, you can set one marker as the object to be moved and the other object as the relative to
object. You can then view the rotation coordinates of the first marker to ensure that they are (0, 0, 0).
Example
Move a marker (MAR2) to (0, -4, -4) in another marker's (MAR1) coordinate system.
1. Set Relocate the to marker , and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set Relative to the , and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. In the C1 through C3 text boxes, enter:
• C1: 0
• C2: -40
• C3: -40
4. Select OK.
356 Adams View
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box (Classic Interface)
Refer to the help on creating a geometry to see where Adams View places hotpoints on the different types of
geometry.
Note: To modify a point, you use the Table Editor because a point only consists of a location. In
addition, for lines, polylines, extrusions, and revolutions, you can use the Location Table that
lets you edit the locations of profile points. For more information, see Editing Locations Using the
Location Table.
Note: You can also use the Info command to view the geometry that belongs to a part. Learn about
Viewing Model Topology Map Through Information Window.
To enter comments for extrusions, revolutions, lines, and polylines, select the Comments tool
at the bottom of the dialog box.
5. Enter the values for the geometry, and then select OK. To get help with entering the values, press F1
when the cursor is in the dialog box.
From a polyline, extrusion, spline, or revolution modify dialog box, select the More button .
To resize a column:
1. Point to the right border of the column heading that you want to resize. The cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow.
2. Drag the cursor until the column is the desired size.
3. Release the mouse button.
To delete a row:
1. Select the row or rows you want to delete.
2. Select Delete.
Note: Adams View reads the location information starting at the first line that has numerical
information. If there are headers in the file, Adams View reads the header information when
you first read in the file and changes the headers in the Location table accordingly. It resets the
headers to the default headers (X, Y, and Z), however, the next time you open the Location
table.
Note: You can also modify part properties using the Table Editor. Learn about Editing Objects Using the
Table Editor
To select a material type from the Database Navigator or create a new material type,
right-click the text box, and then select the appropriate command. Learn about Setting
Up Material Types.
Geometry and In the Density text box, enter the density of the part. Adams View uses the part's
Density density and the volume of the geometry to calculate its mass and inertia.
User Input Mass - In the Mass text box, enter the mass of the part.
Center-of-mass marker - In the Center of Mass Marker text box, enter the marker
that is to be used to define the center-of-mass (CM) for the part.
Inertia marker - In the Inertia Reference Marker text box, specify the marker that
defines the axes for the inertia properties. If you do not enter an inertia marker,
Adams View uses the part CM marker for inertia properties.
The inertia matrix is a symmetrical, positive-definite matrix. You compute the individual terms in the matrix
as follows:
In the above formula, x, y, and z are the components of the displacement of an infinitesimal mass particle of
mass dm, measured from the origin of the inertia marker in the coordinate system of the inertia marker. The
integral is performed over the entire mass of the body. If you do not specify the inertia marker, Adams View
uses the CM marker. In that case, you compute these quantities about the origin of the CM marker in the
coordinate system of the CM marker.
Note: Adams View defines Ixy, Ixz, and Iyz as positive integrals, as shown. Some references define
these terms as the negative of these integrals. You should be sure to compute these values as
shown above.
Angular velocity defines the time rate of change of a part's rotational position with respect to the
CM marker of the part or another marker in your model. You can specify angular velocity for each
vector component of the marker.
If you specify initial velocities, Adams View uses them as the initial velocity of the part during initial
conditions simulations regardless of any other forces acting on the part. You can also leave some or all of the
velocities unset. Leaving a velocity unset lets Adams View calculate the velocity of the part during an assemble
operation depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the part. Note that it is not the same as
setting the initial velocity to zero. Setting an initial velocity to zero means that the part will not be moving in
the specified direction when the simulation starts regardless of any forces and constraints acting upon it.
Location fixes any of the current translational coordinates (x, y, or z) of the part as the initial
location.
Orientation fixes any of the current body-fixed 313 rotational coordinates (psi, theta, or phi angles) as the
initial orientation. These rotation angles are those associated with a body-fixed 313 rotation
sequence regardless of which sequence you set as the default for the modeling database. (Learn about
Rotation Sequences.)
If Adams Solver has to alter part positions to obtain consistent initial conditions during an initial conditions
simulation, it does not vary the coordinates you specify, unless it must vary them to satisfy the initial
conditions you specify for a joint or a motion.
If you fix the initial positions of too many parts, the initial conditions simulation can fail. Use initial positions
sparingly.
Types of Simulations
You can run five types of Simulations in Adams View:
Dynamic simulation
Kinematic simulation
Static equilibrium
Initial conditions simulation
Linear simulation
358 Adams View
Simulation Basics
Note that you may not always help the solution when you change the default parameters for convergence
tolerance, maximum number of iterations, and pattern for updating the Jacobian. For example, if you loosen
the convergence tolerance, you can allow too much error to build up in your solution over time and your
overall solution accuracy could suffer.
If you increase the number of iterations that Adams Solver attempts during each corrector phase, you might
be making the solution less efficient. Often, when Adams Solver cannot get the corrector to converge using
the default number of iterations, it is better to let the solution step back in time and predict forward using a
smaller time step rather than attempt more corrector iterations.
For more information on the effects of making these changes and tips for controlling the dynamic solution,
see the INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams Solver online help.
Comparison of Integrators
The equation
formulation: Has the following characteristics:
I3 Ensures that the solution satisfies all constraints.
Does not ensure that the the velocities and accelerations calculated satisfy all first-
and second-time derivatives.
Monitors integration error only in system displacements, not in velocities.
Is fast.
The Jacobian matrix can become ill-conditioned at small step sizes.
SI2 Takes into account constraint derivatives when solving for equations of motion.
This process enables the GSTIFF integrator to monitor the integration error of
velocity variables, and, therefore, renders highly accurate simulations.
Jacobian matrix remains stable at small step sizes, which in turn increases the
stability and robustness of the corrector at small step sizes.
SI1 Takes into account constraint derivatives when solving for equations of motion.
Monitors the integration error on the impulse of the Lagrange Multipliers in the
system. These additional safeguards enable the integrators to monitor the integrator
error in velocity variables and the impulse of the Lagrange Multipliers.
Very accurate.
Jacobian matrix remains stable at small step sizes, which in turn increases the
stability and robustness of the corrector at small step sizes.
Note: Object characteristics correspond directly to object measures. You do not need to create
object measures to plot object characteristics because Adams Solver automatically calculates
and outputs them for you. To use object measures in the definition of your model or to save
the object characteristics from one simulation to another, however, you should create object
measures. Learn about measuring object characteristics.
Result set components - Result set components are a basic set of state variable data that Adams
Solver calculates during a simulation. Adams Solver outputs the data at each simulation output step.
A component of a result set is a time series of a particular quantity (for example, the x displacement
of a part or the y torque in a joint). Learn about result set components.
Note: You can also use the Measure Distance command to measure the distance between two
markers at different model configurations. This is a quick way to measure distances and does
not require that you run a simulation. For more information, see About Measuring Distance
Between Positions.
Simulation Basics 363
About Simulation Output
Note: For flexible bodies, the location of the center of mass changes over
time relative to the body coordinate system.
[Icm] Inertia tensor of body about its center of mass.
Note: For flexible bodies, the inertia tensor actually changes as the body
deforms. Adams View accounts for this by correcting the inertia tensor
of the flexible body,
[I] according to its specified modal formulation as follows:
Rigid or Constant:
[I] = [I]7
Partial Coupling:
[I] = [I]7 - [I]8 {q}
Full Coupling:
[I] = [I]7 - [I]8{q} - [I]9 {q}.{q}T
The resulting [I] is then transformed from the local body reference frame (LBRF)
to the body's center of mass (cm) to obtain [Icm].
Change in position of the center of mass of the rigid body relative to its original
ΔR cm position (at time=0).
{q} Generalized modal coordinates of active modes of flexible body (modal
deformations).
[K] Generalized modal stiffness matrix of flexible body.
Prescribed gravity vector.
g
Types of Measures
There are two types of Measures available:
Predefined measures that automatically output information.
User-defined measures that you define to obtain more specific information about your model.
Predefined Measures
This type of measure: Lets you capture and investigate:
Object Characteristics of the parts, forces, and constraints in your model.
Point Characteristics of a point, such as its location relative to the global coordinate
system or the sum of forces acting on it.
Point-to-point Kinematic characteristics of a point relative to another point, such as the relative
velocity or acceleration.
Orientation The orientation of one marker with respect to another marker using a variety of
known schemes, such as successive rotations, Euler parameters, direction
cosines, and so on.
Included angle The included angle defined by three points in space.
Range Statistical characteristics of another measure, such as its maximum, average, and
more.
384 Adams View
About Measures
User-Defined Measures
This type of measure: Lets you capture and investigate:
Adams View computed A design expression that you want Adams View to evaluate before or after
a simulation.
Adams Solver function A function expression that you want Adams Solver to evaluate during a
simulation.
Limitations of Measures
The following are limitations to using measures:
Many characteristics in measures are computed from the last Simulation of the model. If you change
your model after running a simulation, the characteristics will no longer be correct. You need to
simulate the modified model again.
You cannot include Adams View computed measures in an Adams Solver run-time function
expression. Only Adams View can process computed measures.
Only Adams Solver can evaluate Adams Solver computed measures. Therefore, you must define an
Adams Solver computed measure before you run a simulation. Adams View cannot evaluate the
measure after a simulation.
Angle Measures
It is the instantaneous angle between these vectors that Adams View tracks in an included angle measure.
Note that the included angle changes over time as the markers move during a simulation.
There are two conventions used in Adams View to define the sign and magnitude of an included angle
measure as it changes over time:
The sign and magnitude is always calculated so as to have an initial value within the range [0, PI]
regardless of the order in which you select the points. The sign convention (+/-) is defined such that
the first nonzero value is positive.
The axis of rotation is automatically calculated as the cross-product of , and the order in
which you select the points have no effect. This, along with the right-hand rule, determines all
subsequent changes to the sign and magnitude of the included angle measure.
Select method - Lets you graphically select the markers to be measured using the Angle tool on
the Measure Toolstack of the Main toolbox. Learn how to use the Select method.
Browse method - Displays the Angle Measure dialog box in which you browse for markers.
388 Adams View
Point-to-Point Measures
tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Angle, and then select New.
2. In the First Marker text box, enter the markers that defines the tip of the first vector.
3. In the Middle Marker text box, enter the second marker that defines the vertex.
4. In the Last Marker text box, enter the marker that defines the tip of the second vector.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
5. To display a Strip chart of the measure, select Create Strip Chart.
6. Select OK.
tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Measure Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select the Included Angle tool.
2. Using the left mouse button, select the following markers:
• The marker that defines the tip of the first vector.
• Second marker that defines the vertex.
• Marker that defines the tip of the second vector.
Point-to-Point Measures
Point-to-Point Measures let you measure kinematic characteristics, such as displacement or velocity, between two
locations during a simulation. For example, you can use a point-to-point measure to calculate the global y-
component of distance between any two specified markers.
You can also obtain point-to-point characteristics for geometric vertices. When you select vertices for the
markers, Adams View automatically creates a marker at each vertex and uses it in the point-to-point measure.
Measures 389
Point-to-Point Measures
tool on the Design Exploration tab, Measures container or (Classic interface) Measure
Toolstack of the Main toolbox. This is the easiest method to use and lets you select geometric vertices as
points to measure. It, however, only lets you measure the translational displacement, velocity, or
acceleration between two markers.
In addition, the Simple method does not let you select a reference frame or coordinate system.
Instead, Adams View uses the global coordinate system and the ground reference frame for velocity
and acceleration. Adams View also creates a default name for the measure and a strip chart.
Learn how to use the Simple method.
Specific method - Displays the Point-to-Point Measure dialog box in which you enter values for the
point-to-point measure. The dialog box lets you select all characteristics listed in Point-to-Point
Characteristics that You Can Measure.
Learn how to use the Specific method.
or
390 Adams View
Orientation Measures
(Classic interface) From the Measure Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select the Point-to-Point tool
.
2. The container in the Main toolbox displays settings for creating point-to-point measures.
3. From the Characteristic pull-down menu in the Measure container, select the kinematic
characteristic to be measured.
4. From the Component pull-down menu, select the vector component you want reported (global
coordinates only). You can select global x, global y, global z, or magnitude.
5. Select a marker or geometric vertex from which to measure.
6. Select a marker or geometric vertex to which to measure.
Orientation Measures
To learn about creating orientation measures:
About Measuring Orientation Characteristics
Orientation Characteristics You Can Measure
Creating an Orientation Measure
Measures 391
Orientation Measures
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, and then select Orientation, and then
select New.
2. When creating an object or point measure, select the Orientation button.
Measures 393
Object Measures
Object Measures
In general, all objects in your model have some pre-defined measurable characteristics. For example, you can
capture and investigate the power consumption of a motion, or measure a part’s center-of-mass velocity along
the global x-axis, taking time derivatives in the ground reference frame. The default coordinate system is the
ground coordinate system, but you can use any marker as the coordinate system.
Learn about:
Object Characteristics You Can Measure
Point Characteristics you can measure
To access the object measure create dialog box, do one of the following:
To create a measure for a selected object, select the object. Click Design Exploration tab. From the
Measures container, click the New measure tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, and then select Selected Object.
To create a measure for any object in the database, when no objects are selected, Click Design
Exploration tab. From the Measures container, click the icon for New measure tool . or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Selected Object, and then
select New. From the Database Navigator, select the object on which you want to define a measure.
To create a measure while modifying the object, from the object's modify dialog box, select the
Object Measure tool . Learn about Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
An Object Measure dialog box appears. Its content corresponds to the object type you are creating. If
you selected an object that is an assembly, the Assembly Measure dialog box appears.
394 Adams View
Range Measures
Range Measures
You can use range measures to obtain statistical feedback about any existing measure. Ranges dynamically
calculate the maximum, minimum, average, or variation characteristics of any measure.
Minimum Minimum value in the current set of measured data. Min (M1, M2, ..., Mn)
Maximum Maximum value in the current set of measured data. Max (M1, M2, ..., Mn)
Variation Difference between the maximum and minimum value in Maximum - Minimum
the current set of measured data.
or
Measures 395
Creating an Adams View Computed Measure
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Range, and then select New.
The Range Measure dialog box appears.
2. In the Name text box, enter a name for the measure.
3. Set Type to the range characteristic to measure.
4. In the Of Measure text box, enter an existing, predefined measure to analyze.
5. To display a Strip chart of the measure, select Create Strip Chart.
6. Select OK.
Caution: Making changes in your model can cause a potential problem because model changes can
invalidate the accuracy of any measure that depends on the results of a simulation. The
simulation redefines the model data and re-evaluates your Adams View computed measures.
Learn more:
Adams View Function Builder online help
Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum
396 Adams View
Creating an Adams Solver Function Measure
1. Click the Design Exploration tab. From the Measures container, click the Computed tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Computed, and then select
New.
The Function Builder dialog box appears in computed-measure mode. Example of Function Builder in
Computed Measure Mode.
2. Build your expression using the functions and object data and format the Strip chart using the options
in the Attributes area.
3. Select OK.
Deleting Measures
To delete a measure:
1. From the Database Navigator, select the Measure and Delete.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, and then select Delete.
2. From the Database Navigator, select the measure to delete.
Modifying Measures
To modify a measure:
1. Click Design exploration tab. From the Measures container point to the appropriate type of
Measure, and then select Modify.
or
(Classic interface) For any type of measure, from the Build menu, point to Measure, point to the
appropriate type of measure, and then select Modify.
2. From the Database Navigator, select the measure to modify.
Tip: For a shortcut to steps 1 and 2, in the strip chart containing the measure data, right-
click the background (not a curve), Point to Plot:scht1, and then select Measure
Modify.
Notes: 1. Displaying script charts during a simulation adversely affects the speed of the
simulation. The more strip charts you display, the slower your simulation.
2. Strip charts only show the results of the most recently run simulation regardless of
what’s being animated in Adams View. See Saving Curves to Establish a Baseline to learn
how to keep a curve from a previously run simulation.
398 Adams View
Setting Up Strip Charts
To save a curve:
1. In the strip chart, right-click a curve.
2. Point to the name of the curve, and then select Save Curve.
Note: You have to redisplay the strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend, color, line
type, line symbol, and line thickness. Learn about redisplaying strip charts.
The Lower, Upper, and Label text boxes currently are not available.
2. In the Legend text box, enter text that describes the data that the curve in the strip chart represents.
The text appears in the title bar of the strip chart. Note that you have to redisplay the strip chart to
see the effects of changing the legend.
3. In the Comment text box, enter text that describes the measure. The text appears in Adams
PostProcessor when you transfer the strip chart to it for plotting. Learn how to transfer a strip chart to Adams
PostProcessor.
4. Select the type of plot to be displayed in Adams PostProcessor when you transfer the strip chart to it
for plotting:
• linear - Performs no transformation of data or axis values. This is the default.
• logar (Logarithmic) - Scales the axis values so that each power of 10 is separated by the same
distance. For example, the values 1, 10, 100, 1000, and 10,000 are equally spaced.
• db (Decibel) - Displays 20 * log 10 (value) for each value.
400 Adams View
Setting Up Strip Charts
• default - Selecting this means no specific axis type is requested and it appears in the default
axis type, which is usually linear.
Learn how to transfer a strip chart to Adams PostProcessor.
5. Set Line Type to the type of line style for the curve. For example, you can select a line that alternates
between dots and dashes.
6. Set Symbol to the type of symbol displayed at data points along the curve.
7. In the Color text box, enter the color of the curve.
8. In the Thickness text box, change the weight of the curve line. Weight values range from 1 to 5 screen
pixels.
9. Select OK.
To transfer a measure:
1. Right-click a strip chart to display a menu of measure results currently in the window.
2. Point to the measure results that you want to display, and then select Transfer to Full Plot.
Note: You can also select to display a measure from Adams PostProcessor. See the Adams PostProcessor
online help.
example, contacts that engage or disengage over a short duration), but can often be a symptom of
modeling errors. For example, they can indicate that there is an incorrect damping value in an
IMPACT function that causes unrealistically high forces. It also can indicate the use of
discontinuous function expressions, such as an IF function.
Iterations per Step - The Iterations per Step strip chart displays the number of iterations that Adams
Solver needed to successfully progress to the next integration time step, over the course of a
simulation. These iterations occur during the corrector phase of the integration. For more
information on the phases in a dynamic simulation, see Extended Definition in the INTEGRATOR
statement in the Adams Solver online help.
The information in the Iterations per Step strip chart can provide you with several insights into your
model:
• If your simulation progresses with very few iterations at each time step, Adams Solver is having an
easy time simulating your model. You can further increase performance or speed by increasing the
allowed maximum time step.
• If Adams Solver requires many iterations for any particular step, it is likely encountering a period
of rapidly changing dynamics that can require corrective action as described for the Step Size strip
chart explained in the previous section.
• If you notice that Adams Solver requires many iterations right from the beginning of a simulation,
it is likely that you have chosen an integration step size that is too large for the dynamics in your
model. You can obtain better performance if you choose a smaller time step. For information on
changing the time step, see Running an Interactive Simulation.
Integrator Order - The Integrator Order strip chart displays the order of the polynomial that Adams
Solver uses during the predictor phase of integration. Adams Solver uses a polynomial to predict the
future value of the state variables in an Adams model. In general, lower order polynomials are
required to successfully integrate more difficult portions of a simulation, characterized either by
nonlinearities or rapidly changing dynamics. For more information, see Solver Settings - Dynamics.
Similar to the Iterations per Step strip chart, if the Integrator Order strip chart shows the consistent
use of high (three or more) order polynomials, you may be able to increase performance by
increasing the maximum allowed time step. If Adams Solver consistently or periodically uses low-
order polynomials, it is symptomatic of a period of rapidly changing dynamics that may require
corrective action as described for the Step Size strip chart or the integration step size may be too large
for the dynamics in your model.
Static Imbalance - The Static Imbalance strip chart displays the current imbalance in the
equilibrium equations that Adams Solver computes during a static equilibrium simulation. A static
equilibrium simulation is an iterative process to compute a position in which your model assumes a
minimum energy configuration. Learn about Performing Static Equilibrium Simulations.
The Static Imbalance strip chart displays a measure of how close the solution is coming to a
complete balance of the equilibrium equations at each equilibrium iteration, in units of your selected
force units.
402 Adams View
Setting Up Strip Charts
Note: You need to select the option, Update Every Iteration, to watch the iteration-by-
iteration progress of an equilibrium simulation. For more information, see Solver
Settings - Display.
Requests
Creating Requests
You can create Requests to ask for standard displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force information that will
help you investigate the results of your simulation. You can also define other quantities (such as pressure,
work, energy, momentum, and more) that you want output during a simulation.
To learn more:
About Naming Results and Components in Requests
Creating by Specifying Predefined Data Type and Marker
Creating by Specifying Function Expression
Creating by Specifying a Subroutine
Creating by Specifying Variables
To define the output in which you are interested, you can specify:
Predefined data to be output
Function expressions
Subroutine
Variables (available for XML format only) Learn about Creating and Modifying State Variables.
Adams Solver generates the data at each Output step in a Simulation. For more on output steps, see Interactive
Simulation Palette and Container.
Note: Unlike measures, you must create requests before you run a simulation. Once you define them,
you can use them with different simulations.
By default, Adams View does not save the requested data to external files, but will save it to your modeling
database. Learn about Solver Settings.
Component Naming
By default, there are eight components per results set, and they have generic names, such as X, Y, Z, and
MAG. You can specify more descriptive names for them or specify a particular unit label or unit type
associated with each component.
Component Units - You can identify the unit dimension of the result set components. If you do not
specify units, then the units of the components are predefined based upon standard request type (for
example, displacement, velocity, and acceleration).
The units can be:
MASS AREA
TIME VOLUME
FORCE TORQUE
LENGTH PRESSURE
VELOCITY DENSITY
ACCELERATION ENERGY
ANGLE TORSION_STIFFNESS
ANGULAR_VELOCITY TORSION_DAMPING
ANGULAR_ACCELERATION FREQUENCY
INERTIA AREA_INERTIA
STIFFNESS FORCE_TIME
DAMPING TORQUE_TIME
Component Labels - You can identify the labels to be used when plotting the result set components.
This can be helpful if you want to reduce the memory overhead of the simulation data.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Request, and then select New.
The Create a Request dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name that you want assigned to the request.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the request.
4. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
the request.
5. If the output of the results set is XML format (see Results (.res) Options), set the naming for the results
and components. Learn About Naming Results and Components in Requests.
• In the Components Name and Results Name text boxes, enter the names of the components and
results. Separate the component names by commas.
• If desired, set the following to define a unit type or label associated with each of the components:
• Component Units, and then enter the units associated with each component. See Available units.
• Component Labels, and then enter the labels to appear when plotting the result set
components. Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes must be used to define the
string if special characters or white space are used.
6. Set the option menu to Define Using Type & Markers.
The elements of the dialog box change to those for entering a predefined data type and markers.
7. Select the type of output (Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, or Force).
8. Specify the markers with respect to which the output will be calculated.
9. Select OK.
To create a request:
1. Click the Design Exploration tab. From the Instrumentation container, click the Request tool
.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Request, and then select New.
The Create a Request dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name that you want assigned to the request.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the request.
4. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
the request.
5. If the output of the results set is XML format, set the naming for the results and components. Learn
About Naming Results and Components in Requests.
• In the Components Name and Results Name text boxes, enter the names of the components and
results. Separate the component names by commas.
• If desired, set the following to define a unit type or label associated with each of the components:
• Component Units, and then enter the units associated with each component. See Available units.
• Component Labels, and then enter the labels to appear when plotting the result set
components. Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes must be used to define the
string if special characters or white space are used.
6. Set the option menu to Define Using Variables.
The elements of the dialog box change to those for entering variables.
7. Enter the variables, separated by commas.
8. Select OK.
To create a request:
1. Click the Design Exploration tab. From the Instrumentation container, click the Request tool
.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Request, and then select New.
The Create a Request dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name that you want assigned to the request.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the request.
Requests 411
Creating Requests
4. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
the request.
5. If the output of the results set is XML format, set the naming for the results and components. Learn
About Naming Results and Components in Requests.
• In the Components Name and Results Name text boxes, enter the names of the components and
results. Separate the component names by commas.
• If desired, set the following to define a unit type or label associated with each of the components:
• Component Units, and then enter the units associated with each component. See Available units.
• Component Labels, and then enter the labels to appear when plotting the result set
components. Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes must be used to define the
string if special characters or white space are used.
6. Set the option menu to Define Using Function Expressions.
The elements of the dialog box change to those for entering function expressions.
7. Enter function expressions in the boxes f2, f3, f4, f6, f7, and f8. Do no use f1 and f5. Adams Solver
uses them to hold magnitudes for the three functions that follow. You do not need to enter a function
in every text box.
8. Select OK.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Request, and then select New.
The Create a Request dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name that you want assigned to the request.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the request.
4. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
the request.
5. If the output of the results set is XML format, set the naming for the results and components. Learn
About Naming Results and Components in Requests.
• In the Components Name and Results Name text boxes, enter the names of the components and
results. Separate the component names by commas.
• If desired, set the following to define a unit type or label associated with each of the components:
412 Adams View
Creating Requests
• Component Units, and then enter the units associated with each component. See Available units.
• Component Labels, and then enter the labels to appear when plotting the result set
components. Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes must be used to define the
string if special characters or white space are used.
6. Set the option menu to Define Using Subroutines.
The elements of the dialog box change to those for entering subroutines.
7. In the User Function text box, enter parameters to the user-written subroutine REQSUB or specify
an alternative library and name for the user subroutine in the Routine text box. (Learn about
specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.)
Enter the USER function using the following format where r1 through r30 are constants passed to
the subroutine:
r1, ..., r30
8. If you specified to write an output file (.out), enter up to eight headings for columns of request
output. Separate each heading with a comma (,).
Each heading can have as many as eight alphanumeric characters, including underscores (_). The
first character in each heading must be alphabetic. You cannot use a comma (,), a semicolon (;), an
ampersand (&), or an exclamation point (!).
If you do not want to specify a title for a particular column, use two quotation marks (" ") with no
characters between them.
9. Select OK.
Displacement
When you request predefined displacement output, Adams Solver outputs the displacement of a specified
marker (I marker) with respect to a second marker (J marker). When you select displacement data, Adams
Solver generates eight channels of output as follows:
Time (Time)
Translational magnitude (Mag)
X component (X)
Y component (Y)
Z component (Z)
Psi angle (Psi)
Theta angle (Theta)
Phi angle (Phi)
The psi, theta, and phi angles are Euler or body-fixed 313 rotations of the I marker with respect to the J
marker. Adams Solver calculates the displacement data in the global coordinate system. If you specify a
reference marker, Adams Solver resolves the translational x, y, and z components in the coordinate system of
the reference marker. The reference marker does not affect psi, theta, and phi.
Rotational displacement information differs from all other standard output. Whether this information is in
psi, theta, and phi coordinates or in yaw, pitch, and roll coordinates, the rotation sequence is not a vector. As
a result, Adams Solver outputs no magnitude column. In addition, the sequence of coordinates is
independent of any frame external to the I and the J markers. The reference marker has no effect on the
angular coordinates.
Velocity
When you request predefined velocity output, Adams Solver outputs the velocity of the first marker that you
specify (I marker) with respect to a second marker (J marker). When you request velocity data, Adams Solver
generates nine headings and nine columns of data. The nine columns include:
Time (Time)
Translational magnitude (Vm)
Translational x component (Vx)
Translational y component (Vy)
Translational z component (Vz)
Rotational magnitude (Wm)
Rotational x component (Wx)
Rotational y component (Wy)
Rotational z component (Wz)
Adams Solver calculates this velocity data (the first derivative of the displacement of the I marker with respect
to the J marker) in the global coordinate system. If you specify a reference marker, Adams calculates the
translational and rotational x, y, and z components in the coordinate system of the reference marker.
414 Adams View
Creating Requests
Acceleration
When you request predefined acceleration output, Adams Solver outputs the acceleration of the I marker with
respect to the J marker. This argument generates nine headings and nine columns of output. The columns
include:
Time (Time)
Magnitude of translational acceleration (Accm)
Translational x component (Accx)
Translational y component (Accy)
Translational z component (Accz)
Magnitude of rotational acceleration (Wmdot)
Rotational x component (Wxdot)
Rotational y component (Wydot)
Rotational z component (Wzdot)
Adams Solver calculates the acceleration data (the second derivative of the displacement of the I marker with
respect to the J marker) in the global coordinate system. If you specify a reference marker, Adams Solver
calculates the translational and rotational x, y, and z components in the coordinate system of the reference
marker.
Force
When you request predefined force output, Adams Solver outputs the force associated with the I and the J
markers or outputs the action-only forces on the I marker if you specify the I marker. When you specify both
the I and the J markers, Adams Solver sums the forces on the I marker due to those forces associated with the
I and the J markers. These forces can include both applied forces (such as Translational Spring Dampers and
Bushings) and reaction forces from constraints (such as Joints and Motions).
When you specify only the I marker, Adams Solver sums all of the action-only forces that are applied to the
I marker. If you specify a reference marker, Adams Solver reports the components of the resulting vectors in
the reference frame of the reference coordinate system. If you do not specify a reference marker, Adams Solver
reports the components in the ground coordinate system.
Adams Solver outputs nine columns of data:
Time (Time)
Translational force magnitude (Fmag)
Three components of translational force (Fx, Fy, and Fz)
Rotational force (torque) magnitude (Tmag)
Three components of torque (Tx, Ty, and Tz)
Applied forces and torques are those generated by Beams, bushings, Field Elements, Single-Component
Forces, and spring-dampers. Adams Solver outputs the applied forces and torques acting at the request I
marker (which can be either the applied force I marker or the applied force J marker). The magnitude and
point of force application on the part containing the applied force J marker varies according to the type and
source of the force:
Requests 415
Creating Requests
For spring-dampers and action-reaction single-component forces, the forces and torques acting at
the J marker are equal and opposite to the forces and torques acting at the I marker.
For action-only, single-component forces, there is no force or torque acting at the applied force J
marker.
For beams, fields, and bushings, the forces acting at the applied force J marker are equal and
opposite to the forces acting at the applied force I marker. As long as the applied force I marker and
the applied force J marker are coincident, the torques acting at the applied force J marker are equal
and opposite to the torques acting at the applied force I marker. If there is a finite separation
between the I and the J markers, the torques acting at the applied force J marker are opposite, but
not equal, to the torques acting at the applied force I marker.
Reaction forces and torques are those generated by constraint-inducing elements. For revolute, spherical, and
universal joints and for orientation, parallel axes, and perpendicular joint primitives, Adams Solver outputs the
reaction forces and torques acting at the request I marker (which can be either the constraint I marker or the
constraint J marker). The force and torque acting at the request J marker are equal and opposite to the force
and torque acting at the request I marker. Depending on the type of constraint, some or all of the torques
acting at the I marker are zero.
You must be careful when requesting a force with the I and the J markers reversed from those specified in the
force-producing element. Adams Solver reports the force as if it were applied to the J marker of the force-
producing element. The translational force on the J marker of the force element will be equal and opposite
to the translational force on the I marker of the force element if it is not action only. The force will be zero if
it is action only.
The torque on the J marker of the force element has an extra component that can have significance. The
torque is the sum of two contributions. The first contribution is the opposite of the torque on the I marker.
The second contribution is due to the force acting across the separation between the I and the J markers. If
the force acts along the line of sight of the two markers, this extra torque will be zero. To minimize
misunderstandings, attach your request markers in the same order as the markers on the force-producing
element.
The function expressions are very efficient, calculating in one or two requests what otherwise might
require eight or more requests.
The following example illustrates how to output quantities that could not be captured using predefined
outputs, especially not all within a single request:
f1 = (blank)
f2 = "0.5*17.49*VM(mar15, mar27)**2"
f3 = "FX(mar18, mar19, mar1)*DX(mar18, mar19, mar1)"
f4 = "FX(mar18, mar19, mar1)/TIME"
f5 = (blank)
f6 = "AZ(mar7, mar8)"
f7 = "JOINT(joi26, mar7, fy, mar99)"
f8 = "MOTION(joi26, mar7, tz, mar99)"
The easiest way to enter a function expression in Adams View is to use the Function Builder. For more
information on the Function Builder and the built-in functions, see the Adams View Function Builder online help.
Simulation
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation
Before you begin your Simulation, you may want to do one or more preliminary operations to help ensure a
better simulation. You can do any of the following:
Check to see if you have the expected number of movable parts and the expected number and type
of constraints in your model.
Determine the total number of system Degrees of freedom (DOF) and which, if any, constraint
equations are redundant. Learn more.
Check to see if any constraints are broken or incorrectly defined and, if so, perform an Initial
conditions simulation on your model to try to correct these broken joints. Learn more.
Perform a static simulation to move your model into an equilibrium configuration immediately before
performing a dynamic simulation to reduce some of the initial, transient system response. Learn more
Calculate the natural frequencies of your model as linearized about a particular operating
configuration. See LINEAR command for more information.
From the Simulation Controls dialog box, select the Model Verify Tool .
Tip: Select the Model Verify tool from the Information tool stack on the Status bar.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Simulation 421
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation
Equation (1) through Equation (3) constrain translational DOF, while Equation (4) through Equation (6) constrain
rotational DOF. The table below explains each of the mathematical equations. In the explanations, the I
marker is on the first part and the J marker is on the second part.
The table below lists some of the most commonly used joints and the equations that are used to represent
them:
Notice that each of the five joints uses Equations 1 and 2. Duplicating constrained DOF between the same
parts can lead to overconstraining your model and introduce redundant constraint equations.
Adams Solver outputs warning messages to help you understand which equations are redundant and,
therefore, which DOF are removed more than once. For some examples of warning messages in Adams View
and how you can remove the redundancy that they indicate, See Examples of Redundant Constraints Messages.
422 Adams View
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation
In the case of the door with two hinges, Adams Solver ignores five of the constraint equations that it finds
redundant. You do not know which equations Adams Solver ignores, however. If Adams Solver ignores all of
the equations corresponding to one of the hinges, then all the reaction forces are concentrated at the other
hinge in the Adams Solver solution. Adams Solver arbitrarily sets the reaction forces to zero at the redundant
hinge. But Adams Solver might not discard all the equations for one hinge and retain all the equations from
the other. It might just as easily retain one or more equations from each, and discard one or more from each.
Simulation 423
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation
Although Adams Solver still provides the physically correct solution, the simulation may require extra
computational effort to constrain the motion when all of the constraint forces and torques are concentrated
at one end of the door. Consequently, it is always a good idea to carefully select your constraints and define
models without any redundancies. For example, you can construct the model of the door with a spherical
joint and a parallel-axes constraint instead of the single revolute joint.
When you verify your model or run a simulation, Adams Solver tells you which constraints are redundant.
To solve the redundancy, try replacing a redundant idealized joint with a joint primitive. You may also want
to replace redundant constraints with approximately equivalent flexible connections.
Adams Solver does not always check the initial conditions set for a constraint when it performs overconstraint
checking. If you apply a motion on one joint and initial conditions on another joint, check to ensure that
they are not redundant because Adams Solver does not check them for redundancy and your model may lock
up when simulation begins. As a general rule, do not specify more initial conditions than the number of DOF
in your model. For more on initial conditions for joints, see Setting Initial Conditions.
DOF = number of normal modes + number of constraint modes + 6 (that is, number of rigid-body modes)
Normal modes: These are fixed boundary normal modes obtained by computing an eigensolution. The
default number of normal modes is set to 20. This can be modified via the environment variable:
"MSC_NLFE_MNFSWAP_EIGENVALUES".
Constraint modes: These modes (also known as, attachment modes) are static modes obtained by giving
each boundary DOF a unit displacement while holding all other boundary DOF fixed. The number of
constraint modes is computed as 6 * (number of nodes referenced by markers on a nonlinear flex body
body). Note that the number of constraint modes depends on the number of nodes referenced by the
nonlinear flex body markers.
Note: Since Adams Solver creates an equivalent linear flex body on the fly, the nonlinear flex body
DOF count (for computing the Gruebler count) depends on the number of nodes referenced
by the nonlinear flex body markers. On the other hand, for a linear flex body, the total
number of modes (normal modes + constraint modes) are known a priori (defined in the
MNF) and thus, the linear flex body DOF does not depend on the number of flex body
markers. See "Adams MaxFlex" for more details about the nonlinear flexible body.
To learn more:
About Performing Static Equilibrium Simulations
Finding Static Equilibrium for Your Model
About Performing Dynamic Simulations to Find Static Equilibrium
Since Adams Solver must be able to move parts around as it attempts to iterate to an equilibrium
configuration, it does not make sense to perform a static simulation on a model that has no degrees of
freedom (DOF). If the model has no DOF, no parts are allowed to move.
Adams View actually calculates an equilibrium configuration for both time 0 and the request time, so
you get two output steps: one automatically at time 0 and one at the requested time.
The function-expression variable, TIME, whether accessed using function expressions or the TIME
variable passed to most User-written subroutines, is set to the starting time for the duration of the
simulation. This setting has the effect of freezing all time-dependent excitations.
Body forces are applied to all rigid bodies (damping forces) that oppose motion relative to ground.
The magnitude of the forces depends on the velocity of the rigid bodies relative to ground and on
the Global Damping value used in Solver Settings - Equilibrium.
The simulation time is reset to the starting time once the analysis is complete.
The analysis terminates when one of the following occurs based on options in Solver Settings -
Equilibrium:
• A norm of the system acceleration falls below Acceleration Error and the system kinetic energy
simultaneously falls below Kinetic Energy Error.
• The simulation time has advanced by Settling Time.
Because a dynamic simulation occurs, the settings in Solver Settings - Dynamics specify the error tolerances
and other parameters normally associated with dynamic simulations.
You can also use the initial conditions simulation if you are creating parts in exploded view. Exploded view is
simply creating the individual parts separately and then assembling them together into a model. You might
find this convenient if you have several complicated parts that you want to create individually without seeing
how they work together until much later. Adams View provides options for specifying that you are creating
your model in exploded view as you create constraints.
428 Adams View
Performing an Interactive Simulation
5. Set the frequency with which Adams View outputs data during your simulation. You can specify:
• Step Size, which represents the amount of time, in current model units, between output steps.
The output frequency remains constant even if you change your simulation end time or
duration. For example, enter a step size of 0.01 seconds to specify an output period of 0.01
seconds per step, which yields an output frequency of 100 steps/second.
• Steps, which represents the total number of times you want Adams View to provide output
information over your entire simulation. For example, specify 50 steps over a 1-second
simulation interval to define an output period of 0.02 seconds per step, which yields an output
frequency of 50 steps/second.
6. If you selected the More button to display the Simulation Controls palette, you can clear the selection
of Update graphics display if you do not want the model updated. This saves simulation time, but
you should only select it if you are sure that your simulation will run to completion without difficulty.
See Solver Settings - Display.
Give careful consideration to the output step size you specify. If you specify an output step size that
is too large, you may not be able to visualize higher frequencies of response. If you specify an output
step size that is too small, you could end up putting an artificial governor on Adams Solver, forcing
it to use an internal solution step that is smaller than it really has to be. This, in turn, would increase
the time it would take Adams View to perform the simulation.
The size of the output time step governs the highest frequency of response that you will be able to
visualize for your simulation. A rough rule-of-thumb is to use at least 5 to 10 output steps per cycle
of the response that you expect. To get a better estimate of the expected response, you might want to
investigate the use of the optional Adams Linear product, which can calculate the natural frequencies
and mode shapes for your model. For additional information, see the LINEAR command in the
Adams Solver online help.
The best way to get started with the Adams View commands is to use the interactive controls to
perform a simulation, then look at the script that Adams View creates, called Last_Sim. You can then
modify and rename it. Also, you can get assistance on entering basic simulation options as you create
the script. See Create/Modify Simulation Script dialog box.
Adams Solver - A set of Adams Solver commands, including commands that change the model or
Adams Solver settings. Unlike an Adams View command script, you can use an Adams Solver
command script to change your model or Adams Solver settings during the simulation. Also, you
can get assistance on entering basic simulation options as you create the script.
You would use a script like this if you wanted to make sure your solution remained more accurate at a
particular point in time, and you wanted to increase the frequency of data output. You would increase the
accuracy and output because you expect a high-frequency response to become active in your model starting
around the specified time. For example, an abrupt event, such as parts coming into contact, causing forces to
change magnitude quickly, might make you increase your number of output steps during that interval so you
can see more fidelity in your animations and plots.
Use the Command Navigator to see the available Adams View commands, their keywords, and
parameters. Learn more about the Command Navigator.
Look at your aview.log file to see the commands that have been executed and their syntax. Learn
more about Using the Adams View Log File.
See Scripted Simulation pallette dialog box help for more information.
Note: By default, the results of a simulation are only saved to the Modeling database, not to external
Adams Solver analysis files. To save the results to external Adams Solver analysis files, set the
simulation output before you run the simulation, as explained in Setting Simulation Controls. To
export the results to analysis files, see Export - Adams Solver Analysis Files.
Note: You must have saved your Modeling database before you can delete simulation results (File
→ Save Database).
2. From the toolstack, select the Delete Results from Database tool .
The Database Navigator appears.
3. Select the names of the simulations you want to delete.
4. Select OK.
Note: The resulting model will not show display the flexible body in its deformed state. It displays
the shape of the flexible body as defined in the original modal neutral file (MNF). A
subsequent analysis first frame will display the deformed shape. Therefore, one should be
cautious if adding any modeling objects (for example, applied forces or joints) and locating
them on the basis of a flexible body node from such an exported model since there could be
a difference between where the node appears while pre-processing and where it actually is due
to the initial conditions enforced at the start of an analysis. Adams Solver will automatically
reconcile such differences in I and J marker location and note this in its output to the message
window and/or .msg file.
FE Parts will take the deformed shape, however they will not be preloaded. They will simply
refer to a newly deformed reference curve.
438 Adams View
Managing Simulation Results
Notes: 1. States coming from user-authored Adams Solver subroutines are ignored.
2. No support Adams Controls co-simulation scenarios, though external system
library (ESL) import scenarios are supported.
3. Part accelerations are not carried into the saved model.
4. Internal forces in FE Parts are not carried into the saved model.
5. Angle functions’ (AX, AY, AZ) values will not “wrap;” they will reset to the
corresponding value between 0-360o.
6. Joint friction’s stiction regime “creep” value will reset to zero (this value tracks
displacement of part and applies spring-like force based on small displacements
when velocity near zero).
7. Curve constraints will see small difference in initial conditions between the
original model (at simulated time) and the starting state of the saved model since
Adams Solver must re-compute the curve parameter based on exported position.
8. Due to integrator differences operating on an initial conditions problem vs. a
transient problem, some values may not match exactly between the saved model
and exported step of the original model; specifically forces, state variables and
differential states (DIFs, LsE, GSE). If such small differences become an issue,
running with tighter error control may mitigate the effect.
9. FE Parts will take the deformed shape and the preload necessary to get them into
this deformed shape is applied via the reference to a preload (.mtx) file which is
automatically generated while saving the simulated output steps states into the
new model. After this operation very little about the FE Part can be modified
(otherwise the preload file is invalidated) so the FE Part Modify wizard will have
a number of fields disabled.
10. Integrator states are not supported. For example, the integration order of
GSTIFF is not restored, and this could cause differences in damping. To avoid
these differences, try switching to HHT since it is constant order 2 integrator,
or set KMAX=1 in GSTIFF. If KMAX=1 adds too much damping to the
solution, try using a tighter error or smaller HMAX instead.
Change solution settings for all types of simulations (kinematic, initial conditions, dynamic,
static)
The options for setting simulations match the arguments for the corresponding statements in Adams Solver.
For example, options for setting a kinematic simulation match the arguments for the KINEMATICS
statement. Therefore, you will find it very easy to refer to the more extensive simulation setting information
in Adams Solver online help.
Keep in mind that settings for individual simulations also affect the simulations during parametric analyses,
such as during a design study or optimization.
Write Files Only - Instruct Adams View to write out the files that are needed to run a simulation
using Adams Solver from outside of Adams View.
To access the Solver Settings dialog box from the Simulation Control dialog box:
1. On the Simulation Control dialog box, select Simulation Settings to display the Solver Settings
dialog box.
2. At the top of the Solver Settings dialog box, set Category to the setting that you want to control.
To access the Solver Settings dialog box from the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box:
From the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, select a button from the Settings area of the dialog
box.
You can select:
• Display to set the display of simulation results during a parametric analysis.
• Output to manage the results of the analysis.
• Optimizer to set options for optimizing.
About Sensors
You can use sensors to trigger actions during simulations when a specified event occurs. The actions you can
trigger include:
Stopping the simulation completely - You might want to monitor the vertical distance between a
wheel center and the ground and stop the simulation when it exceeds the undeformed radius of the
tire.
Changing the parameters controlling the solution - You might want to monitor the distance
between two objects that are expected to collide during a simulation. Just before the objects collide,
you reduce the solution step size to avoid convergence problems and reduce the output step size to
capture the magnitude of the contact force.
Changing inputs to the simulation - Sensors are often used in vehicle applications to transition
between different maneuvers, such as from a controlled, straight-line movement to a J-turn. Any
characteristic of the vehicle's movement that you can measure in Adams View, you can monitor
through a sensor and trigger a change in simulation conditions. For vehicles, these include the yaw,
lateral, or longitudinal velocity; the yaw or slip angle; the engine or wheel speed; and so on.
Changing the model topology - You can create a sensor that monitors the reaction force in a
connection and then deactivates the connection when the force exceeds a specified value. A simple
example of this is shown in the figure below.
The sensor function should be continuous because Adams Solver tries to adjust the step size to find the exact
time the sensor becomes active. This process is inaccurate and time consuming when the function is
discontinuous. For that reason, functions of time or displacements work best for sensors; functions of
velocities, accelerations, and forces are less desirable.
Generally, Adams Solver tests sensors after every successful integration step. If the triggering condition or
event that the sensor is monitoring occurs and persists, you may have to turn off the sensor so it doesn't
continue to trigger. You can turn off a sensor using the DEACTIVATE simulation script command. To help
reduce the possibility of the continuous triggering effect, once the sensor triggers the first time, Adams Solver
does not test the sensor again until after three subsequent successful integration steps.
The comparison: Initiates the action when the function value is:
Equal From (Target - Error) to (Target + Error).
Greater than or equal Greater than or equal to (Target - Error).
Less than or equal Less than or equal to (Value + Error).
The figure below illustrates each of the comparisons. In the figure, the sensor triggers whenever the value of
the function being monitored is in the shaded areas. Be careful that your function does not evaluate in the
shaded area at the start of your simulation unless you want your sensor to trigger immediately. It is a good
idea to define a measure for your sensor function so you can check it by plotting it.
444 Adams View
Adding Sensors to Your Model
Standard Actions
You can specify one or more of the following standard actions to occur when Adams View senses the event.
Generate additional output step - Creates an extra Output step when Adams Solver triggers the
sensor so you can capture the action.
Set output step size - Redefines the time between consecutive output steps. Adams Solver uses this
value until it is changed. The default is the current time between output steps for the simulation.
Terminate current step and stop, or continue with a simulation script - Stops simulation or stops
current command in simulation script and continues with next command. For information on
simulation scripts, see Performing a Scripted Simulation.
Special Actions
Set integration step size - Redefines the next Integration step size. This change is temporary and
lasts only for the next solution step.
Simulation 445
Adding Sensors to Your Model
The default is an integrator-determined value except when you’ve included restarting the integrator
as part of the sensor action as explained next. In this case, the step size defaults to the integrator step
size.
Restart integrator - Restarts integration and reduces the integration order to one. If you also set
integration step size as explained above, Adams Solver reinitializes the integration step size to the
specified value. If you do not specify the step size, Adams Solver reinitializes the integration step size
to the integrator step size.
Refactorize Jacobian - Causes Adams Solver to generate a new pivot sequence for matrix
factorization. This can help the integrator produce more accurate data or proceed more robustly
through the simulation. Adams Solver generates a pivot sequence for matrix factorization before
starting the simulation. Adams Solver does not generate a new pivot sequence unless you specify to
refactorize the Jacobian or it is necessary to refactorize to reach convergence.
Dump state variable vector - Writes the entire array of state variable values to a text file in your
current working directory.
Creating a Sensor
To create a sensor:
1. From the Simulate menu, point to Sensor, and then select New.
The Create/Modify Sensor dialog box appears.
2. Enter a name for the sensor.
3. To define the event to be detected:
• To define the event using a function expression, set Event Definition to Run-time Expression,
and then enter a function expression in the Expression text box.
To get help on entering a function expression, right-click the Expression text box, and then select
Function Builder to display the Adams View Function Builder. For information on using the
Function Builder, see Adams View Function Builder online help. Shortcut to Function Builder: Click
the More button .
• To define the event using a subroutine, set Event Definition to User Written Subroutine, and
then enter the parameters to be passed to the user-written subroutine SENSUB in the Parameter
List text box. Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams View is to pass to SENSUB.
4. To specify a function expression or user-written subroutine to be evaluated with the event occurs:
• To define the evaluation using a function expression, set Event Evaluation to Run-time
Expression, and then enter a function expression in the Expression text box.
To get help on entering a function expression, right-click the Expression text box, and then select
Function Builder to display the Adams View Function Builder. For information on using the
Function Builder, see Adams View Function Builder online help. Shortcut to Function Builder: Click
the More button .
446 Adams View
Adding Sensors to Your Model
• To define the evaluation using a subroutine, set Event Evaluation to User Written Subroutine,
and then enter the parameters to be passed to the user-written subroutine SEVSUB in the
Parameter List text box. Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams View is to pass to
SEVSUB.
5. To set up the target value to trigger an action:
• Set the option menu to the comparison to be used to determine if the event is to be triggered. For
information on the different comparisons, see Triggering the Action of a Sensor.
• In the Value text box, enter the value to trigger an action.
• In the Error Tolerance text box, enter the absolute value of allowable error between the targeted
value and the actual sensed value.
6. To set up the action, select an action from the Standard or Special Actions areas of the dialog box as
explained in Types of Actions for Sensors. If you select to continue with a simulation script, you must run
the simulation with a script, as explained in Performing a Scripted Simulation.
Reviewing results
Using Animations
You can replay an Animation again after the Simulation ends to investigate the results of a simulation, as long
as the results of the simulation have been stored in your Modeling database. By default, Adams View only
stores the last simulation you performed. You can either manually store a particular simulation, or you can
set Adams View so that it automatically stores all your simulations. Learn about Saving Simulation Results.
You can play animation frames forwards or backwards, speed them up or slow them down, pause and
continue an animation, rewind to an earlier frame, continuously play an animation in a loop, or play only a
certain portion of the entire sequence of frames. The following sections explain how to control the playing
of your animations.
Playing an Animation
Stopping an Animation
Rewinding an Animation
Skipping Frames During an Animation
Playing a Subset of Frames
Repeating an Animation
Displaying Specific Animation Frames
Resetting the Model View
To learn about recording animations see Recording Animations.
Playing an Animation
When you play an Animation, Adams View plays every frame by default. You can rewind an animation and
play the animation at various speeds as explained in the table below. During fast-forward and fast-backward
play modes, Adams View plays only every fifth frame.
The table below explains the options available on the Animation Controls dialog box for playing an animation.
Stopping an Animation
You can pause an Animation at any time instead of waiting for it to complete.
Rewinding an Animation
After an Animation has ended or stopped, you can rewind it to the beginning of the animation. When you
rewind an animation, Adams View returns to the first frame calculated during the simulation, and not to the
initial design configuration. You can also rewind or advance one frame at a time. Learn about displaying specific
animation frames.
ten seconds plus one at time 0.0. To only view the animation between 3.0 and 5.5 seconds, set the start time
to 3.0 and the end time to 5.5. To achieve the same effect by specifying the frame number, set the start frame
to 31 and the stop frame to 56. Remember that frame 1 corresponds to time 0.0.
Repeating an Animation
By default, Adams View plays the specified sequence of frames once. You can replay the animation as many
times as desired.
4. If desired, set the option menu to define the mode to be used to calculate the deformation of the
model. Set it to either:
• Mode and enter the number of the mode to be used.
• Frequency and enter the frequency of the mode.
If you specify the frequency, Adams View uses the mode closest to the specified frequency. If you
specify neither the mode nor the frequency, Adams View deforms the model using the first mode.
Tip: To view the modes in the eigensolution to see which you should use, see Plotting and Viewing
Modes and Frequencies
Note: A full cycle goes from undeformed, to maximum positive displacement, back to
undeformed, then to maximum displacement in the negative direction, and finally back
to undeformed.
• Frames Per Cycles - Enter the number of frames to be displayed for each cycle. Adams View
performs the interpolation between the frames using trigonometric functions; therefore, the
frames tend to be segregated at the maximum deformation in the positive and negative
directions.
• Number of Cycles - Parameter used to specify the number of complete cycles to animate.
6. Select any of the following to set up the animation:
• Show time decay - Specifies whether the amplitudes of the deformations are to remain constant
or decay due to the damping factor calculated in the eigensolution.
• Show trail - Shows the path, or trail, of parts from one frame to another. Showing the trail is
useful in showing the relationship of the model parts between frames but often obscures the
view of the motion.
• Show undeformed - Specifies whether the undeformed model is to be displayed with the
deformed shape superimposed on top of it. If you select Show undeformed, select a color for the
undeformed model. If you do not specify a color, Adams View displays the undeformed model
using the same color as the deformed mode.
• Show icons - Turns on the display icons during an animation.
7. Set the maximum amount parts will translate or rotate from their undeformed position. If you do not
specify maximum amounts, Adams View translates parts no more than 20 percent of model size and
20 degrees.
8. Select the Animate tool .
457
Animating Natural Frequencies
Plotting Eigenvalues
You can plot the real eigenvalues against the imaginary eigenvalues.
To plot eigenvalues:
1. At the bottom of the Linear Modes Controls dialog box, select Plot.
A Linear Modes Eigenvalue Plot window appears.
2. After viewing the plot, select Close and Delete Plot.
Viewing Eigenvalues
You can display information about all an eigensolution's predicted eigenvalues in the Information window.
Once you display the information in the Information window, you can save it to a file.
To view eigenvalues:
1. At the bottom of the Linear Modes Controls dialog box, select Table.
The Information window appears.
2. After viewing the information, select Close.
458 Adams View
Animating Natural Frequencies
Animation Controls Basics
Setting Up Lighting
You can enhance the quality and realism of your Animations. You can set:
Overall intensity of the light (much like setting a dimmer switch in your home).
Background, ambient light to control the diffusion of light sources to effect the amount of lighting
on edges.
Reflections off of parts. (Note that this is computationally expensive and can slow down your
animations.)
Focused lighting that comes from different directions, and define the angle of that lighting (how far
it is from the centerline). You can think of this as if you were swinging a light boom across your
model.
Note: The number of light sources you can select depends on the graphics driver and system you are
using. If you selected OpenGL, the number of light sources depends on your graphics card.
460 Adams View
Animation Controls Basics
Tip: To achieve the fastest animations, set the lighting options to:
No reflections
One-sided
One light source
Note: When animating multiple simulations simultaneously, each simulation must have the same
number of output steps or frames associated with it, as well as the same output time step size.
To animate your results in a window other than the currently active one:
On the Animation Controls dialog box, enter the name of any view window that is currently visible on
your screen. The default name is the currently active view.
Note: If you choose to animate in more than one view simultaneously, every view specified must
animate the same simulation results. You cannot display one simulation in one view and
another simulation in another view.
Note: The Camera option menu is only available in the Animation Controls dialog box.
463
Animation Controls Basics
Note: If you specify a camera and base marker, then the view direction points from the camera
marker towards the base marker. This does not, however, uniquely define the resulting
orientation of the view, so Adams View uses the positive y-axis of the camera point marker to
define the “up” direction for your animation view perspective.
4. If you want to see the force and torque graphic arrows respresented as three-dimensional objects
instead of as simple lines and arcs, clear Always Wireframe Vectors. If you leave it selected Adams
View shows the force graphics in Wireframe render mode even when you are rendering the view in
Shaded rendering mode.
5. Select Always in Foreground if you want Adams View to show force graphics in the foreground of
the model so model geometry does not obscure them.
Use the Model Topology command to look at your model's topology - As you build your model,
you can display information about its topology, display how its parts are connected to each other,
and display detailed information about each object in the model, such as its parts, constraints, and
forces. For more information, see Viewing Model Topology Map Through Information Window.
Use the Table Editor to look at all objects in your model - The Table Editor provides a spreadsheet-
like overview of the objects that are in your model. It is a convenient way to inspect or modify
models, particularly large ones.
Note: You can close the command window and use your aview.log file to view the debugging
information. Learn about Using the Adams View Log File.
Note: You can only use the Simulation Debugger with an Adams View interactive custom or standard
library, not an Adams Solver stand-alone executable. Learn how to Set what type of Adams Solver
to run.
468 Adams View
Using the Simulation Debugger
To turn on the Simulation Debugger and Debug table from the Simulation Control dialog box:
1. From the Simulate menu, select Interactive Controls.
2. Set the pull-down menu in the middle of the Simulations Control dialog box to Table.
To turn on the Simulation Debugger and Debug table from the Main toolbox:
1. On the Main Toolbox, select the Simulation tool .
2. Set the pull-down menu at the bottom of the toolbox to Table.
Note: Selecting highlighting of objects will significantly slow down your simulation.
To highlight objects:
1. Turn on the debugging tool as explained in Running the Simulation Debugger.
2. From the Solver Settings dialog box, set Track Maximum to select the element that you want to track.
Learn about Setting Up Tracking of Modeling Objects.
3. Set Display to Highlighting.
4. Run an interactive simulation as explained in Performing an Interactive Simulation.
As the simulation runs, Adams View highlights the objects.
Step Size - The Step Size strip chart displays the integrator step size (units of model time), as the
simulation progresses, on a logarithmic scale. The step size strip chart provides useful information
for debugging a model because, in general, the integrator step size becomes much smaller in response
to rapidly changing dynamics. Rapidly changing dynamics are, in some cases, intentional (for
example, contacts that engage or disengage over a short duration), but can often be a symptom of
modeling errors. For example, they can indicate that there is an incorrect damping values in an
IMPACT function that causes unrealistically high forces. It also can indicate the use of
discontinuous function expressions, such as an IF function.
For more information on the step size and how to control it, see Running an Interactive Simulation.
Iterations per Step - The Iterations per Step strip chart displays the number of iterations that Adams
Solver needed to successfully progress to the next integration time step, over the course of a
simulation. These iterations occur during the corrector phase of the integration. For more
information on the phases in a dynamic simulation, see the INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams
Solver online help.
The information in the Iterations per Step strip chart can provide you with several insights into your
model:
• If your simulation progresses with very few iterations at each time step, Adams Solver is having
an easy time simulating your model. You can further increase performance or speed by
increasing the allowed maximum time step.
• If Adams Solver requires many iterations for any particular step, it is likely encountering a
period of rapidly changing dynamics that can require corrective action as described for the Step
Size strip chart explained in the previous section.
• If you notice that Adams Solver requires many iterations right from the beginning of a
simulation, it is likely that you have chosen an integration step size that is too large for the
dynamics in your model. You can obtain better performance if you choose a smaller time step.
For information on changing the time step, see Running an Interactive Simulation.
Integrator order - The Integrator Order strip chart displays the order of the polynomial that Adams
Solver uses during the predictor phase of integration. Adams Solver uses a polynomial to predict the
future value of the state variables in an Adams model. In general, lower order polynomials are
required to successfully integrate more difficult portions of a simulation, characterized either by
nonlinearities or rapidly changing dynamics.
Similar to the Iterations per Step strip chart, if the Integrator Order strip chart shows the consistent
use of high-order (three or more) polynomials, you may be able to increase performance by
increasing the maximum allowed time step. If Adams Solver consistently or periodically uses low-
order polynomials, it is symptomatic of a period of rapidly changing dynamics that may require
corrective action as described for the Step Size strip chart or the integration step size may be too large
for the dynamics in your model.
Static Imbalance - The Static Imbalance strip chart displays the current imbalance in the
equilibrium equations that Adams Solver computes during a static equilibrium simulation. A static
equilibrium simulation is an iterative process to compute a position in which your model assumes a
minimum energy configuration. Learn about Performing Static Equilibrium Simulations.
472 Adams View
Setting Simulation Display
The Static Imbalance strip chart displays a measure of how close the solution is coming to a
complete balance of the equilibrium equations at each equilibrium iteration, in units of your selected
force units.
You need to select Update Every Iteration to watch the iteration-by-iteration progress of an
equilibrium simulation. Learn about Setting Simulation Controls.
To ensure that you assigned geometry and markers to the correct parts, do one of the
following:
Use the Model Topology by Connection tool to check the connections of your parts.
Turn on icons during animations and watch carefully how markers move.
For example, often you set your length units in meters but data for bushing stiffness are given in Newtons
per millimeters. In this case, you need to convert your units.
Also, be sure that the constants that you use in applied force expressions and user-written subroutines are
consistent with the current set of Adams View units. Adams View does not change the units of constants if
you change the default units settings.
In addition, make sure that you select a set of units that minimizes the difference in magnitude (scale) of all
of your input data. For example, if you are modeling the vibration of a 75-ton industrial press, you might
want to select mass = Kilopounds mass and displacement = inches.
If you divide the mass (about 150 klbm) by the expected vibration magnitude (1.5 inches), you obtain a
model scale number of approximately 100, which is well within the range for an easy numerical solution.
Using grams and meters in the same model would result in a scale number of about 109; other units would
be even worse. Poorly scaled models can present numerical difficulties to Adams Solver, and you should avoid
them.
Improving Your Model Designs
Using the Adams View parameterization and parametric analysis tools, you can efficiently improve your
model design. The entries below explain how to improve your model using these tools. It assumes that you
have a moderate level of knowledge about Design of experiments (DOE) and Optimization and that you have access
to in-depth references on them.
You can also perform more sophisticated design of experiments using Adams Insight. Adams Insight lets you
design sophisticated experiments for measuring the performance of your mechanical system model. It also
provides a collection of statistical tools for analyzing the results of your experiments so that you can better
understand how to refine and improve your model. For more information on Adams Insight, see Adams Insight
online help, if installed, or contact your MSC sales representative.
Temporary Settings
Introducing Temporary Settings
The Adams View Temporary Settings capability provides a way to specify sets of model parameter data and/or
solver settings that can be applied temporarily for a given simulation. This provides a convenient way to
quickly apply, and switch between, variations of model characteristics for a simulation without altering the
baseline model. Adams View provides an interface to create and modify Temporary Settings Files which can
then be applied at simulation time.
The Temporary Settings container and icon will not appear here by default. See Enabling Temporary Settings to
learn how to enable this capability.
To learn how to use this dialog to write and edit these files see the dialog box help for Temporary Settings Files.
Applying to a Simulation
The Adams View Simulation Control dialog has a Temporary Settings field from which one or more
temporary settings files can be browsed for and selected for use with the given simulation. After the
simulation is over, the temporary settings are reverted and the model is returned to its baseline state.
To learn more see the dialog box help for Simulation Controls.
This field will not appear here by default. See Enabling Temporary Settings to learn how to enable this capability.
The analysis object created for any simulation run with temporary settings will reflect that in its Information
listing:
482 Adams View
Applying Temporary Settings Files
After the .adm file has been exported, the temporary settings are reverted and the model is returned to its
baseline state. To learn more see the dialog box help for Export - Adams Solver Dataset.
This field will not appear here by default. See Enabling Temporary Settings to learn how to enable this capability.
The header of any .adm file exported with temporary settings will reflect that:
484 Adams View
Applying Temporary Settings Files
After the job is over, the temporary settings are reverted and the model is returned to its baseline state. To
learn more, see the dialog box help for Design Evaluation Tools.
This field will not appear here by default. See Enabling Temporary Settings to learn how to enable this capability.
486 Adams View
Temporary Settings and Python
TemporarySettings
This class provides a Python interface for temporary settings.
Detailed Description
Description:
The TemporarySettings class allows users to specify sets of model parameter data that can be applied
"temporarily" for a given simulation.
Methods:
apply (model, file_names)
This method applies the settings in the files specified in "file_names" on the given model.
Example:
Adams.TemporarySettings.apply("MODEL_1", "C:/work/settings1.tsf",
"C:/work/settings2.tsf")
revert()
This method reverts the settings applied by the apply() method.
Example:
Adams.TemporarySettings.revert()
write (file_name)
This method writes out the settings in the file indicated by "file_name"
To write or export a TSF file, the following properties need to be set:
object_properties
object_values
solver_properties
Temporary Settings 487
Temporary Settings and Python
solver_values
Notes: The number of object properties should be equal to the number of object values.
The number of solver properties should be equal to the number of solver values.
Example:
Adams.TemporarySettings.object_properties =
["dv_1.value","joint_1.i_marker_name"]
Adams.TemporarySettings.object_values = ["45.0",".MODEL_1.PART_2.MARKER_2"]
Adams.TemporarySettings.solver_properties = ["CORRECTOR","save_files"]
Adams.TemporarySettings.solver_values = ["modified","YES"]
Adams.TemporarySettings.write("C:/work/test.tsf")
488 Adams View
Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools
Parameterization Basics
Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools
You can learn a great deal by running an Adams Simulation of a single configuration. You can learn even more
by manually changing your model, and running simulations again and again, but the process quickly becomes
tedious. Instead, you can use parameterization and the parametric tools that Adams View provides to
automate your changes.
Using parameterization, you can make a single change and your entire model automatically updates. Using
Parametric analyses, you can automatically run a series of simulations to see the effects of varying your model.
Parameterization move tools (f(x) and f( θ )that let you specify how one objects moves relative to
another object.
Expressions, which are the basis of all parameterization.
Optimization, which adjusts design variables to minimize or maximize a particular aspect of your
model's performance.
Temporary settings sweep, allows one to specify and execute a number of trials, each of which is
defined by applying one or more temporary settings files to the baseline model.
The first step in using parametric analyses is to understand design studies, DOEs, and optimizations, what
they do for you, and how they can work together. Depending on your model and interest, you may use one,
two, or all three to explore your model.
In all cases, you start by deciding which design variables to vary and how to measure the performance of your
model. In the latch model from the guide, Getting Started Using Adams View, for example, the design variables are
the coordinates of the pivot points, and the performance measure is the maximum spring force during the
simulation.
Learn more about the different types of parametric analyses you can run and how you can use them together:
About Design Studies
About Design of Experiments
About Optimization
About Temporary Settings Sweep
Using Design Study, DOE, Temporary Settings Sweep and Optimization Together
to make it easy to apply DOE techniques to your model. For more information on DOE techniques, see About
Design of Experiments.
Using a DOE and appropriate DOE techniques, you can:
Identify which design variables and combinations of design variables most affect the performance of
your model (screening).
Control the effects of variations due to real-world manufacturing and operating conditions (robust
design or the Taguchi method).
About Optimization
An optimization adjusts design variables to minimize or maximize a performance measure. You can set ranges
on how far to vary the design variables and add general constraints to keep the optimized design within overall
limits. Using an optimization, you can find the best performing values for design variables.
For more information on optimization techniques, see About Optimization and Running Parametric Analyses.
Using Design Study, DOE, Temporary Settings Sweep and Optimization Together
A design study, DOE, or optimization are useful individually, but combining several parametric
analyses can give you a fuller understanding of your model's performance. Design studies and DOEs
help you explore variations and trade-offs in performance, while optimizations try to find a specific
combination of design variable settings that achieve optimal performance.
For example, you might start exploring your model with one or two design studies on design
variables that you know are important. The design studies show you the major effects of changing
your design and allow you to make a first guess at good values for these variables.
You might then do a few more design studies or a screening DOE to find out if there are other
important design variables or interactions between design variables that you should consider.
When you have determined which design variables are the most important, you can use
optimization to fine-tune their values.
Once you have final values for the design variables, a design study or DOE can tell you what
happens when those values vary. This is important if you are concerned about variations in real-
world performance or you want to adjust your design to gain other advantages without sacrificing
performance.
A design study or DOE can also help you set up an optimization. If you do not have good initial
values for the design variables, the optimization can fail, be slow, or may converge to a design that is
not an overall optimum. A design study or DOE over a range of values can help find good initial
values for optimization. It also can give you a polynomial approximation that you can optimize
separately to find a starting point for a full optimization.
A temporary settings sweep allows one to specify and execute a number of trials, each of which is
defined by applying one or more Temporary Settings files to the baseline model.
Parameterization Basics 491
Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools
Using Expressions
Expressions are the basis of all parameterization. You can specify most modeling data in Adams View as either
a constant value or an expression that can change its value based on other objects and values in your model.
When you specify an expression, Adams View stores the expression and automatically updates the value
whenever a value in the expression changes.
For example, when you specify the mass of a part, you can supply a constant value, such as 5.0, or an
expression, such as:
(2 * .model_1.part_1.mass)
Using the expression above, the new part mass is always twice the mass of part_1, even if you change the mass
of part_1.
Expressions are always enclosed in parentheses and can include:
Constants
Standard mathematical operators and functions
Special Adams View functions
References to other object data in your model
You enter an expression directly in the text box for the value you want to parameterize. You can enter an
expression when you create the object or modify it later to use an expression.
Adams View contains a Function Builder to help you construct expressions. You access the Function Builder by
displaying the shortcut menu in a text box that accepts an expression, as explained in the next section.
Using Points
Points are the easiest way to parameterize the geometry of your model. Points let you specify important
locations once and build other modeling objects from them. When you move a point, the related objects
update automatically.
You create points using the Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack on the Main toolbox. For information on
points, also see the following sections:
Building Parameterization into Your Model as You Create Parts
492 Adams View
Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools
Creating Points
You attach new modeling objects to points by selecting the points as you graphically construct the object.
When you build objects on points, Adams View creates the necessary expressions for you.
Tip: Right-click near the point to display a list of all objects in the area and then select the desired
point from the list to ensure it gets selected.
You can also attach existing objects to a new point by using the Attach Near option when creating the new
point. In this case, Adams View creates expressions, using the function LOC_RELATIVE, to attach any
nearby markers to the new point. With this option, you can parameterize model geometry, forces, and
constraints as you need to rather than creating all points first.
If you later try to move an object that is attached to a point, Adams View warns you that doing so can break
the parameterization and asks you how you want to continue. The warning prevents you from accidentally
removing a relationship and also allows you to delete the relationship.
Usually you do not need to look at or understand the expressions that tie geometry to points. If you want to
create more complicated geometric relationships, however, understanding how points work can help you
write your own expressions.
If you draw a link between two points, for example, Adams View locates markers at each end of the link on
top of the points. Adams View also creates expressions to keep the markers tied to the points. If you request
information on one of the markers at the ends, you see something like the following for the location of the
marker:
Location: -150.0, 250.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
(LOC_RELATIVE_TO({0, 0, 0}, .model_1.ground.POINT_1))
The first line is the current value of the location of the marker relative to the link part. The second line is the
expression that Adams View created to keep the marker at the point. If you change the location of the point,
Adams View automatically evaluates the expression and computes a new location for the marker.
LOC_RELATIVE_TO is one of the Adams View functions that lets you locate points and markers relative
to other objects in your model. For more on Adams View functions, see the Adams View Function Builder online
help.
Parameterization Basics 493
Using the Parameterization Move Tools
Note: The f(x) tool described in this section is not the same as the f(x) tool explained in the Table
Editor. They perform different operations. For more information on the f(x) tool in the Table
Editor, see Working with Cells in the Table Editor.
For general information about the move tools, see Moving Objects Using the Move Tools.
f(x) Tool
Ties the location of a modeling object to a point or marker. You can either superimpose the object on the point
or marker (collapse the two objects) or keep the object offset from a point or marker (maintain current
distance).
The following figures show the two options for parameterizing locations using f(x). The first figure shows
how you can use the f(x) tool to collapse a marker that belongs to a link on a point. In the figure, Adams View
replaces the specific location of MAR_1 in the database with the expression:
(LOC_RELATIVE_TO ( {0,0,0}, .model_1.part_1.POINT_1))
The second figures shows the effects of using the f(x) tool to maintain the position of a marker on the link,
relative to a point. If you set Adams View to maintain their distance, when you move the point, the marker
494 Adams View
Using the Parameterization Move Tools
moves so it and the point are always the same distance relative to each other. In the figure, Adams View
replaces the specific location of MAR_1 in the database with the expression:
(LOC_RELATIVE_TO ({0,10,0}, .model_1.part_1.POINT_1))
f( θ ) Tool
Ties the orientation of a marker, constraint, or force to a marker. You have three options for tying the
orientation:
Same As
Along Axis
In Plane
f( θ ) - Same As
Same As is similar to using the f(x) Tool. It keeps the orientation of the object the same as a marker or keeps
the orientation offset from a marker. The Collapse and Maintain options are similar to those in the f(x) tool,
and the steps for parameterizing are the same as when using the f(x) tool.
The following two figures show the two options you have available for parameterizing locations using Same
As. The first figure shows how you can use the maintain option. The maintain option sets one object so its
current orientation is locked relative to a second object. In the figure, when you rotate MAR_2, MAR_1 on
the cylinder also rotates so it maintains its orientation relative to MAR_2. In the figure, Adams View replaces
the orientation of MAR_1 in the database with the expression:
(ORI_RELATIVE_TO ({90d, 90d, 0}, .MODEL_1.PART_1.MAR_2))
The next figure shows how to use the collapse option. The collapse option keeps the orientation of two
objects the same. The figure shows that when you lock the orientation of MAR_1 to that of MAR_2, the
cylinder changes accordingly when you rotate MAR_2. In the figure, Adams View replaces the orientation of
MAR_1 in the database with the expression:
(ORI_RELATIVE_TO ({0, 0, 0}, .MODEL_1.PART_1.MAR_2))
496 Adams View
Using the Parameterization Move Tools
f( θ ) - Along Axis
Keeps an axis of a marker, constraint, or force pointed toward a marker. This is useful if a marker in your model
defines a unique axis used in a joint or force.
Along Axis only controls one axis of the object. Adams View positions the object at an arbitrary angle about
the axis. If you need to completely control the orientation of the object, use the Same As or In Plane options.
The following figure shows how you can set the alignment of the unique axis (z) of a revolute joint to that of a
marker using Along Axis so the joint always aligns to the marker. In the figure, Adams View replaces the
orientation of the I and J markers that JOINT_1 references with the expression:
(ORI_ALONG_AXIS (.MODEL_1.PART_1.MAR_4, .MODEL_1.PART_1.MAR_1,
“z”))
f( θ ) - In Plane
Controls the orientation of a marker, constraint, or force by pointing one axis towards one marker and another
axis towards another marker. This completely determines the orientation because the third axis must be
perpendicular to the first two, with the positive direction based on the right-hand rule. In Plane uses the
function expression ORI_IN_PLANE.
Parameterization Basics 497
Using Design Variables
To tie an axis of a marker, constraint, or force so it points along the axis of another point or marker:
To tie two axes of a marker, constraint, or force to a plane defined by three markers:
1. From the Move tool stack, select the f( θ ) tool.
2. Select the option In Plane.
3. In the settings container, set the first and second axes of the object to control (X, Y, or Z).
4. Select the marker, constraint, or force to control.
5. Now define three locations to define the plane:
• The marker defining the axis start location.
• The marker defining the axis end location.
• A final location to complete the plane.
Adams View rotates the object so that the first axis points toward the first point or marker, and the second
axis points as closely as possible towards the second point or marker. Adams View also creates an expression
to keep the axes directed at the markers. If you move either of the markers, Adams View rotates the object to
realign the axis with the marker.
Depending on the locations that you selected, it may not be possible for both axes to pass through the
locations. Adams View orients the object so that the first axis passes through the first location, and the plane
defined by the two axes passes through the second location. This means that the second axis comes as close
as possible to the second location, but may not pass through it.
Design variables also let you organize the critical parameters in your design into a concise list of values that
you can easily review and modify. In addition, you can use Parametric analyses to automatically execute a series
of simulations that vary your design variables.
Design variables are Adams View variable objects. Variable objects are general-purpose places to store data or
expressions. A design variable is a variable you use specifically to parameterize your model. This chapter and
the parameterization tools use the term design variable. Some tools, such as the Command Navigator and the
Table Editor, apply to all variables, however. In those contexts, you see just the term variable. It it applies to all
variables, including design variables.
Also see Updating Variables.
To create a design variable using the Create Design Variable dialog box:
1. On the ribbon menu, click the Design Exploration tab. From the Design Variable container, click
the Design Variable icon .
4. Enter a standard value for the design variable, and set any other options as explained in the
Create/Modify Design Variable dialog box.
5. Select OK.
Adams View creates the design variable.
Now that you've created a design variable, you'll need to reference it in your model. You can enter the design
variable directly, using the Reference Design Variable command, or you can type it into a text box. You can
also use the Function Builder to create a more complex expression using the design variable. When you
reference your design variable, Adams View places parentheses () around the variable because you are creating
a simple expression that references the value of the design variable.
3. Right-click the text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Create Design Variable.
Adams View creates a new design variable with a default name and the value that was in the text box
and inserts an expression such as (.my_model.DV_1) into the text box.
4. Create or modify the object as appropriate.
Adams View creates or modifies the object using your design variable for the value you selected.
To modify a design variable using the Modify Design Variable dialog box:
1. Click the Design Exploration tab. From the Instrumentation container, click the Design Variable
tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, select Design Variable, and then point to Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the design variable you want to modify, and then select OK.
Adams View displays the Create/Modify Design Variable dialog box and loads the current properties for
the design variable you selected.
3. Change the properties as desired, following the instructions in the Create/Modify Design Variable dialog
box.
4. Select OK.
If you changed the value of the design variable, Adams View immediately updates any objects that
refer to the design variable.
Note: By default, the Table Editor displays only variables of the type real in your model. You
can display other types of variables, such as string, object, or integer, and control the
columns that are displayed using the Filters button, which displays the Variables Table
Editor Filters dialog box. Learn about Setting Types of Objects Displayed in the Table Editor.
If you want to use unequally spaced values or always use the same set of values, you can specify a list of the
values for the design study and DOE to use. By default, the list of values takes precedence over the range in
a design study or DOE.
If you specify a range, an optimization analysis only varies the variable value within that range, by default. An
optimization ignores a list of values.
For each design variable, you also specify whether the range and allowed values (if any) are absolute (literal)
values, increments relative to the standard value, or percentage increments relative to the standard value. For
example, if the value of the variable is 5, and you enter any of the following, they all give an actual range of
4 to 6:
Absolute range of 4 to 6
Relative range of -1 to +1
Percent relative range of -20 to +20
Adams View may have set a default range when you created the design variable, so you may not need to
change the variable to run a parametric analysis. It is a good idea, however, to review the settings for a variable
before using it in a parametric analysis.
A good way to start is to set the variable range to include values you think are interesting and realistic for your
design. Using a range gives you the most flexibility in selecting the number of values to use in a design study
or DOE and it also keeps the optimization analysis from changing the variable to an unrealistic value.
If only a certain range of values is possible, use absolute limits to keep the variable within that fixed range.
Otherwise, use relative or percent relative limits to include a reasonable amount above and below your initial
value. Relative and percent-relative limits tie the range to the value of the variable, so if you change the value
of the variable, the limits automatically change with it.
You control design variable values using the:
Create/Modify Design Variable dialog box
Table Editor
To control variable values using the Modify Design Variable dialog box:
1. On the ribbon menu, click the Design Exploration tab. From the Design Variable container, click
the Design Variable icon .
4. If you want to allow an optimization to use any value for the variable, select Allow Optimization to
ignore range.
Note: Selecting Allow Optimization to ignore range also disables the range for a design study
and DOE, however, so you should turn off this option when you are preparing for a
design study or DOE. If you try to start a design study or DOE while this option is
selected, Adams View issues an error (unless you have also entered a list of values).
5. If you want to specify a list of values, select List of allowed values and enter the values in the text box
that appears. To keep the list of values and still use the range for a design study and DOE, select the
Allow Design Study to ignore list check box. By selecting Allow Design Study to ignore list, you can
switch back and forth between using the range and the list of values without re-entering the list each
time.
Note: The Value Range setting also affects the allowed values you enter. For example, if you
selected a Value Range of percent relative, then Adams View interprets your entered
allowed values as percentages relative to the standard value.
6. Select OK.
Note: The Table Editor column headings are based on the Adams View command language
and are more concise than the dialog box labels.
4. Change the properties of a design variable as explained the table below for the columns you displayed,
and then select OK. Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
504 Adams View
Preparing for Parametric Analyses
In many cases, the System elements (differential equations, transfer functions, and so on) can be helpful in
numerically integrating, filtering, or transforming model outputs into more useful objectives. Learn more
about System Elements.
Types of Objectives
Adams View gives you four options for the type of objective to create:
This is similar to the measure option, but lets you reference any
Adams Solver output data, such as data from a request. You enter
just the name of the result set and component, for example req1.x.
Adams View uses the result set component in the analysis for which
Adams View is computing the objective function. For more on
result set components, see About Simulation Output.
result_set_component = "REQ1/Z"
output_characteristic = maximum
Adams View function Adams View applies the specified Adams View function object to
the simulation results allowing you to compute any scalar function
of the model outputs. For example, this is useful for combining
scalar values from different outputs, such as summing the
maximums from several outputs.
function_name = FUN1
text_of_expressions =
"max(analysis.req1.z.values)"
argument_names = analysis
type = real
Then, create the objective as explained in Creating an Objective Object.
function_name = FUN1
text_of_expression =".mod1.par4.mass +
.mod1.par5.mass - 50.0"
argument_names = analysis
type = real
Note that you still specify one argument named analysis, even when
you do not use analysis data.
The macro must have one parameter, and the parameter must be
named analysis. Adams View invokes the macro with parameter
analysis set to the name of the analysis for which Adams View is
computing the objective. Your macro must perform the
computations, and put the resulting objective value into the
specified variable. For more information on creating macros and
parameters, see About Creating Macros.
The following is an example of a variable and macro:
Notes: Objectives usually involve simulation results, but they are not required to do so. You
can create an objective that depends only on the model data, such as overall weight
or size. You can then use Adams View to vary, or even optimize, the design variables
and immediately see the results on the model.
In this case, use the function or variable/macro option for the objective, and ignore
the analysis argument or parameter that Adams View supplies. Because you do not
need simulation results, you should also create a dummy simulation script that does
nothing (see Creating a Simulation Script). Then, Adams View repeatedly sets the
variables and evaluate the objective, but does not run any simulations.
3. Enter the name of the measure, result set component, function, or macro and variable. If you are
entering a result set component, enter the name of the result set and component, for example req1.x.
4. If you are using a measure or result set component, set the Design Objective's value is the option
menu to the selected value.
5. Select OK.
Note: You do not need to create an explicit constraint to limit the value of a design variable. You
can do this directly by setting properties for the variable. See Controlling Variable Values.
Each constraint object creates an inequality constraint. The optimization keeps the value of the constraint
less than or equal to zero. You can create an equality constraint, in effect, by creating a pair of constraint
objects, each the negative of the other.
Constraints can involve the simulation results, but are not required to do so. You can constrain overall size,
weight, or other factors that depend only on model data. In these cases, use the function or macro/variable
option for the constraint, and ignore the analysis data that Adams View supplies. Instead, compute the
constraint directly from the appropriate model data.
510 Adams View
Preparing for Parametric Analyses
2. Follow the procedures for creating an objective object as explained in Creating an Objective Object.
Note: You may want to change the display, output, and optimizer options before you run a parametric
analysis. Learn more about Optimization Settings.
Tip: Before running the parametric analysis, you can preview it by selecting Preview. Preview
shows you each configuration of your model for every design variable. It displays an alert box
asking you if you want to pause after each configuration. Select YES to pause.
Tip: By default Adams View writes out a parasolid file of the model geometry for each run in the
parametric analysis. This can take up time and disk space, especially for models with large
geometry. If the model geometry is not changing run-to-run, then it may be advantageous
to instruct Adams not repeat this geometry writing process for each run. This can be done
by clicking the "Output" button for the Design Evaluation Tools dialog, setting "Output
Category" to "Database Storage" and selecting "Yes" for "One Parasolid".
To complete the information for a design study and execute the analysis:
1. Begin the analysis as explained in Beginning a Design Study, DOE, or Optimization Analysis.
2. In the Design Variable text box in the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, enter the name of the design
variable that you want to vary.
Note: You cannot enter more than one design variable in the text box. If you need to enter more
than one design variable, then perform a DOE.
3. If you specified only a range for the design variable, enter the number of levels (values) you want to
use in the Default Levels text box.
4. Select Start.
Adams View runs a simulation for each level of the design variable. When the simulations are done,
Adams View returns the variable to its original value.
• If you specified only a range for the design variable, Adams View uses equally spaced levels across
the range. You specify the number of levels in the Default Levels text box.
• If you specified a list of values for the design variable, Adams View runs a simulation using each
value, ignoring the Default Levels text box.
For more information about variable ranges and values, see Controlling Variable Values.
Analysis Results
Adams View creates an analysis object named Last_Multi under your model. The analysis contains a result set
named Design_Study_Results. The result set contains the following components:
Trial, which contains the number of each run (one through the number of runs).
Component with the same name as the design variable, which contains the values used for the
variable for each run.
For each measure or objective, a component with the same name as the objective or measure, which
contains the values of the performance measure for each run.
Note: If the analysis Last_Multi already exists from a previous parametric analysis, Adams View
deletes the previous results and replaces them with the new results. Learn how to save results
permanently at Saving Results.
Completing a DOE
Learn how to complete a Design of experiments (DOE) analysis and how Adams View stores the results of the
analysis:
Completing and Executing a DOE
514 Adams View
Running Parametric Analyses
Analysis Results
Note: The enhanced DOE capabilities found in Adams Insight, provide you with more sophisticated
experiments and improved results in an easy-to-use interface. For more information, see the
Adams Insight online help, or contact your MSC sales representative.
Analysis Results
Adams View creates an analysis named Last_Multi under your model. The analysis contains a result set named
DOE_Results. The result set contains:
Parameterization Basics 515
Running Parametric Analyses
Component named Trial that contains the number of each run (one through the number of runs).
For each design variable, a component with the same name as the variable, which contains the values
used for the variable in each run.
For each measure or objective, a component with the same name as the objective or measure, which
contains the values of the performance measure for each run.
Note: If analysis Last_Multi already existed from a previous parametric analysis, Adams View
deletes the previous results and replaces them with the new results. For instructions on
permanently saving previous results, see Saving Results.
Completing an Optimization
Learn how to complete an Optimization and how Adams View stores the results of an analysis:
Completing and Executing an Optimization
Analysis Results
Note: If you simultaneously run optimizations of two Adams View models, from the same working
directory, Adams View may crash.
If you specified constraints, Adams View increases or decreases the objective as much as possible
without violating the constraints. For information about using constraints to control the
optimization, see Creating Constraints (Optimization Only).
Adams View iteratively adjusts the design variable values, attempting to improve the model
performance with each iteration. Adams View may need to backtrack to avoid violating a constraint
or limit on a variable value. Therefore, the model performance does not necessarily improve with each
iteration. At each iteration, Adams View runs several simulations to approximate derivatives and
converge on the next iteration.
The last iteration will be the best values that the optimization could find without violating constraints
or limits. Adams View normally leaves the design variables set to the optimized values. If you interrupt
the analysis or Adams View encounters an error during the analysis, Adams View resets the variables
to their original values.
If you do not want to keep the optimized values, and you selected the Auto. Save check box or used
the Save button to save the original values, you can select the Restore button to return the variables
to their original values.
Analysis Results
Adams View creates an analysis object named Last_Multi under the current model in the Modeling database.
The analysis contains a result set named Optimization_Results. The result set contains:
Component named Iteration that contains the number of each iteration (one through the number of
iteration). Iteration zero is the initial model configuration.
For each design variable, a component with the same name as the variable that contains the values
used for the variable for each iteration.
Component with the same name as the objective or measure that contains the values of the
performance measure for each iteration.
Note: If the analysis Last_Multi already existed from a previous parametric analysis, Adams View
deletes the previous results and replaces them with the new results. Learn about Saving Results.
4. Select Start and Adams will run one simulation for each row in the table and then revert the model
back to its baseline configuration
Analysis Results
Adams View creates an analysis named Last_Multi under your model. The analysis contains a result set
named Temporary_Settings_Sweep_Results. The result set contains:
Component named Trial that contains the number of each run (one through the number of rows in
the table).
For each measure or objective, a component with the same name as the objective or measure, which
contains the values of the performance measure for each run.
Saving Results
By default, Adams View overwrites the current results if you perform another parametric analysis. You can
automatically and permanently save all parametric results using the Solver Settings dialog box. Learn About
Setting Simulation Controls. You can also save a single set of results using the Save Design Results to Database
tool at the bottom of the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box.
Note: Be sure to save your modeling database after you save the parametric analysis results. Learn
about Saving Modeling Database.
Deleting Results
To delete a single set of simulation results:
1. From the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, right-click the Save Design Results to Database tool
to display its Tool stack.
2. From the tool stack, select the Delete Results from Database tool .
Generating Plots
You can plot parametric results in the following ways:
1. At the top of the Solver Settings dialog box, set Category to Display.
2. Select More.
3. In the Design Evaluation Display area, select Chart objective and Save
Curve.
For more information, press F1 when the Solver Settings dialog box is active.
Manual plots You can also transfer the strip chart to the plotting window for further use, or
you can use the Results option in the plotting window to plot the parametric
results directly. For more information on creating and modifying plots using the
plotting window, see Transferring a Strip Chart to Adams PostProcessor, and the Adams
PostProcessor online help.
Parameterization Basics 519
Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results
1. From the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, select the Plot Results tool
.
Adams View displays the Plot Design Evaluation Results dialog box.
2. In the Result Set text box, enter the name of the parametric analysis
result set you want to plot.
3. To generate a plot of the measure or objectives versus the variable value,
trial number, or iteration number, select Measure/Objective vs. Run.
4. To generate a plot of the measure or objectives versus time with a curve
for each trial or iteration, select Measure vs. Time For All Runs. If you
use this option, you must have specified a measure or an objective that
refers to a measure or result set component (not a macro or function). In
addition, you must have saved the results from the individual runs. For
information on saving results from individual runs, see Setting Simulation
Controls.
5. Select OK.
Adams View generates one or two plots and displays the plotting window
showing the last plot.
Generating a Table
You can set up Adams View to create a table that contains the following:
Description of the model.
measure or objective.
Constraints (if any).
Design variables used in the analysis.
Table of the objective, constraint, and variable values for each trial or iteration.
For a Design study, the table also includes a column of approximate design sensitivities for each trial. The
approximate design sensitivity is the average of the sensitivity with respect to the preceding trial and the
sensitivity with respect to the following trial, as shown in the formula below:
520 Adams View
Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results
where:
O - Objective value
V - Design variable value
i - Iterations
Note: For the first trial, Adams View computes the value from the changes between the first and
second trial. For the last trial, it computes the value from the changes between the next-to-
last trial and the last trial.
You can control the format of the numbers in the table, the width of the columns, and the precision of the
numbers. For the format of the numbers, you can select:
Automatic - Selects either exponential or fixed, depending on the size of the number and the
column width. If you select automatic format, the value you enter for the precision of the numbers
sets the overall number of digits.
Exponential or fixed - The value you enter for the precision sets the number of digits past the
decimal point.
Note: You can set Adams View to automatically display a table at the end of a parametric analysis.
Setting Simulation Controls.
Updating Variables
You can use the Update Variables tool from the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box to set the design variable
values to those of a trial or iteration. This is helpful if you want to:
Update your model to match the best trial of a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE) analysis.
Visualize the variable settings of a particular trial or iteration.
Parameterization Basics 521
Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results
DOE/Optimization
About Design of Experiments
Learn more about general information on Design of experiments (DOE) techniques and a description of the DOE
tools in Adams View:
Note: For more on DOE techniques, see the Adams Insight online help, if installed.
What is DOE?
Design of experiments (also called experimental design) is a collection of procedures and statistical tools for
planning experiments and analyzing the results. In general, the experiments may measure the performance of
a physical prototype, the yield of a manufacturing process, or the quality of a finished product.
Although DOE techniques were developed around physical experiments, they work just as well with virtual
experiments in Adams View. In the case of Adams View, the experiments help you better understand and
refine the performance of your mechanical system. DOE techniques can improve your understanding of your
design, increase the reliability of your conclusions, and often get you an answer faster than trial-and-error
experimentation.
For simple design problems, it is often possible to explore and optimize the behavior of your system using a
combination of intuition, trial-and-error, and brute force. As the number of design options increases,
however, it becomes more and more difficult to do this quickly and systematically. Varying just one parameter
at a time does not tell you a lot about the interactions between parameters. Trying many different parameter
combinations can require many simulations, therefore leaving you with a great deal of output data to sift
through and understand.
DOE methods provide planning and analysis tools for running a series of experiments. The basic process is
to first determine the purpose of the experiments. You might want to identify which variations have the
biggest effect on your system, for example. You then choose a set of parameters (called factors) for the system
you are investigating and develop a way to measure the appropriate system response. You then select a set of
values for each parameter (called levels) and plan a set of experiments (called runs, trials, or treatments) in
which you vary the parameter values from one experiment to another. The combination of actual runs to
perform is called the design.
An experiment set up in this way is called a designed experiment, or matrix experiment. The runs are
described by the design matrix, that has a column for each factor and a row for each run. The matrix entries
are the level for each factor for each run. For an example of a design matrix, see Specifying a Design Matrix.
You then execute the runs, recording the performance of the system at each run and analyze the changes in
performance across the runs. The type of analysis depends on the purpose of the experiment. Common
analyses are analysis of variance (ANOVA) that determines the relative importance of the factors, and linear
regression, which fits an assumed mathematical model to the results.
DOE/Optimization 523
About Design of Experiments
Experiments with two or three factors may only require five or ten runs. As the number of factors and levels
grows, however, the number of runs can quickly escalate to dozens, even hundreds. As a result, a good design
is critical to the success of the experiment. It should contain as few runs as possible, yet give enough
information to accurately depict the behavior of your system. The best design depends on the number of
factors and levels, the nature of the factors, assumptions about the behavior of the product or process, and
the overall purpose of the experiment.
DOE methods allow you to combine all of these requirements into a efficient, effective design for your
problem, and couple it with the appropriate analysis of the results.
Actually, DOE complements optimization techniques, and is often used in conjunction with optimization.
A screening analysis can determine which parameters are good candidates for optimization that improve the
reliability and speed of an optimization algorithm. Response surface methods can also create a simplified
mathematical model for optimization, that can be evaluated much more quickly and easily than a full
simulation or experiment. Even if the simplified model gives only an approximate optimum, it can be used
as a good starting point for a full optimization.
More than just helping you find the right answer, however, DOE also helps you explore the relationships
between the parameters and your system's performance. A design may combine the optimum parameters, but
what are the effects of real-life variations due to manufacturing, wear, or changes in operating conditions? Or
perhaps you only need to ensure that the performance stays within a certain tolerance, and you want to know
the range of values that will meet that tolerance.
Knowing the optimum point for your system is often important, but may not be the whole story. In many
cases, it is just as important to understand what happens in the area surrounding the optimum, and why.
Built-in Designs
When you run a DOE in Adams View, you may select from several built-in designs. If you select any one of
these, Adams View generates the design matrix for you. Adams View generates full-factorial designs.
The full-factorial design uses all of the combinations of levels. The total number of runs will be mn, where m
is the number of levels and n is the number of factors. Because this grows very quickly, full factorial is only
practical for a small number of factors and levels.
For information about specifying your own trial matrix or transferring a design matrix from an outside
program into Adams View, see Specifying a Design Matrix.
You can also store your design matrix in a file and then specify the file name when running a DOE
analysis. The first line of the file contains three numbers. The first number is the number of factors
for this DOE. The second number is the number of levels for each factor. The third number is the
number of trials to be found on the subsequent lines of the file. Each line that follows contains indexes
to the levels for each factor.
The following is an example of a file that you could use for an experiment with two factors, three
levels, and four trials:
2 3 4
0 +1
-1 0
+1 -1
+1 +1
About Optimization
Learn general information on Optimization, tips on using the optimization tools in Adams View, and additional
reference material for the Adams View optimization analysis:
Optimization Background
Learn general information on Optimization:
Why Optimize?
What is Optimization?
Mathematics and Methods
Additional References
Why Optimize?
Optimization is a sophisticated tool that helps you improve the overall design of your product. Having a good
design early in the process helps you shorten your design cycle.
Most designs have specific requirements, such as to support a specified load or trace a specified path. There
is usually some means of distinguishing a good design from a bad design: it is too heavy or it will cost too
much to produce. Some requirements can be restrictions on a design: packaging, end conditions, or material
availability.
Part of the design process is to manipulate the unknowns (variables) in a design to arrive at a good design that
satisfies all goals (objectives) and restrictions (constraints). If these features can be quantified, optimization
techniques can be used to analytically arrive at the theoretical best solution. The process of optimization can
also provide you with important information such as:
Are there too many constraints on the solution, where relaxing certain specifications might provide
an acceptable result?
Are there superfluous design constraints, and do some design constraints dictate the results?
Is the overall design sensitive to certain design parameters and not others?
DOE/Optimization 527
About Optimization
What is Optimization?
In general, an optimization problem is described as a problem to minimize or maximize an objective function
over a selection of design variables, while satisfying various constraints on the design and state variables of the
system. Various algorithms are available for finding a solution to an optimization problem, given the problem
has been formulated in the manner described in this section.
The objective function is a numerical representation of the quality, efficiency, cost, or stability of the model.
You decide whether the optimization chooses to find the minimum or maximum of the function. The
optimum value of this function corresponds to the best design possible using that particular mathematical
model. Examples of objective functions include execution time, energy (effort) required, and total material
costs.
Design variables can be thought of as the unknowns for the design problem. These are the parameters you
can alter to define the design. Changes in the design variables should result in changes to the objective.
Examples of design variables are part dimensions, force amplitudes, and individual part masses.
Constraints are boundaries that directly or indirectly eliminate unacceptable designs. Constraints often take
the form of additional goals for the design:
The overall weight of the machine must be less than 1 ton.
The path traced by a robot arm must pass through certain points
The fundamental frequency of a vehicle must be greater than 1 Hz.
minJ ( x, u ) )
u
(read as: minimize the objective function J over choices of u, the design variables)
subject to:
x· = f ( x, u )
g ( x, u ) ≤ 0
with initial and final conditions given by:
If a solution exists, the output of the optimization gives the optimal design variables u* that satisfy all of the
constraints and minimize the objective function J. The formulation and solution of such an optimization
problem involves standard techniques of mathematical programming. You are only required to describe the
optimization problem in the terms outlined above.
528 Adams View
About Optimization
Solutions
A local minimum or maximum exists where the gradient, or derivative of J with respect to u, goes to zero.
For this reason, the solution to an optimization is the solution to a system of nonlinear equations. Nonlinear
solvers are iterative methods that take steps of the form:
(i + 1) (i)
u ←u – αS
Where the u's are the iterates, S is referred to as the search direction, and is the step size. In English, each
step of the process tries to get close to the solution by traveling along the direction S by an amount . The
determination of and S distinguishes the solution algorithms. S is usually of the form:
S = HΔJ
-J denotes the gradient of J. H is referred to as the Hessian (matrix) of J and is constructed to improve the
convergence of the algorithm. The best convergence is achieved when H is the Jacobian matrix of second
partial derivative of J. This is the Newton-Raphson method. Newton-Raphson is rarely used, since the
computation of these derivatives is often impossible or too expensive to calculate. Other methods use various,
less expensive approximations to the Jacobian.
Once the search direction, S, is chosen, the step size is chosen using a one-dimensional minimization of J
with as the design variable. This is usually referred to as the line search and uses the bisection algorithm,
golden search, or any of a number of minimization methods.
Additional References
VMA Engineering. DOT User's Manual. Goleta, CA, 1993.
J. J. More and S. J. Wright. Optimization Software Guide, SIAM, Philadelphia, 1993.
D. E. Kirk. Optimal Control Theory. Prentice - Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1970.
U. Kirsch. Optimum Structural Design. McGraw-Hill, 1981
Adams View prints the objective or constraint value in the Information window.
it is usually impractical to allow zero damping, so keep the lower bound above zero if you use damping as a
design variable.
Second, you should make sure that your model is stable. Small changes in the design variables should not lead
to gross changes in the objective function. Like everything else, optimization algorithms work best with
smooth, stable functions. For more information on improving optimizer performance, see Ensuring Accurate
Run Results.
If the model is not robust, optimization is still possible, but more effort is required. In particular, the
parameters for the finite differencing need to be massaged. The key to accurate optimization is good gradient
information. Presently, Adams uses finite differences to compute gradients. You have control over the method
and step size used. The forward difference method passes a line through the design point and a forward
perturbation. The central difference method passes a parabola through the design point and both a forward
and backward perturbation.
If you are certain that your model is robust, use forward differences since it is faster. If not, use central
differences to focus in on the optimum, then switch to forward differences.
The size of the perturbation can also reduce the effect of errors in the analysis. Naturally, you want to remove
as much of this as you can. If you are uncertain of the accuracy and smoothness of your model, use a large
perturbation at first, then reduce it as you get better designs. Remember that the accuracy of the gradients
generally improves as the perturbations get smaller.
When optimizing curves, try to define the curve using analytical functions. If you must use discrete values,
use control points. The optimizer tends to perturb curve points one at a time. The interpolation using curve
points (cubic splines) tends to be more oscillatory under single point perturbation, which can confuse an
optimization algorithm.
The scaling of the optimization variables (design, constraints, and objective) also affects the performance. It
is best to choose variables and functions that are similar in magnitude.
Monitor the scale of objectives, gradients, and constraints. Large values for objectives and gradients impede
optimization. Small values of constraints under-emphasize the constraints.
difference in the objectives and constraints is measured with respect to the change in the design variables.
When using forward differencing, one analysis is performed for each design variable. When central
differencing is used, two analyses are performed for each design variable.
Once the gradients are computed, the optimization algorithm determines a search direction. A line search is
performed in this direction, attempting to improve the design. The number of iterations performed by the
line search is determined greatly by the accuracy of the gradients. If the gradients are highly accurate, then
the line search often terminates after one or two analyses. If the gradients are poor, then the line search can
cause ten or more analyses to be performed. These estimates vary widely depending upon your particular
optimization algorithm.
So, for forward differencing:
runs_per_iteration =number_of_design_variables + length_of_line_search
For central differencing:
runs_per_iteration =2 * number_of_design_variables + length_of_line_search
Refining an Optimization
Optimization is an iterative process in more ways than one. You will probably perform several optimizations
before you are satisfied with the results.
The way you define design variables, constraints, and objective functions has a profound effect on the
performance of the optimizer and on the results of the optimization. You may need to change your objective,
add constraints, or make other changes before you pose your problem in the right way.
The default values for optimization parameters may not always give the final answer, but can bring you closer
to the final answer. You may need to experiment with optimization settings to arrive at the best combination
for your application.
Optimization Settings
The optimization settings are accessible from the Solver Settings dialog box when you select Optimization.
Learn about Accessing the Solver Settings Dialog Box.
Learn about each of the optimizer settings:
Algorithm
Convergence Tolerance
Maximum Iterations
Rescale Iterations
Differencing Technique
532 Adams View
About Optimization
Differencing Increment
Debugging Output
Minimum Number of Converged Iterations
User Parameters
Algorithm
Algorithm specifies the algorithm used to perform the optimization. The MSCADS algorithms are provided
with Adams View. The DOT algorithms can be purchased from Vanderplaats R&D, Inc. You can also
include your own optimization algorithm. The contact information for Vanderplaats R&D, Inc. is:
Vanderplaats R&D, Inc.
1767 S. 8th Street, Suite. 100
Colorado Springs, CO 80906
http://www.vrand.com/
http://www.vrand.com/products/dot-optimization/
MSCADS-MMFD - Use the MMFD (Modified Method of Feasible Directions) algorithm from
MSC Automated Design Synthesis (MSCADS) code. This algorithm requires that design variables
have range limits, since it works in scaled space.
MSCADS-SQP - Use the SQP (Sequential Quadratic Programming) algorithm from MSC
Automated Design Synthesis code. This algorithm requires that design variables have range limits,
since it works in scaled space.
MSCADS-SLP - Use the SLP (Sequential Linear Programming) algorithm from MSC Automated
Design Synthesis code. This algorithm requires that design variables have range limits, since it works
in scaled space.
MSCADS-SUMT - Use the SUMT (Sequential Unconstrained Minimization Technique)
algorithm from MSC Automated Design Synthesis code. This algorithm requires that design
variables have range limits, since it works in scaled space.
MSCADS-OPT - Enables a user selectable optimization strategy as documented in Vanderplaats,
G.N., ADS - A Fortran program for Automated Design Synthesis - Version 1.10, NASA CR
177985, 1985, Appendix A. The default is recommended.
DOT1 - Use DOT with BFGS (Broydon-Fletcher-Goldfarb-Shanno) for unconstrained problems.
Use DOT with MMFD (Modified Method of Feasible Directions) for constrained problems.
DOT2 - Use DOT with FR (Fletcher-Reeves) for unconstrained problems. Use DOT with SLP
(Sequential Linear Programming) for constrained problems.
DOT3 - Use DOT with FR (same as DOT2) for unconstrained problems. Use DOT with SQP
(Sequential Quadratic Programming) for constrained problems.
User 1, User 2, User 3 - Allows you to invoke a user-written optimization algorithm that has been
linked to Adams View. (See Linking External Algorithms.)
Convergence Tolerance
Convergence tolerance is the limit below which subsequent differences of the objective must fall before an
optimization is considered successful. If the condition ABS(objective[now] - objective[now-1]) <
DOE/Optimization 533
About Optimization
convergence_tolerance is true for a certain number of iterations (usually two), then the convergence tolerance
criterion is met. Note that this is only one test that is made by most optimization algorithms before they
terminate successfully.
Like other Adams Solver tolerances, you may need to experiment with this tolerance to find the right value
for your application. Display the objective versus iteration strip chart. If the optimizer quits even though the
last iteration made noticeable progress, try reducing the tolerance. If the optimizer continues iterating even
after the objective has stopped changing very much, make the tolerance larger.
Maximum Iterations
Maximum iterations tells the optimization algorithm how many iterations it should take before it admits
failure.
Note that a single iteration can have an arbitrarily large number of analysis runs (see Predicting Execution Time).
Rescale Iterations
Rescale iterations is the number of iterations after which the design variable values are rescaled. If you set the
value to -1, scaling is turned off.
Differencing Technique
The differencing technique controls how the optimizer computes gradients for the design functions.
Centered differencing perturbs each design variable in the negative direction from the nominal value, then
again in the positive direction using finite differencing between the perturbed results to compute the gradient.
If you choose forward differencing, each design variable is perturbed in a positive direction only.
Centered differencing can sometimes generate smoother, more reliable gradients (especially in noisy models),
but it causes twice as many analysis runs to be performed.
Differencing Increment
The differencing increment specifies the size of increment to use when performing finite differencing to
compute gradients. When using forward differencing this value is added to the nominal value of each design
variable on successive runs. When using central differencing, this value is first subtracted from the nominal
value and then added to it.
Smaller increments may give more accurate approximations of the gradient, but are also more susceptible to
random variations from run to run. Larger increments help minimize the effects of variations, but gives less
accurate gradients. For more information on controlling variations, see Ensuring Accurate Run Results.
Debugging Output
Turning on debugging output sends copious optimizer diagnostics to the window that launched Adams View.
Keep an eye on that window anyway, as some important warnings might be written there.
The debugging output shows you the data the optimizer is receiving from Adams View, among other things.
If the optimizer is behaving erratically, this may help you determine the source of the problem.
534 Adams View
About Optimization
User Parameters
Adams View passes the user parameters to a user-written optimization algorithm. Realizing that there may be
parameter information that is not conveyed through the existing parameter set, this parameter was added to
allow you to pass any real numeric data to your algorithm.
UDE Basics
The other way to work with UDEs in Adams View is manually through the Adams View command language
and by writing your own macros to enable basic functionality for these UDEs like modify, copy, delete and
so on.
Both of these ways of working are described in this guide in the following two sections.
Both these actions launch the Create UDE Definition dialog. The topological objects tab will be populated
with those items chosen from the model browser, or empty if you came to the dialog via the ribbon icon.
536 Adams View
Interactive UDE Authoring
You can edit the topological object list a number of ways from this dialog:
Select All: selects all objects currently in the model
Load from Group: selects all objects within an Adams View group
Clear All: removes all objects from the Topological Objects field
Right-Click Menu: right-clicking within the Topological Objects field enables one to pick or browse
for objects
Again, because these are topological objects you need not include supporting items. The following items will
be automatically detected and included in the UDE definition:
Force graphic objects corresponding to any force objects in the topological object set
Design variables which influence objects in the topological object set
In general, if a child object is selected then its parent will automatically get selected. For example,
geometry will auto-select parent part.
Non modeling items are automatically filtered out. For example, gravity, analysis_scripts and so on.
No UDE instance is selectable except certain allowed UDE instances listed next: spring,
torsion_spring, general_motion, vpg_road, vpg_tire, controls_plant, controls_gain, controls_input,
controls_integrator, controls_lead_lag, controls_low_pass, controls_pid, controls_second_order,
controls_sum, controls_switch, controls_transfer_function
User Defined Elements (UDE) 537
Interactive UDE Authoring
Inputs
Upon clicking Next from the “Topological Objects” tab (or the “Variables” tab) you are taken to the
“Parameters” tab. This is where all entities in the model identified as part of the UDE Definition are sorted
by type: Object, Parameter, Input and Output.
User Defined Elements (UDE) 541
Interactive UDE Authoring
Managing Inputs
Inputs are any entities outside the UDE definition’s topological object set referenced by the UDE definition.
They become an “input_parameter” object under a “ude_definitition” in the Adams View database. Typical
examples are markers that are used to locate objects in the definition (for example, via a parametric
expression) or markers that complete an object in the UDE definition’s topological object set (for example,
the J marker of a joint or force whose I marker is on a part within the definition).
The topological objects in the UDE definition cannot exist in a model without these inputs being specified
a value. Therefore, there is no ability to toggle these inputs to another category in the table. During instance
creation these inputs must be assigned a value; so, a field will be present for each of them on the instance
creation dialog. You can use the “Rename” column in the table to edit the default name to something more
meaningful to users creating instances.
Note: In this release, you cannot rename inputs or outputs after this point (that is, when
modifying the UDE definition later)
542 Adams View
Interactive UDE Authoring
The diagram below is a schematic of a model and illustrates an example of the inputs that would be identified
based on a UDE definition’s topological objects’ relationship to the rest of the model:
Outputs
Upon clicking Next from the “Topological Objects” tab (or the “Variables” tab) you are taken to the
“Parameters” tab. This is where all entities in the model identified as part of the UDE Definition are sorted
by type: Object, Parameter, Input and Output.
User Defined Elements (UDE) 543
Interactive UDE Authoring
Managing Outputs
Outputs are any entities inside the UDE definition’s topological object set that should be accessible outside
the UDE. They become an “output_parameter” object under a “ude_definitition” in the Adams View
database. Typical examples are markers on parts within your UDE definition used by joints or forces outside
the UDE definition. Such items cannot have their type toggled from output to something else in this tab.
But, you can add outputs to your UDE definition. A typical example is a marker that you want exposed for
use as an input to a different UDE. You need not declare markers that you might want to hook up to normal
(that is, non-UDE-resident) objects in your model. Such markers are always available to you through either
the model browser or the command navigator.
During instance creation outputs must be assigned a value; so, a field will be present for each of them on the
instance creation dialog. You can use the “Rename” column in the table to edit the default name to something
more meaningful to users creating instances.
544 Adams View
Interactive UDE Authoring
Note: In this release, you cannot rename inputs or outputs after this point (that is, when
modifying the UDE definition later).
The diagram below is a schematic of a model and illustrates an example of the outputs that would be
identified based on a UDE definition’s topological objects’ relationship to the rest of the model and one that
could be added by the user:
User Defined Elements (UDE) 545
Interactive UDE Authoring
Storing in a Library
If stored in a library the UDE definition will not be included when exporting an Adams View command file
of a model (even if that model contains instances based on the UDE definition). Typically library storage of
UDE definitions is done by organizations that have groups of Adams experts responsible for developing and
sharing modeling methodology. Then, other colleagues using Adams have a procedure to access the expert
library and update their Adams sessions with it (typically via an Adams View command file, like the
aview.cmd, that automatically loads the library into a session).
It is recommended that you create your own libraries in which to store your own UDE definitions, as opposed
to storing them in MSC-shipped libraries that come with Adams View. To create a library go to Tools –
Command Navigator – library – create and specify a name at the top level of the database like shown below:
546 Adams View
Interactive UDE Authoring
You can then choose this library in the UDE Definition Create dialog when specifying where you want to
store your UDE definition:
Note that libraries (including any UDE definitions in them) can be shared via so-called “partial binary” files.
These can be exported from an Adams View session from the command navigator: Tools – Command
Navigator – file – binary – write. In the ensuing dialog specify “File Name” and in the “Entity Name” field
browse for the library/libraries you want to include and click OK.
User Defined Elements (UDE) 547
Interactive UDE Authoring
The .bin file will be written to the current working directory and can be shared with others who consume it
via File – Open Database like any other .bin files.
Storing in a Model
To store your UDE definition in a model, no up-front preparation is necessary. Simply specify the model
name in the UDE Definition Create dialog. If stored in a model the UDE definition is included when
exporting an Adams View command file of a model by way of a second .cmd file specifically for the definition
which is referenced by the model’s .cmd file. See Files Associated with UDE’s for more information.
548 Adams View
Interactive UDE Authoring
The UDE Instance Create dialog will present fields for each of the parameters and inputs of the
corresponding UDE definition. Once completed and the dialog is executed then the UDE instance is created
within the model and will appear in the model browser.
550 Adams View
Interactive UDE Authoring
Usually what users do is declare one UDE definition the primary/main definition and then make one or more
other definitions replaceable types of that primary/main definition. For example, a damper could be modeled
as two parts with a force between them. A UDE definition called “damper” might have simple linear force-
velocity relationship. Then, there may be two other UDE definitions that are replaceable types of “damper”,
have the same topology, but the force function is different in each. Maybe one definition,
“two_stage_damper”, has two different linear force-velocity regime, and the other definition,
“noninear_damper”, has a nonlinear force-velocity relationship referring to a spline data element.
Once there are replaceable definitions accessible to the instances in your model, you can replace a UDE
instance in your model by right-clicking it from the model browser, selecting replace and selecting from the
list of replaceable definitions in the current Adams View session. Remember that if the definition you want
to replace with is stored in a library, that library needs to be loaded into the current session of Adams View.
User Defined Elements (UDE) 551
Interactive UDE Authoring
• View > UDE Definition, then select the definition to modify, then in the graphics window
interactively create the new object(s) connecting them to pre-existing objects in the UDE
Definition, then launch the UDE Modify dialog (from ribbon or Model Browser) and adds the
newly created object(s) on the Topological Objects tab and proceed through the dialog
• Tools > Command Navigator to launch the dialog for the modeling action, complete that dialog
only browsing for the specific objects needed and ensuring that the new object is created in same
locale (library or model) as the UDE definition itself
Impact:
• UDE instances in the current model based on this definition cannot auto-update and so you are
prompted to choose to either cancel the modification action or disassemble all existing instances
into their constituent objects
• Legacy .cmd scripts/models creating instances of this definition will generate errors upon import
in Adams View sessions using this modified UDE definition
• Other UDE definitions that were formerly replaceable types of this one, are not so anymore (nor
would this one be a replaceable type of anything it formerly was).
How:
• Launch the UDE Definition Modify dialog (from ribbon or Model Browser), go to the
Parameters tab, switch the radio button state for a row from "Parameter" to "Object"
• Launch the UDE Definition Modify dialog (from ribbon or Model Browser), go to the
Parameters tab, right-click a parameter and select "Remove Parameter"
Impact:
• UDE instances in the current model based on the modified UDE definition will automatically
update
• Legacy .cmd scripts/models creating instances of this definition generate errors upon import in
AView sessions using this modified UDE definition because they will be attempting to set
parameters that no longer exist
• No impact on replace-ability status with other UDE definitions
• Modify the object within the UDE definition such that it refers to a design variable (one existing
anywhere); at this point existing instances are updated, but you must launch and proceed through
the UDE definition modify dialog so that the design variable gets re-parented into the UDE
definition. On the Parameters tab ensure the radio button state for the new row is set to
"Parameter".
Impact:
• UDE instances in the current model based on the modified UDE definition will automatically
update
• Legacy .cmd scripts/models creating UDE instances of this definition will generate warnings upon
import in Adams View sessions using this modified UDE definition, but the script can proceed
by just taking the value for the new parameter from the value used in the UDE definition itself
• No impact on replace-ability status with other UDE definitions
Nested UDE’s
User-authored UDE definitions cannot, themselves, be used as topological objects within another user-
authored UDE definition.
However, many MSC-authored UDE definitions that are included with Adams View can be used as
topological objects within user-authored UDE definitions. These are listed below organized by the library in
which they reside:
.MDI.Forces.
spring
torsion_spring
general_motion
vpg_road
vpg_tire
.MDI.Constraints.
general_motion
.MDI.Acontrols.
controls_gain
controls_input
controls_integrator
controls_lead_lag
controls_low_pass
controls_pid
controls_second_order
controls_sum
controls_switch
User Defined Elements (UDE) 557
Interactive UDE Authoring
controls_transfer_function
.controls.
controls_plant
• UDEDEF_Name. UDEDEF_Name_create
• This is autogenerated macro based on inputs and parameters of UDE definition. Parameters
form optional argument, whereas inputs form required argument for UDE definition. Default
parameters are captured from objects selected for UDE definition creation. This macro is also
embedded on default UDE instance creation dialog box. The Instance create dialog box is auto
populated with default values of parameters keeping input fields blank.
• UDEDEF_Name. UDEDEF_Name_modify
• This is autogenerated macro based on inputs and parameters of UDE definition. Parameters
form optional argument, whereas inputs form required argument for UDE definition. Modify
dialog box is populated with parameters and inputs from UDE instance. This macro is also
embedded on default UDE instance modification dialog box.
• UDEDEF_Name. UDEDEF_Name_replace
• This is place holder macro which can be modified by the user. It serves two purposes:
Do additional operation while replacing UDE instance with another ISA type definition. This
is automatically called by AVIEW UDE instance replace call before actually replacing the
instance.
Supporting legacy UDE definitions saved in BIN files. If a legacy BIN file is opened in new
release, REPALCE macro is automatically called. If user has made some changes in UDE
definition in current release then the BIN will be updated based on REPALCE macro.
All these macros are stored in .cmd file
• If user opens the cmd file in text editor and edits those macros, those will be available in new
session after opening the UDE definition cmd file.
When a UDE definition is modified all the macros are regenerated to support modified definition
parameters.
For descriptions of each of these dialogs, see Dialog Box Help for UDE Commands.
Creating a UDE Definition
Creating a UDE Instance
Using Macros with UDEs
Replacing UDE Instances
Tutorial: Simple UDE
Tutorial: UDE with Macro
This is where the contents of a UDE definition can be specified - the definition of what modeling objects
make up the UDE. These are specified in the Objects field. A summary of this and other important fields
and concepts of the UDE Definition follows below:
Isa: Specifies name of an existing UDE definition in same class, so that instance of this UDE can be
replaced with UDE definition of same class specified by 'isa' parameter.
Comments: Specifies comment for UDE definition being created
Objects: The set of modeling objects which make up the UDE definition
Parameters: Variables used to control parameterization of the UDE (spring stiffness for example)
Input Parameters: Entities outside the UDE referenced by the UDE (typically a reference marker).
The parameter itself is an object variable containing the marker reference.
Output Parameters: Entities inside the UDE that should be accessible outside the UDE (often a
marker that can be used as reference for another UDE or other entities). This parameter is also an
object variable containing the object that should be referenced.
Be aware that the UDE Definition must be stored under an Adams View "library" object. So, the Definition
Name must have a library name at the beginning. As such, UDE Definitions are not children of a model but,
rather, belong to an Adams View session stored in a library. So, UDE definitions will not be included when
exporting an Adams View command file of a model (even if that model contains instances based on the UDE
definition). Prior to loading models containing instances of a given UDE Definition, one must first ensure
the Adams View session contains the library with the UDE definition. This can be done, at the beginning of
User Defined Elements (UDE) 561
Working with UDEs Manually
your Adams View session, by reading an Adams View command file that does this, or by putting those
commands in one of the files that Adams View executes automatically upon startup if found in Adams View's
default working directory (startup directory): "aview.cmd" or "aviewAS.cmd".
For more about storing Adams View customizations, see Saving Interface Changes.
For a step-by-step tutorial illustrating how to create a UDE definition, including creation of a library, see
Tutorial: Simple UDE.
This is where one can create in their model an instance of a UDE definition. This UDE Instance is an object
within a given model. So, the Instance Name field expects the instance name to be under a model name. The
two other things that must be specified to create a UDE Instance are:
The UDE Definition upon which this UDE Instance is based
The position, spatially, where the UDE Instance should be in the model (defined by the Location,
Orientation and Relative To fields)
Note: Once you have created an instance, you cannot go back and change its definition
without first deleting the instance.
562 Adams View
Working with UDEs Manually
For a step-by-step tutorial illustrating how to create a UDE definition, including creation of a library, see
Tutorial: Simple UDE.
Be advised that for cases where a UDE instance requires an interface marker, one cannot solely use this Ude
Create Instance dialog directly. One must employ Adams View macros as described in the Using Macros with
UDEs.
Method Macros
To facilitate the instantiation of UDEs, several "methods" are available. These methods are actually
implemented as macros, however. If macros by the names provided below exist under your macro definition,
then they will be automatically called:
Method: Description:
create Called after issuing "ude create instance" command.
modify Called after issuing a "ude modify instance" command.
copy Called automatically when user tries to copy UDE instance.
replace Called after issuing a "ude replace instance" command. The replace method of
the new definition is called.
pre_delete Called prior to issuing the "ude delete command" for a given definition.
dbox_display Called when "right clicking" on the UDE instance and choosing "modify".
This macro usually displays the dialog box for this particular UDE definition
type.
User Defined Elements (UDE) 563
Working with UDEs Manually
Notes: The word "modify" has two contexts when discussing UDE instances:
Change things about the UDE, other than its input parameters. This would
cover for example, relocating the UDE. This includes things specified in
Command Navigator >UDE > Modify > Instance (or the equivalent "ude
modify instance" command). This is where the "modify" method macro helps.
Change parameters within the UDE (stiffness, damping, for example). This is
done via a "modify" utility macro (see the Utility Macros section).
Replace Method Macro: Macro to be run after "ude replace instance" command to replace one instance with
another.
564 Adams View
Working with UDEs Manually
Dialog Box Display Method Macro: Macro to be run when right clicking on the UDE in the model browser
and selecting "Modify". This displays the dialog box of a utility macro so that the user can change parameters
(see the Utility Macros section).
Utility Macros
Utility macros are necessary for two scenarios:
Create Utility Macro: When creating the UDE instance, this macro is necessary to handle
interfacing markers and bring up a dialogue box for entering parameter values
Modify Utility Macro: When the user wants to modify parameters in the UDE, a utility macro is
needed to do this. This macro will be called by the "dbox_display" method discussed previously in
Method Macros section.
Below are examples of each marked up to explain their contents.
Create Utility Macro: The first part of the create utility macro defines which parameters are entered by the
user. The second part creates the UDE instance and sets the user-entered parameters.
User Defined Elements (UDE) 565
Working with UDEs Manually
Modify Utility Macro: Similar to the create utility macro, the first part of the modify utility macro includes
which parameters are entered by the user. The second part modifies the UDE instance and sets the user-
entered parameters.
566 Adams View
Working with UDEs Manually
To be able to replace a UDE of this definition with a UDE of another definition, the new definition must at
least have the same input parameters (i_reference_frame and j_reference_frame). If the UDE has output
parameters, then these must also match.
The next step is then to define the two definitions as replaceable. Calling the following command does this:
ude modify definition &
definition_name = .MDI.linear_bearing &
isa = .MDI.nonlinear_bearing
This command in the above example will define the "linear bearing" definition as replaceable with the
"nonlinear bearing" definition. Both definitions must exist when issuing this command.
If any parameters match between the two UDE definitions (for example, if radial_stiffness exists in both
definitions) - the value of this parameter will be copied from the UDE of the old definition to the UDE of
the new definition when doing the replace.
Overview
In this tutorial you will create a simple UDE definition inside an Adams View library and build an instance
of that UDE within an Adams View model. The UDE will consist of a spring damping connecting two
spherical parts. The UDE instance you create here can be connected to other entities in a model. This tutorial
makes use only of the "ude create definition" and "ude create instance" commands. No dialog boxes are
available for the user to change anything within it. To do this, macros are required, which are covered in
Tutorial: UDE with Macro section.
4. Connect the two spherical parts with a single component force between their centers via the Adams
View ribbon: Forces → Applied Forces → (Single Component) Applied Force. For "Run Time
Direction" use the Two Bodies option and set "Characteristic" to K and C.
5. Create a library to hold the UDE we will create. Do this via Tools → Command Navigator→
Library → Create and for "Library Name" enter .my_UDEs then click OK.
User Defined Elements (UDE) 569
Working with UDEs Manually
6. Open the UDE definition creation dialog via Tools → Command Navigator → UDE → Create
→ Definition.
7. For "Definition Name" enter ".my_UDES.ude1" and for "Objects" browse for both parts and the
spring.
570 Adams View
Working with UDEs Manually
8. Click OK from the "Ude Create Definition" dialog and notice that the part and spring objects will
disappear from the main modeling window.
9. You will now see your UDE in Database Navigator under the library you created above:
User Defined Elements (UDE) 571
Working with UDEs Manually
Note: We could have also created the definition via the Adams View Command
Language:
10. Now to create an instance of this UDE, use Tools → Command Navigator → UDE → Create →
Instance. Enter an "Instance Name" and for "Definition Name" choose the UDE Definition you just
created:
Note: We could have also created the instance via the Adams View Command
Language:
11. You will now see an instance of the UDE in the main modeling window. It will also be shown in
the model browser:
572 Adams View
Working with UDEs Manually
However, if you try to connect things to this UDE (forces, joints and so on.), Adams View will
recognize objects within the UDE. Below a fixed joint has been created on one of the parts in the
UDE, and one could create a force on the other.
User Defined Elements (UDE) 573
Working with UDEs Manually
The important thing to note is that by only using the "ude create definition" and "ude create
instance" commands like you did here, no dialog boxes are available for the user to change anything
within it. To do this, macros are required, which are covered in Tutorial: UDE with Macro section.
Overview
In this tutorial you will create a UDE definition inside an Adams View library and build an instance of that
UDE within an Adams View model. The UDE will consist of a spring loaded piston-cylinder style actuator.
You will make use of create ad modify utility macros and a dialog box method macro so that you can apply
the UDE throughout a model and supply it connection markers from a model. To learn more about using
macros with UDEs please see, Using Macros with UDEs.
574 Adams View
Working with UDEs Manually
Tip: To pick objects or parameters, right-click in the field and select All - Browse. Then
use Ctrl + right-mouse-button to pick the objects or parameters from Database
Navigator
User Defined Elements (UDE) 575
Working with UDEs Manually
Note: The actuator objects will disappear from the model, MODEL_1
4. Create a "UDE Create" utility macro via Tools → Macro → Read and fill out the dialog as shown
below.
a. Macro Name = .mdi.actr.actr_create
b. File Name: choose the file Actuator_Create.cmd from the set of files you copied in step 1
c. User Entered Command = mdi actr_create
d. Wrap in Undo = no
e. Create Panel = yes
576 Adams View
Working with UDEs Manually
5. Similarly, via Tools → Macro → Read, create a "UDE Modify" utility macro, choosing the file
Actuator_Modify.cmd from the set of files you copied in step 1.
6. Also, via Tools → Macro → Read, create a "Dialog Box" method macro in a similar fashion,
choosing the file actuator_dbox.cmd from the set of files you copied in step 1.
User Defined Elements (UDE) 577
Working with UDEs Manually
7. In your model, MODEL_1, create three spheres in roughly the locations shown below:
8. Launch the UDE instance creation dialog via Tools → Command Navigator → mdi → actr_create:
578 Adams View
Working with UDEs Manually
9. Complete the dialog as shown below and click "OK". For "Cyl Attach Frame" choose the center of
the leftmost sphere (that is, sphere located at lowest X value). For "Pist Attach Frame" choose the
center of the upper right sphere (that is, sphere located at highest Y value).
10. You should now see an actuator instance between the two spheres:
User Defined Elements (UDE) 579
Working with UDEs Manually
11. In the model browser, select the UDE instance, right-click and choose "Modify"
12. In the modify dialog enter the values as shown below the same as when you created the instance but
this time for "Pist Attach Frame" specify the center of the sphere in the lower-right (that is, located
with the greatest X and lowest Y values).
580 Adams View
Working with UDEs Manually
Notice that you had to re-enter all the parameters. You could include commands in the macro that
reads current values of the instance and then writes them to the dialog box fields whenever it is
opened.
13. After clicking OK in the Modify dialog, you will see the actuator is now oriented along the line from
the left sphere to the lower-right sphere.
Notes: The actuator will likely not end exactly on the center off the lower-right sphere
because we have implemented our UDE to always have the same length. The
location is determined by the Cyl Attach Frame marker and only the direction is
determined from Pist Attach Frame.
While we used the input markers to determine where to position the UDE, we did
not set up the UDE to attach to any external parts, although we certainly could
have.
User Defined Elements (UDE) 581
Working with UDEs Manually
Optional Steps
14. Delete the, now unused, sphere in the upper-right
15. Create a fixed joint between the leftmost sphere (red sphere in these images) and ground
16. Create a fixed joint between the actuator UDE's cylinder part and the leftmost sphere (red sphere
in these images) located at the center of the leftmost sphere. When prompted to choose the first part,
hover over the cylinder and pick actr1.cyl
17. Create a fixed joint between the actuator UDE's piston part and the lower-right sphere (maize
sphere in these images) located at the center of the lower-right sphere. When prompted to choose the
first part, hover over the cylinder and pick actr1.pist
18. Run a 10 second, 200 step simulation and animate
582 Adams View
About Adams View Macros
3. If you are creating a macro, in the Macro Name text box, enter the name of the macro.
4. In the Command text box, enter the command string that executes the macro. To use the name of
the macro, select Use Macro Name.
Note: The command string you enter must be unique. You cannot redefine an existing
command, although you can add a new keyword at any level to an existing command.
For instance, entering MARKER CREATE is invalid, because a MARKER CREATE
command already exists, but entering MARKER GENERATE is valid.
5. Specify whether or not the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command. Note that a
single Undo=yes, while convenient, can consume a great deal of memory for very large macros, or
slow macro execution noticeably, even if you do not ever use the Undo. You might want to specify
Undo=yes during initial creation and debugging until your macro works properly, then switch to
Undo=no to improve performance.
6. In the Commands text area, enter the commands that the macro is to execute, and select OK.
Recording Macros
Recording a Macro is easiest for simple macros.
To record a macro:
1. From the Tools menu, point to Macro, point to Record/Replay, and then select Record Start.
2. Perform the operations you want included in the macro.
3. To stop recording the macro, from the Tools menu, point to Macro, point to Record/Replay, and
then select Record Stop.
Automating Your Work Using Macros 585
About Adams View Macros
Important: Macro record/replay supports only basic menu, dialog box and graphics window actions.
Actions performed in the model browser, wizards and most complex dialog boxes (for
example, dialogs which dynamically update based on user interactions with them) are not
supported.
Note: The Macro Read dialog box contains an option to create a panel. This option is no
longer supported or recommended.
2. In the Macro Name text box, enter the name of the macro that Adams View uses to store the macro
in the current database.
3. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the file containing the commands to be executed.
4. In the User Entered Command text box, specify the command string that will execute the macro.
The command string defaults to the name of the macro if you do not enter a command string.
5. Specify whether or not the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command. Note that a
single Undo, while convenient, can consume a great deal of memory for very large macros or slow
macro execution noticeably, even if you do not actually use the Undo.
6. Specify a text file containing help on the macro or enter a text string describing the macro. Currently,
you can only specify help for the entire macro command, not its parameters or leading keywords.
7. To ensure that you do not create an outdated dialog box, from the Create Panel option menu, select
no.
8. Select OK.
Note: To create an up-to-date dialog box to execute your macro, go to the Command
Navigator and double-click on the name of your macro after you have created it.
Adams View automatically creates a dialog box whose name is based on the user-
entered commands associated with the macro. For example, if you create a macro
called mar_scale_down and associated with it the user-entered commands: marker
scale down, then Adams View names the auto-generated dialog box
.gui.mar_sca_dow (Adams View uses the first three characters of each command in
the user-entered commands to create the name of the dialog box). See also Customizing
Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder, and the example.
Saving Macros
Adams View automatically stores your macros in the current modeling session. You can also export your
macros to command (.cmd) files, which allows you to edit, archive, or import them into other modeling
session. It also lets you give the macro to another user, and also helps you to modify long macros when you
do not have the original file
If you used non-default values for the other macro data, such as the help string, the command file includes
comments with those values. You can read in the command file using the Macro Read command.
Deleting Macros
To delete objects using the Database Navigator:
1. Clear the select list of any existing selections by selecting the Select Tool .
2. On the Edit menu, select Delete.
The Database Navigator appears.
3. Select the macro or macros that you want to delete. Learn about navigating through a modeling
database using the Database Navigator.
4. Select OK.
Note: If the Database Navigator does not appear as indicated in Step 2, the select list was
not cleared before executing the Delete command. You can always use the Edit ->
Select List commands to be sure it is cleared.
Debugging Macros
Adams View provides a debugging tool to help you troubleshoot your macros if they don't run or work as
expected. You can use the debugging tool to:
View your macro and the output from it.
Step through each command in the macro.
Print your macro.
Executing Macros
Once you have created a macro, you execute it by issuing the command that you specified when you created
the macro. You can issue the command by:
Entering the command in the Command Window. The full command is a combination of the
command and macro parameters, if any.
Using the Command Navigator to execute the command. Selecting the macro command in the
Command Navigator, automatically displays a dialog box in which to enter parameters.
588 Adams View
About Adams View Macros
Using a custom dialog box and menu command that you created to execute the macro. Learn more
about Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder.
Adams View treats the macro as it does other Adams View commands. For example, if you enter the
command in the command window, but do not enter all required parameters, Adams View prompts you for
the missing required parameters.
Examples of Qualifiers
The qualifiers: Specify that the parameter requires:
$parts:t=part:c=2 Names for two existing parts.
$NSpokes:T=INTEGER:GE=3:LE=8:D=3 An integer from 3 to 8 and a constant default of 3.
$infile:t=file(*.dat) A file name. The File Selection dialog box lists all files with
the extension .dat.
Type Qualifier
The type qualifier specifies the type of value a user must enter. The format for the type qualifier is:
T = type
T = type(additional data)
where:
type is a basic type, database object type, or database object class type as explained in the next sections.
Additional data is either optional or required depending on the type.
Range Qualifiers
A range qualifier specifies the minimum and/or maximum values allowed. It only applies to numeric types.
The formats for the range qualifiers are listed in the table below.
Count Qualifiers
Count qualifiers specify the number of values required. The formats for the count qualifier are listed in the
table below.
Automating Your Work Using Macros 593
Using Parameters in Macros
Default Qualifiers
Default qualifiers are optional. If a parameter has no default, users must enter a value when executing the
macro. There are three types of default qualifiers as well as a default value:
Constant - The parameter is optional. Adams View uses the default value if a user does not supply a
parameter value.
Updated - The parameter is optional and Adams View uses the last value the user entered if the user
does not supply a parameter value. If a user has not yet entered any value for a parameter, Adams
View uses the default value.
Database object - The default for database objects is automatic. If the type is an existing database
object, the automatic default is the current default object.
The table below lists the formats for the default qualifiers.
Tip: To avoid unexpected results, we recommend that you explicitly set the characteristics of your
parameters in comments at the beginning of your macro. For examples of setting the
characteristics in comments, see Example Macros.
594 Adams View
Helpful Commands in Macros
In the example below, parameter $text defaults to a string because it has no qualifiers and is not in a
command. Parameter $numbers has qualifiers that specify it as one or more integers greater than zero.
Parameter $part_1 is a part because it immediately follows an "=" and, therefore, inherits the type from
parameter part_name. Parameter $part_2 defaults to string because it does not immediately follow the "=".
Parameters $part_3 and $part_4 have qualifiers that specify them both as parts.
! Parameter $text is a string.
! $numbers:t=integer:c=0:gt=0
list_info part part_name=$part_1, $part_2
list_info part part_name=$part_3:t=part, $part_4:t=part
Tip: For more help on using commands, see the online help available from the Command
Navigator. Simply select a command and then select the Help button at the bottom of
the Command Navigator.
Parameters
file_name Specifies the name of the text file to be written. The proper extension is the
(optional) default, but you can be override it by supplying a different extension.
It's not necessary to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-
numeric characters and starts with a letter. If you want to include other
characters, such as a '.' for an extension or '/' or '[]' for directory paths, you must
enclose the name in quotes.
variable_name Specifies a variable to which Adams View stores a formatted string.
(optional)
format_for_output Specifies the format of the output text. Output formats are a mixture of text and
(required) conversion specifications. Each conversion specification usually has a matching
argument in the values_for_output parameter. A conversion specification begins
with a percent sign, %, and is terminated by a letter or another percent sign.
The conversion specifications provided by Adams View are a subset of those used
in the ANSI-C programming language. Valid conversion specifiers are:
Most conversion specifications can contain flags between the leading percent sign
and the terminating conversion specifier. These flags allow you to further refine
the format of your output. Some of the valid flags are:
- Indicates that the output is to be left justified in the field, with the default being
right justification. This is only useful when the field width is specified (see
below).
"005.....7"
You specify precision by entering a decimal point followed by a number. You
enter the precision after the field width. For example:
Values for output are converted to the appropriate type for the conversion
specifier, and using expressions is extremely useful here.
You can write information from the Adams View database to the text file by using
data access references in the value expressions. For example, VALUES=
(.mod1.par1.mass) writes the mass of part par1. For more information on
expressions and database access, see Adams View Function Builder online help.
values_for_output Specifies the values to be placed in the output string.
(optional)
newline Controls whether or not file write text causes the output to terminate the line
(optional) with this write command. If newline is no, then subsequent write commands
produce output on the same line. If newline is yes (the default), then any
succeeding write command produces content on a new line.
system
Issues a device-dependent operating system command. You can select to display the results of the command
in the Information Window or the Adams View Log file.
Parameters
Examples
The following example issues a Linux-appropriate command to remove the file named test.txt without
displaying the command in either the Adams View Information window or a log file:
SYSTEM COMMAND="rm test.txt" SEND=OFF ECHO=OFF
BREAK
Use the BREAK command to exit the innermost FOR or WHILE loop immediately and stop execution of
the loop.
When Adams View encounters a BREAK command inside a loop, it immediately exits the loop without
executing the remaining commands for that iteration.
The BREAK command affects only the innermost FOR or WHILE loop.
Format
BREAK
Example
In this example, Adams View creates markers, named MAR1, MAR2, MAR3, MAR4, and MAR5, unless a
marker already exists with one of those names. As soon as it encounters an existing marker, Adams View exits
the loop and does not create any more.
variable create variable_name=ip integer_value=0
while condition=(ip < 5)
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value(eval(ip+1))
if condition=(eval(DB_EXISTS ("MAR"//ip)))
break
end
marker create marker_name=(eval("MAR"//ip)) &
location=(eval(ip-1)),0,0
end
variable delete variable_name=ip
CONTINUE
Use the CONTINUE command to skip commands inside the innermost FOR or WHILE loop and continue
with the next iteration of the loop.
When Adams View encounters a CONTINUE command inside of a loop, it skips over the remaining
commands of the loop and goes directly to the END of the innermost loop. Adams View tests the loop
condition and continues looping if the condition is still valid.
The CONTINUE command affects only the innermost FOR or WHILE loop.
Format
CONTINUE
Example
In this example Adams View creates four markers on the default part: MAR1, MAR2, MAR4, and MAR5.
Adams View skips MAR3, because when ip evaluates to 3, Adams View encounters the CONTINUE
command and skips to the END of the WHILE loop.
variable create variable_name=ip integer_value=0
Automating Your Work Using Macros 599
Conditional Constructs and Loops
IF/ELSEIF/ELSE/END
Use the IF, ELSE, ELSEIF, and END commands to execute a group of commands conditionally. The
execution of commands bracketed by IF and END depends on the value of an expression.
You can nest any combination of looping (FOR/END, WHILE/END) and conditional constructs
(IF/ELSEIF/ELSE/END).
Note: As with all Adams View commands, you can use the IF, ELSE, ELSEIF, and END commands
on the command line, in macros, and in command files.
Format
You can use the IF command with or without the ELSE command. A few examples of many variations are
shown below.
IF CONDITION=(expression)
...
END
IF CONDITION=(expression)
...
ELSE
...
600 Adams View
Conditional Constructs and Loops
END
IF CONDITION=(expression)
...
ELSEIF CONDITION=(expression)
...
ELSE
...
END
If the expression evaluates to a non-zero value, Adams View executes the commands following the IF or
ELSEIF command up to the ELSE, when present, or the END if you do not use the ELSE. If the expression
evaluates to zero and you used ELSE, Adams View executes the commands between the ELSE and the END
commands.
The question-mark/colon (?:) operator used in a conditional expression replaces and IF/ELSE command that
distinguishes one of two values. The expression consists of three parts, a condition whose truth determines
which value is selected, and two expressions for the values.
condition expression ? expression a : expression b
When evaluated, the conditional takes on one of the two values. The expression that comes before the
question-mark is interpreted as boolean-valued. If it is true (non-zero), then expression a is used as the value
of the conditional, otherwise expression b is used as the value.
For example, consider the commands below:
if condition = (variable_a < variable_b) variable set variable =
variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_a)) else variable set
variable = variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_b)) end
This can be expressed more concisely by using a ?: conditional operator:
variable set variable = variable_min & real = (EVAL((variable_a <
variable_b)? variable_a : variable_b))
Example
In the following example, if the marker MAR1 exists, Adams View modifies its location. If the marker does
not exist, Adams View creates it and sets its location.
if condition=(DB_EXISTS ("MAR1"))
marker modify marker=mar1 location=2,0,0
else
marker create marker=mar1 location=2,0,0
end
The next example illustrates how to use ELSEIF to determine the type of object and then perform an
operation on the object based on the object's type. The example assumes that an Adams View variable named
.mdi.org exists and its type is database object.
! Bodies
variable create variable=object_type string=(eval(DB_TYPE(.MDI.obj)))
if condition=(object_type == "marker")
interface command_builder command="marker modify marker" initial=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "point")
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.main_objecttable parameter="Points"
elseif condition=(object_type == "flexible_body")
Automating Your Work Using Macros 601
Conditional Constructs and Loops
FOR/END
The FOR and END commands allow you to execute a group of commands a fixed set of times. You can use
FOR either to perform numeric iteration or to operate on a set of Adams View objects, such as markers or
parts. Adams View executes the commands bracketed by the FOR and END for each value of a variable in
the specified range or upon the specified set of objects.
You can nest any combination of looping (FOR/END, WHILE/END) and conditional constructs
(IF/ELSEIF/ELSE/END).
Format
Using FOR/END to Perform Numeric Iteration
To perform numeric iteration, use this form of FOR/END:
FOR VARIABLE_NAME=var START_VALUE=REAL &
INCREMENT_VALUE=REAL &
END_VALUE=REAL
...
END
Adams View executes the commands between the FOR and END for each value of var, in the range
START_VALUE to END_VALUE. At the beginning of the FOR loop, Adams View creates a temporary
Adams View variable named var of type REAL. Adams View deletes the variable when the loop terminates.
If you use the loop variable in an expression that requires it to persist, Adams View issues a warning message
and does not delete the variable at the termination of the loop. If you do not want this behavior, you can use
the EVAL function as described in Examples of Numeric Iteration for FOR/END.
START_VALUE, INCREMENT_VALUE, and END_VALUE can be any valid real expression.
INCREMENT_VALUE can be either positive or negative, and defaults to 1.0 if not specified. If
INCREMENT_VALUE is positive, Adams View increments the value of var by the increment for each
iteration and stops looping when the value of var is greater than END_VALUE. If INCREMENT_VALUE
is negative, Adams View decrements var by the increment for each iteration and continues looping until var
is less than END_VALUE.
602 Adams View
Conditional Constructs and Loops
The commands inside the FOR/END loop can use var as they would any other Adams View variable of type
REAL.
As in the previous example, you can use the EVAL function to get the instantaneous value of an expression
rather than assigning the expression itself.
As shown, you can use wildcards to specify the objects for the OBJECT_NAME parameter. The TYPE
parameter applies a filter to the set of objects, in this case, matching only children of the part that are markers.
If you use a more general wildcard, Adams View may execute the command more slowly than if you use a
more specific wildcard. For example, if you want all the markers in the model MOD1, use
OBJECT_NAME=.MOD1.* type=MARKER instead of OBJECT_NAME=* type=MARKER.
For more sophisticated searching and filtering, see the database functions, such as DB_CHILDREN, in the
Design-Time Functions section of the Adams View Function Builder online help. You also may want to use the
miscellaneous function SELECT_OBJECT of the same guide.
WHILE/END
Use the WHILE and END commands to execute a group of commands zero or more times. Adams View
executes the commands that WHILE and END bracket repeatedly until the condition associated with the
WHILE command is FALSE (zero).
You can nest any combination of looping (FOR/END, WHILE/END) and conditional constructs
(IF/ELSE/ELSEIF/END).
Format
The format of the WHILE command is:
WHILE CONDITION=(expression)
...
END
Adams View evaluates the value of expression and executes the commands between the WHILE and the END
command if the value is non-zero. Adams View evaluates the expression at the end of the loop and continues
looping as long as the value of the expression is non-zero.
Examples
In this example, Adams View creates 10 markers, MAR1 through MAR10, on the default part, and locates
them one unit apart on the x-axis of the coordinate system.
variable create variable_name=ip integer_value=0
while condition=(ip < 10)
marker create marker_name=(eval("MAR"//ip+1)) &
location=(eval(ip)),0,0
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value=(eval(ip+1))
end
variable delete variable_name=ip
You can use the EVAL function to get the value of an expression rather than assigning the expression itself.
Use of the EVAL function with loops is described in the FOR/END.
604 Adams View
Conditional Constructs and Loops
RETURN
Use the RETURN command to exit a command file or macro and return to the command file or macro that
invoked it. Its effect is similar to BREAK when you use it to exit a loop, skipping all remaining commands
in the command file or macro (including any cleanup commands you may have at the end of your macro).
If a RETURN is executed within loops (nested to any depth), it exits those loops and performs all required
cleanup, just as multiple BREAKs would do. You can have as many RETURN commands in your command
files or macros as you want.
Format
RETURN
Example
RETURN is often used as a means for recovering from an error condition or allowing a user to cancel an
operation. Below are two examples.
Example 1
In the example, the RETURN command lists information on the contents of the select list, but only if there
are objects on the list. If it finds no objects, it returns and issues an error message.
if condition=(DB_COUNT(.SELECT_LIST, "objects_in_group")==0)
mdi gui_utl_alert_box_1 type="Error" text="Select List is
empty. Select objects first."
return
end !if
!
info empty
!
list_info group &
group_name = .SELECT_LIST &
brief = on &
write_to_terminal = on
!
Example 2
This example macro determines if a particular file exists and asks the user if it should overwrite the existing
file.
variable create variable=$_self.fileName string="file.dat"
if condition=(file_exists($_self.fileName))
if condition=(alert("warning", "Delete existing
"//$_self.fileName//"?", "Ok", "Cancel", "", 2) == 2)
variable create variable=$_self.junk &
int=(alert("information", "File "//$_self.fileName//" not
destroyed.", "Ok", "", "", 1))
variable delete variable=$_self.*
return
end
Automating Your Work Using Macros 605
Conditional Constructs and Loops
! Clean up.
variable delete variable=$_self.*
Format
condition expression ? expression a : expression b
When evaluated, the conditional takes on one of the two values. The expression that comes before the
question mark is interpreted as Boolean-valued. If it is true (nonzero), then expression a is used as the value
of the conditional, otherwise expression b is used as the value.
Example
For example, consider the commands below:
if condition = (variable_a < variable_b)
variable set variable = variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_a))
else
variable set variable = variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_b))
end
You can express this more concisely using the ternary conditional operator:
variable set variable = variable_min &
real = (EVAL((variable_a < variable_b)? variable_a : variable_b))
606 Adams View
About Adams View Menus and Dialog Boxes
Notes: The ternary conditional operator has lower precedence than all other operators. Any
operations performed in sub expressions are performed before the ternary operator is
evaluated:
x < 10 ? x + 10 : x * 10
is the same as:
Interface
About Adams View Menus and Dialog Boxes
Many of the windows, menus, and dialog boxes you see in Adams View are interface objects in the Adams
View Modeling database. Using Adams View commands, the Menu Builder, and the Dialog-Box Builder, you can
modify, delete, or add to the standard windows, menus, and dialog boxes. You can make changes such as:
Remove menu entries that you seldom use.
Add a new shortcut menu to display a standard dialog box that you often use.
Add a set of menus and dialog boxes to execute your own macros or command files. (For more on
macros, see Automating Your Work Using Macros.)
Create a custom interface for your particular Adams application, perhaps simplifying virtual
prototyping for novice users.
Note: You cannot customize all Adams View dialog boxes and tools. For example, you cannot
customize the Plugin Manager or the Information window. The Dialog-Box Builder's
Dialog Box -> Open menu provides access to those dialog boxes, containers, and toolbars
that you can customize.
The two top-level interface objects are windows and dialog boxes. The main modeling window, for example,
is named main. Its full database name is .gui.main.
Windows and dialog boxes look similar, although they are quite different. Windows usually stay on the screen
for some time as you work in them, while dialog boxes come and go as you need to enter data or access
controls. Windows can contain toolbars and menu bars. Both windows and dialog boxes contain other
interface objects such as buttons, labels, and so on.
Most customizing involves creating new dialog boxes or modifying standard dialog boxes. Unless you are
creating an entirely custom interface, you will not need to modify the standard windows themselves. You may
want to modify the menu bars, menus, and toolbars.
Dialog boxes and toolbars can contain interface objects such as labels, fields, buttons, toggle buttons, radio
boxes, option menus, and sliders. In addition, containers and button-stack objects allow you to group other
objects.
Most of the modeling menus and dialog boxes ar e available in the database, and you can customize these.
Some dialog boxes are controlled entirely from within Adams View. These do not appear in the database, and
you cannot customize them. They include:
Database Navigator
Dialog-Box Builder
Command Navigator
Data Browser in the plotting window
File Selection dialog box
Coordinate window
Plugin Manager
Note: Customizations made directly in Adams libraries (for example, gui, amachinery, acar) and
saved as a modelling database file (.bin) will not be retained if opening that .bin file in a
future version of Adams. To save such customizations in a modelling database file (.bin), they
should be made in user defined plugins/libraries. Such .bin files from a previous version will
open properly with the customizations in future versions of Adams. To learn more about
plugins see Authoring Plugins.
When you create menus in Adams View, you can specify keyboard accelerators (shortcuts) and mnemonics.
You can cascade menus up to 10 deep by nesting MENUs below other MENUs. You can include as
many buttons in a menu as you want, although you should not create more than will fit on your
screen.
label is the text that appears in the menu. For an icon button, you specify the icon name instead of
the text. In Motif, the icon name is the name of a XBM (X BitMap) or XPM (X PixMap) format
file. In Windows, the icon name is the name of a bitmap (.bmp) format file.
labels can contain ampersand (&) characters that specify keyboard mnemonic shortcuts for a menu
item (for example, ALT-F opens the File menu).
Note that with the exception of CMD=lines, spaces are not permitted in the menu structure input. Therefore,
NAME = my_menu is not valid, but NAME=my_menu is. This differs from Adams View command
language where spacing rules are flexible.
The following shows a portion of the Menu Builder could be used to define a Help menu in Adams View.
To the right of the Menu Builder is the corresponding Help menu as it appears in Adams View.
MENU
A MENU entry creates a pull-down or pull-right menu. First-level menus, MENU1, appear in the menu bar
and pull downward. Lower-level menus, such as MENU2 and MENU3, appear as cascading pull-right
menus.
614 Adams View
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder
Syntax
MENUn TITLE
NAME=name
HELP=Help
Parameters
n = Number identifying whether the menu appears on the menu bar or on a pull-down menu. Can
be either:
• n = 1 - Menu appears on menu bar.
• n 2 - Menu appears on pull-down menus.
TITLE = Text string that appears in the menu bar. You can also place an & in the title in front of
the letter to be used as the keyboard mnemonic (for example, enter &File to have the resulting menu
be File and the mnemonic would be Alt+F).
NAME = Name of the object in the modeling database. If you omit NAME, Adams View constructs
a default identifier, such as MENU_4 or BUTTON_7.
HELP = Text that appears in the status bar and in the tool tips, and describes the menu group.
Example
MENU1 File
NAME=file
HELP=Read and write files
Syntax
BUTTONn LABEL :: ACCELERATOR
NAME=name
HELP=help
CMD=command
Parameters
n = Number identifying the placement of the button. Can be either:
• n = 2 - Button appears on pull-down menu.
• n = 3 - Button appears on a sub-menu.
LABEL = Button name that appears in the pull-down or sub-menu. By convention, you should
include ellipsis (...) after the button name if the button displays a dialog box. You can also place an
& in the label in front of the letter to be used as the keyboard mnemonic (for example, enter &Save
to have the resulting menu command be Save and its mnemonic be Alt+S.)
Interface 615
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder
ACCELERATOR = Key or series of keys that execute the menu command. To create a series of
keys, you use the Shift, Ctrl, or Alt keys followed by the plus symbol (+) and any letter (a to z) or
function key (F1, F2, and so on). No spaces can be between any of the keys (for example, Alt+A,
instead of Alt + A).
The Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys are case sensitive (the first letter must be capitalized), while the key
letters are not (user can enter A or a). You also can group the Shift key with the Ctrl and Alt keys (for
example, Shift+Ctrl+A). If you combine the keys, the Shift key must be executed first.
NAME = Name of the menu object in the modeling database. If you omit NAME, Adams View
constructs a default identifier, such as MENU_4 or BUTTON_7.
HELP = Text that appears in the status bar or tool tips describing the button.
CMD = Command, sequence of commands, that the button executes.
Example
BUTTON2 &Export
NAME=export
HELP=Write data to file
CMD=interface dialog_box display dialog_box_name=.gui.file_export
TOGGLE
A toggle creates a menu entry that toggles between two states. It creates a check mark depending on the state
value (on or off ). Make sure that if you create a toggle, you maintain its state. A TOGGLE can be on a pull-
down or sub-menu.
Syntax
TOGGLEn TITLE
NAME=name
HELP=help
STATE=state
CMD=command
Parameters
n = Number identifying the placement of the toggle. Can be either:
• n = 2 - Toggle appears on pull-down menu
• n = 3 - Toggle appears on a sub-menu
TITLE = Toggle name that appears in the pull-down or sub-menu.
NAME = Text that identifies the toggle so that you can define keyboard shortcuts and mnemonics
for it. If you omit NAME, Adams View constructs a default identifier, such as MENU_4 or
BUTTON_7.
HELP = Text that appears in the status bar or tool tips describing the toggle.
616 Adams View
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder
SEPARATOR
A separator creates a horizontal line between menu entries on either a pull-down or sub-menu to indicate
groups of comments.
Syntax
SEPARATORn
Parameters
n = Number identifying the placement of the separator. Can be either:
• n = 2 - Separator appears on pull-down menu
• n = 3 - Separator appears on a sub-menu
Example
SEPARATOR2
These menu commands are helpful if you have a new version of Adams View or created a new Modeling
database and want to read in your customized menus.
To import text:
1. In the Menu Builder, place the cursor at the location you want to bring in the text.
2. From the Menu Builder File menu, select Import.
3. Enter the name and location of the text file containing the menu text.
4. Select OK.
When this command is executed, the earlier ribbon will be deleted and a new ribbon will be created based
upon the .xml file read in. If the .xml file syntax is incorrect, then the default ribbon.xml provided in the
installation folder will be used. Once you read your customized ribbon, you can revert back to the default
ribbon by following the below steps:
1. In command language execute the "interface ribbon read" (without filename parameter).
2. On the Tools menu, point to Ribbon → Read Local Ribbon.
8. Selecting the light icon will open the Lighting settings dialog box as shown below:
9. Clicking on the Color icon will open the Modify Background color dialog box as shown
below:
620 Adams View
Customizing the Ribbon
10. If you want to revert to the original Ribbon provided with the installation, select Tools → Read
Local Ribbon.
11. If you want my_ribbon.xml to be launched at the startup, then add the following line to aview.cmd
file in the working directory and keep the my_ribbon.xml in the same working directory along with
the icons.
interface ribbon read filename = "my_ribbon.xml"
Interface 621
Customizing the ModelBrowser for Adams View
Structure of ModelBrowser.xml
The various tags and attributes in ModelBrowser.xml explained in the below table.
A variable created under DV_2 will not be shown since the model browser does not support more than 2
levels.
In order to see all variables under the model, the model browser will have to be customized.
Copy the ModelBrowser.xml to the current working directory and modify the section related to 'Design
Variables' as below:
<Folder Name="Design Variables">
<L1 Exhaustive="true">variable</L1>
</Folder>
On running Adams View with the above change, all the variables under the active model can be seen in the
model browser
624 Adams View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
Note: You cannot customize all Adams View dialog boxes and tools. For example, you cannot
customize the Plugin Manager or the Information window. The Dialog-Box Builder's Dialog
Box -> Open menu provides access to those dialog boxes, containers, and toolbars that you
can customize.
4. In the Name text box, enter a title for your dialog box.
5. Select any predefined buttons you'd like on your dialog box.
6. Select OK.
A new dialog box appears.
Note: You cannot customize all Adams View dialog boxes and tools. For example, you cannot
customize the Plugin Manager or the Information window. The Dialog-Box Builder's Dialog
Box -> Open menu provides access to those dialog boxes, containers, and toolbars that you
can customize.
Tip: After displaying a dialog box from the Tools menu, you can double-click the
background of a displayed dialog box to display the Dialog-Box Builder and modify
the dialog box.
Adding Objects
You can add Interface objects to your dialog box.The instructions for adding objects to your dialog box are the
same for all types of objects.
Adding Images
You add an image to your dialog box just as you add a label. The image format for the label must be:
Motif - .xbm (X BitMap) or .xpm (X PixMap)
Windows - .bmp (must be a 16-color bitmap)
You cannot size the image in the Dialog-Box Builder. Therefore, if you want to fill the entire dialog box, you'll
need a very big image.
For sample images, see the directory /install_dir/aview/bitmaps where install_dir is the directory where you
installed your Adams products.
To add an image:
1. On the Create menu, select Label.
2. Draw the label so it fits the size of the image.
3. Double-click the label to activate it.
4. From the option menu, select Appearance.
5. Clear the value in the Label Text box.
6. In the Icon File box, enter the path to and name of the image.
7. From the Justified option buttons, select the alignment for the image.
8. Select Apply.
Tip: To see the image, you may need to select Test Box from the Options menu.
Using the Arrow tools in the Dialog-Box Builder. The tools move objects to
the edges of the dialog box or to the edges of other objects. The tools are located along the top of the
Dialog-Box Builder.
Learn about Setting Distance Between Interface Objects.
2. Hold down the left mouse button, with the cursor over a selected object, and move the mouse in the
direction you want to move the object.
The selected object or objects move as you move the mouse.
To increase the size of objects using the last four arrow icons on the Dialog-
Box Builder toolbar:
1. Select the object(s).
2. Click on the arrow icon indicating the direction in which you want to increase your object(s).
2. Increase or decrease the size of your object by moving the reshaping handles.
To make two or more objects the same height or width with respect to the first object you
select:
1. Select the objects. The height and width are with respect to the first object you select.
2. Select one of the following:
• Height tool to make objects the same height.
• Width tool to make objects the same width.
Note: Because the snap grid points are not visible, and the default grid is very fine (2 pixel distance),
snapping is not very noticeable by default.
Note: The following steps only include instructions for linking your dialog box to a help file; they
do not explain how to create HTML help files. Refer to HTML reference guides.
Note: You do not need to complete the Help Link text box. It is used for backward
compatibility only.
632 Adams View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
IFor example, to include the contents of the field my_value in a command, you
enter:
If the field contains 123, then Adams View executes the command:
By default, the value of an option menu or radio box is the text of the displayed
or selected button. By default, the value of a toggle is on or off.
You can specify other values for Adams View to substitute. In the toggle button
Value attributes, there are fields to set the toggle values. In the Option Menu and
Radio Box Value attributes, you can add a substitution value after the text for each
choice, separated by a vertical bar "|". The values do not affect the displayed text;
they are only used in commands.
The Object: Has the value:
Field Contents of field
Option-menu Selection of value for current selection
Radio-box Selection or vale for current selection
Toggle button On/off or specified on/off value.
Slider Integer slider value
634 Adams View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
$_value $_value substitutes the value of the object that contains the command. For
example, if the commands are on a button named my_toggle, $_value is the same
as $my_toggle. Another example might be if you want to create a toggle button
that returns a value of "1" or "0". You would do so with commands like the
following:
if condition=($_value)
! commands executed when user turns on toggle
else
! commands executed when user turns off
toggleend
Wherever possible, you should use $_value instead of the name of the actual
object because it is easier to understand and maintain since it does not rely on the
name of the object holding the command. If you see $_value in a command, you
know immediately that it refers to the value of the interface object. In addition,
if you change the name of the object, you do not need to change the commands.
You will find this especially helpful for toggle buttons, radio boxes, and option
menus, where you almost always want the value of the object in the associated
commands.
Interface 635
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
$_self, $_parent, These substitute the name of the object executing the commands, the object's
$_topgui immediate parent, or the parent dialog box, window, or toolbar. When Adams
View executes the commands, it substitutes the full database name of the
appropriate object.
$_self, $_parent, and $_topgui help you make your dialog boxes easier to read
and maintain. For example, a dialog box can load one of its child fields with this
command:
Note that $_value and $_self are different, but easy to confuse. $_value inserts the
value of the object, $_self inserts the name of the object.
$_1, $_2, $_3,... These refer to parameters passed with a window or dialog-box display command.
The window or dialog-box, and any child of the window or dialog box, can
include $_1,... in the commands. When Adams View executes the commands, it
substitutes the current value of the parameter. This allows you to pass information
to a window or dialog box as you display it. You might, for example, pass the
name of an object to a dialog box. Commands executed by the dialog box or
objects in the dialog box can then refer to this object.
$_1, $_2, $_3,... These refer to parameters passed with a window or dialog-box display command.
The window or dialog-box, and any child of the window or dialog box, can
include $_1,... in the commands. When Adams View executes the commands, it
substitutes the current value of the parameter. This allows you to pass information
to a window or dialog box as you display it. You might, for example, pass the
name of an object to a dialog box. Commands executed by the dialog box or
objects in the dialog box can then refer to this object.
Instead, if you use a command like the following Adams View only includes my_parameter = $my_value, if
the user has entered a value:
my_command my_parameter = $my_value ...
The same technique handles mutually-exclusive parameters. As long as the parameters are wrapped in ,
and only one option is displayed or enabled at a time, the command only includes the displayed parameter.
Example
Conditional expansion allows for the commands for custom interface objects to ignore parameters in which
the user does not enter any value. Back quotes [ parameter=value ] indicate parameters that will be
collapsed when the command is executed. This makes the resulting custom interface object easier to use and
relieves you from having to handle error checking for empty fields.
The Easy Beam Properties custom dialog box below shows how conditional expansion can be used.
The command for this dialog box modifies the indicated beam's properties as shown below:
force modify element_like beam &
beam_name = $f_beam_name &
youngs_modulus = $f_youngs_modulus &
shear_modulus = $f_shear_modulus &
damping_ratio = $f_damping_ratio
The problem with this configuration is that the user must enter all of the fields in the dialog box or the entire
command fails. For example, if the user left the Damping Ratio Field blank, its command would fail with the
following error:
ERROR: ---------------------------------------
ERROR: Invalid input. Enter a number.
ERROR: The command was not executed.
ERROR: &> damping_ratio =
ERROR: -------------------------------
If the command is modified to incorporate conditional expansion, the user could leave fields blank without
affecting the execution of the command.
Interface 637
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
To add the conditional expansion, you add back quotes ( ) for each parameter. The resulting command looks
like the following:
force modify element_like beam &
beam_name = $f_beam_name &
youngs_modulus = $f_youngs_modulus &
shear_modulus = $f_shear_modulus &
damping_ratio = $f_damping_ratio
Now the command can handle blank fields. For example, if the user of the dialog box leaves the Shear
Modulus field blank with the new command, the following command is executed:
force modify element_like beam &
beam_name = .model_1.ebm_beam4 &
youngs_modulus = 2.07E+05 &
damping_ratio = 1.0E-02
Adams View did not include the parameter for the blank field.
Conditional expansion is valid for all parameter types in addition to fields that can return no value.
Conditional expansion can be included for none, some, or all parameters in a command. In the example
above, the beam_name parameter is required by the command, so the single quotes are not included.
Example
You can display windows and dialog boxes with a list of parameters. These parameters can be used by the
interface objects and commands within that interface object. The parameters are passed as quoted text strings
into the interface object.
Once the window or dialog box is displayed, it can make use of these parameters in its own commands. These
parameters are automatically assigned the special names $_1, $_2, ..., $_n, for each parameter that is passed
to it.
This functionality is especially useful for specifying default values for fields or other interface objects in the
new window or dialog box. For example, a button labeled Easy Beam Size has been added to the custom Easy
Beam Properties dialog box. The button contains commands that display a new dialog box for further
modification of a beam:
638 Adams View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder
The name of the beam is passed to the new dialog box so that it automatically loads the relevant parameters.
The command for the Easy Beam Size button is:
interface dialog_box display &
dialog_box_name = .gui.db_beam_size &
'parameters="$f_beam_name"'
In addition to specifying the name of the dialog box to open, the command also specifies a parameter to pass
to the new dialog box.
The start command for the new Easy Beam Size dialog box uses this passed parameter to automatically load
the current values for the beam as shown below:
if condition=("$_1" != "")
interface field set field_name=$_self.f_beam_name str="$_1"
end
if condition=("$f_beam_name" != "")
interface field set &
field_name=$_self.f_length &
database_field="$f_beam_name.length"
interface field set &
field_name=$_self.f_area_of_cross_section &
data_base_field="$f_beam_name.area"
interface field set &
field_name=$_self.f_i_marker_name &
database_field="$f_beam_name.i_marker_name"
Window and dialog box parameters are useful tools for communicating information between interface
objects. To pass multiple parameters, separate them with commas, as in the following example:
interface dialog_box display dialog_box=my_dialog_box
parameters="parameter1", "parameter2", "parameter3"
When the new dialog box appears, it has access to those parameters as $_1, $_2, and $_3, respectively.
Editing Commands
Holding down the right mouse button over the Commands area of the Dialog-Box Builder displays a shortcut
menu with several options for editing the commands as shown in the table below.
Note: You can also save your dialog box by saving your modeling database as a binary file.
All of your changes are saved if you save a binary file.
Before you reload your dialog box, note that Adams View does not allow the command file to create interface
objects with the same names as objects that already exist in the database. You must delete or rename to read
in the command file.
This is the most reliable way of ensuring your custom dialog boxes are upwardly compatible with new versions
of Adams.
Authoring Plugins
Introduction
By definition, a plugin is a computer program that can or must interact with some other program to provide
a specific functionality. Plugins typically use the UI of their parent program and rely on the native
environment of their parent to provide this functionality.
Authoring Plugins 641
Section 1: The basic plugin
Plugins in Adams
Adams provides plugins as a very powerful way of customization. With plugins, the end user can modify the
Adams environment to suit their needs. This may involve anything from personalizing the UI (menus, adding
custom dialogs etc.) to writing custom routines, directly called by the Adams Solver at runtime.
Information is organized into the following sections:
Section 1 - This section talks in brief about the files that constitute a plugin, their contents and their
role.
Section 2 - This section talks about the locations in which the plugin files can reside.
Section 3 - This section talks about the directory structure in which the files should reside in one of
the locations.
Section 4 - This section talks about the Ribbon customization for plugins.
Plugin xml
The plugin xml serves to publish the existence of a plugin to the product (View, Car, PPT and so on.). The
plugin manager makes use of the xml files that belong to the individual plugins to create a consolidated list
of plugins that is available for use with the current product.
Among other things, the xml contains information such as the plugin name, version and author as well as the
list of products with which the plugin is compatible. This information is made use of by the plugin manager
to display the information about the plugin in its UI as shown below,
642 Adams View
Section 1: The basic plugin
It is recommended, that while creating new plugins, existing plugin xml files be used as reference.
Explanation for some of the most common tags in the xml file is given below,
Description - Specifies a short multi-line description of the plugin.
Version - Specifies the version number of the plugin.
Author - Contains information such as the name of the person/organization that created the plugin.
LicenseFeature - Contains information related to the licensing feature used by the plugin. The
plugin manager uses this information to denote the number of available licenses.
ValidWith / NotValidWith - List of the products that the plugin is valid for use with and otherwise.
Only plugins specified in the ValidWith list are displayed in the plugin manager.
The naming convention for the plugin xml file is (plugin_plg.xml), where plugin is the placeholder for the
actual name of the plugin.
Apart from the custom functions, a view dll must contain 2 other functions named plugin_initialize and
plugin_terminate (where plugin is a placeholder for the name of the actual plugin). The initialize function
takes care of the function registration, performing license checkouts if necessary etc. The terminate function
on the other hand does exactly the opposite, in un-registering the functions and any other clean up tasks
involved in unloading of the plugin.
The plugin view DLL is created using the ‘adams2021_3 –c aview cr-u’ command. The naming
convention for the view dll is plugin_view.{so, sl, dll}, with the extension specific to the platform under
consideration.
View GUI
The view GUI is a full or a partial binary file containing a View library object. The library has the same name
as that of the plugin (.plugin). The library object typically contains all the macros, UDE definitions and
dialog boxes which the plugin makes use of.
The library object also contains a load macro (.plugin.load). The load macro is typically responsible for
making changes to the parent UI (like adding plugin specific menus to the parent UI) during the plugin load
operation. It is important that the load macro uses a User-Entered Command, for instance:
mdi myplugin load
The user-entered command is required to have the load macro called upon plugin startup. For this, it might
reference other menu or command files. After Adams View loads the binary, the plugin library will be
searched for this macro for the load process to continue.
The View library object will also contain a corresponding unload macro (.plugin.unload). The unload macro
is complementary to the load macro and usually restores the parent environment when the plugin is
unloaded.
Also, plugin dialog boxes should have commands which call plugin specialized macros instead of building
long command structures in the dialog boxes itself. The plugin load operation automatically sets an
environment variable within the Adams View session which helps locate the binary file from which the plugin
was loaded. The variable name is plugin_BIN_DIR where plugin is the upper-cased version of the plugin
name. This can be used in the plugin load macro, for instance, to read gui components that are inside the
plugin library.
Example:
macro create macro = .plugin.load &
user = “mdi plugin load” &
com = “file binary read &”, &
“ file = (getenv(\” PLUGIN_BIN_DIR \”) // \” plugin.bin \”) & “, &
“ entity = .gui.main.mbar.my_menu”
This plugin binary must be named plugin.bin (where plugin is the name of the plugin).
Note that no database object in the plugin library references any object outside of the library, otherwise an
unresolved dependency would be introduced between the plugin and the parent application.
644 Adams View
Section 1: The basic plugin
The bitmap below shows the controls plugin components as seen through the database navigator. Note the
library name (which is the name of the plugin) and the load/unload macros beneath the library.
Solver DLL
This binary contains the custom written functions/routines which are used by the solver during analysis. The
functions can be written in C or FORTRAN and can reside in any number of files. The solver dll is created
using the ‘adams2021_3 –c cr-u’ command.
The naming convention for the solver dll is plugin.{so, sl, dll}, with the extension specific to the platform
under consideration. The convention is not a requirement. It is a recommendation, just so that the solver dll
is easily distinguished from the view dll.
It is recommended that the solver dll have the two standard functions DLL_INIT and DLL_TERMINATE,
although having them is not a requisite. The INIT and TERMINATE functions have the same role as the
initialize and the terminate functions of a View dll. Typical initialization operations for a solver dll include
allocating memory for the plugin, checking out licenses and opening device handles while termination
operations include de-allocating the memory, returning licenses and closing any open device handles.
Authoring Plugins 645
Section 2: The search path algorithm for plugin discovery
The init function is called by the solver as soon as the statements FUNCTION = USER(…), ROUTINE =
libname::fname1 are encountered by the solver. Solver will not initialize the same DLL more than once.
Conversely, DLLs are automatically unloaded under the following conditions,
A new database is opened
Solver changed from C++ to FORTRAN or vice-versa.
The STOP command is issued
The FILE command is used to read a new model
Again, solver will not call the DLL_TERMINATE function more than once for each dll. Also note that the
terminate function will be called only if the init function was called in the first place.
3. Site location
646 Adams View
Section 2: The search path algorithm for plugin discovery
The site location is specific to verticals and is not applicable to View. This location is defined by an
environment variable which has the format MDI_<product_name>_SITE, where product_name is
the product under consideration. The environment variable is set to the desired location/locations by
the user in the form of a colon separated (semi-colon separated on windows) list of directories. The
site environment variable for individual products is listed below,
For a given product, the list of directories in the corresponding environment variable will be checked
for the existence of a plugin.
4. Installation path
The environment variable $topdir is set to the installation path of the Adams product. The platform
specific sub-directory (win32, hpux11 etc.) as applicable, will be searched for in the plugin directory,
if present in the installation path. Note that the environment variable $MDI_CPU is set to the
appropriate platform. So essentially, the location $topdir/plugin/$MDI_CPU will be searched for the
existence of the specified plugin.
5. Library path
On different platforms, the library path is specified using different environment variables. The list of
the library path environment variable on individual platforms is as specified below,
This variable contains a colon/semi-colon separated list of directories. Individual directories will be
searched for during the plugin load operation.
6. Current working directory
The current working directory is the last location which will be searched for the existence of the
plugin.
Authoring Plugins 647
Section 3: The Plugin directory structure
Note: The Plug-in Manager will display a plug-in, if plug-in .xml file located within any sub-
directory inside MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR. However the solver and view dll's will only
be searched in the paths mentioned above, not within any sub-directory inside
MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR. So, if there is a plug-in .xml file that is contained in a folder
C:/Plugins/Y for plug-in X, then this plug-in X will be displayed in the plug-in manager, but
when the user tries to load the plug-in, it may result in an error since the binary and view,
solver dll's are searched in the 4 paths mentioned above.
The help files associated with a plugin should be placed in the help directory located inside the root. Similarly
examples associated with the plugin should be placed in a directory called as examples. Both, the xml file and
the bin file should be located directly in the root and not inside any directory.
A possible directory structure is shown below,
<Plugin searchable location>
X (root directory)
- rh_linux (o)
- win32 (o)
- win64 (o)
- SuSE linux (o)
- help (o)
- examples (o)
Directories that are optional are marked with an (o) beside them.
648 Adams View
Section 4: Ribbon customization for plugins
1 Copy any existing plugin files (supertools_plg.xml, supertools.bin, others) and all new icon files (.xpm)
to a "plugin directory" of your choice. Now set the environment variable
MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR with this path (for example, "C:\Plugins").
2 The existing .xml file, supertools_plg.xml, residing in the 'plugin directory', should have the
following <ribbon> element appended to it as below:
<ribbon>
<Tab Name="Plugins" Help="">
<Group Name="SuperTools">
<Button Name="Load Super Tools" row="0" col="0">
<tip_text>Load my Super Tools Plugin</tip_text>
<icon_name>lightings.xpm</icon_name>
<single_click_commands>
if cond=(!DB_EXISTS(".mdi.plugins.supertools"))
plugin load plugin_name = supertools
else
interface menu display menu_name=
.gui.main.ribbon_plugin.supertools
end
</single_click_commands>
</Button>
</Group>
</Tab>
</ribbon>
3 The .xpm file must exist in the same folder as the 'plugin directory' or in the current Adams View
working directory.
4 The plugin binary file (supertools.bin in this example) typically contains load and unload macros
(see Section 1: The basic plugin). A typical role of the load macro is to create custom menus for this
plugin. In the 'classic' Adams View interface the load macro would put new menus on the existing
menu structure.
In the modern (ribbon) interface of Adams View there exists a new container element named:
.gui.main.ribbon_plugin
You can add menu items, using the load macro, under .gui.main.ribbon_plugin and display this
menu when a button is clicked on the ribbon. For example, the load macro for 'supertools' might
contain these commands to create a menu and a button:
interface menu create menu_name =
.gui.main.ribbon_plugin.supertools label = "Super"
interface push_button create push_button_name =
.gui.main.ribbon_plugin.supertools.butt_1 label = "Push Me"
commands = " view zoom auto_zoom = on"
Now when the ribbon button is clicked (refer xml section), the Adams View menu named
.gui.main.ribbon_plugin.supertools is displayed.
Authoring Plugins 651
Creating Partial Binary (.bin) Files
5 Rebuild (see Creating Partial Binary (.bin) Files) the plugin partial binary (supertools.bin in this example)
if necessary. Ensure that the partial binary exists in the MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR location.
6 Ensure that MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR is set properly, then open Adams View.
7 The plugins tab should display a new icon for the plugin. A first click on the icon loads the plugin,
subsequent clicks display the menu for the plugin.
Can be:
File format: Description: Imported Exported
Adams Solver dataset Describes a model using Adams Solver Data Yes Yes
(.adm) Language (ADL) statements.
Adams Solver Set of three Adams Solver analysis files: request, Yes Yes
analysis files (.req, results, and graphics. You can import the entire set or
.res, .gra) just a single analysis file.
Adams View Set of Adams View commands. You can use Yes Yes
command file (.cmd) command files to automate the creation of a model
or the investigation of simulation results.
Test data Numerical results generated from an external Yes No
program.
Numeric data Numerical results generated during an Adams View No Yes
session.
588 Adams View
Supported File Formats for Import and/or Export
Can be:
File format: Description: Imported Exported
CAD files Model geometry. You can import and export the Yes Yes
following formats: STEP, IGES and Parasolid.
For translation via 'Adams Geometry Translators', the table below lists the format and version support
information.
The Start Server and Stop Server buttons (or corresponding commands above) will start a new TCP/IP server
in Adams View that listens for commands. Simple output from the server is displayed in the main window
of the dialog box above. Starting the server yields output like the following:
592 Adams View
Adams Command Server
The server has started and is listening for client connections on the TCP/IP port 5002.
Note: The intended usage of the Adams View Command Server is to run one Adams Command
Server session per Adams View database.
"binary on"
Note: Query data is returned from the server in string form by default. The server can also return
data in binary mode for greater efficiency. Examples below, unless noted otherwise, are
presented in the default text (not binary) response mode. Communication with the Command
Server for queries must follow this pattern (default text query response mode shown, not
binary mode):
The size parameter in text query mode generally returns a value of 0 and can be ignored. If binary queries are
turned on then the size parameter represents the size of the packed array structure to be sent from the server
to the client. The client can use this information when reading the data stream from the server.
596 Adams View
Adams Command Server
Query Examples
1. Query for an array of numbers, such as a location (server is in text query mode):
Of type string
1 string being returned
Size undefined (max 1024 bytes)
3 OK Client acknowledges receipt of
above.
4 suspension Server sends data as a string.
Of type string
Array contains 4 elements
Size undefined (max 1024
bytes)
3 OK Client acknowledges receipt of
above.
4 ('.suspension.ground', Server sends data as a string.
'.suspension.Lower_Arm', Client must parse string to split
'.suspension.Upper_Arm', comma and other characters.
'.suspension.Spindle_Wheel')
Of type integer
Array contains 3 elements
Total size of response is 12 bytes
3 OK Client acknowledges receipt of
above.
4 (19, 20, 17) Server sends data as a packed integer
array. Client must unpack array to
retrieve elements.
Exchanging Data in Adams 599
Importing and Exporting Geometry
For recommendations of the best ways to export data from the CAD packages so you can import it effectively
into Adams, see Recommendations for Exporting CAD Data.
Linear Approximation
Adams View directly supports only a subset of the geometry encountered in the IGES file. Some of the
unsupported IGES entities are approximated using a technique called linear approximation. Adams View
translates the nonlinear entities (for example, surface, curve, and so on) it encounters in the IGES file to
polylines. For IGES curves, surfaces, and annotation entities that are nonlinear in definition, linear
approximation produces a piecewise linear string of points or polygons that approximates the geometry to
within a specified tolerance. For more information, refer to the discussion of the tolerance option in Import -
STEP, IGES.
Unit Conversion
The import process in Adams View automatically converts all coordinate data in the IGES file to the internal
units (meters, kilograms, seconds) of Adams View.
Imported Subfigures
Adams View does not support subfigures. Therefore, Adams View does not import any geometry defined as
subfigures in an IGES file.
Exported Colors
Adams View writes the colors of geometric entities to the IGES file. It supports any color defined within
Adams View. The RGB (red, green, blue) values are stored as entity number 314, Color Definition, in the
IGES file. Note that not all IGES vendors support RGB color values.
Exported Visibility
Adams View translates invisible geometric objects to the IGES file as blanked entities. The visibility of the
object as it appears in Adams View determines how it is interpreted when written to the IGES file as shown
in the table below.
Import, export, or
Adams View object: Entity type number: IGES entity: both:
Arc 100 Circular arc Both
Circle 100 Circular arc Both
Graphic force 102 Composite curve Export
Spline 102 Composite curve Export
Outline 102 or 106 Composite curve or Export
copious data
Polyline 102 or 106 Composite curve or Both
copious data
Ellipse/nurbcurve 104 Ellipse/nurb_curve Both
Block 106 Copious data Export
Cylinder 106 Copious data Export
Ellipsoid 106 Copious data Export
Extrusion 106 Copious data Export
Frustum 106 Copious data Export
Link 106 Copious data Export
Graphic spring 106 Copious data Export
damper
Revolution 106 Copious data Export
Shell 106 Copious data Export
Tire 106 Copious data Export
Torus 106 Copious data Export
Face (trimmed surf ) 108:1 Plane Both
Polyline 110:0 Line Both
nurb_curve 112:0 Parametric spline Both
curve
nurb_surf 114:0 Parametric spline Both
surface
Marker 116 Point NS
Polyline 116:0 Point Import
nurb_surf 118 Ruled surface Import
nurb_surf 120:0 Surface of revolution Import
nurb_surf 122:0 Tabulated cylinder Import
Explode 125:0 Flash entity Import
Exchanging Data in Adams 605
Importing and Exporting Geometry
Import, export, or
Adams View object: Entity type number: IGES entity: both:
Polyline 125:2 Polyline Import
arc 125:3 Arc Import
polyline 125:4 Polyline Import
nurb_curve 126 Rational b-spline Import
curve
nurb_surf 128 Rational b-spline Import
surface
nurb_curve 130:0 Offset curve Import
explode 132:0 Connect point entity Import
nurb_surf 140:0 Offset surface Import
Chain 141:0 Composite edge Import
curve (boundary)
Chain 142:0 Composite edge Import
curve
Face 143:0 Bounded surface Both
Face 144:0 Trimmed parametric Both
surface
Solid 186:0 Manifold solid B-rep Import
object
Explode 202:0 Angular dimension Import
Explode 204:0 Curve dimension Import
Explode 206:0 Diameter dimension Import
106:11 and explode 208:0 Flag note Import
Explode 210:0 General label Import
Polyline 212 Polyline Import
Polyline 214 Leader Import
Explode 216 Linear dimension Import
Explode 220:0 Point dimension Import
Explode 222 Radius dimension Import
Explode 228 General symbol Import
106 and explode 230 Sectioned area Import
Explode 308:0 Subfigure definition Import
Explode 320:0 Network subfigure Import
definition
606 Adams View
Importing and Exporting Geometry
Import, export, or
Adams View object: Entity type number: IGES entity: both:
Explode 408:0 Singular subfigure Import
instance
Explode 412:0 Rectangular array Import
subfigure
Explode 414:0 Circular array Import
subfigure
Explode 420:0 Network subfigure Import
instance
In addition, note that we do not support conformance class 5, which contains faceted B-rep shape
representations. AP 214 is still in the committee-draft stages of its development and, therefore, we do not
encourage its use.
If you have multiple groups with the same name in the Wavefront file, all groups attach to the same Adams
View part but become separate geometric entities. This allows you to use different colors within the same
Adams part to create more realistic images.
The only lines that are significant in the Wavefront file are the ones that begin with g (groups), f (facets), and
v (vertex). Adams View ignores everything else.
To reduce the number of group names, open the dataset in a text editor and substitute names before
importing the set into Adams View. For example, a car body dataset typically has the following group names:
g hood
g fender
g windows
g bumper
Change them to the same name so they attach to a single part. For example:
g body
g body
g body
g body
Stereolithography
CATIA If using the IGES and STEP export is time
Adams_CAD_Translators license, consuming and Adams View can have
then CATIA V4 (.model, .dlv, .exp, difficulties reading the resulting files.
session) files and CATIA V5
(.CATPart, .CATProduct) files can
be read by Adams View directly.
Stereolithography
STEP
IGES
Pro/Engineer or If using the Render files contain color, while
Creo Adams_CAD_Translators license, Stereolithography files do not.
then Pro/Engineer and Creo files
(.prt, .asm) can be read by Adams
View directly.
Render
Stereolithography
IGES
Exchanging Data in Adams 611
Importing and Exporting Geometry
Parasolid
Stereolithography
IGES
SolidEdge Export using Dynamic Designer Exporting from the embedded motion
with Shells (v2000). product automates the geometry
export/import process.
Or, export from SolidEdge in these
Using Parasolid is convenient because
file formats in order of preference:
one file contains all the geometry and
Parasolids Adams View creates a separate part for
each solid.
Stereolithography
Stereolithography is dependable but
IGES requires you to output each part
separately. It only works on solid bodies.
Mechanical Desktop Export using Dynamic Designer Exporting from the embedded motion
with Shells (v2000). product automates the geometry
export/import process.
Or, export from Mechanical
IGES transfers are complicated but are
Desktop in these file formats in
reasonably dependable.
order of preference:
Stereolithography exports are
IGES unpredictable because the model has to
Stereolithography be in a particular quadrant before
exporting.
Microstation Parasolid Using Parasolid is convenient because one
file contains all the geometry and Adams
View creates a separate part for each solid.
612 Adams View
Importing and Exporting Command Files
! Remove all but one view (the one that will remain is, the “active”
view),
! and display the bottom view in it (this actually recalls from the
data
! base the set of view attributes saved under the name “bottom”).
!
view management delete view_name=all
view management restore saved_view_name=bottom
!
! Display frame 150 from the simulation graphics file.
!
graphic_results single_frame_display frame_number=150
!
! Create a Postscript hardcopy file of this frame.
!
hardcopy generate
! Done
!
exit confirmation=yes
Ignore command - Instructs Adams to ignore the line on which it found the error and start
processing the next line as a new command. Adams can usually recover and execute subsequent
commands in the file. If subsequent commands depend on the results of the invalid command,
however, they may fail or give unexpected results.
Continue the command file execution - Instructs Adams to continue processing the line as if it were
typed interactively. This can be dangerous if there is no correction later on in the line, because
Adams keeps issuing error messages until the error is corrected. The errors can continue beyond the
end of the line, even to the end of the file, if carriage returns are invalid. Use this value only if the
command file is a literal recording of your key strokes, complete with back spaces or other
corrections of mistakes.
Cancel the command file execution and abort file - Instructs Adams to immediately close all the
command files and returns control to interactive input. This is the most conservative setting because
it guarantees subsequent commands will cause no further errors or unexpected results.
Run a Simulation - Before exporting FEA loads, you need to run a Simulation of your model so that
Adams View can determine the loads acting on the bodies in the model. There is no special
preparation needed for this simulation; you run it just like any other simulation.
Identify the Body - You identify the body whose load information you want to export by specifying
a marker belonging to a rigid body or directly selecting a flexible body. For a rigid body, Adams View
calculates all load information relative to the marker you select. Therefore, the marker’s location
must correspond to the origin of the body as it appears in the FEA tool. For a flexible body, Adams
View assumes that its FEA origin is unchanged.
Find Load Points - After identifying a body whose load information is to be exported, Adams View
finds all locations (load points) on the body that have external loads placed on them and displays the
locations in a table. The node coordinate locations are displayed relative to the FEA origin of the
body.
For a flexible body, Adams View also populates the table with the node IDs of the load points that
correspond to the node IDs on the part in the FEA program. For a rigid body, you assign node IDs
to the load points as explained next.
Assign Node IDs to Load Points, if desired - For a rigid body, you can assign IDs to the load points
that correspond to the node IDs on the part in the FEA program before exporting the load
information. You can assign the IDs using either of two ways:
• Type the node IDs into the table in Adams View.
• Store the node IDs in a text file and have Adams View read the file. As Adams View reads a file,
it associates the load points it found on the part with the node IDs and locations listed in the file.
Adams View searches the file for node IDs with locations closest to the ones it found and fills the
node IDs into the table in Adams View.
The node location file must be in the following format with commas (,) separating each element:
Node IDn, X, Y, Z
Node IDn+1, X, Y, Z
...
If your model contains several node IDs, you might want to create a text file of node IDs.
If you choose not to specify any node IDs, the FEA input file that is generated will contain the locations (with
respect to the FEA coordinate reference) and ADAMS ID labels of the specified marker forces. You will need
to replace the ADAMS ID labels with node IDs in the input file before submitting an analysis.
Redundant Constraints
You cannot export loads at the locations of redundant constraints. This is because Adams removes all
redundant constraints in the simulation. Therefore, forces are not computed for these constraints. It is best
to manually remove redundant constraints defined at a part before simulating if you want to export FEA
loads.
616 Adams View
Importing and Exporting Other Data
Friction
Reaction loads resulting from friction in joints are not supported. In fact, you receive an error if you attempt
to export loads on joints that include friction.
Floating Markers
You cannot export FEA loads if the part has a floating marker. You receive the following error message from
Adams View when you try to export loads for a part with a floating marker:
No application point for reaction force. Unable to export loads on floating markers.
This can happen if there are forces, such as six-component general force, three-component force, or three-
component torque, or higher-pair constraints, such as curve-point or curve-curve, are defined on the part. In
the case of forces, there is a workaround:
Redefine the force by swapping the I- and J-parts so that the part in question does not have a J-
floating marker.
! This sample file contains only one component and contains the number
! 3. Because we used an exclamation point (!) in front of each line in
this header
! paragraph, however, Adams View does not read the line starting with
3.
1.5
3.0
2. To the right of the Values text box, click the More button .
3. The Location Table appears.
Use the Write button to export the data. Learn about Reading and Writing Location Information..
Examples of Using Adams View
Tutorials of overall product use:
Getting Started Using Adams View
Using Adams Insight with Adams View
Overview
The following example illustrates how you can use the Adams View Controls Toolkit to control the speed of
a part in your model based on a known speed profile. To download the model for this example
(ControlVelocity.cmd), go to the following simcompanion link:
http://simcompanion.mscsoftware.com/KB8014381
618 Adams View
Example of Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit
To see other examples of the Adams View Controls Toolkit, see the following articles in the simcompanion
website.
All of the connecting lines in the diagram are elements that you can create using the Adams View Controls
Toolkit. The specified speed profile is entered into a spline element named SpeedSpline. You can create this
using Build → Data Elements → Spline → New, and then entering the speed vs. time profile that you want.
(Alternatively, you could select File → Import Test Data to enter your values.)
Examples of Using Adams View 619
Example of Using Contact Forces
After you run the model for one second and 100 time steps, you see two strip charts:
The actual ball speed measure
The desired speed versus time profile (using the defined spline element SpeedSpline)
They should look very similar when the simulation is run.
Overview
The following example demonstrates how to create a contact between a cam and follower on a cam valve. In
the example, you import an Adams View command file that builds the valve cam model for you. You then
create a curve-to-curve contact force to define how the cam and follower come into contact. Finally, you run
a simulation of the model to see the forces acting between the cam and follower. The model is shown in
Figure 2.
620 Adams View
Example of Using Contact Forces
The command file that you’ll use is in the directory install_dir/aview/examples/user_guide, where install_dir
is the directory in which Adams software is installed.
The example is divided into the following sections:
Importing the Command File
Creating the Contact Force
Simulating the Contact Force
Note: By default on Windows, files in the installation directory are read-only. During
installation, your system adminstration can choose to change the permissions so you
can write to the installation directory. If this has not been done, you will need to change
the permissions of the above file when you copy them to your working directory.
1. From the Force tool stack, select the Contact Force tool .
The Create Contact dialog box appears.
2. Set Type to Curve to Curve.
3. Right-click the I Curve text box, point to Contact_Curve, and then select Pick.
4. Select the follower geometry on the part Rod (Circle_1). For the location of Circle_1, see
Figure 3.
The I Direction pull-down menu fills with the selected geometry.
5. Right-click the J Curve text box, point to Contact_Curve, and then select Pick.
6. Select the cam geometry. It is a BSPLINE with the name .valve.cam.GCU173. For the location of
.valve.cam.GCU173, see Figure 3.
The J Direction pull-down menu fills with the selected geometry.
7. Select OK.
622 Adams View
Example of Using Contact Forces
Adams View creates a contact force between the cam and follower. Notice that it places a white arrow
on each curve to show the direction of the force. Figure 4 shows the arrows. For this example, you don’t
need to change direction. If you did need to change it, you’d select the geometry in a Direction pull-
down menu, and then select the Change Direction tool .
To run a simulation:
3. To divide the window into two viewports, right-click the Page Layout tool stack , and select the
2 Views - side by side tool.
4. Plot the results of the contact force in the right view.
5. Animate and observe the animation as the cam goes through three cycles. Notice the increased force
as the lifter begins movement and the spline when it loads.
The command file that you’ll use is in the directory install_dir/examples/user_guide, where install_dir is the
directory in which the Adams software is installed.
The example is divided into the following sections:
Importing the Command File
Animating Modes
View the Eigenvalues
Note: By default on Windows, files in the installation directory are read-only. During
installation, your system adminstration can choose to change the permissions so you can
write to the installation directory. If this has not been done, you will need to change the
permissions of the above file when you copy them to your working directory.
Animating Modes
To animate the modes:
1. Run a linear simulation.
2. From the Review menu, select Linear Modes Control.
3. In the Linear Modes Control dialog box, select Mode, and then enter mode 1 as the mode to be
animated.
The pair of values closest to the real axis corresponds to mode 1 and the other pair corresponds to
mode 2.
2. Select Close and Delete Plot.
3. In the Linear Modes Control dialog box, select Table.
Two rows of data appear in the information window as shown in Figure 7.
626 Adams View
Example Macros
Example Macros
Overview
The following are some example macros:
Create Marker Macros
Create Extrusion Macros
For more examples of macros, see:
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface.
The examples directory in the Adams View installation area.
Adams simcompanion link search for macros at http://simcompanion.mscsoftware.com/. Many of the
example files use macros.
The macro expects you to specify three parameters when you execute the macro, as indicated by the three
names preceded immediately by a dollar sign ($). Note that the three parameters used by the macro are
defined up front, at the beginning of the macro, before they are ever used in an executable Adams View
command. Defining macro parameters at the beginning of a macro allows you to explicitly declare a type for
each parameter. The T=marker or T=new_marker string associated with the parameters indicate that a user
can only specify an existing marker or a new marker, respectively, for that particular parameter. Although
declaring the type in advance is not required, we recommend it.
! $FIRST_MARKER: T=marker
! $SECOND_MARKER: T=marker
! $NEW_MARKER_NAME: T=new_marker
!
marker create marker_name=$NEW_MARKER_NAME &
location = (( ($FIRST_MARKER.loc_x)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_x) )/2
),&
(( ($FIRST_MARKER.loc_y)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_y) )/2 ),&
(( ($FIRST_MARKER.loc_z)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_z) )/2 )&
orientation = 0,0,0&
relative_to = ground
Example 2 - Macro to Create Marker Midway Between Two Existing Markers (Variation)
The macro shown below is similar to the first macro example in that it creates a new marker midway between
two existing markers. It, however, directs the new marker's z-axis so it points from the first marker towards
the second marker. The two markers that a user specifies must both belong to the same part and to the same
part as the new marker being created.
!$FIRST_MARKER: T=marker
!$SECOND_MARKER: T=marker
! $NEW_MARKER_NAME: T=new_marker
!
defaults orient_axis_and_plane
axis_and_plane_setting=z_axis_zx_plane
!
marker create marker_name=$NEW_MARKER_NAME &
location =
((($FIRST_MARKER.loc_x)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_x))/2), &
((($FIRST_MARKER.loc_y)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_y))/2), &
((($FIRST_MARKER.loc_z)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_z))/2) &
along_axis = $FIRST_MARKER, $SECOND_MARKER &
relative_to = ground
Overview
In this example, we use a spline to relate the force of a spring to its deformation. The values in Table 1 show
the relation of a force in a spring to its deformation.
Using this table, you can determine the force when deflection equals -0.33, and the force when deflection
equals -0.17. You cannot, however, determine the force when the deflection is -0.25. To determine the force
at any deflection value, Adams View creates a continuous function that relates deflection and force. The
continuous approximation is then used to evaluate the value of the spring force at a deflection of -0.25. If you
input two sets of values (x and y) using a spline data element, you can define the curve that the data represents.
You would then use the spline data element in a function or subroutine that uses cubic spline functions to fit
a curve to the values. The curve allows Adams View to interpolate a value of y for any value of x.
Procedure
Briefly, the steps that you’d perform to use the spline data element to define the force deflections are:
1. Create the spline using the spline editor or the general method.
630 Adams View
Example of Using Splines Imported from Test Data to Create Curves
2. Build a simple nonlinear spring-damper, and then modify it to use the spline. To use the spline in the
spring-damper definition, under Stiffness and Damping in the Spring-Damper Modify dialog box,
change the stiffness coefficient to Spline: F=f(defo). Adams View builds a function expression for you,
using AKISPL and modeled spring length as free length.
Note: You can also use a single- or multi-component force to define the force deflections. In
this case, you would select Custom as you create the force, and then modify the force by
entering a function expression, such as:
You can use the Function Builder for assistance in building the expression.
Overview
To create geometric splines from a file you must create a matrix, create a curve using the matrix, and then
create a bspline using the curve. The following steps outline this process.
Importing Test Data
Creating a Matrix
Creating a Curve
Creating Geometry
Creating a Matrix
Now, you create a matrix. Note that you can also import a matrix from a file formatted as explained in the
MATRIX statement in the Adams Solver online help.
To create a matrix:
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the Matrix tool .
Examples of Using Adams View 631
Example of Using Splines Imported from Test Data to Create Curves
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Matrix, and then select
New.
2. Do the following:
• Select Enter input ordered by columns.
• Define the number of rows in matrix (number of points used to define curve).
• Define the Column Count as 3 (x,y,z coordinates).
3. Display the Expression Builder to define the x matrix column from a previously created spline:
• Right-click the Values text area, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression Builder.
• Set Getting Object Data to All Objects.
• Right-click All Object text area, point to All, and then select Browse.
The Database Navigator appears.
4. From the Database Navigator, select the spline containing the x values necessary to define your curve.
For example:
model_1 -> spline_1
The spline name appears in the text area.
5. Select Get Data Owned By Object.
A selection box appears for these items,
6. Select the column of data containing the x values necessary to define your curve.
The expression appears in the text box. For example:
.model_1.spline_1.x
7. Because you want these numbers represented by this expression, frame the expression with the
evaluation expression:
(eval(.model_1.spline_1.x))
8. Repeat Step 7 to define the y and z matrix columns expressions (or cut and paste from the x value
column expression).
9. Make sure the column expressions are separated by commas. For example:
(eval(.model_1.spline_1.x)),
(eval(.model_1.spline_1.y)),
(eval(.model_1.spline_1.z))
10. Select OK to create the matrix.
632 Adams View
Example of Using Splines Imported from Test Data to Create Curves
Creating a Curve
To create a curve:
1. Click the Elements tab. From the Data Elements container, click the Curve tool .
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Curve, and then select
New.
2. Select the matrix name of the matrix you created in Creating a Matrix.
3. Select OK.
Creating Geometry
To create geometry:
1. Click the Bodies tab. From the Constrution container, click the Spline tool .
or
(Classic interface) On the Main toolbox, from the Rigid Body tool stack, select the Spline tool .
Note: To have your geometry tightly line up with your curve, you should edit it so that the segment
count is very high (for example, 1000 for a 51-point curve). This will give you a good
representation of the curve shape. Remember, however, that geometry is not crucial to
simulation results. Adams Solver will use your curve information. Therefore, if your curve
shape is not what you would expect, it is your curve that must be modified, not your geometry.
Examples of Using Adams View 633
Example of Adding a Sensor
Overview
The following example demonstrates how to use a sensor to stop a simulation. In the example, you import
an Adams View command file that builds a model of a garage-door mechanism. In the example, you will add
a sensor to the model to stop the simulation when the bottom of the door reaches the ground. The garage
door model is composed of several rigid sections hinged together, just as many typical garage doors are.
You construct the sensor so it monitors the vertical component of distance between a point on the bottom
tip of the lowest door section and the global xz plane and stops the simulation when this distance becomes
approximately equal to zero.
Mathematically, the following relationship defines the sensor:
Halt the simulation if DY between tip and ground ≤ 1.0E-3
If this never occurs, run to normal completion
We’ve provided you with two command files that you can use depending on how much of the example you
want to do yourself:
gdoor_without.cmd - Model with no sensor defined.
gdoor_with.cmd - Model with sensor defined.
You can also use gdoor_with.cmd if you encounter difficulties with the example or want to check your
work. Use the Simulate → Sensor → Modify menu to see how we created SENSOR_1.
The files are in the directory /install_dir/examples/user_guide, where install_dir is the directory in which
Adams software is installed.
The example is divided into the following sections:
Importing the Command File
Simulating the Model without a Sensor
Adding a Sensor
Note: By default on Windows, files in the installation directory are read-only. During
installation, your system adminstration can choose to change the permissions so you can
write to the installation directory. If this has not been done, you will need to change the
permissions of the above file when you copy them to your working directory.
You should see the model, shown on the next page, in your modeling window. A strip chart also
appears. It tracks the height of the door.
To perform a simulation:
1. Perform a dynamic simulation from 0 to 5 seconds with 200 steps.
Without a sensor, the simulation runs to time = 5 seconds even though the bottom tip of the door
goes into the ground (that is, below the global xz plane). This does not sufficiently model what
happens in the physical world, so you need to add a sensor to enhance the realism of your simulation.
2. Reset the model to its initial configuration.
Adding a Sensor
You’ll now add a sensor that uses the run-time function DY to monitor when the tip of the garage door crosses
ground. DY returns the y component of translational displacement from one object, in this case ground, to
Examples of Using Adams View 635
Example of Adding a Sensor
another object, the bottom tip of the lowest door section. When the y component is 0 within a tolerance of
1.0E-3, the sensor stops the simulation.
To add a sensor:
1. Click the Design Exploration tab. From the Instrumentation container, click the Sensor tool
.
or
(Classic interface) From the Simulate menu, point to Sensor, and then select New.
2. Set Event Definition to Run-Time Expression.
3. Define the Expression to be:
DY(.gdoor.PART_2.tip, .gdoor.ground.frame, .gdoor.ground.frame)
Note: The shortened form DY(tip, frame, frame) also works. For help in defining this
function, right-click the Expression text box and use the Function Builder.
4. Select Non-Angular Values to indicate that the expression measures non-angular values.
5. Now set the value to trigger the sensor action:
a. Set the pull-down menu to less than or equal.
b. In the Value text box, enter 0, which is the value to trigger an action.
c. In the Error Tolerance text box, use the default 1.0E-03, which is the allowable error between the
targeted value (0) and the actual sensed value.
6. In the Standard Actions section, select Terminate current simulation step.
7. Select Stop.
8. Ensure that all other standard and special actions are not selected.
9. Select OK.
To perform a simulation:
Perform a dynamic simulation from 0 to 5 seconds with 200 steps.
The simulation now stops before reaching 5.0 seconds. The last output step should be at time = 4.6
seconds, and you should receive a message similar to the following:
WARNING: Sensor .gdoor.SENSOR_1 halting simulation at time 4.617.
636 Adams View
Example of Adding a Sensor
or
(Classic interface) From the Simulate menu, point to Sensor, and then select New.
2. Set Event Definition to Run-Time Expression.
3. Define the Expression to be:
MOD(time, .5)
Note: This will measure the y-displacement of the bottom of the door with respect to ground.
6. Select Non-Angular Values to indicate that the expression measures non-angular values.
7. Set the value to trigger the sensor action:
a. Set the pull-down menu to equal.
b. In the Value text box, enter 0.
c. In the Error Tolerance text box, enter 0.05.
8. In Standard Actions, select Generate additional Output Step at event.
9. Ensure that all other standard and special actions are not selected
10. Select OK.
Now you'll create a function measure to track the evaluation of the sensor.
or
Examples of Using Adams View 637
Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Function, then select New.
2. In the function work area, enter:
SENVAL(SENSOR_2)
3. Select OK.
A strip chart appears to track the value of the function measure.
Now you’ll simulate the model.
Overview
The following example demonstrates how to use user-defined measures and illustrates some of the useful
capabilities of measures. In the example, you import an Adams View command file that builds a model of an
ideal pendulum. The simple mathematical model of the ideal pendulum assumes the following:
The link defining the pendulum has no mass or inertia.
The sphere is a point mass.
There is no friction in the revolute joint.
The pendulum oscillates through a small angle.
You will then create an object measure and a user-defined analytical solution to measure the pendulum’s
kinetic energy. After simulating the model, you will use another user-defined measure to compare the two
kinetic energy measurements.
We’ve provided you with three command files that you can use depending on how much of the example you
want to do yourself:
test_measures_without.cmd - Model with no measures defined.
test_measures_with.cmd - Model with two of the four required measures.
test_measures_final.cmd - Model with all four required measures.
The files are in the directory /install_dir/examples/user_guide, where install_dir is the directory in which
Adams software is installed.
The example is divided into the following sections:
Importing the Command File
Creating an Object Measure of Kinetic Energy
Creating a User-Defined Analytical Measure
638 Adams View
Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum
Note: By default on Windows, files in the installation directory are read-only. During
installation, your system administration can choose to change the permissions so you
can write to the installation directory. If this has not been done, you will need to change
the permissions of the above file when you copy them to your working directory.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Function, and then select New.
The Function Builder appears.
2. Change the function measure name to .model_1.MY_KE.
3. Type the following lines into the work area of the Function Builder:
0.5*wz(.model_1.PART_2.cm)**2*(15*(50**2 + 300**2) + 15000)/1000
Note: The Function Builder can only process 80 characters per line. To avoid any problems,
use multiple lines to input the kinetic energy expression.
4. Select OK.
A strip chart titled MY_KE appears. Because you have not run a simulation, the chart contains no
information.
5. Run an interactive dynamic simulation for 2.0 seconds with 50 steps (the default). Watch the
feedback of both measures.
Both plots should appear similar in period and magnitude. If not, double check the syntax of your
function.
1. Click the Design Exploration tab. From the Measures container, click the Range Measure tool
.
or
(Classic interface) From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Range, and then select New.
2. Change the name of the range to MY_AVERAGE. Then, select the range type Average, and specify
the measure of .model_1.MY_KE.
3. Select OK.
A strip chart titled MY_AVERAGE appears. You do not need to run another simulation because the
strip chart already contains useful information based on the last simulation.
4. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Computed, and then select New. The Function
Builder appears.
5. Change the name of the computed measure to .model_1.PERCENT_ERROR.
6. Type the following line into the working area of the Function Builder:
100*(.model_1.ADAMS_KE - .model_1.MY_KE)/322.6
7. Select OK.
A strip chart titled PERCENT ERROR appears. You do not need to run a simulation because the
strip chart should already contain useful information. Remember that if you make any significant
changes to the model, these results are no longer valid.
You should see that the maximum percentage of error between the two curves is less than 3%.
Overview
The following examples illustrate basic tasks you can perform with the Menu and Dialog-Box Builders:
Modifying a Standard Menu
Modifying a Standard Dialog Box
Creating and Modifying a Custom Dialog Box
Using Command Files to Customize the Interface
To delete a tool:
1. On the Tools menu, point to Dialog Box, and then select Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Double-click moag.
The Dialog-Box Builder appears.
3. Double-click the Main toolbox tool that you want to delete. For example, double-click the Select
tool.
4. In the Dialog-Box Builder, on the Edit menu, select Delete.
Examples of Using Adams View 643
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface
Adams View removes the selected tool from the Main toolbox.
Figure 11 Example Dialog Box with One Field and One Button
To see the default material types Adams View supplies, do the following in the Command
Navigator:
1. Double-click +material, and then double-click modify.
A dialog box appears.
2. Right-click the Material Name box, point to Material, and select Browse.
The Database Navigator lists all the default material types.
5. Copy the command used for the Aluminum button and modify it for the other buttons.
6. From the Options menu, select Test Box to activate the new dialog box for testing.
7. Use the right mouse button to click in the field next to the Part label in your dialog box, and select
the part to which you want to apply a certain material type.
8. Click the desired Material button.
Your part now has the assigned material type.
9. Click OK to close the dialog box.
2. Create all your custom dialog boxes that are required to execute the macros, test them to make sure
they work correctly, and then save them as .cmd files. If you create your dialog boxes in Adams View
(by either using the Dialog Box Builder or double-clicking on the name of the macro from within the
Command Navigator), then you should export each to a .cmd file when you are finished. As with
macros, once you get familiar with the Adams View commands necessary to create custom dialog
boxes, you may find it faster and easier to create your associated .cmd files using a text editor.
3. Create a build .cmd file that contains the commands required to accomplish three main objectives:
• Import each of your macro .cmd files into Adams View.
• Import each of your custom dialog box .cmd files into Adams View.
• Create each of the custom menus in Adams View needed to execute the macros, either directly or
indirectly (by displaying the custom dialog boxes).
Command Files
Table 1 lists and briefly explains the command files that make up this example. The text of the command files
follows the table.
Creates the macros contained in the four mac_ command files (macro create
macro_name = ...)
build_my_gui.cmd
Customizes the interface and imports macros.
! --- Import macros
!
!
macro read &
macro_name = mac_vis_all &
file_name = "mac_vis_all.cmd" &
user_entered_command = "marker visibility all"
!
Examples of Using Adams View 649
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface
dbox_sca_down.cmd
Creates a dialog box for scaling markers.
!
interface dialog_box create &
650 Adams View
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface
default = true
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_sca_dow.Apply &
location = 228.0, 35.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
vert_resizing = attach_bottom &
label = "Apply" &
commands = "interface dialog execute dialog=$_parent
undisplay=no"
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_sca_dow.Cancel &
location = 318.0, 35.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
vert_resizing = attach_bottom &
label = "Cancel" &
commands = "interface dialog undisplay dialog=$_parent"
dbx_sca_up.cmd
Creates a dialog box for increasing the size of markers.
!
interface dialog_box create &
dialog_box_name = .gui.mar_sca_up &
help_text = "Marker Scale Up" &
location = 410.0, 120.0 &
height = 68.0 &
width = 404.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
title = "Marker Scale Up" &
iconifiable = no &
execution_commands = "marker scale up &", " ‘markers =
$f_markers‘" &
decorate = yes &
resizable = yes &
grab_all_input = no
!
interface label create &
label_name = .gui.mar_sca_up.l_markers &
location = 2.0, 2.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 160.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
652 Adams View
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface
dbx_vis_some.cmd
Sets the visibility of selected markers.
!
interface dialog_box create &
dialog_box_name = .gui.mar_vis_som &
help_text = "Marker Visibility Some" &
location = 184.0, 108.0 &
height = 118.0 &
width = 425.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
title = "Marker Visibility Some" &
iconifiable = no &
execution_commands = "marker visibility some &", &
" ‘markers = $f_markers‘" &
decorate = yes &
resizable = yes &
grab_all_input = no
!
interface label create &
label_name = .gui.mar_vis_som.l_markers &
location = 2.0, 2.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 160.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
justified = left &
text = "Markers"
!
interface field create &
field_name = .gui.mar_vis_som.f_markers &
location = 162.0, 2.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 261.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = expand &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
scrollable = no &
editable = yes &
required = yes &
execute_cmds_on_exit = no &
number_of_values = 0 &
object_type = old &
type_filter = marker
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_vis_som.OK &
location = 159.0, 85.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
654 Adams View
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface
mac_sca_down.cmd
Creates a macro that scales selected markers.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND marker scale down
!WRAP_IN_UNDO NO
!$MARKERS:t=marker:c=0
marker attributes scale=0.5 marker_name=$MARKERS
mac_sca_up.cmd
Creates a macro that increases the size of selected markers.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND marker scale up
!WRAP_IN_UNDO NO
! $MARKERS:t=marker:c=0
marker attributes scale_of_icons=2.0 marker_name=$MARKERS
Examples of Using Adams View 655
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface
mac_vis_all.cmd
Creates a macro that turns on the visibility of all markers.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND marker visibility all_on_off
!WRAP_IN_UNDO NO
marker attributes visibility=toggle marker_name=.*
mac_vis_some.cmd
Creates a macro that turns on the visibility of selected markers.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND marker visibility some_on_off
!WRAP_IN_UNDO NO
! $MARKERS:t=marker:c=0
marker attributes visibility=toggle marker_name=$MARKERS
656 Adams View
Examples of Customizing the Adams View Interface
A - D 659
2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool
or
Curves - Splines, chains, and data-element curves are all considered curves.
Edge - An edge is one of the wireframe outlines drawn on a solid. For
example, you can use a Parasolid object representing a cam that you imported
into Adams View.
3D Plot Viewer
Ribbon menu → Elements Tab → Data Elements Container → Spline icon → Type → y=f(x,z) 3D → 3D
Preview
or
About Adams
Help → About
Displays the following information:
Software version number and the date it was built
Directory where Adams is installed
Copyright statement
Names of objects in the database use a hierarchical naming structure. For example, a block built on the
ground part is named .model_1.ground.block.
Activate/Deactivate
Right-click object → (De)activate
Sets the Activation status of a selected object and whether or not the object’s children inherit the activation
status of the parent.
Learn about About the Adams View Modeling Database.
A - D 661
Adams Insight Display
or
Notes: If you want to run all the investigation simulations in the current Adams View session, you
can alter some of the Simulate settings to enable the entire series of simulations to run more
efficiently. Alternately, you can run all the simulations external to Adams View with the MDI
INSIGHT BUILD command. This can be accomplished by saving the experiment after the
workspace has been defined, returning to Adams View, and then issuing the MDI INSIGHT
BUILD command.
or
Notes: If you want to run all the investigation simulations in the current Adams View session, you
can alter some of the Simulate settings to enable the entire series of simulations to run more
efficiently. Alternately, you can run all the simulations external to Adams View with the MDI
INSIGHT BUILD command. This can be accomplished by saving the experiment after the
workspace has been defined, returning to Adams View, and then issuing the MDI INSIGHT
BUILD command.
File Operations
To: Select:
Create a new modeling database Ctrl + n
Open an existing modeling database Ctrl + o
Save the current modeling database Ctrl + s
Print Ctrl + p
Read command file F2
Exit Ctrl + q
Edit Operations
To: Select:
Undo the last operation Ctrl + z
Redo the last undone operation Ctrl- Shift + z
Copy objects Ctrl + c
Paste text in text boxes in dialog boxes and as comments Ctrl + v
Cut text from text boxes in dialog boxes Ctrl + x
Quickly clear text from text boxes Left-click at the start of the text box, and
then press Ctrl-k or Ctrl-K
Delete selected object Del
Modify object Ctrl + e
Escape operation Esc
Display Operations
To display: Select:
Command window F3
Coordinate window F4
Menu Builder F5
Dialog Box Builder F6
Working grid g
Plotting window (Adams PostProcessor) F8
Help window F1
A - D 665
Adams View Command Server
Viewing Operations
To: Select:
Rotate view in the XY directions r
Rotate view in the Z direction (s pin) s (lowercase)
Translate view t
Change perspective depth d
Dynamically zoom view z
Use dynamic increment Shift
Define a zoom area w
Center view c
Orient view to object (e lement) e
Fit view f
Fit view - no ground Ctrl + F
Orient view to front F
Orient view to right R
Orient view to top T
Orient view to isometric I
Toggle render mode between wireframe and shaded S (Uppercase)
Toggle screen icons on and off v
Drawing Operations
Adams2Nastran
Ribbon menu → Simulation Tab → Simulate container → Run a Scripted Simulation → Select Interactive option → Export a
or
Add/Replace Simulations
File → Replace Simulations
Updates the data in the plots with that stored in simulation result files, without recreating the plots. Also lets
you add data from other Simulations to your existing plots.
When you update your plots, Adams PostProcessor looks for simulation results in the original simulation
Results file (for example, a Request file) from which you imported the current data. If the time and date stamp
on the original file is more recent than the time and date stamp on the plot, Adams PostProcessor reloads the
plot with the updated data.
If you use the Add Simulation option, a new legend, called the simulation legend, appears on the left side of
the plot. The simulation legend identifies the source of the data grouped by color or line style. The original
legend, called the curve legend, continues to show information about the original curves.
Auto Style/ Select Auto to allow Adams PostProcessor to automatically assign colors,
styles, or weights to the curves.
Auto Weight
Clear the selection of Auto to use the pull-down menu to set the colors,
styles, or weights. If you select No Change, Adams PostProcessor uses the
current color of the curve representing the data to be added.
Update Pages Select the pages containing the plots that you want to update. Enter a range of pages
in the Start Page and End Page text boxes.
668 Adams View
Aggregate Mass
Aggregate Mass
Tools → Aggregate Mass Shared Dialog Box
Calculates the total mass of a part or parts in your model. Adams View returns the information in the
Information window or in a specified file. It ignores the ground part or any part that has no mass.
When calculating the aggregate mass, Adams View essentially places a temporary marker at the center of mass
location of the selected parts and then calculates the inertia properties in principal moments (without off-
diagonal terms). The calculated inertia tensor is then transformed to the given reference frame (or to global
coordinates, if no reference frame is selected). Note that the reported inertia tensor is not relative to the total
CM location/orientation, it is relative to the selected reference frame.
The orientation shown is the orientation of the principal moments of inertia.
If no reference frame is selected, then the calculated inertia tensor is additionally reported relative to the total
CM location and orientation, and thirdly relative to the total CM location but global orientation.
Learn about Calculating Aggregate Mass of Parts.
Select the desired parts from the list of parts in your model.
Replace
Append
None
File Select if you want the output displayed to a file.
Enter the name of the file in which you want to save the information in the text box.
A - D 669
Angle Measure
Angle Measure
Ribbon menu → Design Exploration Tab → Measures container → Create a new Angle Measure and then click Advanced
or
Animation Controls
Ribbon menu → Results Tab → Review container →
or
Animation Controls Dialog Box - View Animation Controls Dialog Box - Car
A - D 671
Animation Controls
Option/Icon Description
Plays the animation backward.
Slider Click and drag until you reach the number of the frame you want to display.
Analysis Do one of the following:
Play animations in a different view window, by entering the name of any view
window that is currently visible on your screen. The default name is the currently
active view.
Play animation in multiple view windows at the same time by entering multiple
view names, separating each name with a comma.
Note: If you choose to animate in more than one view simultaneously, every view
you specify must animate the same simulation results. You cannot display
one simulation in one view and another simulation in another view.
672 Adams View
Animation Controls
Option/Icon Description
Switches to the Variant, Testrig and Road Graphics used for the selected analysis.
Base Part/ Lets you set the view perspective or camera angle for an Animation. Setting different
Fixed Base/ animation view perspectives can be especially useful when parts undergo large motions
Std Camera and move off your screen during an animation, such as with vehicle simulations.
Choose from:
Time Range - Enter a start time and stop time in the text box. Adams View replays
those frames whose time is within the specified range.
Time - Enter an interval and select Apply.
Frame Range - Enter a start frame and an end frame.
Frame - Enter a frame number and select Apply.
Cycles/Loop Sets how many times to replay the animation. The default is to play the specified
sequence of frames once.
In the Cycles box, enter a whole number representing the number of times you want
Adams View to play the animation. It automatically rewinds the animation before each
replay.
Frame Increment Enter a number of frames to skip. For example, enter 5 to have Adams View display
only every fifth frame.
Superimpose Toggles the overlay of frames on top of one another. By default, during an animation,
Adams View erases the previous frame before drawing the next frame.
We recommend that you use the frame or time range features, as well as the frame
increment so that only certain frames are superimposed on top of one another.
Icons Toggles the Screen icons during animations.
Option/Icon Description
Contour plots Toggles the display of Contour plots of flexible bodies. The default is set to off to improve
the speed of the animation, and to remove any caching of the animation before playing
it.
To learn about setting defaults for caching animations see PPT Preferences - Animation.
To learn about displaying contour plots on flexible bodies see Animating Deformations,
Modal Forces, and Stress/Strain.
Save Simulated Position
Displays the Save Model at Simulation Position dialog box so you can save the model at a
simulated position into the Modeling database under a new name.
Save Model at Simulation States
Displays the Save Model at Simulation State dialog box so you can save the model at a
simulated state into the Modeling database under a new name so you can use it as your
new design configuration with states.
Displays the Simulation Controls dialog box.
Aero Forces Toggles the visualization of the Aerodynamic force components in user defined color
(Car only)
Tire Forces Toggles the visualization of the Road contact force components in user defined color
(Car only)
Display Driver Toggles the visualization of the target path data used by the Driving Machine for
Target Path controlling the vehicle (if available).
(Car only)
Display Driver Toggles the visualization of the actual path data of the vehicle as a result of the
Actual Path controlling actions of the Driving Machine.
(Car only)
Learn about:
Using Animations
Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes
674 Adams View
Append Run Commands
End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want the simulation
to stop.
Duration - Specify the amount of time over which you want the simulation to
run.
Steps/Step Size Set the frequency with which Adams View outputs data during your simulation. You
can specify:
Steps - Represents the total number of times you want Adams View to provide
output information over your entire simulation. For example, specify 50 steps over
a 1-second simulation interval to define an output period of 0.02 seconds per step,
which yields an output frequency of 50 steps/second.
Step Size - Represents the amount of time, in current model units, between
output steps. The output frequency remains constant even if you change your
simulation end time or duration. For example, enter a step size of 0.01 seconds to
specify an output period of 0.01 seconds per step, which yields an output
frequency of 100 steps/second.
If you select Transient - Static Steps/Step Size and End Time/Durations options appear
If you select Equilibrium no other options will appear
If you select Eigensolution following options appear:
A - D 675
Append Run Commands
Arc Tool
or
Creates arcs and circles centered about a location. You begin drawing an arc by specifying its starting and
ending angles. You then indicate its center location and set its radius and the orientation of its x-axis. You can
also specify the arc’s radius before you draw it. The Arc tool draws the angle starting from the x-axis that you
specify and moving counterclockwise (right-hand rule).
See Elements of an arc.
Before you create arc geometry, you can select to create a new part consisting of the arc geometry or add the
arc geometry to an existing part or ground. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed of
only wire geometry. You can extrude a circle into solid geometry that has mass. Learn about Extruding
Construction Geometry Along a Path.
Learn about Creating Arcs and Circles.
Assembly Measure
Creates a measure on an assembly.
See Measures and Assemblies.
A - D 677
Associativity
Associativity
Database Navigator → Associativity
Allows you to display the objects that a selected object uses. For example, you can select a joint in the tree list
to show the I and J markers that the joint uses. You can also select to view the objects that use the selected
object.
Learn about Viewing the Associativity of Objects.
Beam
or
Modifying Beams
Beam Measure
Design Exploration tab → Measures container
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Bode Plots
Plot → Bode Plots
Creates a Bode plot in Adams PostProcessor. Bode plots provide a way to study frequency response functions
(FRFs) for linear systems and linearized representations of nonlinear systems. The frequency response
function measures the response at the outputs due to unit harmonic excitation at the inputs at various
frequencies. A Bode plot in Adams PostProcessor shows the amplitude gain and the phase shift between input
to output for all output/input combinations of the linear system.
Bodies
Displays tools for creating rigid body geometry.
684 Adams View
Bodies
Boss Tool
Hollow Tool
Construction or Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change
Settings depending on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you
Container create a link, Adams View lets you specify its width, length, and height before
creating it. Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of
how you move the mouse. You can also define design variables or expressions
for many values.
Boss Tool
or
As you create a boss, you can specify its radius and height.
Learn about Creating a Hole or Boss.
Box Tool
or
The box dimensions are in screen coordinates with the height up, length to the left, and depth out of the
screen or grid:
Note: One hotpoint appears after you draw the box. It lets you modify the length, height, and
depth of the box. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using
Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry
688 Adams View
Bushing Measure
Bushing Measure
Design Exploration tab → Measures container
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Bushing Tool
or
1 Location
2 Bodies - 1 Location
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes of
the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-axes of
the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector you
select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams View automatically calculates
the x- and y-axes.
Translational K Enter the stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the damping coefficients.
Rotational K Enter the rotational stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the rotational damping coefficients.
A - D 691
STEP, IGES ('Adams Geometry Translators' only)
Model Name - Lets you specify the Adams View model to be written to
the CAD file. Adams places each rigid body in the model on a separate
level. All geometry written to the IGES file is defined with respect to the
global coordinate system of the Adams View model.
Part Name - Lets you specify the Adams View part to be written to the
CAD file. Adams writes all the geometry owned by the part to the CAD
file. It defines all geometry in the CAD file with respect to the part
coordinate system.
Analysis Name - Lets you export a model at a particular simulation
frame (time) of a particular analysis. This is helpful for transferring
position data of an Adams View model to a drafting program to prepare
drawings of the mechanism at various states of operation. Adams writes
all parts and geometry to the CAD file in the same relative position as
they appear in a single frame display.
Display Summary Select to write a verbose log file to the disk. A message will be displayed indicating
the log file to which the translation operation details have been written.
Translation Options Click on this button to invoke the Manage Geometry Translation Options dialog
box for the relevant geometry and translation operation (read or write). The
dialog box would be pre-filled with the option name, short description of what
the option is for and the default value.
Upon changing the desired option values, click on the 'Done' button. The
translation options so set will be used in the ensuing translation operation.
692 Adams View
Chain Tool
Chain Tool
Ribbon menu → Bodeis Tab → Booleans container → Chain Tool
or
Note: If you want to use the chained geometry with a pin-in-slot or curve-to-curve constraint, you
must turn the geometry into a spline. See the Spline Tool.
Chamfer Tool
or
Note: You will get different results when you chamfer one edge at a time than when you chamfer
all edges at once. Also, you may not be able to chamfer an edge if an adjoining edge has
already been chamfered. It depends on the complexity of the chamfering.
Learn about:
Chamfering and Filleting Objects
Fillet Tool
694 Adams View
Clearance Compute
Clearance Compute
Tools → Clearance →Compute
When you request to run a Clearance study, Adams PostProcessor calculates the minimum and maximum
distances between a pair of objects using data from a selected Simulation. It adds the information to the
animation associated with the simulation, which you can subsequently run. You can also generate a report of
the data and plot it.
Note: The number of frames in your animation can have a significant effect on the accuracy of the
distances reported. Therefore, for best results, we recommend that you perform at least one
clearance study with a large number of frames in the animation (time steps in the
simulation).
Caution: Clearance Studies are not designed to handle cases where one geometry (I or J) is
completely enclosed by the other. Unexpected results can occur.
Color Picker
Settings → Colors → Color Picker
Lets you select a basic color or create a custom color to be used for displaying objects and the background of
the Main window and any View windows that you create.
Tip: You can define a custom color by clicking the closest basic color, modifying
it, and then selecting Add to Custom Colors.
Custom Colors Select an empty box to create a custom color or select a custom color you've
already defined so you can modify it.
Color Matrix Click anywhere to select a custom color. Use the pointer to change the hue and
Saturation. Change hue by moving the pointer horizontally; change saturation by
moving the pointer vertically.
Luminosity Slider Drag the slider to change the luminosity or relative lightness or darkness of a
color. Changes the value in the Value text box.
Hue Specify the hue of a color. The values range from 0 to 239.
Saturation Specify the saturation of a color.
Value Specify the luminosity of a color.
Red Specify the amount of red in a color. You can use any combination of red, green,
or blue to define a color.
Green Specify the amount of green in a color. You can use any combination of red,
green, or blue to define a color.
Blue Specify the amount of blue in a color. You can use any combination of red,
green, or blue to define a color.
Add to Custom Colors Select to add the color currently displayed in the color matrix to the palette of
custom colors.
Command File
Settings → Command File
Allows you to specify whether Adams View displays the command that it executes in the Command Window or
displays the results of the commands on the screen. In addition, it lets you specify what Adams View should
do when it encounters an error while reading an Adams View command file.
Learn more with Import - Adams View Command Files dialog box help.
696 Adams View
Command Navigator
Note: Use this value only if the command file is a literal recording of your
key strokes, complete with back spaces or other corrections of
mistakes.
Ignore Command Select if you want Adams View to ignore the line on which it found the error
and start processing the next line as a new command.
Note: Adams View can usually recover and execute subsequent commands
in the file. However, if subsequent commands depend on the results
of the invalid command, they may fail or give unexpected results.
Abort Execution Select to instruct Adams View to immediately close all the command files and
return control to interactive input. This is the most conservative setting because
it guarantees that subsequent commands will cause no further errors or
unexpected results.
Command Navigator
Tools → Command Navigator Shared Dialog Box
Enables you to enter Adams View commands without having to know the entire syntax of the commands.
The Command Navigator displays a list of all Adams View command Keywords. You can also search
Keywords.
A - D 697
Command Window
If the entered string does not contain any wildcard character, all occurrences
of the string as a prefix or suffix will be included in the search. For example,
entering "Marker" in the Search option without quotes will display the result
"floating_marker" as well as "marker". If you want to search for an exact string
without any wildcards, enclose the string in " " (double quotes). In the above
example, if "Marker" is entered with quotes, only keywords/objects that
contain the string "marker" are displayed.
Help Help about selected keyword/object.
Close Select to close the command navigator dialog box.
Learn about:
Showing, Hiding, or Selecting Keywords
Getting help in the Command Navigator
Command Window
View → Command Window
F3
Provides a text-based way to enter commands using either the Adams View command language or Adams
command based in Python. It assumes that you understand the Adams View command language or Adams
Python interface underlying the Adams View interface. The command window contains both a command
entry area for entering commands and a command information area for displaying informational and error
messages and there is an option menu for toggling between Adams View command language (cmd) and
Python (py):
698 Adams View
Comments
Learn about Using the Command Window with the Adams View command language.
Learn about the Adams Python interface.
Comments
Database Navigator → Comments
Allows you to add comments to any object in the Modeling database.
Learn about Adding Comments Through the Database Navigator.
or
or
Connectors
Displays tools for creating joints. The tab contains the entire library of joints.
700 Adams View
Connectors
Construction Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change depending on
or Settings the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you create a link, Adams
Container View lets you specify its width, length, and height before creating it. Then, as you
create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move the mouse. You
can also define design variables or expressions for many values.
or
or
A - D 703
Constraint Create Complex Joint Gear
To create a marker, right-click the Common Velocity Marker text box, and then
select Create.
Tip: If you encounter a warning message that the gear has a suspicious
configuration, the z-axis of the CV marker is probably oriented
incorrectly.
A - D 705
Constraint Modify Complex Joint Gear
or
To create a marker, right-click the Common Velocity Marker text box, and then
select Create.
Tip: If you encounter a warning message that the gear has a suspicious
configuration, the z-axis of the CV marker is probably oriented
incorrectly.
A - D 707
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve
or
Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.
or
Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.
710 Adams View
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve
Ref Marker Name Enter marker that is fixed on the part containing the curve on which the point
must move. Adams Solver uses the reference marker to associate the shape
defined by the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The curve
coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the reference
marker.
A - D 711
Contact Force Measure
Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact on the curve is
specified.
Leave blank. Adams View uses the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve.
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Controls_measure_panel
Modify Controls Block dialog box → Output Measure button
Creates an output measure for a control block.
Learn about adding controls Using the Adams View Controls Toolkit.
A - D 713
Coordinate System
Coordinate System
Settings → Coordinate System
Lets you set the default coordinate system for a Modeling database.
Learn about Coordinate Systems in Adams View.
Cartesian
Cylindrical
Spherical
Rotation Sequence Select the type of rotation sequence. See Rotation Sequences.
Body Fixed/Space Fixed Select either:
Space fixed - Adams View applies the rotations about axes that remain
in their original orientation.
Body fixed - Adams View applies the rotations about axes that move
with the body as it rotates.
As Adams View applies each rotation to an axis, it produces a new set of axes.
714 Adams View
Coupler Joint Tool
Ribbon menu → Connectors Tab → Couplers container → Joint (Add-on Constraint): Coupler
or
It relates the translational and/or rotational motion of the joints through a linear scaling of the relative
motions or through nonlinear relationships that you define by entering parameters to be passed to a user-
written subroutine that is linked into Adams View. Couplers are useful if your model uses belts and pulleys
or chains and sprockets to transfer motion and energy. Although you can couple only two or three joints,
more than one coupler can come from the same joint, as shown in the figure above.
When you create a coupler, you can only create a two-joint coupler. You select the driver joint, the joint to
which the second joint is coupled, and the coupled joint, the joint that follows the driver joint. To specify the
relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or to create a three-joint coupler, you modify the
coupler.
Learn about Creating Couplers.
Curve Edit toolbar → Filter Curve Tool → Right-click Filter Name text box → filter_function → Create → Create from Butterworth Filter
Creates a Butterworth filter to define the coefficients of a transfer function when creating a curve filter
function. The first four options in the dialog box are the same as when you are creating a Butterworth filter
directly. See Create/Modify Filter Function dialog box help. To generate these options based on Passband and
Stopband options, select the Generate Filter Order _ Frequency checkbox.
Learn about Filtering Curve Data.
A - D 715
Create Butterworth Filter
Using the notation Passband Corner Frequency=fp and Corner Frequency=fs, the following rules apply for
the options below:
To create a low-pass filter, give one value each for fp and fs, and fp < fs.
To create a high-pass filter, give one value each for fp and fs, and fp > fs.
To create a bandpass filter, specify two values each for fp and fs, such that fs1< fp1< fp2 < fs2.
You cannot create a bandstop filter using the options below.
Create Clearance
Tools → Clearance → Create
Defines a Clearance study.
Learn more about Defining a Clearance Study.
You can also select Pick to select the object from the screen. (You can select more
than one object at a time.)
J Body Select the second object in the pair.
You can also select Pick to select the object from the screen. (You can select more
than one object at a time.)
A - D 717
Create Design Constraint
Polygon
Vertex
Ribbon menu → Design Exploration Tab → Design Evaluation container → Create a Design Constraint
or
Note: You do not need to create an explicit constraint to limit the value of a design variable. You can
do this directly by setting properties for the variable.
Constraints can involve the simulation results, but are not required to do so. You can constrain overall size,
weight, or other factors that depend only on model data. In these cases, use the function or macro/variable
option for the constraint, and ignore the analysis data that Adams View supplies. Instead, compute the
constraint directly from the appropriate model data.
718 Adams View
Create Design Objective
Ribbon menu → Design Exploration Tab → Design Evaluation container → Create a Design Objective
or
Create an FE Load
or
720 Adams View
Create an FE Load
This new force type will be launched from the Forces-Special container.
Distributed Load - The distributed force can be applied to the FE Part which can be defined through the
expression language or user-written subroutines.
AZ Torque
The Adams Solver functions S, SD, SV, SA can be used to define FE Load functions relative to the
position along the length of FE parts that are modelled with the 2D/3D beam formulations.
Force Display If set to "On" 10 force vectors will be displayed along the length of the FE part centreline.
Create FEMDATA
or
Produces data files of monitor points, component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains for input to
subsequent finite element or fatigue life analysis for use in third-party products. You use the Settings →
Solver → Output → More → Durability Files to specify the type of file to produce (for more information,
see Solver Settings - Output dialog box help and the Adams Durability online help). Adams View will not output to
any files unless you specify the format. For more information, see About Setting Simulation Controls.
722 Adams View
Create FEMDATA
A - D 723
Create FEMDATA
Loads on Rigid Body/Flex Body - Outputs all external forces (reaction and
applied forces except gravity) acting on the specified body and, optionally,
inertial forces of the specified body (angular velocity and acceleration, including
effects of gravity) as a function of time. Load data will be output in the
simulation set of units.
Modal Deformation - Outputs modal deformations as a function of time of the
specified flexible body. Adams View will only export coordinates of the active
modes in the simulation.
Nodal Deformation - Outputs nodal deformations as a function of time of the
specified flexible. Adams View writes the deformations in the simulation set of
units.
Strain - Outputs strain information if strain modes are available in the Modal
Neutral File (MNF) of the specified flexible body and an Adams Durability license
is available. Adams Durability outputs all six components of strain (normal-X,
normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-ZX). It outputs strains in the
basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body except where specified below.
Stress - Outputs stress information if modal stresses are available in the MNF
of the flexible body and an Adams Durability license is available. Adams
Durability outputs all six components of stress (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-
Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-ZX). It outputs stresses in the simulation set of
units in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body except where
specified below.
Strain on FE Part - Outputs strain information of the specified FE Part when
an Adams Durability license is available. Adams Durability outputs all six
components of strain (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ,
shear-ZX) even though some of these components may be zero by definition of
the nonlinear FE Part beam formulation. It outputs strains in the body
coordinate system of the FE Part except where specified below.
Stress on FE Part - Outputs stress information of the specified FE Part when an
Adams Durability license is available. Adams Durability outputs all six
components of stress (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ,
shear-ZX) even though some of these components may be zero by definition of
the nonlinear FE Part beam formulation. It outputs stress in the body
coordinate system of the FE Part except where specified below.
Monitor Points - Output monitor point information if monitor point data are
available in the MNF of the flexible body.
724 Adams View
Create FEMDATA
Note: When you set the Time options, Adams Durability only checks the time
steps within those specifications for the hot spots.
Von Mises/Max Specify the value of stress/strain in determining hotspots from one of Von Mises,
Prin/Min Prin.,/Max Max Prin., Min Prin., Max Shear, Normal-X, Normal-Y, Normal-Z, Shear-XY,
Shear/Normal- Shear-YZ, Shear-ZX, or Signed von Mises. For more information, see the FEMDATA
X/Normal- statement.
Y/Normal-Z/Shear-
XY/Shear-YZ/Shear-
ZX
Radius Enter a radius that defines the spherical extent of each hotspot. A default value of
0.0 (zero) means that all nodes in the flexible body will be hotspot candidates.
726 Adams View
Create FEMDATA
Note: When you set the Time options, Adams Durability only checks the time
steps within those specifications for the hot spots.
Von Mises/Max Specify the value of stress/strain in determining hotspots from one of Von Mises,
Prin/Min Prin.,/Max Max Prin., Min Prin., Max Shear, Normal-X, Normal-Y, Normal-Z, Shear-XY,
Shear/Normal- Shear-YZ, Shear-ZX, or Signed von Mises. For more information, see the FEMDATA
X/Normal- statement.
Y/Normal-Z/Shear-
XY/Shear-YZ/Shear-
ZX
Radius Enter a radius that defines the spherical extent of each hotspot. A default value of
0.0 (zero) means that all markers on the FE Part will be hotspot candidates.
A - D 727
Create Forces Palette and Tool Stack
From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is the
start of the simulation.
To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search of a
peak load. The default is to output to the end of the simulation.
Skip - Enter the number of output steps to skip when outputting the data. The
default is to output every step (0).
Icon Link
Translational Spring Damper Tool
Create/Modify Contact
Torsion SpringTool
Bushing Tool
Gravity
Beam
Ribbon menu → Design Exploration Tab → Instrumentation container → Create Run-Time Clearance
or
plot to see if the curves fall beneath the spec line. There are no limits to the number of spec lines you can add
to a plot.
Ribbon menu → Bodies Tab → Flexible Bodies container → Adams Flex: Create a Flexible Body
or
734 Adams View
Create a Flexible Body
Note: The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB,
using the “…” button provided beside the index. The desired
flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the displayed
list.
Import All This option can be used as an alternative to specifying an index. Using this
option will import all flexible bodies in the specified MD DB at once. All the
created bodies will have a default location and orientation as (0,0,0).
A - D 735
Create a Flexible Body
Orientation
Along Axis Orientation
In Plane Oriention
Relative to You can:
Notes: Adams MNF Import (> ~10MB) May Cause SUSE System to Hang.
In Adams importing .mnf files greater then approximately 10MB in size may cause the
machine to hang/freeze on SUSE Linux operating systems. The root cause is a configuration
setting of the NVidia driver typical for normal users. The workaround is to change the
NVidia configuration file like so:
Note: With version 2015 or before, Adams MD DB import only supported Nastran i4 database
files. In version 2015.1 or later Adams MD DB supports only i8 files. Support for i8 begun
with MSC Nastran version 2016.
Create a Request
Ribbon menu → Design Exploration Tab → Instrumentation container → Create a new Request
or
Enter one or more strings that identify the names of the result set
components the request produces. Learn more about About Naming Results
and Components in Requests.
Component Labels Available for XML result files only.
Enter one or more strings that identify the labels to be used when
plotting the result set components. Labels can be strings that include
white space. Quotes must be used to define the string if you set special
characters or whitespace.
Component Units Available for XML result files only.
Enter one or more strings that identify the unit dimension of the result
set components in XML result files. If you do not specify units, then the
units of the components are predefined based upon standard request type
(for example, displacement, velocity, and acceleration). See standard units.
738 Adams View
Create a Request
This is helpful if you want to group the output from multiple requests
into a single result set. For example, you might have several different
requests measuring driver input for a vehicle, and you might want to
place them all within a result set named Driver_Inputs for easier viewing
in Adams PostProcessor.
Comments Add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
Define Using Type & Markers/ Set to:
If you do not want to specify a title for a particular column, use two
quotation marks (" ") with no characters between them.
If you selected Define Using Function Expressions, the following options appear:
f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 Enter function expressions in the boxes f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 . Do
not use f1 and f5 . Adams Solver uses them to hold magnitudes for the
three functions that follow. You do not need to enter a function in every
text box. Learn About Specifying Function Expressions.
Title Enter a title for the top of each set of information output. The entire
comment must be on one line. The title can be only eighty characters
long. You can use blank spaces and all alphanumeric characters.
However, you cannot use the comma (,), the semicolon (;), the
ampersand (&), and the exclamation point (!).
If you selected Define Using Variables, the following options appear:
Variables Enter the variables in the text box. Learn about Creating and Modifying State
Variables.
Create/Modify Contact
Creates or modifies a contact force between two geometries. Learn About Contact Forces. For solids and curves,
you can select more than one geometry as long as the geometry belongs to the same part. The first geometry
is called the I geometry and the second geometry is called the J geometry. For sphere-to-sphere contacts, you
can specify that the contact be inside or outside the sphere.
Learn more about Contacts.
740 Adams View
Create/Modify Contact
If you type a geometry object name directly in the text box, you must press Enter to register the value.
Contact Name Enter the name of the contact to create or modify.
Contact Type Set to the type of geometry to come into contact. The text boxes change depending
on the type of contact force you selected.
If you selected Solid to Solid, Adams View displays the following two options:
I Solid Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same part.
J Solid Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same part.
If you selected Curve to Curve, Adams View displays the following four options:
I Curve Enter one or more geometry curves. The curves must all belong to the same part.
I Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
J Curve Enter one or more geometry curves. The curves must all belong to the same part.
J Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
If you selected Point to Curve, Adams View displays the following two options:
Marker Enter a marker.
Curve Enter one or more curves.
Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
If you selected Point to Plane, Adams View displays the following two options:
Marker Enter a marker.
Plane Enter a plane.
If you selected Curve to Plane, Adams View displays the following two options:
Curve Enter one or more curves.
Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
Plane Enter a plane.
If you selected Sphere to Plane, Adams View displays the following two options:
Sphere Enter a sphere. To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction
tool .
Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
A - D 741
Create/Modify Contact
Note: If the internal surface(s) of one geometry is selected to be used for contact via the Change
Direction tool, then the other geometry should be contained or nearly contained by the other's
surface(s) in the model design position otherwise the contact force will return a very large value
initially.
Sphere Enter a sphere. To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction
tool .
Sphere Enter a sphere. To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction
tool .
If you selected Cylinder to Cylinder, Adams View displays the following three options:
Note: If the internal surface(s) of one geometry is selected to be used for contact via the Change
Direction tool, then the other geometry should be contained or nearly contained by the other's
surface(s) in the model design position otherwise the contact force will return a very large value
initially.
First Cylinder Enter a cylinder. To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction
tool .
Second Cylinder Enter a cylinder. To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction
tool .
Face Contact For cylinder-in-cylinder scenarios (that is, where the interior surface of one of the
cylinders was selected) the faces of the outer cylinder can be optionally set to
enforce contact. The “Bottom” face is defined as the one on which the cylinder
geometry’s reference marker is located. The "Top" face is defined as the one on
which the cylinder geometry's reference marker is NOT located.
If you selected Flex Body to Solid, Adams View displays the following two options:
I Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.
J Solid Select a Geometry Solid.
If you selected Flex Body to Flex Body, Adams View displays the following two options:
I Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.
J Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.
If you selected Flex Edge to Curve, Adams View displays the following three options:
I Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.
To reset the Edge, select the Reset The Edge tool .
I Flex Edge Select a Flex Edge on I Flexible Body.
To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction tool .
J Curve Select a Curve. Multiple curves are not allowed.
742 Adams View
Create/Modify Contact
Note: If you are using an External Adams Solver, you must set the output files to
XML to view the force display. See Solver Settings - Output dialog box
help.
Normal Force Select either:
A large penalty value ensures that the penetration of one geometry into another
will be small. Large values, however, will cause numerical integration difficulties.
A value of 1E6 is appropriate for systems modeled in Kg-mm-sec. For more
information on how to specify this value, see the Extended Definition for the CONTACT
statement in the Adams Solver online help.
Note: The penalty value of 1.0E+06 is recommended value for users who have
no prior experience with restitution based contacts. Experienced users
will find values that are both smaller and larger that are applicable to
their models.
Note: When changing the length units in Adams View, stiffnesses in contacts
are scaled by (length conversion factor**exponent). When changing the
force unit, stiffness is only scaled by the force conversion factor.
744 Adams View
Create/Modify Contact
STIFFNESS * (PENALTY)**EXPONENT
For more information, see the IMPACT function in the Adams Solver online help.
Damping Enter a value to define the damping properties of the contacting material.
Consider a damping coefficient that is about one percent of the stiffness
coefficient.
Penetration Depth Enter a value to define the penetration at which Adams Solver turns on full damping.
Adams Solver uses a cubic STEP function to increase the damping coefficient from
zero, at zero penetration, to full damping when the penetration reaches the
damping penetration. A reasonable value for this parameter is 0.01 mm. For more
information, see the IMPACT function in the Adams Solver online help.
If you selected User Defined for Normal Force, define the following two options:
User function Specify the user parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine CNFSUB. For
more on user-written subroutines, see the Adams Solver online help.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
ROUTINE Argument.
The following option is available for all choices:
Augmented Select to refine the normal force between two sets of rigid geometries that are in
Lagrangian contact. When you select Augmented Lagrangian, Adams View uses iterative
refinement to ensure that penetration between the geometries is minimal. It also
ensures that the normal force magnitude is relatively insensitive to the penalty or
stiffness used to model the local material compliance effects.
For more on friction in contacts, see Contact Friction Force Calculation. In addition,
read the information for the CONTACT statement in the Adams Solver online help.
If you selected Coulomb for Friction Force, define the following four options:
A - D 745
Create/Modify Contact
On
Off
Dynamics Only
Static Coefficient Specify the coefficient of friction at a contact point when the slip velocity is smaller
than the value for Static Transition Vel. For information on material types versus
commonly used values of the coefficient of static friction, see Material Contact
Properties Table.
μ ( –Vs ) = μs
μ ( Vs ) = –μs
μ(0) = 0
μ ( –Vd ) = μd
μ ( Vd ) = μd
For more on friction in contacts, see Contact Friction Force Calculation. In addition,
read the information for the CONTACT statement in the Adams Solver online help.
Note: Small values for this option cause the integrator difficulties. You should
specify this value as:
Friction Transition Vel. 5* ERROR
where: ERROR is the integration error used for the solution. Its default
value is 1E-3.
or
Absolute Min and Max Values - Specifies a value range (an upper and
lower limit)
+/- Delta Relative to Value - Specifies increments relative to the
standard value.
+/- Percent Relative to Value - Specifies percentage increments
relative to the standard value.
If only a certain range of values is possible, use absolute limits to keep the
variable within that fixed range. Otherwise, use relative or percent relative
limits to include a reasonable amount above and below your initial value.
Relative and percent-relative limits tie the range to the value of the variable, so
if you change the value of the variable, the limits automatically change with
it.To learn more about the choices, see Preparing for Parametric Analyses.
- Delta/Min Value Enter the lower limit for the range or the relative amount or percentage below
the standard value.
+ Delta/Max Value Enter the upper limit for the range or the relative amount or percentage above
the standard value.
750 Adams View
Create/Modify Design Variable
Selecting Allow Optimization to ignore range does not disable the range for a
Design study or Design of experiments (DOE). The range is used for a design study
or DOE only if a list of values has not been specified or is to be ignored.
List of allowed value If you want to specify a list of values, select List of allowed values and enter the
values in the text box that appears. This lets you to use unequally spaced values
or always use the same set of values. By default, the list of values takes
precedence over the range in a design study or DOE.
Note: The Value Range setting also affects the allowed values you enter.
For example, if you have selected a Value Range of percent relative,
then Adams View interprets your entered allowed values as
percentages relative to the standard value.
If you selected List of allowed values, the following two options appear:
Generate Creates a list of values for you automatically.
Allow Design Study to To keep the list of values and still use the range for a design study and DOE,
ignore list select Allow Design Study to ignore list. By selecting Allow Design Study to
ignore list, you can switch back and forth between using the range and the list
of values without re-entering the list each time.
If you selected String, the following option appears:
String value Enter the alphanumeric string for the design variable.
Note: Object names not to be used for string value. Adams does not
handle any change in Object name for string type design variable.
If you selected Object, the following option appears:
Object value Enter the database object for the design variable (for example,
.model_1.part_1). For more on objects and their database name, see Getting
Object Names and Data Dictionary in the Adams View Function Builder online help.
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Note: Now that you have created a design variable, you’ll need to reference it in your model. You
can enter the design variable directly, using the Reference Design Variable command, or you
can type it into a text box. You can also use the Function Builder to create a more complex
expression using the design variable. When you reference your design variable, Adams View
places parentheses () around the variable because you are creating a simple expression that
references the value of the design variable.
A - D 751
Create/Modify Differential Equation
or
Note: By default, the external system is placed so its local body reference frame (LBRF) is at the
origin of the global coordinate system. The LBRF corresponds to the origin of the finite
element (FE) environment in which the body was originally modeled. You can also set the
location and orientation as you import the body or after it is imported as you do any element
in Adams View. This is applicable only for external systems that have a visual representation.
1. Nastran
2. User
The default option when the dialog is opened in the Create mode is ‘Nastran’.
input_file_name File containing the input source parameters for the external system. The
button provided on the side of the field can be used to view and / or edit
the specified file.
modal_neutral_file_name An optional (rigid only) MNF, if a visual representation of the external system
is required.
md_db_file_name An optional MD DB, if a visual representation of the external system is
required.
index_in_database Index of the body in the specified MD DB. Valid only if the parameter
md_db_file_name is specified.
754 Adams View
Create/Modify Filter Function
Orientation
Along Axis Orientation
In Plane Orientation
Relative to You can:
Shortcut: Curve Edit toolbar → Filter Curve Tool → Right-click Filter Name text box → filter_function → Create
Creates or modifies a curve filter to eliminate noise on time signals or to emphasize a specific frequency
content of a time signal. Adams PostProcessor supports two different types of filters:
Butterworth filter - butter() in MATLAB™ developed by The MathWorks, Inc.
Transfer function - A filter you define by directly specifying the coefficients of a transfer function.
Once you create a filter, you can apply it to any curve.
Learn about Filtering Curve Data.
A - D 755
Create/Modify Filter Function
This differs from how a transfer function is defined for Adams Solver, where the
coefficients are given in increasing order:
Check Format and Select to display a plot of the transfer function's gain (magnitude) or phase.
Display Plot Always check the filter before using it.
Note:
If you have not defined the filter correctly, an error message appears.
If you’ve defined the filter correctly, a plot appears in which you can
switch between the filter’s gain and phase plots and change scales.
Create/Modify Friction
Right-click joint → Modify → Friction tool
Models both static (Coulomb) and dynamic (viscous) friction in revolute, translational, cylindrical, hooke/universal,
and spherical joints. You cannot apply friction to joints connected to Flexible bodies or Point masses.
For more information on the values to be entered in the dialog box, select a type of joint below:
Revolute Joint Options
A - D 757
Create/Modify General Constraint
or
box, select the More tool to display the Adams View Function
Builder. For information on using the Function Builder, see the Function
Builder online help. Learn more about defining a runtime expression for a
general constraint with Extended Definition of GCON statement.
Report action forces on marker Enter a marker to have the reaction force on this marker measured and
reported as part of standard results. The reaction force reported is the
force that is exerted on the marker to satisfy the constraint equation.
Note that if you specify a marker and the runtine expression has no
dependency on it, the general constraint reports a zero force.
Note: You cannot enter the Adams ID for the marker; you must
enter the name of the marker. Learn about Adams Solver IDs.
Add any comments about the general constraint that you want to enter
to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.
Ribbon menu → Elemens tab → System Elements container → Create/Modify General State Equation
or
System Elements
Continuous
Discrete
Sampled
None (No options appear)
If you selected Continuous or Sampled, the following options appear:
X Array (Continous) Enter the array element that defines the continuous states for the GSE.
The array element must be of the X type, and it cannot be used in any
other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
760 Adams View
Create/Modify General State Equation
When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the continuous states
are initialized to zero.
Static Hold Indicate whether or not the continuous GSE states are permitted to
change during static and Quasi-static simulations.
If you selected Discrete or Sampled, the following options appear:
X Array (Discrete) Enter the array element that is used to access the discrete states for the
GSE. It must be of the X type, and it cannot be used in any other linear
state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
IC Array (Discrete) Enter the array element that specifies the initial conditions for the
discrete states in the system. The array is optional. The array element
must be of the IC type.
When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the discrete states are
initialized to zero.
First Sample Time Specify the Simulation time at which the sampling of the discrete states is
to start. All discrete states before the first sample time are defined to be at
the initial condition specified. The default is zero.
Sample Function/Sample User Specify the sampling period associated with the discrete states of a GSE.
Parameters This tells Adams Solver to control its step size so that the discrete states
of the GSE are updated at:
last_sample_time + sample_period
Select the More button to display the Function Builder and build
an expression. See Function Builder and the Adams View Function Builder online
help.
Add any comments about the GSE to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
A - D 761
Create/Modify Material
Create/Modify Material
or
Create/Modify Matrix
or
Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams View model if multiple matrices
are to be read from the same file.
Result Set Component User Entered Numbers to enter the values yourself.
Names Result Set Component Names to obtain the values from the results of
a Simulation from a Result set component.
See an Example of Entering Matrix in Full Format.
Row Count For user-entered numbers only, enter the number of rows in the matrix.
Column Count For user-entered numbers only, enter the number of columns in the matrix.
A - D 763
Create/Modify Modal Force
Note: Large number of values pasted into user interface fields or data tables
may result in application instability. MSC recommends users to enter
no more than 1 million data points at a time.
Result Set Component For result set components only, enter the names of the components.
Names
If you selected Sparse Matrix, the following option appears:
Row Index Enter the row numbers, separated by commas, in your matrix containing
nonzero values. Enter the row number each time there is a value in the row.
Column Index Enter the column numbers, separated by commas, containing nonzero values.
Enter the column number each time there is a value in the column.
Values Enter the nonzero values in your matrix starting with the first column. Separate
each value with a comma.
Note: Large number of values pasted into user interface fields or data tables
may result in application instability. MSC recommends users to enter
no more than 1 million data points at a time.
If you selected From a File, the following option appears:
File Enter the name of the file containing the matrix values and the name of the
matrix in the file. The name of the matrix is necessary even if the file contains
only one matrix. You will need to create additional matrices to read other
matrices from the same file.
Ribbon menu → Forces tab → Special Forces container → Create/Modify Model Force
or
Modal Forces
764 Adams View
Create/Modify Modal Force
Function - Lets you select the modal loadcase and scale function of the
MFORCE. Note that you cannot select Function when defining an
MFORCE on a flexible body that does not contain any modal load case
information in its corresponding MNF.
Subroutine - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be
passed to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute the
modal load case and scale function whose product is the modal force
applied to the flexible body. The scale function can depend on time or the
state of the system. The load case can only be a function of time.
Force - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be passed to
the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute the modal force
on the flexible body. Each component of the modal force can depend on
time or the state of the system. (Adams Solver (C++) only. Learn about
switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.)
To use a subroutine, you need to build a version of the Adams Solver that contains
your version of the MFOSUB routine that quantifies the modal force. For more
information, see the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine in the Routine text
box. Learn about specifying your own routine with ROUTINE Argument.
A - D 765
Create/Modify Point Mass
or
Note: By default, Adams View creates a point mass with a mass of 1 in current
units.
Location Set or adjust its location as desired.
Note: By default, Adams View places the point mass in the center of the main
window.
766 Adams View
Create/Modify Road
Displays the Point Mass Measure dialog box to let you create a measure for the point
mass. Learn about creating Object Measures.
Position ICs/ Displays the Modify Body dialog box set to let you change the initial position or
velocity of the point mass.
Velocity ICs
Create/Modify Road
Adds a road assembly to your model. If your model includes tires, you must specify a road because each tire
must reference a road. The road determines the surface friction, bumps, and other inputs to tires.
.
Graphics Select On to display road graphics or select Off to hide any road graphics. You may
want to hide the road graphics when you work on your model. Roads graphics are
typically large and can affect operations such as fitting to view.
Location and Orientation
Location Enter a location for the road. The location determines the origin of the road and, along
with the road property file, determines whether any tires referencing this road are
initially contacting the road.
Orient Using Select a method to orient the road, either Euler Angles or Direction Vectors. The z
direction of the road orientation is always vertical direction. Therefore, you should
orient this axis of the road so it matches the vertical direction in your model.
If you selected Euler Angles, the following option is available:
A - D 767
Create/Modify Sensor
Z = z-vector / | z-vector |
Y = z-vector x x-vector / | z vector x x-vector |
X = Y x Z / | Y x Z |
For more information on XP-ZP method in Adams Solver, see argument XP in the
MARKER statement.
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and identify it. See
Comments.
Select to display the contents of the road property file in the Information window. This
helps you determine what kind of road the file models.
Create/Modify Sensor
or
If you set the following values, you can retrieve the distance between two markers.
You use the SENVAL function to retrieve the distance.
In the figure, the sensor triggers whenever the value of the function being
monitored is in the shaded areas. Be careful that your function does not evaluate
in the shaded area at the start of your simulation unless you want your sensor to
trigger immediately. It is a good idea to define a function measure using the same
expression used for your sensor so you can check it by plotting it.
Value Enter the target value that triggers an action.
End Tolerance Enter the absolute value of allowable error between the targeted value and the
actual sensed value.
Generate additional Select to create an extra Output step when Adams Solver triggers the sensor so you
Output Step at event can capture the action.
Set Output Stepsize Select to redefine the time between consecutive output steps. Adams Solver uses
this value until it is changed. The default is the current time between output steps
for the simulation.
A - D 771
Create/Modify Simulation Script
simulation script] Stop the current command in the simulation Script and continue with the
next command.
Set Integration Select to redefine the next integration step size. This change is temporary and lasts
Stepsize only for the next solution step.
Create two measures to monitor the expression and state of a sensor during
simulation. Learn about Object Measures.
or
Simple Run
Adams View Commands
Adams Solver Commands
Learn more about the Types of Simulation Scripts.
If you select Simple Run:
End Time/Duration Enter the time interval over which the Simulation takes place and set how you
want it defined. You can select:
End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want the
simulation to stop.
Duration - Specify the amount of time over which you want the
simulation to run.
Steps/Step Size Set the frequency with which Adams View outputs data during your
simulation. You can specify:
Steps - Represents the total number of times you want Adams View
to provide output information over your entire simulation. For
example, specify 50 steps over a 1-second simulation interval to define
an output period of 0.02 seconds per step, which yields an output
frequency of 50 steps/second.
Step Size - Represents the amount of time, in current model units,
between output steps. The output frequency remains constant even if
you change your simulation end time or duration. For example, enter
a step size of 0.01 seconds to specify an output period of 0.01 seconds
per step, which yields an output frequency of 100 steps/second.
Simulation Type Select a type of simulation to run:
Transient - Default
Transient - Dynamic
Transient - Kinematic
Transient - Static
Learn more about Types of Simulations.
Start at equilibrium Select to have Adams View perform a static simulation before performing a
dynamic simulation.
A - D 773
Create/Modify Solver Array
Ribbon menu → Elements tab → Data Elements container → Create/Modify Solver Array
or
Tips: You might find it easier to track which array element goes with
which system element if you name the array elements and the
corresponding system elements with like names. For example, the states
(X) array that goes with general state equation GSE_100 would be
ARRAY_100; the inputs (U) array would be ARRAY_101 ; and the
outputs (Y) array would be ARRAY_102 .
Solver ID Assign a unique ID number to the array. See Adams Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify the
array. See Comments.
Type Set to:
General
Initial Conditions (ICs)
X (States)
Y (Outputs)
U (Inputs)
Learn more about Types of Arrays.
If you selected Define General or Initial Conditions, Adams View displays the following option:
Numbers Enter the values to be stored in the array.
Note: Large number of values pasted into user interface fields or data
tables may result in application instability. MSC recommends
users to enter no more than 1 million data points at a time.
If you selected X (States) or Y (Outputs), Adams View displays the following option:
Size Enter the size of the array.
If you selected U (Inputs), Adams View displays the following option:
Variables Enter the variables to be stored. If the array is used as input to a transfer
function, then you can only enter one variable.
A - D 775
Create/Modify Spline
Create/Modify Spline
or
Note: Large number of values pasted into user interface fields or data tables may result in
application instability. MSC recommends users to enter no more than 1 million data points
at a time.
or
Icon Link
Input-Signal Function Block
Gain Block
Integrator Block
PID Controller
Switch Block
Ribbon menu → Elements tab → System Elements container → Create/Modify State Variable
or
Run-time Expression
User written subroutine
Learn more about Ways to Define State Variables.
F(time...,) = If you selected Run-time Expression, enter the function expression that
defines the variable. Select the More button to display the Function
Builder and build an expression. See the Adams View Function Builder online
help.
If you selected User written subroutine, enter constants to the user-
written subroutine VARSUB to define a variable. See the Subroutines
section of the Adams Solver online help.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine VARSUB. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Guess for F(1, 0..) and Select and then specify an approximate initial value for the variable, if desired.
Adams Solver may adjust the value when it performs an Initial conditions simulation.
Entering an accurate value for initial conditions can help Adams Solver converge
to the initial conditions solution.
Create/Modify String
or
Ribbon menu → Elements tab → System Elements container → Create/Modify Transfer Function
or
Ribbon menu → Forces tab → Special Forces container → Create/Modify Wheel and Tire
Adds a wheel and tire assembly to your model. Learn about Defining Tires in Adams View.
Enter the initial spin velocity of the wheel-tire. The spin velocity is the
rotational velocity of the wheel-tire about its z-axis in negative direction.
A good approximation of the initial spin velocity is the longitudinal
velocity divided by the unloaded radius of the tire:
Select the reference (VM) marker for the translational initial velocities:
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
786 Adams View
Create/Modify Wheel and Tire
Select the reference (WM) marker for the angular initial velocities:
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Road Enter the name of an existing road property file. To create a road, right-
click the text box, point to vpg_road, and then select Create. The
Create/Modify Road dialog box appears. The road determines the input
your tire sees—rough or smooth, wet or dry, and so on.
Location and Orientation
Location Enter the location of the wheel center.
Orient using Select either Euler Angles or Direction Vectors.
Euler Angles Enter the euler angles (body 3,1,3 angles) to orient the wheel-tire
assembly.
X Vector Enter the x-direction vector. The x- and z- direction vectors determine
the x,y,z orientation of the wheel-tire in the following way:
Z = z-vector / | z-vector |
Y = z-vector x x-vector / | z vector x x-
vector |
X = Y x Z / | Y x Z |
For more information on XP-ZP method, see the argument XP in the
MARKER statement.
Z Vector Enter the z-direction vector (see X Vector above).
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Select to display the contents of the road or tire property file in the
Information window. This helps you determine what kind of road the file
models.
A - D 787
Create/Modify model
Create/Modify model
or
Create Section
In all cases the Section is normal to the node's X direction. The section dimensions correspond to the node's
Y and Z directions as shown below. For details, see section Orientation of FE Part Nodes.
788 Adams View
Create Section
A - D 789
Create Section
Solid Rectangle
Base - The width of the rectangle (dimension in node's z direction).
Height - The height of the rectangle (dimension in node's y direction).
790 Adams View
Create Section
Solid Circle
Radius - Radius of the circular cross-section.
Hollow Circle
Radius - Outer radius of the circular shell.
Thickness - Width of the wall of the circular shell.
A - D 791
Create Section
Fill Table: Click to fill the table with the created points.
Erase: Click to clear the created points.
Closed: Enforces that the section polyline close upon itself. This is the only option
which the FE Part supports.
794 Adams View
Create User Defined Element (UDE) Instance
Notes: For FE Part results to be accurate, you need the centroid of the cross-section to lie on the
FE Part centerline. Adams View does this automatically when using the standard section
types for which it supports native-Adams geometry creation (solid
elliptical/circular/rectangular and I-Bar).
For a user-drawn cross-section, you must draw it such that its centroid ends up at X,Y=0,0
in the drawing box.
For user-imported geometry, you must locate/orient it such that…
one end is located co-incident with the node at S=0 (via ref mar)
the centroid of the cross-section lies along the FE Part centerline
the geometry is not longer than the FE Part centerline
Curve-Curve Measure
Design Exploration tab → Measures container
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Cut Tool
or
You cannot cut the geometry so that the remaining geometry is split into two solids. For example, you cannot
cut a block from the center of a cylinder so that two cylinders remain after the cut. The following is an
example of cutting a solid into two solids:
If a part completely envelopes another part, you cannot cut that part from the enveloped part because no
geometry would result. For example, if a box completely envelopes a sphere, you cannot cut the box from the
sphere and leave a zero mass part. The following is an example of cutting a solid into a zero-mass part
A - D 797
Cylinder Tool
Cylinder Tool
or
The Cylinder tool draws the centerline of the cylinder in the plane of the screen or the Working grid, if you
have it turned on.
798 Adams View
Cylindrical Joint Tool
If you do not enter a radius, Adams View creates the cylinder with a radius 25%
of the length of the center line.
Note: Two hotpoints appear after you draw a cylinder. One lets you modify the length of the
cylinder and one lets you set its radius. For more information on modifying geometry using
hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
or
The orientation of the cylindrical joint defines the direction of the axis about which the parts can rotate or
slide along with respect to each other. The rotational axis of the cylindrical joint is parallel to the orientation
vector and passes through the location.
A - D 799
Cylindrical Joint Tool
Learn about:
Creating Idealized Joints
Adding Friction to Idealized Joints
800 Adams View
Data Element Create Array U Input Array
Pick Feature Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid, if
it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
First Body/Second Body Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
(only appears if you select
to explicitly define the Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
bodies using the options 2 Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach the
Bodies - 1 Location or 2 joint to a curve, Adams View creates a curve marker, and the joint follows
Bodies - 2 Locations the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with Marker Modify
explained above) dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is only available with
Adams Solver (C++). Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings -
Executable dialog box help.
If you enter a size, it should match the number of variables. Adams View provides the
size parameter mainly for your convenience in model creation (it is not required).
Variable Name Enter the list of variables.
For linear state equation, the X state array size is the row dimension of the A
state matrix.
For transfer functions, the transformation from polynomial ratio type to
canonical state space type internally determines the X state array size.
For general state equations, the X state array size is the state equation count as
defined in the general state equation.
802 Adams View
Data Element Create Array Y Output Array
For linear state equations, the Y output array size is the row dimension of the
C output matrix or the D feedforward matrix.
For transfer functions, the Y output array size is always 1.
For general state equations, the Y output array size is the output equation
count, as defined in the general state equation.
or
or
Interactive Simulation dialog box → Linear States Tool → Right-click Plant Input text box
Defines a set of inputs (state variables) to the mechanical system that Adams Solver recognizes as system input
during an Adams Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant input acts only as
a pointer to the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant input:
Function expressions access the values by using the Adams Solver function PINVAL(i i), where i
specifies the PINPUT ID and i specifies the ith variable in the plant input list. Note that i is not the
ID of the variable.
User-written subroutines call the subroutine SYSFNC to access single elements of the plant input list
and call the subroutine SYSARY to access all values for a PINPUT (see the Subroutines section of the
Adams Solver online help).
Learn more:
Plant Inputs and Outputs
Ways to Use Plant Input and Output
Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant input. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.
or
Interactive Simulation dialog box → Linear States Tool → Right-click Plant Output text box
Defines a set of output (state variables) that Adams Solver recognizes as system output during an Adams Linear
simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant output acts only as a pointer to the list of
the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant output:
Function expressions access the values by using the Adams Solver function POUVAL(i1,i2), where i1
specifies the plant output ID, and i2 specifies the i2th variable in the plant output list. Note that i2
is not the ID of the variable.
User-written subroutines access single elements of the plant output list and call the subroutine
SYSFNC to access all values for a POUTPUT by calling the subroutine SYSARY (see the Subroutines
section of the Adams Solver online help).
Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant output. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.
Learn more:
Plant Inputs and Outputs
Ways to Use Plant Input and Output
Interactive Simulation dialog box → Linear States Tool → Right-click Plant State text box
Adams Solver (C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.
Adams Linear requires a minimum representation of the system to generate the state matrix from which
eigenvalues can be computed. For non-stationary systems, the state matrix is a function of the states used to
linearize the system. This dialog box lets you to define a set of states that are to be used in the linearization
scheme. You can specify as many states as there are degrees-of-freedom. If a smaller set of states are provided,
then the system will "fill in" by choosing a set of internally available states for the ones that were not explicitly
specified. If too many states are specified, Adams Solver identifies and discards the redundant states.
Plant states are a list of variables. The variables contain expressions that specify the states that are to be used
in linearizing the system. Plant state objects are defined in the model. The LINEAR command can instruct
Adams Solver to use a specific plant state object for generating the linear model. A model can contain any
number of plant state objects. You can use any one of them with the LINEAR command.
For more information, see the Adams Solver (C++) LINEAR command.
For theoretical details, see the white paper in Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016460.
For an example of using PSTATE, see Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016414.
Ribbon menu → Elements Tab → Data Elements container → Spline with Numeric data or from Results
or
or
or
User-written subroutines call the subroutine SYSFNC to access single elements of the plant input list
and call the subroutine SYSARY to access all values for a PINPUT (see the Subroutines section of the
Adams Solver online help).
Learn more:
Plant Inputs and Outputs
Ways to Use Plant Input and Output
Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant input. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.
or
Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant output. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.
Learn more:
Plant Inputs and Outputs
Ways to Use Plant Input and Output
or
Interactive Simulation dialog box → Linear States Tool → Right-click Plant State text box
Adams Solver (C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.
Adams Linear requires a minimum representation of the system to generate the state matrix from which
eigenvalues can be computed. For non-stationary systems, the state matrix is a function of the states used to
linearize the system. This dialog box lets you to define a set of states that are to be used in the linearization
scheme. You can specify as many states as there are degrees-of-freedom. If a smaller set of states are provided,
then the system will "fill in" by choosing a set of internally available states for the ones that were not explicitly
specified. If too many states are specified, Adams Solver identifies and discards the redundant states.
Plant states are a list of variables. The variables contain expressions that specify the states that are to be used
in linearizing the system. Plant state objects are defined in the model. The LINEAR command can instruct
Adams Solver to use a specific plant state object for generating the linear model. A model can contain any
number of plant state objects. You can use any one of them with the LINEAR command.
For more information, see the Adams Solver (C++) LINEAR command.
For theoretical details, see the white paper in Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016460.
812 Adams View
Data Element Modify Spline
For an example of using PSTATE, see Simcompanion Knowledge Base Article KB8016414.
or
Database Navigator
Tools → Database Navigator Shared Dialog Box
Displays the types of objects appropriate for the command you are executing and shows objects in their
database hierarchy. You can browse for objects or set it to rename objects, view information about the objects
and view dependencies. You can also set a filter for the types of objects displayed in the Database Navigator.
Learn more about Database Navigator.
814 Adams View
Database Storage
Database Storage
Settings → Solver → Output → More → Output Category → Database Storage
Selecting Database Storage as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box, lets you set how Adams
View handles the results for:
Single Simulations - As you perform a single Simulation, Adams View stores the results of the
simulation under the current model in your Modeling database. By default, when you perform another
simulation, Adams View overwrites the results of the previous simulation. You can store simulations
results in your database after a simulation has finished so that Adams View does not overwrite them.
For information on saving the results of individual simulation, see Saving Simulation Results.
A - D 815
Database Storage
Multi-run Simulations - For a parametric analysis, Adams View stores the parametric analysis (multi-
run) results in an analysis object called Last_Multi. This analysis is not a full analysis—it simply
contains a summary of the design variable variations and Objective values for each model that was
analyzed in the parametric study. Unless you rename or copy Last_Multi before running another
parametric analysis, subsequent parametric study summaries will overwrite Last_Multi.
Saving Multi-Run simulations does not save each individual trial resulit simply saves a summary of
the parametric study. To save each individual trial result, use Save Analysis for Individual
Simulations.
Parametric analyses can run many simulations. Use care in saving individual analyses and/or mult-
run analyses. It is possible to exhaust the memory or file space available on your computer. Running
out of memory or file space can lead to unpredictable system problems, and cause the parametric
analysis to fail.
You can use measures to compare specific data between runs without saving all the results. Create and
display a measure for the data of interest, then select Save Curves under the Display settings of the
Solver Settings dialog box. Adams View charts the measure for each simulation and saves all the
curves. At the end, you have a strip chart showing the measure for all simulations.
Stored simulation results remain in your modeling database when you save your modeling database. Be
careful not to save more simulation results than you need since they require quite a bit of storage space. To
delete simulation results from your modeling database, see Deleting Simulation Results.
Defaults Names
Settings → Names → Dialogs
Allows you to determine whether Adams View uses full object names, short object names, or Adams Solver
IDs when displaying run-time functions or object names in the Information Window and dialog boxes. This also
determines the naming the Function Builder Assist box uses for object names or Adams Solver IDs to generate
run-time functions.
Settings → Names → Icons
Allows you to determine whether Adams View uses full object names, short object names, or Adams Solver
IDs when displaying graphics items on the graphics window.
A - D 817
Delete Group
Note: Regardless of the option you choose, you can enter the object's full or short name or its
Adams Solver ID while writing functions.
Delete Group
Model Browser → Groups tab → Select Group name right click and delete
or
Build → Ungroup
Ungroups a Group of objects.
Learn about the procedures for Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
Ribbon menu → Design Exploration tab → Design Evalution container → Evaluate All With Default Analysis tool →
or
Allows you to create a report of the results of the Parametric analyses in a table. Learn more about Generating a
Table.
Ribbon menu → Design Exploration tab → Design Evaluation container → Evaluate All With Default Analysis tool
or
Property values contained in the file(s) will be applied before starting the
simulations and then reverted to their original values immediately after the
simulations finish, even if some of the simulations fail to complete. Note that
this field is only available if the Temporary Settings capability has been enabled
from the AView-Preferences section of the Adams Registry Editor.
Simulation Script Enter the name of the simulation Script to use.
Study a Select either Measure or Objective to define the type of objective you are using.
Note that each type displays some different dialog box options. Learn about options available for all types.
Design Study
Design Variable Enter the name of the design variable that you want to vary.
820 Adams View
Design Evaluation Tools
If you specified a range for the design variable, Adams View uses equally
spaced levels across the range. You specify the number of levels in the
Default Levels text box.
If you specified a list of values for the design variable, Adams View runs a
simulation using each value, ignoring the Default Levels text box.
Start Begins the simulation.
After you select Start, Adams View runs a simulation for each level of the
design variable. When the simulations are done, Adams View returns the
variable to its original value.
Design of Experiments
Design Variables Enter the name of the design variable that you want to vary.
Default Levels Enter the number of levels (values) you want to use only if you specified a
range for the design variable.
Trials defined by Select either Built-In DOE Technique, Direct Input, or File Input from the
pull-down menu.
Select a DOE technique. The DOE technique or trial matrix controls the
number of simulations and the combination of variable values to use for each
simulation. For example, the Full Factorial technique simulates every possible
combination of levels. If you use two variables with three levels each, Adams
View runs nine simulations.
The DOE technique or trial matrix selects values for a variable based on the
range or list of values you defined for the variable.
If you specified only a range for a design variable, Adams View selects from
equally spaced values across the range. You enter the number of values in
the Default Levels text box.
If you specified a list of values for a design variable, Adams View selects
directly from those values, ignoring the value in the Default Levels text
box.
Check Variables Guess # (Appears only if you selected Full Factorial as the DOE Technique above)
of Runs.
Select if you want to check that the variables have the same number of levels
and display the required number of runs.
Number of Trials (Appears only if you selected Direct Input for Trials Defined by)
If you specified value ranges on any of the design variables, Adams View
increases or decreases the objective as much as possible without exceeding
the value limits.
If you specified constraints, Adams View increases or decreases the
objective as much as possible without violating the constraints.
As Adams View runs the optimization, it iteratively adjusts the design variable
values, attempting to improve the model performance with each iteration.
Adams View may need to backtrack to avoid violating a constraint or limit on
a variable value. Therefore, the model performance does not necessarily
improve with each iteration. At each iteration, Adams View runs several
simulations to approximate derivatives and converge on the next iteration.
Auto. Save Select if you want to automatically save the original values of the design
variables before starting the optimization analysis.
Goal Select either Maximize or Minimize. If you select Maximize as the goal,
Adams View adjusts the design variable values to increase the measure or
objective as much as possible. If you select Minimize, Adams View reduces the
objective as much as possible.
Constraints Select if you want to add constraints and then enter the names of the
constraints in the text box that appears.
Start Begins the simulation.
The last iteration will be the best values that the optimization could find
without violating constraints or limits. Adams View normally leaves the design
variables set to the optimized values. If you interrupt the analysis or Adams
View encounters an error during the analysis, Adams View resets the variables
to their original values.
If you do not want to keep the optimized values, and you selected the Auto.
Save check box or used the Save button to save the original values, you can
select the Restore button to return the variables to their original values.
Temporary Settings Sweep
A - D 823
Design Evaluation Tools
Property values contained in the file(s) will be applied before starting the
simulations and then reverted to their original values immediately after the
simulations finish, even if some of the simulations fail to complete. Note that
this option menu available only if the Temporary Settings capability has been
enabled from the AView-Preferences section of the Adams Registry Editor.
Trial – Uneditable by users, these cells simply count the rows in the table
Temporary Settings File – Cells which can be populated by one or more
.tsf files browsed for via the same file browser as in other places in AView
that already reference TSF today
Insert – Inserts a row above the row you selected
Remove – Removes the row you selected
Start - Begins the simulation
After you select Start, Adams View runs a simulation for each trial of the
Temporary Settings File per trial row. In which, for each trial, the model will
be updated as per temporary settings file(s) applied per trial and when the
simulations are done, Adams View returns the model to its original state.
Note: When using the Temporary Settings Sweep option, the "set variables
to values used in trial or iteration" button is disabled because it is
specific to setting a single set of variables used across all trials. The
Temporary Settings Sweep option is richer, allowing one to perturb
different properties per trial, this button does not apply. If you want
to update your baseline model to the state used in a given
Temporary Settings Sweep trial, use the Temporary Settings dialog
to select the same set of temporary settings files and apply them to
your model.
The following buttons are available for all four types:
Display, Output, and Displays the Solver Settings dialog box for either display, output, or optimizer
Optimizer options.
Note that each button brings up a different option in the Solver Settings
Dialog Box.
Note: The Adams Solver settings for the Optimizer will, of course, only
influence and Optimization multi-run job
824 Adams View
Design Evaluation Tools
Select to display the Save Design Evaluation Results dialog box to save the
simulation results. (Be sure to save your modeling database after you save
the parametric analysis results.)
Right-click to delete the simulation results.
Learn about parametric simulation results for:
Design studies
DOE
Optimizations
Temporary Settings Sweep
Displays the Plot Design Evaluation Results dialog box to display the results as a
plot.
Displays the Design Evaluation Results Table dialog box to display the results as a
table.
Displays the Update Design Variables dialog box to let you update the design
variables.
A - D 825
Dialog-Box Builder
Dialog-Box Builder
Tools → Dialog Box → Create
Allows you to create and modify Dialog boxes to better suit your needs and preferences.
Ribbon menu → Bodies Tab → Flexible Bodies container → Discrete Flexible Link
or
You indicate the following and Adams View creates the appropriate parts, Geometry, Forces, and Constraints at
the endpoints:
Endpoints of the link
Number of parts and the material type
Properties of the beam
Types of endpoint attachments (flexible, rigid, or free)
Learn about working with Discrete Flexible Links.
Note: For more information on beam force elements, see Beam. Also note the caution about the
asymmetry of beams.
Note: Marker 1 and Marker 2 are also used to calculate the orientation of
the link.
Attachment Select how to define the start of the link:
Solid Rectangle
Solid Circle
Hollow Rectangle
Hollow Circle
I-Beam
Properties
Display Attribute
Database Navigator → Display Attribute
Allows you to set how individual, types of objects, and children of objects appear in Adams View.
Learn about Setting Appearance of Objects Through the Database Navigator.
Enter the text that the line must contain in the text box. You can also enter
wildcards.
Suppress duplicate lines Select if you want to remove any duplicate lines that occur if you encounter
the same error again.
Update Select to redisplay the log file and apply filters.
E-I
Edit Appearance Dialog Box
Edit → Appearance
Sets how individual objects or types of objects appear in Adams View. You can set the appearance of any
modeling object in your Modeling database or for a group of objects.
Learn about:
Setting object appearance
Using Wildcards
Icon Settings Dialog Box
Once the name of the object is in the text box, press Enter to update the dialog
box.
Types To specify a group of similar objects, enter a filter or wildcard. For example, enter
Parts to set the appearance of all rigid bodies or Markers to set the appearance of
all markers.
Visibility Select how you want to set the visibility of the selected object or objects. You can
select:
Polygon Fill - Sets the color of those areas of a graphic that can be
shaded (they include sides of a cylinders, frustums, boxes, and so on).
Edge - Sets the color of the lines making up the edges of the facets of a
graphic that can be shaded.
Outline - Sets the color of the lines that make up those graphics that
cannot be shaded or filled like the coil of a spring damper.
Text - Sets the color of the text.
All - Sets the selected color for all elements of an object.
To browse for a color in the Database Navigator or create a new color, right-click
the Color text box, and then select Browse or Create.
Render Set the rendering for the geometry:
Note: You can also change the background color using the Edit Color dialog box. Learn about changing
object colors, including the background.
E - I 833
Edit Color
Edit Color
Settings → Colors
Allows you to modify the colors used for displaying objects or create a new color.
Red Use the slider to determine the amount of red to be used in the new color.
Green Use the slider to determine the amount of green to be used in the new color.
Blue Use the slider to determine the amount of blue to be used in the new color.
834 Adams View
Enable or Disable a Range of Modes
Note: If you accidentally exit without saving your work, you can use the Adams View Log file
(aview.log) to recover your work. Learn about Using the Adams View Log File.
Note: The simulation results are not referenced in the command file. You must import the analysis
files (graphics, request, and results files) separately into Adams PostProcessor. For more
information, see Import - Adams Solver Analysis Files.
Adams View names the command file ModelName_to_ppt.cmd, where ModelName is the name of the
model. For example, if the model from which you are exporting data is suspension14, then the command file
is suspension14_to_ppt.cmd.
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse for
the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the File Name
text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog box.
Analysis Name Enter the name of the simulation whose data you want to export.
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse
for the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the
File Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog box.
Model Name Enter the name of the model you want exported as a command file.
Property values contained in the file(s) will be applied before exporting the .adm
file and then reverted to their original values immediately after exporting the .adm
file. Note that this field is only available, if the Temporary Settings capability has
been enabled from the AView-Preferences section of the Adams Registry Editor.
Write to To specify where the text of the dataset is to be written and displayed, select one
Window/Write to File of the following:
Only
Write to Window - To display the dataset in an information window, as
well as save it in a file.
Write to File Only - To only write the dataset to a file and not display it
in an information window.
E - I 839
Export - Adams Solver Dataset
Adams View does not indent the text for continuation lines of function
expressions. It assumes that you will add any leading spaces that you want for
indentation of functions. Any indentation Adams View would enter would
interfere with the indention used to show nesting of IFfunctions. Adams View
does, however, indent the argument list of a user function if it requires more than
one line.
Adams View precedes the values of an argument that has multiple string values
separated by colons with a comma and indents the values if you place them on a
continuation line. This applies to the PART/EXACT and COUPLER/TYPE
arguments. It does not apply to the REQUEST/TITLE argument, which doesn't
allow embedded spaces. Instead, Adams View precedes a REQUEST/TITLE
argument with a comma.
Decimal Places Enter the number of decimal places written after the decimal point for real
numbers. In cases where this setting conflicts with the setting for Significant Digits,
the setting which would result in the number with the fewest digits will be applied.
For example:
Value = 59.1234567890; with Significant Digits = 10 and Decimal Places = 10, the
.adm file will show 59.12345678 since respecting Significant Digits results in a 10-
digit number and respecting Decimal Places would have resulted in a 12-digit
number.
So, to ensure that this setting, Decimal Places, is always respected, one should set
Significant Digits sufficiently higher than Decimal Places to account for anticipated
digits to the left of the decimal.
Zero Threshold Enter the threshold value for numbers being written to an Adams Solver dataset.
When Adams View writes a number that has an absolute value smaller than the
zero threshold value, it writes it as zero. The zero threshold value is independent
of units.
840 Adams View
Export - Adams Solver Dataset
For example:
So, to ensure that this setting, Significant Digits, is always respected, one should
set Decimal Places sufficiently high to account for the anticipated digits to the left
of the decimal.
Scientific Notation Specify where the format for real numbers switches from a fixed point format to
scientific notation. Enter the lower and upper power of 10. Separate the values
with commas (,). The default values are -4 and 5, meaning that Adams View writes
any number less than or equal to 1.0E-04 or greater than or equal to 1.0E+05 in
scientific notation.
E - I 841
Export - Adams Solver Dataset
PART/1 ,
QG = 0.5, 0, 0 ,
REULER = 0D, 90D, 0D ,
MASS = 1.2
Upper Case Text/ To control the case of the text of statement keywords and parameters, select one
Lower Case Text, of the following:
Mixed Case Text
Upper Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are
written in uppercase letters (BEAM). Uppercase is the default.
Lower Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are
written in lowercase (beam).
Mixed Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are
written in initial case (Beam). The first character of each word is in
uppercase, and the rest are in lowercase.
Note that the text case control does not affect certain types of string-valued
arguments. For a listing of the arguments to which the text case does not apply, see
Arguments Not Affected by Case Control.
Include Trailing Zeros Select Include Trailing Zeros to print all the digits after the decimal point whether
they are zero or not. If you do not select Include Trailing Zeros, Adams View drops
any zeros at the end of the fractional part of the number leaving the last digit as a
non-zero digit.
Export All Graphics Select Export All Graphics to write all the graphics into the dataset. If this option
is not checked, only the dataset graphics that are supported by the solver (such as
BOX) and those that are referenced by contacts, are included in the dataset.
Exceptions are the revolution and extrusion geometry types; these are only
exported if they are referenced by contacts.
Verify Model Select to verify the model before exporting
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams View, enter the path name and the file name in the File Name text
box. To browse for the directory in which you want to export the command file,
right-click the File Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File
Selection dialog box.
Sim Script Name An existing Simulation Script to export.
Saving a model as a command file does not save your simulation results or analysis files. To save your analysis
files, set up Adams View so that it saves the analysis files.
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse for
the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the File Name
text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog box.
Model Name Enter the name of the model you want exported as a command file.
As is - Adams View exports any geometry that was imported from a Parasolid
file out to a Parasolid file when it writes the command file. The command file
references the newly created Parasolid file. All other geometry (for example,
cylinder, shell, and spring-dampers) are defined using Adams View command
language and included in the command file.
Full - Adams View exports all static geometry to Parasolid files instead of
using Adams View command language. This includes cylinders, shells,
Parasolid, solids, and so on. It does not include dynamic outlines, spring-
damper graphics, and graphic force vectors. These graphics continue to be
defined in the Adams View command language.
For flexible bodies because the node IDs at each load location are known.
For rigid bodies if the node IDs are not available. Then, the FEA input file will contain the
locations (with respect to the FEA coordinate reference) and Adams ID label of the marker at each
load location. You will need to edit the file, however, replacing these labels with the actual node
IDs, once they are known.
848 Adams View
Export - FEA Loads
Adams View calculates the load points and places the points and their
locations in the Nodes table of the File Export dialog box. The node
coordinates are displayed relative to the FEA origin of the rigid or flexible
body. You might need to resize the File Export dialog box to see all the point
locations. See Example of Nodes Table.
Node_id/Scan file for IDs For rigid bodies only, assign node IDs to the load points Adams View found,
if desired. You can do one of the following:
Note: For flexible bodies, Adams View automatically assigns node IDs
to the load points based on the actual node IDs of the flexible
body at these load locations.
Output at times Do one of the following depending on the load information you want
Adams View to export:
To generate a complete loads history, leave the Output at times text box
blank. Adams View exports load information at every output step in the
simulation. This is the default setting.
To generate only load information for certain output times, enter the
desired output times, separated by commas (,) in the Output at times
text box. Adams View exports a single load case at the time closest to the
requested time.
For ABAQUS, ANSYS, and NASTRAN, you can also enter a tolerance
(+ or - a value) for the output times. For example, if you requested output at
time steps 2 and 5 with a tolerance of 0.1, Adams View generates a load case
for all output steps between 1.9 and 2.1 and 4.9 and 5.1.
For DAC and RPC III, you can enter a start output time and an end output
time.
E - I 849
Export for Co-animation
Caution: Note that loads are output in the Adams View modeling units. These units must be
consistent with those specified in the finite element model or the results of the FE analysis
that includes the Adams loads will be incorrect. After completing the Export FEA Loads
dialog box, Adams View displays the current modeling units and gives you a chance to
modify them before continuing with the FEA loads export.
When you export an HTML report, Adams PostProcessor creates main homepage with a left frame
containing a tree of information in your model. Learn about the resulting HTML pages.
Tab Link
Files Export - HTML Report - FIles
Title Page Export - HTML Report - Title Page
Pages Export - HTML Report - Pages
Models Export - HTML Report - Models
If you select .jpg or .png, Adams Processor, exports each frame as an png or jpg
file, and then plays them as a movie.
If you select compressed AVI format, set the frame rate, interval between key
frames, and quality (percentage of compression). The default is 75% compression
with each key frame 500 frames apart, and a frame rate of 10 seconds per frame.
If you select .mpg, set either of the following:
Compress the file using P frames - Turning off the compression using P
frames ensures your movie plays in many playback programs, including as
xanim. It results, however, in a much larger file (up to 4 times as large).
Round size to multiples of 16 - Some playback programs require the pixel
height and width to be multiplies of 16. Turning this option on ensures that
you movie plays in many playback programs.
OFF: Will not write the location information (this is the default)
Note: Plots with more than two axes are not supported. Only the
curves belonging to the first two axes will appear in the .xlsx
file.
Export - Shell
File → Export → Shell Shared Dialog Box
You can export Adams geometry for use as shell geometry in other applications.
Export - Table
File → Export → Table
Exports plotting data as tables (HTML or spreadsheet format).
858 Adams View
Export - Wavefront
Export - Wavefront
File → Export → Wavefront Shared Dialog Box
You can export Adams View graphics and motion data to Wavefront to help you create animations in
Wavefront Technologies advanced photorealistic rendering product, the Advanced Visualizer. You can also
select to only export the model geometry, in which case Adams View only creates object files.
If you select Model Name, you export only your model geometry.
If you select Analysis, you export all motion and geometry data. You can enter
multiple models or simulations by separating the names with commas.
If you select Part, you export the geometry of this part only.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Reference When selecting 'Local Part Frame' the wavefront geometry will be exported with the
local part coordinate system; when selecting 'Global Frame' the global coordinate
system is used as reference for the Wavefront data.
Extrusion Tool
or
E - I 859
Extrusion Tool
The Extrusion tool extrudes the points or curve along the z-axis of the screen or Working grid, if it is turned
on. When you specify points, you can also specify the direction along the z-axis that the Extrusion tool
extrudes the profile. You can also select to extrude along a path.
You can select to create the extrusion using the Analytical Method or Non-analytical Method.
Learn about Creating an Extrusion.
Notes: After you draw the extrusion, hotpoints appear. If you used the non-analytical method to
create the extrusion, hotpoints appear at every vertex in the profile and at the point directly
opposite from where you began drawing the profile. If you used the analytical method,
hotpoints appear along the curves that define the extrusion. Use the vertex hotpoints to
modify the profile of the extrusion and the opposite hotpoint to control the depth of the
extrusion. See Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
You can also use the extrusion modify dialog box to more accurately place the points that
make up the profile and read in location points from a file. See Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely
Modify Geometry and using the Location Table.
E - I 861
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
Mag
Phase
PSD
Start Time Enter the start time on the curve for which you want the signal
processing performed.
End Time Enter the end time on the curve for which you want the signal
processing performed.
Window Type Select the type of window type you want to use. Learn more about the
window functions.
Points/Points (Power of 2) Select the number of points to be used for the FFT.
Or, you can enter the segment length directly. This is often referred to
as the window length.
Overlap Points Enter the number of overlaps, which indicates how many signal samples
are used.
Add Curves Select to plot multiple curves selected in the Curve Name field.
Clear Plot Select to clear the FFT Window plot.
862 Adams View
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 3D
Mag
Phase
PSD
Z-Axis Select result set component to be plotted on Z axis.
FE Part Wizard
To launch the FE Part creation wizard:
1. Click the Bodies tab on the Adams View ribbon.
2. From the Flexible Bodies container, click the icon for Create FE Part.
where:
Viscous damping
coefficient cm
Details about how the number and location of nodes can influence
extruded geometry.
X, Y, Z Real Specify x, y, z coordinates.
To define hotspots:
1. In the Hotspots text box, enter the number of hotspots to locate and
output. With this option, a text file containing a tab-delimited table of
hotspot information, such as node ID, maximum value, time when the
maximum value occurred, and location, is generated.
2. From the option menu, specify the value of stress/strain in
determining hotspots from one of Von Mises, Max Prin., Min Prin.,
Max Shear, Normal-X, Normal-Y, Normal-Z, Shear-XY, Shear-YZ, or
Shear-ZX. For more information, see the FEMDATA statement.
3. In the Radius text box, enter a radius that defines the spherical extent
of each hotspot. A default value of 0.0 (zero) means that all nodes in
the flexible body will be hotspot candidates.
4. In the R Marker text box, enter a coordinate reference marker in the
model that will be used to transform the stress or strain data. If not
specified, the stress or strain will be output in the basic FEA coordinate
system of the flexible body (LPRF). This option can be useful when
correlating strain gauge data from a physical test. If the orientation of
the strain gauge does not match the FEA coordinate system, you can
reference a marker whose orientation does match.
E - I 875
Field Element Tool
or
1 Location
2 Bodies - 1 Location
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes of
the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-axes of
the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector you
select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams View automatically calculates
the x- and y-axes.
Field Measure
Design Exploration tab → Measures container
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
File Export
File → Export Shared Dialog Box
Exports modeling data in a wide variety of formats so you can exchange modeling data among different
Adams products, as well as with other software manufacturer’s products.
Learn about exporting:
Adams Solver Dataset
Adams Solver Analysis Files (Graphics, Requests, and Results)
Adams Solver Script files (*.acf)
Adams View Command Files
Numeric Data
CAD (STEP, IGES and Parasolid)
STEP, IGES ('Adams Geometry Translators' only)
Wavefront
Shell Geometry
FEA Loads
Spreadsheet Data
Adams PostProcessor
DAC/RPC III
File Import
File → Import Shared Dialog Box
Imports modeling data in a wide variety of formats so you can exchange modeling data among different
Adams products, as well as with other software manufacturer’s products.
878 Adams View
File Import - Adams PPT
To import a report:
1. From the File menu, point to Import, and then select Report.
2. Enter the name of the file to import.
3. Select OK.
Files
Settings → Solver → Output → More → Output Category → Files
Selecting Files as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box, lets you set advanced options for Adams
Solver analysis files.
If you set to On, Adams View writes tables for each request in your model.
If you set to Off, Adams View does not write the tables. If your simulation has
many output steps or you have many requests, specifying Off results in a much
smaller tabular output file and conserves disk space.
Separator Specify whether or not Adams writes separators to the request, graphics, results, and
tabular output files when you modify the model topology in the middle of a Simulation.
When running a Scripted simulation, you can change the model topology by adding
Adams commands to your script file to activate an element, deactivate an element,
change a marker position, or change the type or point of application of a force or
constraint.
If you set to On (which is the default), Adams Solver reads the analysis
information into Adams View, one analysis for each block of output between the
separators.
If you set to Off, Adams Solver reads the analysis information into Adams View
as a single simulation. This allow you to plot or animate the simulation from
beginning to end.
Yaw Pitch Roll Set to Yes to specify that rotational values are to be output in yaw, pitch, and roll
coordinates, rather than in psi, theta, and phi coordinates. First Adams rotates about
the z-axis, then about the new negative y-axis (y'), and then about the second new
x-axis (x"). Note that Yaw Pitch Roll only affects rotational displacement output.
Adams View always outputs angular velocities and accelerations as vectors, with
orthogonal x, y, and z components.
Fillet Tool
or
880 Adams View
Fillet Tool
You can think of creating filleted edges as rolling a ball over the edges or corners of the geometry to round
them.
When filleting an edge or corner, you can specify a start and an end radius for the fillet to create a variable
fillet:
E - I 881
Fixed Joint Tool
Adams View begins creating the variable fillet using the start radius and then slowly increases or decreases the
size of the fillet until it reaches the end radius. Using the ball analogy again, Adams View starts rounding edges
and corners using one size ball and finishes using a different size.
Note: You will get different results when you fillet one edge at a time than when you fillet all edges
at once. Also, you may not be able to fillet an edge if an adjoining edge has already been
filleted. It depends on the complexity of the filleting.
Learn about:
Chamfering and Filleting Objects
Chamfer Tool
or
882 Adams View
Fixed Joint Tool
For a fixed joint, the location and orientation of the joint often do not affect the outcome of the simulation.
In these cases, you can place the joint at a location where the graphic icon is easily visible. However,
occasionally the placement of the fixed joint can allow force moments to become quite large depending on
where you place the joint, as shown in this example. In this case, be sure to place it where you get the results
you want.
Accept the default. If you accept the default, Adams Flex applies non-zero
damping as follows:
1% damping for all modes with frequency lower than 100.
10% damping for modes with frequency in the 100-1000 range.
100% critical damping for modes with frequency above 1000.
Clear the selection of default, and then either:
Enter the scalar damping ratio that you want applied to all modes.
Enter a function. To get help building the function, next to the Damping
Ratio text box, select the More button .
When you display a mode, Adams Flex displays its frequency in the Frequency text
box. Also, when you display a mode, the mode deformations appear along with
the undeformed flexible body. You can turn this off to display only the deformed
mode.
Select to animate the specified mode to see how it deforms. By default, the
animation runs 3 times or through 3 cycles. (Use the Cycles text box (described
below) to change the number of cycles.)
Note: You can also use the Animation tool on the Main toolbox to animate the
entire model containing the flexible body after you've run a simulation.
Select to display the previous mode.
E - I 887
Flexible Body Modify
Note: Dual-representation or simplified flexible bodies do not directly support contact with any other
bodies nor modal force. One would have to use dummy part geometry fixed to the flexible body
for contact modeling.
One Representation Selects the flexible body to not be eligible for runtime type switching during a
simulation. This is the default setting.
Dual Rep Start Rigid Selects the flexible body to be eligible for runtime type switching and will be
treated as a rigid body initially for the simulation.
Note: When this option is selected and the Inertia Modeling radio button is
set to "Rigid Body" or Invariant 6 is disabled in Custom Inertial
Modeling, a warning message is issued because these may not be the
desired settings.
888 Adams View
Flexible Body Modify
Flex body animation with the Simple Flex method is limited to showing rigid
mesh of flex body while animating the displacement of flex body markers. Thus,
the animation of flex body markers may move away from the reference node from
a rigid animation of the mesh.
Result set components that appear on the Plotting dashboard for Simple Flex
method will vary greatly from those of Modal method. The REPRESENTATION
and RESULT_FILE_INDEX components are included in the flex body XFORM
result set. Typically, these will be constants set to 4 (for Simplified Representation)
and 0. Instead of MODES, a NODES component is included which provides the
list of node ID that were selected as nodal references on the flex body markers
(SELNOD). The kinematics (displacements, velocities and accelerations) of each
selected node are included as components. Finally, the kinematics of the rigid body
CM is included as components.
Inertia Modeling Select a formulation option or select Custom. Learn more about the options.
When you select Custom, Adams Flex displays a Custom Inertial Modeling dialog box
that lets you set up the invariants that you want selected.
Setting Plot Type
E - I 889
Flexible Body Modify
Note that setting the scale factor to a value other than 1 can make the joints at the
flexible body appear to separate. This is because the motion of a point on a flexible
body is the sum of the deformation that has been scaled and a rigid body motion
that is not scaled.
In addition, if you set the scale to 0, Adams Flex treats the flexible body as a rigid
body during animations.
Select to add any comments to help you manage and identify the flexible body. See
Comments.
Select to create a flexible body measure. Learn about creating Object Measures.
[ B ] Rayleigh = α 1 [ M ] + α 2 [ K ]
Rayleigh Stiffness Specifies the scale factor for stiffness portion of Rayleigh damping. Enter a real
Factor (ALPHA2) number (default is 0). Rayleigh viscous damping is calculated as:
[ B ] Rayleigh = α 1 [ M ] + α 2 [ K ]
Material Factor Specifies the scale factor for material damping. Enter a real number (default is 1).
(GEFACT) Structural damping specified by the G and GEFACT entries will replace any
structural damping by: new[K4] = G[K] + GEFACT[K4].
Load Cases Tab - Building Flex Body Models > Load Case Selection.
Graphics Tab
Substituting Graphics with an Outline (Learn more about Substituting Outline Graphics for the Finite Element Mesh.)
Full graphics Select to turn on the viewing of the full graphics; clear to turn off the viewing.
Outline Select to turn on the viewing of the Outline.
Select to sketch an outline.
Note: When animating deformation while the analysis is still running, the
color scale can only take into account the maximum deformation to
that point in the simulation; so, the colors may appear differently when
animating partial results as opposed to when animating a completed
analysis.
Deformation Scale Move the Deformation Scale Factor slider to change the amount by which a
flexible body will displace. For greater exaggeration, type a value in the text box
next to the slider. Changing the deformation scale lets you exaggerate
deformations that might otherwise be too subtle to see, or lets you limit the
deformations. The default scale factor is 1.
Note: Setting the scale factor to a value other than 1 can make the joints at the
flexible body appear to separate. This is because the total displacement
of each point on the flexible body will be magnified. In addition, if you
set the scale to 0, the flexible body will not move during animations.
Select to add any comments to help you manage and identify the flexible body. See
Comments.
Results Tab
E - I 893
Flexible Body Modify (NLFE)
Furthermore, the originating BDF must be setup for self-contact in the finite
element pre-processor. Specifically, there must be a "BCBODY" statement in the
bulk data section referencing a "BSURF" that defines the specific elements to be
used for contact detection. If the case control section of the original BDF also has
a "BCONTACT" statement then its ID is applied to the run-ready deck (.dat)
which Adams View creates. If not, the youngest ID of the "BCBODY" statements
in the BDF is applied. If the self-contact option is checked and no "BCBODY" is
present then the self-contact is deactivated.
By default, here, Adams uses a value of 0.5 divided by the number of nonlinear
flexible bodies in the model solved on the same machine. One may want to use
this setting if they do not want to evenly distribute memory to each flexible body
in the model because some are much larger than others. If, for example, the model
has three nonlinear flexible bodies where two are relatively small compared to
another, then one may want to set Memory Scale Factor to 0.4 for the large one
and 0.05 for the two smaller ones.
Memory Setting If "Automatically Allocate Memory" is not selected, then specify the precise
amount of open core memory (in MB) to allocate to this nonlinear flexible body.
Be careful to leave some memory for the Adams process or other processes if they
are executing on the same machine.
Buffer Size Select from one of the following:
"Auto"
"8193 Words"
"16385 Words"
"32769 Words"
"65537 Words"
This specifies the number of words in a physical record. If "Auto" is selected, then
the Buffer Size is computed internally based upon the degrees of freedom of the
Non-Linear flexible body. Please refer to the Note below, Estimating BUFFSIZE,
for more details.
E - I 895
Flexible Body Modify (NLFE)
Notes: 1. Units (Mass, Length, Force and Time) specified in this dialog box indicate the Nastran
units specified in the BDF or while creating the non-linear flexible body and cannot be
modified using the Flexible Body Modify dialog box. If you wish to use different units from
what was specified during creation, please delete the flexible body and recreate it again
with the desired units.
2. Estimating BUFFSIZE:
The Table 4-1 presents recommendations for BUFFER SIZE based on model size.
These values have been chosen to represent the best compromise between database
access speed and storage requirements for typical problems. An excessively large
BUFFER SIZE can result in more I/O data transferred and wasted space in the
database for smaller problems; an excessively small BUFFER SIZE can result in
increase I/O counts for larger problems. You may be able to achieve higher
performance or smaller database using other values.
The Default Buffer Size is set to "Auto", in which the Degrees of Freedom (DOF) will
be computed approximately using the Nastran Estimate functionality and the Buffer
Size is then selected based on the Table 4-1 below.
The DOF can also be computed approximately by the following formula:
DOF ~= (Number of nodes on solid elements)* 3 + (Number of nodes on the other
elements) * 6
The Buffer Size can be then selected based on Table 4-1.
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Notes: If you defined force graphics for any force elements in your model, but do not see the
associated arrows during animation, you should probably increase the appropriate scale
and animate again. Repeat the scaling process until the arrows of interest are visible.
Conversely, if you see force graphic arrows on the screen, but they are too large or not
completely visible, you should either zoom out, fit your view, or decrease the scale factor
and animate again. Repeat the scaling process until at least the arrows of interest are
completely visible.
900 Adams View
Force Modify Element Like Beam
where:
where:
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to
right. The damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero entries;
that is, r1 through r21 each default to zero.
The damping matrix should be positive semidefinite. This ensures that
damping does not feed energy into the model. Adams Solver does not warn
you if the matrix is not positive semidefinite.
E - I 903
Force Modify Element Like Field
By definition, the beam lies along the positive x-axis of the J marker.
Therefore, the I marker must have a positive x displacement with respect to the
J marker when viewed from the J marker. In its undeformed configuration, the
orientation of the I and the J markers must be the same.
When the x-axes of the markers defining a beam are not collinear, the beam
deflection and, consequently, the force corresponding to this deflection are
calculated. To minimize the effect of such misalignments, perform a static
equilibrium at the start of the simulation.
When the beam element angular deflections are small, the stiffness matrix
provides a meaningful description of the beam behavior. When the angular
deflections are large, they are not commutative; so the stiffness matrix that
produces the translational and rotational force components may not correctly
describe the beam behavior. Adams Solver issues a warning message if the beam
translational displacements exceed 10 percent of the undeformed length.
Specifies the theory to be used to define the force this element will apply. By
default the LINEAR theory is used. If the NONLINEAR option is used, the
full non linear Euler-Bernoulli theory is used. If the STRING option is used,
a simplified non linear theory is used. The simplified non linear theory may
speed up your simulations with little performance penalties.
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right. Learn
about units.
Note: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for the
stiffness matrix.
Matrix of Damping Enter either a matrix of damping terms or a damping ratio if you want to include
Terms/Damping damping coefficients in the calculation of the field forces as explained below. The
Ratio damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero entries.
Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right.
To enter a damping ratio that defines the ratio of the damping matrix to
the stiffness matrix, select Damping Ratio and enter the value. If you
enter a damping ratio, Adams Solver multiplies the stiffness matrix by the
ratio to obtain the damping matrix. Do not enter a ratio without also
entering a stiffness matrix.
Note: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for the
damping matrix.
906 Adams View
Force Modify Element Like Friction
Default: LINEAR
LENGTH_TOL When using FORMULATION=NONLINEAR, the geometric stiffness uses the
larger of the current length and length tolerance.
Default: 1.e-05
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Forces
Displays tools for creating forces. Learn more about Forces.
908 Adams View
Forces
Icon Link
Applied Forces
Single-Component Force tool
Flexible Connections
Bushing Tool
Torsion SpringTool
Icon Link
Beam
Special Forces
Create/Modify Contact
Gravity
Create an FE Load
Frustum Tool
Note: Three hotpoints appear on a frustrum after you draw it. One controls the length of the
frustum, one controls its top radius, and the other controls the bottom radius. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify
Geometry.
Function Builder
Tools → Function Builder
Helps you create and modify functions and parameterize values for various entities. You can either work in
the Expression mode or the Run-time mode.
E - I 911
Function Builder
Expression Mode
912 Adams View
Function Builder
Run-time Mode
1. Standard run-time function mode
E - I 913
Function Builder
For more information on Function Builder, see the Adams View Function Builder online help.
914 Adams View
Function Builder
real
integer
array
string
object
location_orientation
Arguments Enter the names of arguments for the function object.
Assumed Values Select to specify assumed values for arguments to be used during
validation and/or plotting.
Getting Object Data Select a type object allowed in the object field. Choose from:
Markers
Parts
Design Points
Design Variables
Results Data
Measures
All Objects
Enter the name of an object to insert into your function definition in
the field next to the pull-down menu.
Get Data Owned By Object Select if you want to get the name of a data field owned by the object
and insert it into your function definition.
Insert Object Name Select if you want to insert the object name into your function
definition.
Plot Select to plot your function.
Plot Limits Select to specify the horizontal limits for plotting your function.
Evaluate Select to evaluate your function.
Verify Check run-time function syntax.
916 Adams View
Function Builder Plot Limits
Gain Block
Ribbon menu → Elements tab → Controls Toolkit container
or
Gain blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer functions. You
specify the gain as an Adams View scalar real value. You can parameterize this constant with an Adams View
real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.
Learn about:
Creating and Modifying Gears
About Gears
Equations for Gears
918 Adams View
General Force Measure
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
or
E - I 921
Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack
Construction or Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change
Settings depending on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you
Container create a link, Adams View lets you specify its width, length, and height before
creating it. Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of
how you move the mouse. You can also define design variables or expressions
for many values.
924 Adams View
Geometry Modify Curve Arc
Enter either the radius of the arc or circle or enter a radius marker. If you
specify a radius marker, Adams View calculates the radius of the arc or
circle as the distance from the center marker origin to the radius marker
origin. Adams View stores the radius value, not the marker name. If you
later move the marker, the radius does not change.
Segment Count Displays the number of straight line segments Adams View uses to draw
the circle or arc.
Close For an arc, select one of the following:
Chord or Yes - Closes the arc from the starting point to the
ending point.
Sector - Closes the arc so that it creates a pie-shaped arc.
No - Creates an open arc.
To easily edit the locations, select the More button to display the
Location table.
A geometry object whose path defines the polyline. You can select arcs,
circles, spline curves, polylines, and outlines. Adams View extracts the
values of the vertices of the path curve and uses them to create the
polyline.
Close Select if you want to create a closed polyline. If closed, the polyline can be filled
(shaded). The endpoints of the polyline do not need to be coincident for you to
close it; the two endpoints will be connected with a line segment.
If you do not select Close, you create a polyline that appears as a segmented curve.
Adams View creates the polyline by connecting the locations you specified in the
Location text box together with straight line segments in the order in which you
specified them.
Select to add any comments about the polyline that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify it. See Comments.
Center Marker Specify the center marker that defines the center of base of the cylinder. The
length of the cylinder is oriented along the z-axis of the center marker.
Angle Extent Specify the extended angle measured positive (according to the right-hand
rule) about the z-axis of the center marker. The angle starts at the positive x-
axis of the center marker and extends the arc of the cylinder.
Length Enter the length of the cylinder. Adams View uses the value of length to specify
the z distance between the two circles. A positive value specifies a cylinder
along the positive z-axis of the center marker.
Radius/Ref Radius By Specify the radius of circles at the top and bottom of the cylinder or a radius
Marker marker. If you enter a radius marker, Adams View calculates the radius of the
cylinder as the distance from the center marker z-axis to the radius marker.
Adams View stores the radius value, not the marker name. If you later move
this marker, the radius does not change.
Side Count for Body Enter the number of flat sides Adams View draws on the side of the cylinder.
The number of sides you specify affects the calculations Adams View uses to
determine a part’s mass and inertia.
Segment Count for Ends Displays the number of straight line segments Adams View uses to draw the
circles at the ends of the cylinder.
Note: To change the corner locations of a plate, modify the markers that define the corner
locations.
Graphical Topology
Database Navigator → Graphical Topology
Allows you to display a representation of the selected part and shows its connections to other parts. The
connections represent the joints, forces, coupler or gear constraint between the parts. Each time you select a
different part in the tree list of the Database Navigator, the graphical display changes to show the selected part
at the center of the display. If the object is inactive, the part appears dimmed.
Below is an example of graphical view topology.
Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.
934 Adams View
Gravity
Gravity
Settings → Gravity
Group Attributes
or
Group Create
Model Browser → Groups tab (right click) → New Group
or
In the Objects in Group text box, enter the names of the objects.
Separate each name with a comma (,).
You can select an object on the screen or browse for an object in the
Database Navigator. If you select objects to group using the shortcut menu,
Adams View enters commas between the objects.
To set filters for specifying objects to be grouped:
In the Objects in Group text box, enter a wildcard, and then specify the
type of objects in the Type Filter text box. For example, enter Parts to
include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only coordinate system
markers.
E - I 937
Group Modify
Group Modify
Model Browser → Groups tab → Modify
or
In the Objects in Group text box, enter the names of the objects.
Separate each name with a comma (,).
You can select an object on the screen or browse for an object in the
Database Navigator. If you select objects to group using the shortcut menu,
Adams View enters commas between the objects.
To set filters for specifying objects to be grouped:
In the Objects in Group text box, enter a wildcard, and then specify the
type of objects in the Type Filter text box. For example, enter Parts to
include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only coordinate system
markers.
Type Filter If you set a filter in Objects in Group, specify the type of objects to be included
in the group. For example, enter Parts to include only rigid bodies or Markers to
include only coordinate system markers.
Expand Group Do not use. It is only present to provide backward compatibility. We recommend
that you not use it.
Expr Active Specify whether or not the group of objects is active during a simulation. You
can enter an expression that evaluates to 0 (not active) or 1 (active) or enter 1 or
0. If you do not specify a value, Adams View uses the activation status you set
using the Activate and Deactivate commands.
Hole Tool
Ribbon menu → Bodies tab → Features container → Hole Tool
or
As you create a hole, you can specify its radius and depth.
Note: You cannot specify the radius and depth of a hole so that it splits the current geometry into
two separate geometries.
Hollow Tool
Ribbon menu → Bodies tab → Features container → Hollow Tool
or
Note: You can hollow any object that has a face. You cannot hollow spheres, revolutions, or
Construction geometry
940 Adams View
Hooke/Universal Joint Tool
or
This joint is particularly useful when transferring rotational motion around corners, when you need to
simulate the non-constant velocity of a physical universal joint, or when transferring rotational motion
E - I 941
Hooke/Universal Joint Tool
between two connected shafts that are permitted to bend at the connection point (such as the drive shaft on
an automobile).
The location point of the universal joint represents the connection point of the two parts. For a hooke joint,
two shaft axes leading to the cross bars identify the axes about which the two parts are permitted to rotate
with respect to each other. Note that Adams View uses rotational axes that are parallel to the rotational axes
you identify but that pass through the location point for the hooke joint. For a universal joint, the cross bars
identify the axes about which the two parts are permitted to rotate with respect to each other.
Learn about:
Creating Idealized Joints
Adding Friction to Idealized Joints
942 Adams View
Hot Point Snapping Increments
On - Turns on the display of screen icons for the selected type of object.
Off - Turns off the display of screen icons for the selected type of object.
Remember, however, that turning on the display of screen icons for the
entire database overrides this setting.
Inherit - Lets the object type simply inherit the display settings from its
parent. For example, a coordinate system marker inherits settings from its
parent part.
No Change - Does not change the current settings. Lets you make changes
to other display options without affecting the visibility of the icons.
Size of Icons/Scale Enter the size you want for the icons or select the amount by which you want to scale
of Icons the icons. The scale factor is relative to the current size set. A scale factor of 1 keeps
the icons the same size. A scale factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of the icons and
a scale factor greater than 1.0 increases the size of the icons. Note that these changes
take precedence over the size you specify globally for the modeling database.
Color Enter the color you want to use for the icons.
To browse for or create a color, right-click the Color text box, and then select Browse
or Create.
Name Visibility Select whether or not you want the names of objects of the selected type displayed
in the view. Refer to Visibility option above for choices.
Reset Select to reset the screen icon display to the previous values.
If you have very large request files that you want to import, Adams View lets you read in only a subset of the
request file to conserve memory use. You can specify to read in only the request IDs in which you are
interested and skip time steps. Note that this is only available when reading in a single request file, not when
reading in an entire set of analysis files.
Notes: Importing an entire set of analysis files works even if you have only one of the three files
included in the analysis set as explained below.
If Adams View cannot find any of the three files, it issues a message. The most common
reasons that Adams View cannot find one or more of the files are that the path to the files is
incorrect or you do not have permission to read the file. You can either:
If you have a large result file with unnecessarily fine time resolution, specifying
Time Skip Step can significantly reduce the amount of memory used to store the
data as well as reduce the reading time.
If the this is not specified or if the value is 1 then the entire result file is read as usual.
If this is for example 3, for a result file with the name test.res, then every 3rd step
(not including initialCondition, input and contact step is included in the new
results file with the name test_3.res. This file, after shrinking, is read into Adams
View instead of the original file. This file is stored in the same location as the
original result file. This can be combined with a Contact Step Skip specification
(two suffixes would be added to the filename in that case).
Contact Step Skip Specifies whether or not to skip contact steps by specifying a pattern of contact
steps to skip in the result file. This should be greater than or equal to 0. For XRF
style result files only.
If you have a large result file with unnecessarily fine resolution and employing
contacts, specifying Contact Skip Step can significantly reduce the amount of
memory used to store the data as well as reduce the reading time.
If the this is not specified or if the value is 1 then the entire result file is read as usual.
If this is for example 4, for a result file with the name test.res, then every 4th step
(not including initialCondition, input and contact step is included in the new
results file with the name test_4.res. This file, after shrinking, is read into Adams
View instead of the original file. This file is stored in the same location as the
original result file. This can be combined with a Time Step Skip specification (two
suffixes would be added to the filename in that case).
E - I 947
Import - Adams Solver Dataset
Note: If Adams View encounters special characters in the file, such as <CTRL m>, it cancels the
operation. Special characters can appear in files that have been transferred between different
computer systems (for example, from Windows NT to Linux). If Adams View cancels the
operation, edit the file to remove the special characters and import the file into Adams View
again.
Tip: You can also use Tools → Read Command File to import a command file, and set the options
using Settings → Command File.
Learn about:
Sources of Command Files
Command File Format
Ensuring Upward Compatibility of Command Files
Reading Command Files
E - I 949
Import - CatiaV4, CatiaV5, CatiaV6, Inventor, STEP, IGES, ACIS, Pro/Engineer, SolidWorks, Unigraphics, JT
You can specify a single level or a range of levels. Separate the range with a comma (,).
For example, enter 10, 15 to translate levels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15.
Scale Enter the factor by which you want to scale the size of the geometry created in Adams
View. The default scale factor is 1.0, meaning that the geometry in Adams View will
be the same size as the geometry in the CAD file. A scale factor less than 1.0 reduces
the size of geometry and a scale factor greater than 1.0 increases the size of the
geometry.
For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams translates a cylinder of length
2 meters and diameter of .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of .25 meters.
Adams also scales the distance from the geometry to the coordinate system specified
in the Relative To text box according to the scale value. If the cylinder was located at
3, 2, 0 in the file, it would be located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is translated to Adams. The
orientation of the geometry is not effected by scale value.
Ref. Markers Upon import Adams creates reference markers to correspond with each piece of
(Reference geometry created in the Adams model. These markers are typically automatically
Markers) named with the prefix PSMAR. These reference markers are usually located and
oriented at the origin of the Adams model. However, sometimes the geometry in the
CAD file was created in such a way in the CAD system that it has a
location/orientation transformation value relative to the CAD assembly/part origin.
For example, the geometry was created via a copy/paste/move action performed on an
original piece of geometry, or an assembly is composed of a number of parts/sub-
assemblies re-located relative to the origins about which they were originally modelled.
In these scenarios, setting the option Reference Markers to “Local” will locate/orient
the Adams-created reference markers by applying the same location/orientation
transformation value used in construction in the CAD system to the marker relative
to the Adams model origin. Setting the option Reference Markers to “Global” will
locate/orient all reference markers at the origin of the Adams model.
Blanked entities are typically construction entities that are used in the definition of
another geometric entity. For example, a line can be used as the center of rotation of
another line in the definition of a cylinder. The center line and the sweep line rotated
about the center line are both blanked because they are temporary entities used in the
construction of the cylinder.
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention for
entering translational positions. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate System.
Note: This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part and
not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the
parameter will simply be ignored.
Orientation Specify the angular position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be oriented
relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.
Adams View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate system
and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed 313 angles.
You can change the convention for entering orientation angles.Learn about Setting
Default Coordinate System.
Note: This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part and
not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the
parameter will simply be ignored.
Relative To Enter the coordinate system relative to which the translated geometry will be defined.
The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text boxes are relative
to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a coordinate system, part,
or model.
Note: This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part and
not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the
parameter will simply be ignored.
952 Adams View
Import - DAC or RPC III
Flat: With this setting, the name of the part entity in Adams is the name of the
part in UG under which the geometry is present.
Assembly: With this setting, the name of the part entity in Adams is a
combination of the names of all objects in the hierarchy of the part in UG where
the geometry is present, starting from the assembly name.
Consolidate To Set to import all the geometry as one shell. If you do not select Consolidate To Shells,
Shells Adams imports the geometry as individual entities. We recommend that you select
Consolidate To Shells to receive the best animation results.
Note: This parameter is valid only when importing the geometry under a part and
not a model. If the geometry is being imported under a model, the
parameter will simply be ignored.
Display Summary Select to write a verbose log file to the disk. A message will be displayed indicating the
log file to which the translation operation details have been written.
Translation Click on this button to invoke the Manage Geometry Translation Options dialog box
Options for the relevant geometry and translation operation (read or write). The dialog box
would be pre-filled with the option name, short description of what the option is for
and the default value.
Upon changing the desired option values, click on the 'Done' button. The translation
options so set will be used in the ensuing translation operation.
Clean on Import Enables an automatic geometry scanner and cleaner behind-the-scenes during import
of geometry files. This process looks for small imperfections in the geometry that
would render in not "watertight" and therefore cause problems with mass property
calculations based on geometry and density/material. In some cases this may slow
down import speed of certain geometry. If disabling this option, be sure to verify that
the volume Adams View calculates is still sufficiently accurate enough.
time history data in the database. Adams View also creates Result_Set_Component placeholders below the
file object for each RPC III data channel or DAC file.
Import - Parasolid
File → Import → Parasolid Shared Dialog Box
Imports Parasolid geometry. See Manage Geometry Options for more information.
When you import Parasolid geometry, Adams View reads the file and converts the geometry into a set of
Adams geometric elements. By importing geometry from standard CAD packages you can reduce the need
to recreate geometry primitives within Adams, and you can enhance your ability to realistically view the
behavior of complicated mechanical systems.
Be sure that the model into which you want to import the geometry is currently open and displayed in
Adams. You can associate the geometry that you import with an existing part or create a new part with which
to associate it.
For example, the geometry was created via a copy/paste/move action performed
on an original piece of geometry, or an assembly is composed of a number of
parts/sub-assemblies re-located relative to the origins about which they were
originally modelled.
Import - Shell
File → Import → Shell Shared Dialog Box
Imports shell geometry to enhance animations.
956 Adams View
Import - STEP, IGES
Note: In Adams PostProcessor, you can specify whether or not you want Adams PostProcessor to
import triangular geometry into trimesh strips when you import CAD geometry. Trimesh
strips display significantly faster than individual polygons, resulting in faster animations.
Adams PostProcessor automatically imports shell files (.shl , .slp, and .stl) as trimesh strips.
For more information, see PPT Preferences - Geometry.
For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams View translates a cylinder of
length 2 meters and diameter of .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of .25
meters. Adams View also scales the distance from the geometry to the coordinate
system specified in the Relative To text box according to the scale value. If the cylinder
was located at 3, 2, 0 in the file, it would be located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is translated
to Adams. The orientation of the geometry is not effected by scale value.
Blanked Entities Select to translate entities that are blanked (made not visible). Adams View translates
the blanked entities and makes them invisible. If you do not select Blanked Entities,
Adams View does not translate the blanked entities.
Blanked entities are typically construction entities that are used in the definition of
another geometric entity. For example, a line can be used as the center of rotation of
another line in the definition of a cylinder. The center line and the sweep line rotated
about the center line are both blanked because they are temporary entities used in the
construction of the cylinder.
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention for
entering translational positions. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate System.
Orientation Specify the angular position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be oriented
relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.
Adams View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate system
and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed 313 angles.
You can change the convention for entering orientation angles. Learn about Setting
Default Coordinate System.
Relative To Enter the coordinate system relative to which the translated geometry will be defined.
The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text boxes are relative
to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a coordinate system, part,
or model.
958 Adams View
Import - STEP, IGES
Upon changing the desired option values, click on the 'Done' button. The translation
options so set will be used in the ensuing translation operation.
Clean on Import Enables an automatic geometry scanner and cleaner behind-the-scenes during import
of geometry files. This process looks for small imperfections in the geometry that
would render in not "watertight" and therefore cause problems with mass property
calculations based on geometry and density/material. In some cases this may slow
down import speed of certain geometry. If disabling this option, be sure to verify that
the volume Adams View calculates is still sufficiently accurate enough.
Ref. Markers Upon import Adams creates reference markers to correspond with each piece of
(Reference geometry created in the Adams model. These markers are typically automatically
Markers) named with the prefix PSMAR. These reference markers are usually located and
oriented at the origin of the Adams model. However, sometimes the geometry in the
CAD file was created in such a way in the CAD system that it has a
location/orientation transformation value relative to the CAD assembly/part origin.
For example, the geometry was created via a copy/paste/move action performed on an
original piece of geometry, or an assembly is composed of a number of parts/sub-
assemblies re-located relative to the origins about which they were originally
modelled.
In these scenarios, setting the option Reference Markers to “Local” will locate/orient
the Adams-created reference markers by applying the same location/orientation
transformation value used in construction in the CAD system to the marker relative
to the Adams model origin. Setting the option Reference Markers to “Global” will
locate/orient all reference markers at the origin of the Adams model.
Note: Only ASCII .stl files (Stereolithography) are supported. Binary .stl files are not currently
supported.
For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams translates a cylinder of length
2 meters and diameter .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of .25 meters.
Adams also scales the distance from the geometry to the coordinate system specified
in the Relative To text box according to the scale value. If the cylinder was located at
3, 2, 0 in the imported file, it would be located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is translated to
Adams. The orientation of the geometry is not affected by scale value.
960 Adams View
Import - Test Data
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention for
entering translational positions. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate System.
Orientation Specify the angular position where the geometry in the file is to be oriented relative to
the Adams View part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be relative
to any other coordinate system defined in the model.
Adams View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate system
and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed 313 angles.
You can change the convention for entering orientation angles.Learn about Setting
Default Coordinate System.
Relative To Enter the coordinate system to which the translated geometry will be defined relative
to. The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text boxes are
relative to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a coordinate system,
part, or model.
If you specify an independent data index for splines, Adams does not create
a spline for the column of the file with that index. Instead, that column of
data is used as the x data for all splines. If you do not include an independent
column index, then the series of numbers 1, 2, 3, and so on is used for the x
data of all splines.
Units Specify the unit category to be applied to the dependent data for the spline.
You can provide a unit category for each dependent column in the file.
Once Adams assigns the units to the spline, it performs automatic unit
conversions based on the current default units specified (Settings → Units).
For example, if you import test data and assign the unit category of length,
and then you change the length unit from millimeter to meter, Adams View
automatically converts the test data by 0.001.
Note that you should take care to ensure the current units in Adams are set
to the appropriate units for the data in the file before importing the file. If
the Adams default units are millimeter, and you are importing data in inches,
the data in the file will be interpreted as millimeters.
The units field is optional. If you omit it, Adams assigns no_units to the
imported data, and performs no automatic unit conversion.
Model Name/ Specify the name of the model or, for measures, the name of the analysis in
Analysis Name which you want to store the data. Select:
Model Name and then enter the name of the model in the text box next
next to the pull-down menu.
Analysis Name and then enter the name of the simulation in the text
box next to the pull-down menu. You can only store measures under
simulation results. (Not available if you are importing the data as a spline.)
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Names in File Specify how to define the names of the splines or measures
If there are textual column headers in the file, select Names in File.
Adams uses the column header text as the names of each spline.
If there are no textual column headers, do not select Names in File.
Adams automatically generates names for the splines (for example,
SPLINE_1, SPLINE_2, and so on).
962 Adams View
Import - Wavefront Files
Model Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a model, Adams View
creates a new part for each unique group name that appears in the file. If the same
group name appears more than once, Adams View adds a separate shell geometric
entity to the part with the same name as the group. It assigns names to the shell
using the convention SHLx, where x is a unique integer.
Part Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a single part, Adams View
creates a new shell for each group that appears in the file. It assigns names to the
shells using the convention group_name_x where x is a unique integer.
Marker Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a marker, Adams View
creates a new shell for each group that appears in the file. It assigns names to the
shells using the convention group_name_x where x is a unique integer.
The parts Adams View creates are massless and editing their properties and then
attaching them to your model could be cumbersome. Therefore, we suggest you use
the Part Name option. See also Tips on Importing Wavefront Files.
Impose Motion(s)
Right-click general motion → Modify
Lets you modify a general Point Motion. It displays a set of options for each of the motion's six Degrees of freedom
(DOF). It displays a pull-down menu next to a DOF if it is free and can have motion applied to it, and
displays the label fixed if the DOF is constrained and cannot move.
964 Adams View
Information
Learn more:
About Motion
Modifying General Point Motion
Information
Database Navigator → Information
Allows you to view information about the selected object. This lists the database fields for the selected object.
Learn Viewing Object Information Through Database Navigator.
Information Window
Tools → Model Topology Map/Model Verify or Right-click on a part → Info
Adams View uses the Information window to display many different types of information about your model,
simulation, or motion data. In addition to just viewing information about your model, you can perform a
variety of operations in the Information window.
E - I 965
Initial Conditions Tool
Simulation tab → Simulate container → Interactive Simulation icon → Initial Conditions tool
or
configuration and make it suitable for performing a nonlinear or linear simulation. Most importantly, the
initial conditions simulation tries to ensure that all joint connections are defined properly.
For example, for a revolute joint to be defined properly, the origins of the Markers that define the joint must
be coincident throughout a simulation. If the markers are not coincident, the joint is broken and needs to be
repaired. In this example, the initial conditions simulation helps repair the broken revolute joint by moving
the origins of the two markers until they are coincident
You can also use the initial conditions simulation if you are creating parts in exploded view. Exploded view is
simply creating the individual parts separately and then assembling them together into a model. You might
find this convenient if you have several complicated parts that you want to create individually without seeing
how they work together until much later. Adams View provides options for specifying that you are creating
your model in exploded view as you create constraints.
After selecting the Initial Conditions tool, Adams View tells you when it has assembled your model properly.
You can revert back to your original design configuration or you can save your assembled model as the new
design configuration for your model.
Learn about Performing Initial Conditions Simulation.
or
The location of the inline joint on the first part must remain on the z-axis of the second part.
Learn about Creating Joint Primitives.
E - I 967
Inplane Joint Tool
Pick Geometry Feature Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid, if
it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector
on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
or
The origin of the inplane joint on the first part must remain in the xy plane of the second part.
Learn about Creating Joint Primitives.
Pick Geometry Feature Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid, if
it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector
on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
E - I 969
Input-Signal Function Block
or
Integrator Block
Ribbon menu → Elements tab → Controls Toolkit container →
or
Display tools for controlling Simulation. The dialog box contains a complete set of simulation controls, while
the Simulation container contains only a subset of the most commonly used simulation controls.
Learn about:
Simulation Basics
Types of Simulations
Performing an Interactive Simulation
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation
Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes
Icon Description
Sets your model back to its initial design configuration so you can modify your
model or perform another simulation starting at time 0.
You do not have to set the model back to its design configuration to continue
simulating. You can pick up from the last frame of your animation and
continue.
How Adams View replays your simulation depends on whether or not you
have finished the simulation and reset the model back to its initial design
configuration.
If you have run a simulation, or part of a simulation, but not set the model
back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the animation,
Adams View animates the model up to the last simulation step and leaves
your model there.
If you reset your model back to its initial configuration, when you select to
replay the animation, Adams View automatically sets the model back to
the initial design configuration when the animation is complete.
Model Verify Tool
E - I 973
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
Icon Description
Sim. Type Sets the type of Simulation:
Default
Dynamic simulation
Kinematic simulation
Static equilibrium
End Time/ Enter the time interval over which the simulation takes place and set how you
Duration/Forever want it defined. You can select:
End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want the
simulation to stop.
Duration - Specify the amount of time over which you want the
simulation to run.
Forever - Adams View continues simulating until you stop the
simulation or until it can no longer solve the equations of motion to
within your specified tolerance. This option is only available on the
Simulation Control dialog box.
Steps/Step Size Set the frequency with which Adams View outputs data during your
simulation. You can specify:
Steps - Represents the total number of times you want Adams View
to provide output information over your entire simulation. For
example, specify 50 steps over a 1-second simulation interval to define
an output period of 0.02 seconds per step, which yields an output
frequency of 50 steps/second.
Step Size - Represents the amount of time, in current model units,
between output steps. The output frequency remains constant even if
you change your simulation end time or duration. For example, enter
a step size of 0.01 seconds to specify an output period of 0.01 seconds
per step, which yields an output frequency of 100 steps/second.
Static Equilibrium Tool
Icon Description
Icons By default, Adams View turns off all Screen icons during animations to speed
up the animation.
Allows the user to grab a part and drag it while the C++ Solver honors all of
the model's constraints. Useful for quickly verifying a model's behavior. If this
is attempted while a simulation is already running, the running simulation will
stop.
Displays the Compute Linear Modes dialog box.
Displays the Perform Vibration Analysis dialog box. Only available when you have
Adams Vibration. For more information, see the Adams Vibration help.
Computes system linear modes with or without damping. See Linear Modes.
Displays the Compute and Export Linear States dialog box letting you generate a
state-space matrix representation of your mechanical system.
Update Graphics Display Clear the selection to never have your model updated during the simulation.
Select this when you are sure that your simulation will run to completion
without difficulty, and you want to maximize the efficiency of the simulation.
Learn about setting more options for simulation display with Solver Settings -
Display dialog box help.
Interactive/Scripted Displays tools for controlling either an interactive or Scripted simulation.
E - I 975
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
Icon Description
Save/Delete Simulation Results
Left-click to display the Save Run Results dialog box so you can save the
simulation results.
Right-click to select a set of simulation results to delete.
Save Simulated Position
Displays the Save Model at Simulation Position dialog box so you can save the
model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new name.
Save Model at Simulation States
Displays the Save Model at Simulation State dialog box so you can save the model
at a simulated state into the Modeling database under a new name so you can use
it as your new design configuration with states.
Displays the Animation Controls dialog box.
Temporary Settings Specify one or more Temporary Settings Files (.tsf ) files.
Property values contained in the file(s) will be applied before starting the
simulation and then reverted to their original values immediately after the
simulation finishes, even if the simulation fails to complete. Note that this
field is only available if the Temporary Settings capability has been enabled
from the AView-Preferences section of the Adams Registry Editor.
Simulation Settings Displays the Solver Settings dialog box, letting you set how you want the
Simulation performed.
976 Adams View
Intersect Tool
Intersect Tool
or
Learn about Creating One Part from the Intersection of Two Solids.
J - O 977
Joint Initial Conditions
J-O
Joint Initial Conditions
Modify Joint dialog box → Initial Conditions
Sets initial conditions for revolute, translational, and cylindrical joints, including translational and rotational
displacement and velocity. If you specify initial conditions, Adams View uses them as the initial displacement
and velocity of the part during an Initial conditions simulation regardless of any other forces acting on the part.
Some options in the dialog box are not available (ghosted) depending on the type of joint for which you are
setting initial conditions.
Learn more about initial conditions for joints.
Note: If the initial rotational displacement of a revolute or cylindrical joint varies by anywhere from
5 to 60 degrees from the actual location of the joint, Adams Solver issues a warning message
and continues execution. If the variation is greater than 60 degrees, Adams View issues an
error message and stops execution.
978 Adams View
Joint Measure
Joint Measure
Design Exploration tab → Measures container
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Joint Motion
Right-click joint motion → Modify
Lets you modify a Joint motion.
Learn more:
Modifying Joint Motion
Tips on Creating Motions
Defining the Motion Magnitude
DOF Removed by Motion
Joint Toolstack Motion Toolstack Create Joints Palette (from Build Menu)
J - O 983
Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks
Construction Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change depending on
or Settings the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you create a link, Adams
Container View lets you specify its width, length, and height before creating it. Then, as you
create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move the mouse. You
can also define design variables or expressions for many values.
984 Adams View
Lead-Lag Filter Block
or
Lead-lag filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer functions.
The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams View scalar real value. You can parameterize this constant
with an Adams View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input.
Lighting Settings
Settings → Lighting → Lighting Settings
Helps you enhance the quality and realism of your animations.
Click a tool below for more information.
J - O 985
Lighting Settings
Icon Description
Intensity Slide to set how bright the overall light is.
Ambient Slide to set the ambient light.
Angle Slide to set how far from the center line the light source is. May not be appropriate for
all light sources, such as front.
Reflections Toggle to set up reflections off of parts. See Reflections Example.
Two-Sided Turn on to have lighting come from two sides.
Turns on and off the light
986 Adams View
Lighting Settings
Icon Description
Set from upper left corner.
Icon Description
Set from upper right corner
Icon Description
Set from right side
J - O 989
Lighting Settings
Icon Description
Set from lower right corner
or
Frames Per Cycle Enter the number of frames to be displayed for each cycle.
Showing the trail is useful in showing the relationship of the model parts
between frames but often obscures the view of the motion.
Show undeformed Select if you want the undeformed model to be displayed with the deformed
shape superimposed on top of it.
If you select Show undeformed, select a color for the underformed model. If
you do not specify a color, Adams View displays the undeformed model using
the same color as the deformed mode.
Show icons Select to turn on the display icons during an animation.
Undef. Color Specify the color for undeformed shape or use original colors.
Max. Translation Enter a value to scale mode shape so that translations are smaller than it.
Note: If you have not specified a either scales, then use 20% of the
maximum dimension of the model for translational and 20 degrees
for rotational.
Max. Rotation Enter a value to scale mode shape so that rotations are smaller than it.
Table Select to display eigenvalues in a tabular form.
Plot Select to plot complex eigenvalue scatter.
Select to switch to Simulation Controls.
Ribbon menu → Results tab → Review container → Linear Modes Controls → Plot button
or
Link Tool
or
Note: Two hotpoints appear after you draw the link: one hotpoint lets you modify the length of the
link and the other hotpoint lets you modify the depth, width, and height. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify
Geometry.
Location Table
LocationEvent
When Adams View asks you for a location, right-click
Lets you enter location coordinates to precisely set the location of an object, such as a design point or a force.
You can enter the location relative to the origin of the Working grid, the global coordinate system, or any other
object on the screen.
Learn about:
994 Adams View
Low-Pass Filter Block
or
Low-pass filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer functions.
The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams View scalar real value. You can parametrize this constant with
an Adams View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.
Macro Editor
Tools → Macro → Edit → New
Edits Macros that you recorded or that you created by reading in a macro file. You can also use the Macro
Editor to create a macro.
Note: If you select Modify from this menu, the Database Navigator appears. From the Database
Navigator, select a macro to modify.
Macro Read
Tools → Macro → Read
Allows you to read in an existing command file containing the commands to be executed as a macro. You can
also assign a help file or text string to the macro that explains the macro's use.
Learn about Automating Your Work Using Macros.
J - O 997
Macro Write
Note: The command string you enter must be unique. You cannot redefine
an existing command, although you can add a new keyword at any
level to an existing command.
Wrap in Undo Specify if the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command. Note
that a single Undo, while convenient, can consume a great deal of memory for
very large macros or slow macro execution noticeably, even if you do not
actually use the Undo.
Create Panel Select Yes if you want to create a dialog box, or select no if you do not want to
create a dialog box.
Macro Write
Tools → Macro → Write
Saves the macro to a command file. Saving the macro to a command file lets you give the macro to another user,
and also helps you modify long macros when you do not have the original file.
If you used non-default values for the other macro data, such as the help string, the command file includes
comments with those values.
Note: Adams View saves all macros in the current Modeling database when you save the database.
Main Toolbox
Displays commonly used tools for creating, editing, and selecting modeling elements, as well as simulating
the model and undoing operations. The tools are shortcuts to using the menus in the menu bar. In addition,
many of the tools are Tool stacks. Right-click a tool to display its tool stack.
998 Adams View
Main Toolbox
Icon Description
Select Tool
Measure Toolstack
J - O 999
Main Toolbox
Icon Description
Undoing and Redoing Operations
Joint Toolstack
Motion Toolstack
Animation Controls
Move Toolstack
Increment Entering a value lets you more precisely control the view display changes, such
as zooming and rotations.
1000 Adams View
Main Toolbox
Icon Description
View Orientation Tools
Window Layout
Notes: All but STEP and IGES require the 'Adams Geometry Translators' license.
The geometry options listed below are not applicable for import of Catia V6 3dxml
files in Review mode. This is because Catia V6 files in Review mode generate an
STL file during the import process. This is unlike other CAD formats, whose
import generates a Parasolid file.
Import: IGES, STEP, ACIS, CATIA V4, CATIA V5, CATIA V6, Pro/E (and Creo), Inventor, Solidworks,
Unigraphics, JT
Export: IGES, STEP
Sew If set to true, all the bodies are sewed together. The default is 'false'.
Heal If set to true, geometry errors are corrected by adjusting data to Parasolid's
default precision. The default is 'true'.
TranslateBodies If set to true, solid/sheet bodies will be imported. The default is 'true'.
TranslateWires If set to true, free curves (curves that are not attached to any surface) will
be imported. The default is 'false'.
TranslatePoints If set to true, free points (points that are not attached to any curve) will be
imported. The default is 'false'.
TranslateCoordinateSystem If set to true, coordinate will be imported. The default is ‘false’.
1002 Adams View
Manage Geometry Options
CATIAV5GeometricSet If set to true, the exact model tree structure is provided for 'Geometric Set'
(applicable for CATIA V5 entities as in CATIA V5. The default is 'true'.
only)
Color (applicable for If set to true, color of the data will be taken into account during import.
Unigraphics, Solidworks and The default is 'true'. Setting to 'false' may improve import speed under
JT only) some conditions.
Use Direct Approach If set to true, the data translator component will save the data directly into
Parasolid. The default is 'false'.
CurveChordToleranceScale Curve chord tolerance scale is the multiplying factor for the curve chord tolerance.
Curve chord tolerance is the maximum chordal distance between a facet edge and its
original edge entity.
If the curve chord tolerance scale is less than 0.3, the tessellation will be finer. A value
greater than 0.3 will result in a coarser tessellation.
J - O 1005
Manage Geometry Options
CurveChordAngle Curve chord angle is the maximum angle (always in radians, irrespective of model units)
which is permitted between a facet chord and its original edge entity.
The default is 0.26 (that is 15 deg) which means a value will be automatically set by
Adams if it is not explicitly set by the user.
Lesser curve chord angle will result in a finer tessellation. Greater angle will result in a
coarser tessellation.
1006 Adams View
Manage Geometry Options
SurfacePlaneToleranceScale Surface plane tolerance scale is the multiplying factor for the surface plane tolerance.
Surface plane tolerance is the maximum distance between the mid-plane of a facet and
its original face entity.
If the surface plane tolerance scale is less than 0.3 the tessellation will be finer. A value
greater than 0.3 will result in a coarser tessellation.
J - O 1007
Manage Geometry Options
SurfacePlaneAngle Surface plane angle is the maximum angle (always in radians, irrespective of model
units) which is permitted between the surface normal at any two positions on the
surface which lie within the facet boundary.
The default is 0.26 (that is 15 deg) which means a value will be automatically set by
Adams if it is not explicitly set by the user.
Lesser surface plane angle will result in a finer tessellation. Greater angle will result in a
coarser tessellation.
Note: Finer or coarser tessellation will impact performance in loading the model and all graphics
operations like view manipulation, wireframe/shaded mode change and so on. Finer
tessellation will result in better rendering but will negatively impact the performance.
Coarser tessellation will improve the performance but will negatively impact the rendering
quality.
1008 Adams View
Marker Modify
Marker Modify
Right-click a marker → Modify
Allows you to precisely control the location and orientation of your marker. The options available depend on
whether or not the marker is attached to a part, ground, or curve or a node on a flexible body. Select a topic
below:
Marker on Part, Ground, or Curve
Marker Attached to Node on Flexible Body or an external system (when an MNF/MD DB is specified)
Marker Tool
or
Note: You can parameterize the locations and orientations of other objects to that of markers. For
example, you can align the location of a part to be the same as a marker regardless of how the
marker moves. Unlike points, whose parameterization is automatic, you must set up
relationship of markers to other objects. For more information on establishing parameteric
relationships, see, Improving Your Model Designs.
Tip: To reorient the marker, use the Align & Rotate tool from the Move tool stack, select Align One
Axis, and then follow the prompts:
Ribbon menu → Simulation Tab → Simulate container → Run an Interactive Simulation → Table
Displays the Debug table, which contains a running count of the iterations needed to solve the equations of
motion for the current Simulation. You can use the information as a measure of how many computations Adams
Solver is performing.
Learn more about Debugging Your Model.
J - O 1013
Maximum Equation Error (Debug Table)
Measure Attributes
Object Measure → Modify → Measure Attributes Tool
When you modify a measure, you can set the attributes for a Strip chart, including creating a legend, setting
axis limits, and setting the color and line type for the curve.
Note that you have to redisplay the strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend using the options
below. Learn about redisplaying strip charts.
Line Type Select a type of line style for the curve. For example, you can select a line that
alternates between dots and dashes.
Symbol Set the type of symbol displayed at data points along the curve.
Color Change the color of the curve.
Thickness Change the weight of the curve line. Weight values range from 1 to 5 screen pixels.
Measure Distance
Tools → Measure Distance Shared Dialog Box
Calculates the relative distance and orientation between two positions in your model (Markers, Points, or a
marker/point) and ground. Adams View calculates the following distance information:
Magnitude
x, y, and z component
Angular displacement
You can also select that Adams View calculate the results relative to a reference marker. You can select to
measure the distance at the model's initial configuration (how you built it) or at a particular simulation step.
You can specify a time, frame number, or a configuration of the model. You can view the results in an
Information window or have Adams View store the results in a file.
Learn more about Measuring Distance Between Positions.
1016 Adams View
Measure Distance
Analysis Name Model Name - To calculate the distance based on the current
configuration of a model.
Analysis Name - To calculate the distance based on a
configuration or simulation time in a particular Simulation.
If you selected Model Name, the following option appears:
Model Name Enter the name of the current model in the text box. If you want to
measure distance in the current model, you do not need to enter a model
name.
If you selected Analysis Name, the following options appear:
Analysis Name Enter the name of the simulation.
Configuration/Time/Frame Select to use a particular time, frame, or configuration store in the
Number selected simulation.
J - O 1017
Measure Toolstack
Measure Toolstack
Ribbon menu → Design Exploration tab → Measures container
or
Merge Tool
or
Merges two non-intersecting rigid body geometries into one without performing any Boolean operations on
the geometry. The geometry can contain any type of geometry: solid, wire, or complex. If the geometry
belongs to the different parts, the merge tool merges the parts into one.
Because Adams View does not perform any Boolean operations on the merged geometries, overlapping
volumes produce double-density mass in the part and change the results of the mass property calculations.
Therefore, you should use this operation only for non-intersecting rigid bodies that the Unite Tool cannot
combine.
1018 Adams View
Merge Two Models
Adams View merges the second geometry that you select into the first geometry you select.
Learn about Merging Geometry.
You can browse for a model by right-clicking the text boxes and selecting the
appropriate commands.
Translate Specify the translations to apply to the source model before merging it with
the destination model.
By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the
convention for entering translational positions. Learn more about Coordinate
Systems in Adams View.
Rotation Specify the angular position of the parts and polylines in the source model.
Add all elements to a Group Optional. Enter a new or existing group into which Adams View adds all
named merged objects. Learn about Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
Merge/Rename Select either:
Message Settings
View → Message Window → Settings
Allows you to set the messages displayed in the Message Window and clear the messages from the window. By
default, the message window only displays error and fatal messages and messages from commands that you
execute from the user interface (for example, menus and dialog boxes). You can also display messages that you
execute from the Command Window, Command Navigator, and command files. In addition, you can set the severity
level of the messages displayed, from informational to fatal messages. Learn about Managing Messages in
Adams View.
Message Window
View → Message Window
Provides you with messages on the status of Adams View and displays helpful information while you are using
Adams.
Adams View displays messages about the execution of a command in the message window. By default, the
message window only displays messages about commands you execute from the user interface. You can also
set it to display messages about commands that you execute from the Command Window, Command Navigator, and
command files.
Learn about Managing Messages in Adams View.
or
Note: You can view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB, using the “…”
button provided beside the Index. The desired flexible body can be
selected by double-clicking on the displayed list.
MNF/MD DB Select the appropriate option for Output File and enter the name of the MNF or
the MD DB file.
Create Flexible Body... Select to open Create a Flexible Body dialog box after the intended transformation is
carried out, so that you can create the flexible body and see the transformation.
Mirror Select to perform mirroring operation. You need to specify mirroring plane to
perform mirroring operation.
Translate Select to perform translation operation. You need to specify a direction for
translation and a distance to translate.
Rotate Select to perform rotation operation. You need to specify the axis about which
rotation can be done and an angle for rotation.
If Mirror option is selected, following options are available.
Plane Normal to Specify either of these three methods to specify the mirroring plane:
Vector/
Plane From 3 Points/ Plane Normal to Vector - This option allows you to specify a vector
Plane Normal to 2 which is normal to the plane about which you want to mirror the flexible
Points body.
Plane From 3 Points - This option allows you to specify three points to
define the mirroring plane.
Plane Normal to 2 Points - This option allows you to specify 2 points
which define a vector normal to the plane about which you want to
mirror the flexible body.
If Plane Normal to Vector is selected, following options are available.
1022 Adams View
MNF and MD DB Transformation
Global X - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the
global X axis.
Global Y - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the
global Y axis.
Global Z - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the
global Z axis.
X axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal
to the specified Marker's X axis.
Y axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to
the specified Marker's Y axis.
Z axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal
to the specified Marker's Z axis.
User Defined - This option specifies the mirror plane is normal to the
user entered vector.
Marker Only available if Direction is either X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis of Marker.
Mirroring will be done with respect to marker's orientations (X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis)
respectively.
Direction Vector Only available if Direction is User Defined.
Location Enter a location on the mirror plane.
If Plane From 3 Points is selected, the following options will be available.
Point 1, Point 2, Point3 Specify the coordinates of three points that define the mirroring plane.
If Plane Normal to 2 Points is selected, the following options will be available.
From Location, To Enter the coordinates of two end points of a vector that is normal to the mirroring
Location plane.
If Translate option is selected, the following options are available.
Direction From Specify either of these three methods to define the direction of translation:
Vector/
Direction Normal to 3 Direction From Vector - direction is specified as a vector.
Points/ Direction Normal to 3 Points - direction is specified as normal to a
Direction From 2 plane.
Points Direction From 2 Points - direction is specified by two end points of a
vector.
If Direction From Vector option is selected, the following options will be available.
J - O 1023
MNF and MD DB Transformation
Translation will be done with respect to marker's orientation (X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis)
respectively.
Direction Vector Only available if Direction is User Defined.
If Direction Normal to 3 Points option is selected, the following options will be available.
Point 1, Point 2, Point3 Specify the coordinates of three points that define a plane. Translation will be
performed in the direction which is normal to the plane.
If Direction From 2 Points option is selected, the following options will be available.
From Location, To Enter the coordinates of two end points; translation will be done in the direction
Location of the two end points.
Distance Enter the distance for translation of the flexible body. Except for the Direction
From 2 Points option you are required to specify a value for Distance. For
Direction From 2 Points option, if Distance is not specified it is calculated to be
the distance between the two points.
If Rotate option is selected, following options will be available.
Direction From Specify either of these three methods to specify an axis of rotation:
Vector/
Direction Normal to 3 Direction From Vector - rotation axis is defined as a vector.
Points/ Direction Normal to 3 Points - rotation axis is defined as a plane normal.
Direction From 2 Direction From 2 Points - rotation axis is defined by two end points.
Points
If Direction From Vector option is selected, the following options are available.
1024 Adams View
MNF and MD DB Transformation
Rotation will be done with respect to marker's orientation (X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis)
respectively.
Direction Vector Only available if Direction is User Defined.
Center of rotation Enter the coordinates for the center of rotation.
If Direction Normal to 3 Points option is selected, the following options are available.
Point 1 (center of Enter the coordinates of the three points that define a plane; rotation will be done
rotation), Point 2, about the axis which is normal to the plane, using Point 1 as the center of rotation.
Point3
If Direction From 2 Points option is selected, the following options are available.
From Location, To Enter the coordinates of end points; the end points define the axis for rotation.
Location
Angle Enter the angle for rotation of the flexible body.
J - O 1025
Model Verify Tool
Modify Body
Right-click part → Part name → Modify
Modifies the following for a part:
Name, location, and orientation
Mass and inertia
Initial velocities
Initial location and orientation
In addition, it also defines a new ground part.
Material Type
Geometry and Density
User Input
If you selected Material Type, the following options appears:
Material Type Enter the type of material for the rigid body. Adams View displays the
material’s composition below the text box. Adams View uses the density
associated with the material type and volume of the geometry of the part to
calculate the part’s mass and inertia. Learn about Standard Material Properties.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Show calculated inertia Select to view the mass-inertia tensor matrix that Adams View calculates.
If you selected Geometry and Density, the following options appears:
Density Enter the density of the part. Adams View uses the part’s density and the
volume of the geometry to calculate its mass and inertia.
Show calculated inertia Select to view the mass-inertia tensor matrix that Adams View calculates.
If you selected User Input, the following options appear:
Mass Enter the mass of the part.
Moments of inertia Enter the mass moments of inertia. Learn About Entering Mass Moments of Inertia.
Center of Mass Marker Enter the marker that is to be used to define the center-of-mass (CM) for the
part.
1028 Adams View
Modify Body - Name and Position
Translational Velocity
Ground Select to specify the global reference coordinate system as the system in which
the translational velocity vector components will be specified.
Marker Select and enter a marker along whose axes the translational velocity vector
components will be specified.
J - O 1031
Modify Bushing
Modify Bushing
Right-click bushing → Modify
Modifies the following for a bushing:
The two bodies to which the forces are applied.
Translational and rotational properties for stiffness, damping, and preload.
Force graphics.
Learn more about Modifying Bushings.
Select to change the position of the force using the Precision Move dialog box.
Modify Comment
Adds notes about the objects in your Model, and for Template-Based products, about entities in your subsystem,
to help you manage and identify them. The types of objects about which you can add comments in Adams
View are listed below. For parts, constraints, and forces, you add comments when you modify the object. For
models, you can add the comments as you create the model, and you can also modify the comments.
J - O 1033
Modify Coupler
Models
Parts
Constraint
Forces
Materials
The comments that you create appear in the following:
Information window
Adams View Log file
Command or dataset files
Modify Coupler
Right-click coupler → Modify
Modifies a coupler allowing you to specify the relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or to
create a three-joint coupler.
Learn about:
Modifying Couplers
Creating Couplers
Modify Extrusion
Right-click an extrusion → Modify
Allows you to control the location and orientation of an Extrusion and allows you to rename the extrusion.
Learn about Extrusion tool.
To edit the locations of the points, select the More button to display the
Location table.
Profile Curve - Enter the object used to define the profile of the extrusion. You
can specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, chain, or outline as the profile
curve. The object should be in the xy plane of the reference marker.
Path Points/ Select either:
Path Curve/
Length along Z Path Points - Enter points used to define the path of the extrusion. The points are
relative to the reference marker. The points define the path along which the
profile curve will be extended.
To edit the locations of the points, select the More button to display the
Location Table.
Path Curve - Enter the object used to define the path of the extrusion. You can
specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, chain, or outline. The object defines
the path along which the profile curve is extended.
Length along Z - Z-axis of the reference marker defining the straight line along
which the profile curve will be extruded. Enter a positive length to extrude along
the +z-axis.
Select to add any comments about the extrusion that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify it.
Modify FEMDATA
or
Produces data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains for input to subsequent finite
element or fatigue life analysis. You use the Solver → Settings → Output → More → Durability Files to
specify the type of file to produce (for more information, see Solver Settings - Output dialog box help and Adams
Durability online help). Adams View will not output to any files unless you specify the format.
J - O 1037
Modify FEMDATA
Loads on Rigid Body/Flexible Body - Outputs all external forces (reaction and
applied forces except gravity) acting on the specified body and inertial forces of the
specified body (angular velocities and accelerations including effects of gravity) as a
function of time. Load data will be output in the simulation set of units.
Modal Deformation - Outputs modal deformations as a function of time of the
specified flexible body. Adams View will only export coordinates of the active modes
in the simulation.
Nodal Deformation - Outputs nodal deformations as a function of time of the
specified flexible body. Adams View writes the deformations in the simulation set of
units.
Strain - Outputs strain information if strain modes are available in the modal
neutral file (MNF) of the specified flexible body. Adams View outputs all six
components of strain (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-
ZX). It outputs strains in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body.
Stress - Outputs stress information if modal stresses are available in the Modal Neutral
File (MNF) of the flexible body. Adams View outputs all six components of stress
(normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-ZX). It outputs stresses
in the simulation set of units in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body.
Strain on FE Part - Outputs strain information of the specified FE Part when an
Adams Durability license is available. Adams Durability outputs all six components
of strain (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-ZX) even
though some of these components may be zero by definition of the nonlinear FE
Part beam formulation. It outputs strains in the body coordinate system of the FE
Part except where specified below.
Stress on FE Part - Outputs stress information of the specified FE Part when an
Adams Durability license is available. Adams Durability outputs all six components
of stress (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-ZX) even
though some of these components may be zero by definition of the nonlinear FE
Part beam formulation. It outputs stress in the body coordinate system of the FE
Part except where specified below.
If you selected Loads on Rigid Body, the following options appear:
R Marker Enter the rigid body marker to be the reference coordinate system to output loads.
Because Adams Solver resolves all loads acting on the rigid body in the coordinate system
of the specified marker, the marker should represent the FEA basic coordinate system of
the part's finite element model (FEM).
1038 Adams View
Modify FEMDATA
Note: When you set the Time options, Adams Durability only checks the time steps
within those specifications for the hot spots.
Von Mises/Max Specify the value of stress/strain in determining hotspots from one of Von Mises, Max
Prin/Min Prin., Min Prin., Max Shear, Normal-X, Normal-Y, Normal-Z, Shear-XY, Shear-YZ,
Prin.,/Max Shear-ZX, or Signed von Mises. For more information, see the FEMDATA statement.
Shear/Normal-
X/Normal-
Y/Normal-
Z/Shear-
XY/Shear-
YZ/Shear-ZX
Radius Enter a radius that defines the spherical extent of each hotspot. A default value of 0.0
(zero) means that all markers on the FE Part will be hotspot candidates.
R Marker Enter a coordinate reference marker in the model that will be used to transform the stress
or strain data. If not specified, the stress or strain will be output in the body coordinate
system of the FE Part (LPRF). This option can be useful when correlating strain gauge
data from a physical test. If the orientation of the strain gauge does not match the FE
Part coordinate system, one can reference a marker whose orientation does match.
1040 Adams View
Modify Flexible Body Connections
From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is the start
of the simulation.
To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search of a peak
load. The default is to output to the end of the simulation.
Note: Adams Solver (FORTRAN) does not support markers offset from
their attachment nodes. Therefore, Adams Flex (FORTRAN)
automatically introduces a massless link between the marker and
the flexible body. Learn more.
Move Node to Marker Select to move the node in the selected row of the Marker and Node table. to the
location of the marker location. The node must be an attachment node. This
option will invoke Adams Flex in the background and generate a new MNF
with the node(s)' positioned edited. This MNF will then be used for the swap.
Note that the modal content of the MNF is not changed by this action. The
modal response of the flex body may be approximate, depending on how
much the attachment node has been moved from its original location. Moving a
node to a marker location removes the need for a rigid offset to be maintained
by Adams Flex between node and marker location during the simulation.
Number of digits Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the
Marker and Node table.
Sort By Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the columns.
For example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most distant from
its selected node.
Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to the
flexible body.
Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the marker
for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the
flexible body.
Marker Location - Marker's current location.
Node ID - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is
transferred to the flexible body. When Adams Flex initially creates the table, it
chooses the closest node. You can change the chosen node using the node id
cell itself.
Interface - An asterisk (*) in this column indicates that the chosen
attachment node is an interface node.
Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment node
relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's
coordinate system. A perfect match is 0.
Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
J - O 1043
Modify Flexible Body Connections
View Parts Only Select to display only parts present in the model.
View Topology Select to display a representation of the flexible body and its connections to
other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.
1044 Adams View
Modify Force
Modify Force
Right-click single-component force → Modify
Modifies the following for a Single-component force:
Force direction, if only one part is affected.
Action body to which the force is applied. If you created the force between two parts, you can also
change the reaction body. You cannot change a force created on one part and ground to a force
created between two parts because the direction methods are not compatible. You’ll have to delete
the force and create it again.
Force magnitude.
Force graphics
The options available in the dialog box change depending on the direction of the force.
Learn more about:
How To create a single-component force:
Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces
Modifying Single-Component Forces
Function text box, select the More button to display the Function Builder.
Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed to a
user-written subroutine and its ID. Entering an ID is optional.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine SFOSUB. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Force Display Set whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or none. By
default, Adams View displays the force graphic on the action body for single-
component forces.
Action Marker
Reaction Part/ Change the reaction body or marker that receives the reaction forces.
Reaction Marker
1046 Adams View
Modify General Force
AZ Torque
XYZ Force/ If you selected Vector Function (X,Y,Z) for Define Using, enter the following
for each component of the force or torque:
AXYZ Torque
Constant force value
Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the XYZ Force / AXYZ Torque text box,
select the More button to display the Function Builder.
Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed
to a user-written subroutine and the ID of the force being modified.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine GFOSUB. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Force Display Set to whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or
none. By default, Adams View displays the force graphic on the action body.
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
For an open curve, Adams View defaults to a segment count that is five times the
number of curve points that you have provided. Specifying fewer segments results in
a coarser curve. For a closed curve, Adams View defaults to a segment count that is
five times the number of points, plus one. In mathematical terms:
5 * ( #pts + 1 )
For both closed and open curves, there are no limits to how many or how few
segments you use (other than hardware limitations), but for every curve there is a
plateau, beyond which increasing the number of segments does not enhance the
graphics of your spline.
Values Enter values for the locations of the points that define the spline. The points are
relative to the reference marker.
You can edit the locations of the points by selecting the More button to display
the Location table. The values cannot be modified if a reference_profile is specified.
Reference Marker Enter the marker that defines the location and orientation of the spline. The marker
acts as a reference coordinate system for the coordinate values used to define the
reference curve points.
Reference Curve Displays the existing data element curve that is used to mathematically define the
spline. When you define the points that make up the spline, Adams View creates a
curve fit through the points. Learn about Data Element Modify Curve dialog box.
Reference Profile Enter an existing Wire Geometry from which the bspline is to be created. Note that
the ref curve and matrix will be automatically generated and hence the corresponding
fields are disabled if a profile is specified.
Reference Matrix Displays a data element matrix that contains all the spline point coordinates. Learn
about Create/Modify Matrix dialog box.
1048 Adams View
Modify Joint
Modify Joint
Right-click idealized or primitive joint → Modify
Changes several basic properties about an idealized or primitive joint, including:
Parts that the joint connects. You can also switch which part moves relative to another part.
What type of joint it is. For example, you can change a revolute joint to a translational joint.
For a screw joint, you can also set the pitch of the threads of the screw.
J - O 1049
Modify Joint
You can only change a simple idealized joint to another type of simple
idealized joint or to a joint primitive.
You cannot change a joint’s type if motion is applied to the joint. In addition,
if a joint has friction and you change the joint type, Adams View returns an
error.
First Body Change the part that moves relative to the second body.
Second Body Change the part that the first body moves relative to.
Force Graphics Select to display force graphics.
Pitch Value For a screw joint, enter its pitch value (translational displacement for every full
rotational cycle).
Impose Motion Select to impose motion on the joint. After selecting, set the translational or rotational
displacement or velocity, and then select OK.
Select to change the position of the joint using the Precision Move dialog box.
Select to apply friction to the joint. See Create/Modify Friction dialog box help.
1050 Adams View
Modify Modal ICs
Multiple clearance analyses may be conducted between the same two bodies by selecting different regions of
a flexible part for each analysis.
Modify Torque
Right-click single-component torque → Modify
Modifies the following for a single-component torque:
Force direction, if only one part is affected.
Action body to which the force is applied.
Force magnitude.
Force graphics.
The options available in the dialog box change depending on the direction of the force.
Learn about:
Single-Component Torque tool
Modifying Single-Component Forces
Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces
J - O 1055
Modify Torque
Modify a Request
Ribbon menu → Design Exploration tab → Instrumentation container → Create a new Request
or
Stiffness and damping values, including specifying splines that defines the relationship of stiffness to
displacement and damping to velocity. Learn about defining Splines.
Preload values.
Learn about:
Translational Spring Damper Tool
Equations Defining the Force of Spring Dampers
No Stiffness/ Stiffness Coefficient and enter a stiffness value for the spring damper.
No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damper.
Spline: F=f(defo)
Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
force to deformation.
Damping Coefficient/ Select one of the following:
No Damping/ Damping Coefficient and enter a viscous damping value for the spring
damper.
Spline: F=f(velo)
No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring.
Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
force to velocity.
Length and Preload:
Preload Enter the preload force for the spring damper. Preload force is the force of the
spring damper in its reference position.
Default Length/ Select either:
Length at Preload Default Length to automatically use the length of the spring damper
when you created it as its reference length.
Length at Preload and enter the reference length of the spring at its
preload position.
Tip: If you set preload to zero, then displacement at preload is the same as
the spring’s free length. If the preload value is non-zero, then the
displacement at preload is not the same as the spring’s free length.
1060 Adams View
Modify a Torsion Spring
Select to change the position of the spring damper using the Precision Move
dialog box.
No Stiffness/ Stiffness Coefficient to enter a stiffness value for the torsion spring.
No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damping force.
Spline: F=f(defo)
Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of spring
force with rotational deformation (radians). Learn about defining Splines.
Damping Coefficient/ Select one of the following:
No Damping/ Damping Coefficient and enter a viscous damping coefficient for the torsion
spring.
Spline: F=f(velo)
No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring force.
Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of spring
torque with angular velocity (radians per second).
Length and Preload:
Preload Enter the preload force for the torsion spring. Preload force is the force of the
torsion spring in its preload position.
Default Angle/ Select one of the following:
Angle at Preload Default Angle to set the rotation angle of the spring when you created it at its
preload position.
Angle at Preload and enter the angle of the spring at its preload position.
Torque Display Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or
none.
Motions
Displays tools for creating motions.
1062 Adams View
Motion Measure
Construction Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change depending on
or Settings the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you create a link, Adams
Container View lets you specify its width, length, and height before creating it. Then, as you
create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move the mouse. You
can also define design variables or expressions for many values.
Motion Measure
Design Exploration tab → Measures container
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
New Color
Postprocessing → Edit → Preferences → Colors Tab → New Color button
Defines a new color name in the Modeling database. After creating the new color, return to the Colors tab in
the PPT Preferences dialog box to define its color values. See PPT Preferences - Colors.
No Help Available
There is currently no help available for this dialog box.
Enter the number of nodes to search for which are closest to the specified marker.
For example, find the 10 nodes closest to a marker.
Radius Available only when By Radius Around Marker is selected.
Object Measure
Design Exploration tab → Measures container
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Allows you to create a global position handle with respect to the which you can translate and rotate selected
objects. When you create a global position handle, Adams View turns off the object position handle for
individual objects.
Learn more about Using Object Position Handle.
Learn more about Using Object Position Handle (Classic Interface).
1068 Adams View
Optimize Constraint Evaluate
or
The location of the origins of the coordinate systems does not matter.
Learn:
About Joint Primitives
Creating Joint Primitives
1070 Adams View
Orientation Measure
Pick Geometry Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid, if it is
Feature displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
Orientation Measure
Ribbon menu → Design Exploration tab → Measures container → Orientation Measure
or
Note: When creating an object or point measure, select the Orientation button from the Object
Measure Dialog Box.
Learn more :
About Measuring Orientation Characteristics
About Simulation Output
J - O 1071
Output (Out) Content
To determine the degrees of freedom for the degree-of-freedom table, Adams Solver
factorizes the constraint matrix. Adams Solver then checks for columns that are
linear combinations of the other columns of the matrix. The components of motion
corresponding to these columns are not constrained. After the matrix has been
factored, Adams Solver selects the components corresponding to the zero pivot
elements as the degrees of freedom. Adams Solver reports these as the independent
coordinates in the degree-of-freedom table.
Equation Map Writes the internal representation of a model in the tabular output file after Adams
Solver reads and checks the input. It maps the equations and variables in the system
and provides their numeric codes.
1072 Adams View
PPT Preferences
P-Z
PPT Preferences
Edit → Preferences
Changes the ways in which Adams PostProcessor works. In addition, you can specify the directory to which
Adams PostProcessor saves files.
Tab Link
Animation PPT Preferences - Animation
Colors PPT Preferences - Colors
Curves PPT Preferences - Curves
Files PPT Preferences - Files
Fonts PPT Preferences - Fonts
Geometry PPT Preferences - Geometry
Orientation PPT Preferences - Orientation
Page PPT Preferences - Page
Plot PPT Preferences - Plot
Units PPT Preferences - Units
Stereo PPT Preferences - Stereo
Restore Select to restore the settings to their defaults
Save Save
Page Layouts
View → Page→ Page Layouts
Allows you to select different page layouts so you can see more than one viewport. Page layout is also referred
to as the viewport layout.
Note: A page that contains a Fast fourier transform (FFT) or Bode plot has two viewports. For an FFT
plot, the top viewport contains the plot with the input data and the bottom viewport
contains the plot with the output from the FFT. For a Bode plot, the top viewport contains
the gain plot and the bottom viewport contains the phase plot.
Selecting a Layout
You can access the page layout palette in two ways. Both methods contain the same set of viewport options.
1074 Adams View
Parallel Axes Joint Tool
To select a layout:
1. Do either of the following:
• On the View menu, point to Page, and then select Page Layouts. The palette appears.
• On the Main toolbar, right-click the Page Layout tool stack . A selection of layouts
appears.
2. Select a layout.
3. If you used the palette, select Close to close the palette. You can leave the palette open and continue
working so you can quickly change the window.
or
The marker of the first part can only rotate about one axis with respect to the coordinate system of the second
part.
Learn:
About Joint Primitives
Creating Joint Primitives
Pick Geometry Feature Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid, if it
is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on
a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
1076 Adams View
Part Create Equation Linear State Equation
or
The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there are
elements in the inputs (U) array.
Y Output Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output variables
for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is optional. If you enter
an outputs (Y) array, you must also specify a C output matrix or a D
feedforward matrix. The corresponding matrix elements must have the
same number of rows as there are elements in the outputs (Y) array. It also
must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state
equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
IC Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial
conditions for the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The IC
array must have the same number of elements as the states (X) array (equal
to the number of rows in the A state matrix). When you do not specify an
IC array, Adams Solver initializes all states to zero.
P - Z 1077
Part Measure
When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a Y
output matrix and an inputs (U) array.
Static Hold Select yes to hold states at the constant value determined during static and
quasi-static simulations; select no if they can change. Learn about
Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.
Part Measure
Design Exploration tab → Measures container
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
or
The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there are
elements in the inputs (U) array.
Y Output Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output variables
for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is optional. If you enter
an outputs (Y) array, you must also specify a C output matrix or a D
feedforward matrix. The corresponding matrix elements must have the
same number of rows as there are elements in the outputs (Y) array. It also
must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state
equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
IC Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial conditions
for the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The IC array must
have the same number of elements as the states (X) array (equal to the
number of rows in the A state matrix). When you do not specify an IC
array, Adams Solver initializes all states to zero.
A State Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the state transition matrix for
the linear system. The matrix must be a square matrix (same number of
rows and columns), and it must have the same number of columns as the
number of rows in the states (X) array.
B Input Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the control matrix for the linear
system. The B input matrix must have the same number of rows as the
A state matrix and the same number of columns as the number of elements
in the inputs (U) array.
When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a Y
output matrix and an inputs (U) array.
Static Hold Select yes if you do not want the linear state equation states to change
during static and quasi-static simulations; select no if they can change. For
more information on holding values constant, see Controlling Equilibrium
Values When Using System Elements..
or
The marker of the first part can rotate about two axes with respect to the second part.
Learn:
About Joint Primitives
Creating Joint Primitives
1082 Adams View
Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool
Pick Geometry Feature Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid, if it
is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on
a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
P - Z 1083
Picture of Marker and Node Table
PID Controller
Ribbon menu → Elements tab → Controls Toolkit container → Standard Control Blocks → New/Modify →
or
The PID controller creates a general proportional-integral-derivative control block. Two inputs are necessary
for this block: the proportional input and the derivative input. You must specify the derivative state for input
to this block that is consistent with the proportional state. For example, if the proportional input is the
measured x position of a part, the derivative input should be the linear velocity in the x direction.
This block automatically creates the integrated state of the proportional input for use as the integrated input.
You can parameterize the P, I, and D gains of this block with an Adams View real design variable to quickly
study the effect of changing control gains.
1084 Adams View
Planar Joint Tool
or
The orientation vector of the planar joint is perpendicular to the joint’s plane of motion. The rotational axis
of the planar joint, which is normal to the joint’s plane of motion, is parallel to the orientation vector.
Learn about:
Creating Idealized Joints
Modeling Two-Dimensional Body Using Planar Option
1086 Adams View
Plane Tool
Plane Tool
or
P - Z 1087
Plate Tool
Notes on Modifying Planes: One hotpoint appears after you draw the plane. It lets you modify the length
and height of the plane. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to
Graphically Modify Geometry.
Plate Tool
or
After you indicate the locations, the Plate tool creates a polygon with the specified number of sides and
extrudes it. By default, it creates the plate with a depth that is 1 and has corners with radii of 1 in current
length units. Before drawing, you can also specify the thickness and radius of the corners of the plate.
Note: The reference marker of the plate determines the plate orientation and defines the plane of
the plate to its x and y axes. Adams View defines the x and y axes of the reference marker
using the working grid, if it is turned on, or the view screen. Adams View defines the plate
vertices as the component of distance from the reference marker to the vertex marker as
defined along the reference marker's y-axis. Therefore, if you choose a plate vertex marker
that is out-of-plane from the xy plane of the reference marker, the vertex marker is not the
actual plate vertex.
If you do not specify a thickness, Adams View creates the plate with a thickness of
1 in current length units.
Radius Select and then enter the radius of the plate corners.
If you do not specify a radius, Adams View creates the plate with corners with radii
of 1 in current length units.
Note: After you draw a plate, a hotpoint appears at the reference marker. It lets you change the
depth of the plate. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using
Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry
You can also use the Geometry Modify Shape Plate dialog box to change the markers used to
define the plate, the thickness of the plate, and the radius of the corners of the plate.
Design Evaluation →
Ribbon menu → Elements tab → System Elements container → Transfer Function → Check Format and
Display Plot
or
(Classic) Build → System Elements → Transfer Function → New or Modify → Check Format and Display Plot
Displays a plot of the transfer function you created using the Create/Modify Transfer Function dialog box. Learn
more about Creating and Modifying Transfer Functions.
P - Z 1091
Plots Transfer Function
1092 Adams View
Plugin Manager
Note: There are several operations displayed in the shortcut menu when you
right-click but many are not supported in the plot display.
Min Set the minimum value for the frequency axis (horizontal). Press Enter to
enable the Redraw button.
Max Set the maximum value for the frequency axis (horizontal). Press Enter to
enable the Redraw button.
Scale Select either:
log - Scales the axis values so that each power of 10 is separated by the
same distance. For example, the values 1, 10, 100, 1000, and 10,000 are
equally spaced.
lin - Displays the axis values linearly, starting at 0.
Redraw Redraws the plot after you change the scale of the plot.
Plugin Manager
Tools → Plugin Manager Shared Dialog Box
Manages the add-on modules or plugins to Adams View, which expand its functionality. The MSC plugins
include Adams Vibration, Adams Controls, and Adams Durability. The Plugin Manager lets you run these
products from within Adams View and set Adams View to load them automatically when you start up. It also
lets you unload them while in your current session of Adams View, and view whether or not there is a license
available to run them.
Learn about Loading and Unloading Plugins.
P - Z 1093
Point-Curve Measure
Point-Curve Measure
Design Exploration tab → Measures container
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
or
the global x-axis, taking time derivatives in the ground reference frame. The default coordinate system is the
ground coordinate system, but you can use any marker as the coordinate system.
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Point Measure
Design Exploration tab → Measures container
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Point Motion
Right-click point motion → Modify
Lets you modify a single Point Motion.
Learn more about:
Tips on Creating Motions
Defining the Motion Magnitude
DOF Removed by Motion
Point Tool
or
Note: You should not attach a part’s center of mass marker to a point, however. If you attach a center
of mass marker, Adams View removes the parameterization whenever it recomputes the
center of a part, unless you defined mass properties for the part.
Learn about:
1100 Adams View
Point-Curve Constraint Tool
Creating Points
Parameterization
Attach Near - Attach other nearby objects to the point. When you change the
location of the points, the other objects locations and orientations update
accordingly.
Note: After creating the point, you can modify its name and set its location using the Table Editor.
Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
or
You can use the point-curve constraint to model a Pin-in-slot mechanism or a Simple Cam Follower mechanism
where a lever arm is articulated by the profile of a revolving cam.
When modeling a pin-in-slot mechanism, the point-curve constraint keeps the center of the pin in the center
of the slot, while allowing it to move freely along the slot and rotate in the slot.
Learn more about:
Point-Curve Constraints
Tips on Creating Higher-Pair Constraints
Curves - Splines, chains, and data-element curves are all considered curves.
Edge - An edge is one of the wireframe outlines drawn on a solid. For
example, you can use a Parasolid object representing a cam that you imported
into Adams View.
Point-to-Point Measure
or
You can:
Polyline Tool
or
Before drawing lines or polylines, you can specify the length of the line or lines to be created so you can
quickly create perfectly sized lines and polylines.
When creating a single line, you can also specify the angle of the line. The angle you specify is relative to the
x-axis of the global coordinate system or the working grid, if it is turned on. When you create line geometry,
you can select to create a new part consisting of the line geometry or add the line geometry to an existing part.
If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed of only wire geometry. You can extrude the lines
into solid geometry that has mass. For more information, see Extruding Construction Geometry Along a Path.
Learn about Creating Lines and Polylines.
Note: Adams View places hotpoints at the endpoint of each line segment after you draw the objects.
The hotpoints let you reshape the lines. If you create a closed polyline, Adams View
maintains it as a closed polyline regardless of how you move the hotpoints. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify
Geometry.
You can also use the line or polyline modify dialog box to more accurately place the points
that make up the line or polyline. You can also read in location points from a file. For more
information, see Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry and Using the Location Table.
Precision Move
Edit → Move
Moves objects either by increments or to precise coordinates.
You can select to move the objects relative to a specified object’s coordinate system, called the reference
coordinate system. You can also select to move objects relative to the screen. In addition, you can use the
Precision Move dialog box to view the coordinates of one object in relation to another.
Learn about Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box (Classic Interface).
Option Description
Rotate Y, X, Z Select each to rotate an object with respect to a body-fixed or reference
coordinate system in incremental amounts specified in the +/- text box. You
specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative to/About the options.
Translate Y, X, Z Select each box to translate an object with respect to a body-fixed or reference
coordinate system in incremental amounts specified in the +/- text box. You
specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative to/About the options.
Relocate the Enter the object or objects to be moved.
P - Z 1105
Precision Move
Option Description
Relative to/About the Select to define the coordinate system whose axes are to be used for defining
rotations and translations. For rotations:
Relative to rotates objects in place (their locations do not change) and their
rotations are with respect to the coordinate system specified in the Relative
to the text box.
About the rotates the objects rotate about the origin of the coordinate
system specified (their locations change) and the rotations are with respect
to the coordinate system specified in the About the text box.
Translations are with respect to the coordinate system defined as either
Relative to the or the About the.
Model/Part/Marker/View By default, the Precision Move dialog box moves the selected objects relative
/Entity/Screen to the default coordinate system. You can specify that Adams View use a
different coordinate system as the reference coordinate system. The rotational
and translational coordinates you enter for the move or the incremental values
you select are with respect to the origin and orientation of this coordinate
system.
Option Description
C1 - C3 Enter the coordinates to which you want to move an object relative to another
object’s coordinate system (the reference coordinate system). You specify the
reference coordinate system using the Relative to the and About the options.
For example, if you want to ensure that two markers, which you want to
connect using an inplane joint, are in the same plane, you can set one marker
as the object to be moved and the other object as the relative to object. You can
then view the rotation coordinates of the first marker to ensure that they are
(0, 0, 0).
Print
Adams PostProcessor → File → Print
You can print pages directly to a printer or store them in a file for printing at a later time.
Notes: Adams PostProcessor only prints the portion of a report or table that fits on the paper.
To print a multi-page report, open the report in a browser and print from there.
To print a multi-page table, export the table in HTML format, open the report in a
browser, and print from there. Pages with only reports and tables on them print
significantly faster than pages with mixed views (for example, plot and report),
depending on the type of printer being used.
P - Z 1107
Print
Printer:
On Linux, in the Print to area, select Printer and enter an operating system
command to execute the print job (for example, lpr -Psp2 or lp -c -Ppd1).
On Windows, select also show Windows print dialog to display the default
Windows printer dialog box from which you can select a printer. The dialog
box appears after you select OK.
File:
In the Print to area, select File and enter the location and name of the file to
which you want to print the page.
Note that if you print more than one page to a file, Adams PostProcessor uses
the page number of each page as the name of the file.
If you selected to print to a file, select the type of file format. You can select
BMP, XPM, JPG, TIFF and PNG.
Note: If you select jpg format, you can set the level of quality.
(A)Paper Size Select the size of paper, or to accept the current default paper for the printer, select
default.
Landscape Select if you want the page to print horizontally.
Portrait Select if you want the page to print vertically.
Closed and Open Select if you want the page to print in closed and open.
If you select Closed and Open, Adams PostProcessor prints all colors in closed and the
background in white even if you are using a color printer.
Selecting closed and open is generally considered more readable for presentations, but
you should use altering line style or line thickness to distinguish between the curves
on the plot.
Color Select if you want to print the plot in color.
If you print a plot in color but send it to a closed-and-open printer, the printer
approximates the colors using grayscale.
Current Page Select to print the page you currently have displayed.
All Pages Select to print all the pages.
Page Range Select to print specific pages and enter the first page and last page.
1108 Adams View
Range Measure
Range Measure
or
Rename
Database Navigator → Rename
Renames any object in the Modeling database.
Learn about Renaming Objects Through the Database Navigator.
P - Z 1109
Rename Dialog Box
Rename Object
Edit → Rename
By default, it displays unused markers for currently displayed model in the graphics
window and model browser.
Delete Clicking "Delete" will delete all the listed unused markers.
Cancel If there are no unused markers in a selected model or if you don’t want to delete the
markers, then click "Cancel" to close the dialog box.
Binary - By default, Adams View saves the results file as a binary file. You
cannot view a binary file nor can you move it to different computer
platforms. It, however, provides greater precision, faster access, and more
compact size than a standard Adams View text file.
ASCII - Standard Adams View text file with no formatting.
XML - XML is a license-free, platform-independent file format used often
for Web applications. The XML format's structured data representation is
an ideal framework for storing Adams information. Because XML is an
ASCII file, you can use it across all platforms and read it in a text editor.
Although the formatting is not optimized for reading in text editors, you
will find it useful to quickly check the progress of a simulation, or
debugging a model. You can tag XML-formatted results for retrieval from
many database or pdm systems. Freely available tools for reading and
writing XML files makes it easy to incorporate Adams results into other
programs.
If you selected XML as the format, the following options are active:
Decimal Places Specify how many digits are written after the decimal point for real numbers. The
default value is 17 decimal places (full precision for recovery of double-precision
numbers).
Round Off Set to On to turn on the roundoff feature for real numbers (the default is disabled).
The Significant digits option controls the actual numbers of digits retained during
rounding off.
Scientific Notation Specify the boundaries at which the format for real numbers switches from a fixed
point format to scientific notation. The values are exponents for the base ten. The
default values are -4 and 5, meaning that any number less than or equal to 1.0E-04
or greater than or equal to 1.0E+05 will be written in scientific notation.
1112 Adams View
Revolute Joint Tool
-------------------------------------
xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<Results>
< Analysis>
< ModelInfo title="model_1" />
< Units angle="deg" length="mm" mass="kg" time="sec"
/>
...
Significant digits Specify how many significant figures of a real number are retained during round off
(when round off is enabled). The default is to use ten significant figures. This
number is distinct from the number of places actually printed for a real number,
which the Decimal Places option controls. Significant Figures includes digits to the
left and right of the decimal point.
Trailing Zeros Set to On to specify that trailing zeros are printed for real numbers. The default is
not to print trailing zeros. When enabled, all the digits after the decimal point will
be printed, whether they are zero or not. When disabled, any zeros at the end of the
fractional part of the number will be dropped, leaving the last digit as a non-zero
digit.
Zero Threshold Enter the zero threshold value for numbers being written to an output file. If a
number has an absolute value smaller than the zero threshold value, then it will be
written out as zero. This value is independent of units.
or
The orientation of the revolute joint defines the direction of the axis about which the joint’s parts can rotate
with respect to each other. The rotational axis of the revolute joint is parallel to the orientation vector and
passes through the location.
Learn about:
Creating Idealized Joints
Adding Friction to Idealized Joints
1114 Adams View
Revolute Joint Tool
Revolution Tool
or
You can create an open or closed revolution. If you create a closed revolution, the Revolution tool closes the
profile by drawing a line segment between the profile’s first and last points and creates a solid revolution from
this profile. If you leave the revolution open, the Revolution tool creates a skin that has no mass properties.
You can also select to create the revolution using the Non-analytical Method or Analytical Method.
Learn about Creating a Revolution.
1116 Adams View
Revolution Tool
Points to select the locations on the screen that define the profile.
Curve to select the curve to be used to define the profile.
Closed Select to create a closed revolution. (Available only when you set Create by
Picking to Points.)
Analytical Select to create a revolution using the analytical method. Clear to use the non-
analytical method
Notes: After you draw a revolution, hotpoints appear. If you used the non-analytical method to
create the revolution, the hotpoints appear at the vertexes of the profile. If you used the
analytical method, hotpoints appear at points along the curves that define the revolution.
The hotpoints let you resize and reshape the revolution. For more information on modifying
geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
You can also use the revolution modify dialog box to more accurately place the points that
make up the profile and read in location points from a file. For more information, see Using
Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry and Using the Location Table.
P - Z 1117
Rotational Motion Tool
Ribbon menu → Motions tab → Joints Motions container → Rotational Joint Motion Tool
or
Note: There is no restriction on the size of the binary file (earlier the size was restricted to 2GB).
While there is no theoretical limit to .bin file size, practically speaking, the size of a .bin file
will be limited to the amount of RAM available to the Adams session.
To save the document in a different directory, right-click the File Name text box, select
Browse, and then select the desired directory.
Save Database
File → Save Database
Alerts you that Adams View is saving the current Modeling database as an Adams View binary file and asks you
if you want to create a backup file. To save the model data in another format, see the File Export dialog box.
Learn about Modeling Database.
Save Database As
File → Save Database As
Saves the current Modeling database to a binary file with a new name. This lets you keep several versions of your
database under different names and reduces the risk of losing your work if you inadvertently change or delete
your model. Saving your modeling database saves all modeling information, including any customization
changes you made.
To save the model data in another format, export the data as explained Exchanging Data in Adams. To save your
preferences, see Saving and Restoring Settings.
If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams View, enter the path name in the File Name text box.
Design Evaluation →
Allows you to save a single set of results for a parametric analysis.
Learn about Saving Results.
Saves the model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new name so you can use it as your
new design configuration.
Learn about Saving a Simulation Frame as New Model.
1120 Adams View
Save Model at Simulation State
Saves the model at a simulated state into the Modeling database under a new name so you can use it as your
new design configuration with states.
Learn about Saving a Simulation State as New Model.
Note: By default, the results of a simulation are only saved to the modeling database, not to external
Adams Solver analysis files. To save the results to external Adams Solver analysis files, set the
simulation output before you run the simulation, as explained in Setting Simulation Controls. To
export the results to analysis files, see Export - Adams Solver Analysis Files.
P - Z 1121
Screw Joint Tool
or
The screw joint does not require that the two parts remain parallel with respect to the axis of rotation and
translation. However, the z-axis of the coordinate system marker on the first part and the z-axis of the
coordinate system marker on the second part must always be parallel and co-directed. Although the screw
joint does not enforce this parallelism, the chain of parts and joints that connects the two markers should.
1122 Adams View
Screw Joint Tool
After you create a screw joint, you need to specify the pitch value. The pitch value is the distance from one
peak on a thread of the screw to the next thread. It defines the amount of translational displacement of the
first part for every rotation of the second part about the axis of rotation.
By default, Adams View sets the pitch value to 1. The pitch value is in length units. A positive pitch creates
a right-hand thread, and a negative pitch creates a left-hand thread.
Learn about Creating Idealized Joints.
Scripted Simulation
Icon Description
Sets your model back to its initial design configuration so you can modify your
model or perform another simulation starting at time 0.
You do not have to set the model back to its design configuration to continue
simulating. You can pick up from the last frame of your animation and
continue.
How Adams View replays your simulation depends on whether or not you
have finished the simulation and reset the model back to its initial design
configuration.
If you have run a simulation, or part of a simulation, but not set the model
back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the animation,
Adams View animates the model up to the last simulation step and leaves
your model there.
If you reset your model back to its initial configuration, when you select to
replay the animation, Adams View automatically sets the model back to
the initial design configuration when the animation is complete.
Model Verify Tool
Icon Description
Save/Delete Simulation Results
Left-click to display the Save Run Results dialog box so you can save the
simulation results.
Right-click to select a set of simulation results to delete.
Save Simulated Position
Displays the Save Model at Simulation Position dialog box so you can save the
model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new name.
Save Model at Simulation States
Displays the Save Model at Simulation State dialog box so you can save the model
at a simulated state into the Modeling database under a new name so you can use
it as your new design configuration with states.
Displays the Animation Controls dialog box.
Temporary Settings Specify one or more Temporary Settings Files (.tsf ) files.
Property values contained in the file(s) will be applied before starting the
simulation and then reverted to their original values immediately after the
simulation finishes, even if the simulation fails to complete. Note that this
field is only available if the Temporary Settings capability has been enabled
from the AView-Preferences section of the Adams Registry Editor.
Simulation Settings Displays the Solver Settings dialog box, letting you set how you want the
Simulation performed.
or
The second-order filter block creates a second-order filter by specifying the undamped natural frequency and
the damping ratio. You can parameterize the undamped natural frequency or damping ratio constant with an
Adams View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the frequency or damping ratio of the
associated block.
Select List
Database Navigator → Select List
Allows you to view objects that you've selected. You can also add and remove objects from the select list.
Learn about:
Managing the Select List
Showing, Hiding, and Selecting Objects in the Database Navigator
Note: Your printer may not support all of these printer fonts.
To browse for a font, right-click the text box, point to Browse, and then select a font.
Postscript Font Select the font you want to use to print the text.
OFF: It will only create a GFORCE on the selected marker, and that marker’s
parent part will be the action part of the created GFORCE.
ON: It will create a new rigid part at the selected Marker location which will be
Action part of the GFORCE.
By Default it is Off
A good rule of thumb is set this ON when the mass and inertia of the Marc model
are not negligible compared to the rest if the Adams model.
Mass of the rigid part is set to 1 Kg by default and can be adjusted manually like
any other part in Adams.
Flexbody If the marker selected for “Location (Marker)” belongs to a flexible body, then this
field will display the name of that parent flexible body.
Attach ON: When “With Rigid Part” is checked, a fixed joint will be created between the
rigid part and the flexible body.
OFF: No fixed joint will be created between the rigid part and flexible body.
By Default it is OFF
MSC CoSim Select the product with which you want to co-simulate: scFLOW or Marc.
Product
If scFLOW is selected then the following settings are enabled (and automatically written into an Adams
Array known as the "cosim_protocol_array"):
Job ID Specify the scFLOW Job ID to which this GFORCE will correspond. Setting this
field is useful when co-simulating between one Adams process (from this one
Adams model) and multiple scFLOW processes and, therefore, one wants to
instruct MSC CoSim which GFORCEs in the model correspond to interaction
with which scFLOW process.
Default =1.
1130 Adams View
Setup for MSC CoSim
Also, if this number is set to 0, the application software stops when it detects the
termination of the communication partner software. If this number is greater than
zero, an application software moves forward till the end of its process using the
extrapolated data sent from the MSC CoSim process even if the communication
partner has terminated.
As a practical example, let us consider the co-simulation between Adams and Marc.
In most of the cases, the time information at the beginning of co-simulation in both
application software are zero. If the user wants Adams to move forward before Marc
does, the user should define the execution mode number of Adams higher than
Marc's execution mode number. If the execution numbers in both application
software are identical, the application software that has bigger time step moves
forward first. The table below illustrates a few cases:
Execution Mode number Result
Adams Marc
5 4 Adams will start first.
0 1 Adams will stop the moment Marc stops.
1 2 Adams will NOT stop even if Marc stops. Adams
will continue using the extrapolated data.
2 2 The process with the bigger time step will start first.
Interpolation Mode MSC CoSim supports different interpolation algorithms for forces and
displacements.
Default: Quadratic
P - Z 1131
Simulation Controls
Simulation Controls
Simulation tab → Simulate container → Interactive/Scripted
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
or
You cannot use the line-of-sight method if the two points that define the force will become coincident during
a simulation because the force direction becomes undefined. When running a simulation, Adams Solver
warns you when the points become nearly coincident. The following shows an example of a warning:
Caution: The direction cosines for SFORCE model_1.FORCE_1 are invalid. This is usually caused
by a (nearly) zero length SFORCE or SPRINGDAMPER.
You can ignore the warning only if the computed force is zero when the points are coincident (for example,
when you are using a BISTOP function that is inactive when its markers are coincident). Otherwise, having
coincident points is a modeling error with unpredictable results.
Learn more about:
Single-Component Forces
1134 Adams View
Single-Component Force tool
Space Fixed
Body Moving
Two Bodies
Learn about Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces.
Construction Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:
Constant torque - Lets you enter a constant torque value or let Adams
View use a default value.
Spring-Damper - Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
lets Adams View create a function expression for damping and stiffness based
on the coefficient values. (Not available when you are using the Main toolbox
to access the force tool.)
Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you, which, in effect,
creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force, you modify
it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a User-written
subroutine that is linked to Adams View. You can also specify an alternative
library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about specifying routines
with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Torque, the following option appears:
Force Value Enter a constant torque value.
If you selected Spring-Damper, the following two options appear:
Translational K Enter the stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the damping coefficients.
P - Z 1135
Single-Component Torque tool
Ribbon menu → Forces tab → Applied Forces container → Single-Component Torque Tool
or
Space Fixed
Body Moving
Two Bodies
Learn about Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces.
Construction Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:
Constant torque - Lets you enter a constant torque value or let Adams
View use a default value.
Spring-Damper - Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
lets Adams View create a function expression for damping and stiffness based
on the coefficient values. (Not available when you are using the Main toolbox
to access the force tool.)
Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you, which, in effect,
creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force, you modify
it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a User-written
subroutine that is linked to Adams View. You can also specify an alternative
library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about specifying routines
with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Torque, the following option appears:
Force Value Enter a constant torque value.
If you selected Spring-Damper, the following two options appear:
Translational K Enter the stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the damping coefficients.
P - Z 1137
Single Point Motion Tool
Ribbon menu → Motions tab → General Motions container → Single Point Motion Tool
or
Ribbon menu → Forces tab → Applied Forces container → Six-Component General Tool
or
1 Location
2 Bodies - 1 Location
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:
Constant - Lets you enter a constant force and torque values or lets Adams
View use a default value.
Bushing Like- Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and lets
Adams View create a function expression for damping and stiffness based
on the coefficient values.
Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you, which, in effect,
creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force, you modify
it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a User-written subroutine
that is linked to Adams View. You can also specify an alternative library
and name for the user subroutine. Learn about specifying routines with
ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Force, the following options appears:
Force and Torque Enter a constant force value.
If you selected Bushing Like, the following options appear:
K and KT Enter the stiffness coefficients.
C and CT Enter the damping coefficients.
Sizes
Dialog-Box Builder → Preferences → Sizes
Displays the default size of a new interface object if you create it by clicking in the new dialog box or container.
1140 Adams View
Snap Grid
It does not display the size for the objects you created and modified by dragging the item to a desired size.
Learn more about Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder.
Snap Grid
Dialog Box-Builder →Preferences → Snap Grid
Allows you to restrict the possible positions and sizes of your interface objects, similar to the Working grid in the
modeling window.
When you drag an item with the mouse to move or resize it, the mouse position will snap to the nearest grid
point. Because the snap grid points are not visible, and the default grid is very fine (2 pixel distance) it is
generally not very noticeable.
You can turn this option on or off in the Option menu in the Dialog-Box Builder.
Solver Settings
Settings → Solver → Dynamics/Kinematics/Equilibrium/Initial
Conditions/Executable/Display/Output/Optimizer/Debugging
Displays options for setting the Simulation depending on the command you selected:
Dynamics
Kinematics
Equillibrium
Initial Conditions
Executable
Display
Output
Pattern for Jacobian
P - Z 1141
Solver Settings - Advanced
Optimizer
Debugging
Contacts
Linear Solver
Flexible Bodies
Advanced
Parasolids - Specifies that the Parasolid geometry library to be used for three-
dimensional contact determination. Adams Solver (FORTRAN) supports
Parasolid version 33.1.176.
Default_Library - Specifies that the default geometry library to be used for
three-dimensional contact determination. The default library is based on
RAPID, a polygon-based interference detection package developed at the
University of North Carolina. Currently, Adams Solver supports RAPID version
2.01.
For many models, the Default Library can substantially reduce simulation time.
Because it is polygon-based, however, it is not always as accurate as the Parasolids
geometry engine. Parasolids is an exact boundary-representation geometric
modeler, which makes it highly accurate, but not as fast as a polygon-based engine.
For these reasons, you can switch from one to the other depending on your needs.
Faceting Tolerances Specify the faceting tolerances when you select the Default_Library as the geometry
library (see above). Faceting is the process of approximating the surface of an object
by a mesh of triangles. All polygon-based geometry engines used faceted
representations of surfaces.
The default value Faceting Tolerances is 300.0028. Increasing this value will result
in a finer mesh of triangles, which gives a more accurate representation of surfaces
which are curved. Increasing the tolerance, however, also increases the memory
requirements of the geometry engine and adds to the computational overhead,
which makes it run slower. Setting the faceting tolerance to values greater than 1000
is not recommended. Values smaller than 300.0028 will give negligible
performance improvements. The faceting tolerance has no effect on inherently
polygonal surfaces such as boxes.
Note: The debugging tools from this dialog function only when using the internal solver. For
external and standalone solver runs please consider Debugging Your Model Using Eprint.
Error - Track objects with the largest equation residual error. This number is
an indicator of how far Adams Solver is from a solution. It should decrease
with every iteration.
Force - Track objects generating the greatest force. Includes forces and
constraints.
Change - Track variables with the most change.
Acceleration - Track objects experiencing the greatest acceleration. Includes
only parts.
1144 Adams View
Solver Settings - Display
Never - No updates. Use this option only when you are sure that your
simulation will run to completion without difficulty, and you want to
maximize the efficiency of the simulation. (You can also set this option
directly from the Interactive Simulation Palette and Container when Running an
Interactive Simulation.)
At Simulation - Update your model display only at the end of the
simulation.
At Output Step - Update your model display at every output time step that
you specified when you submitted your simulation and omit any contact
steps. Because it does not display contact steps, your simulation time may
improve because the graphical processing operations will not be burdened
with intermediate contact events.
At Contact/Output Step - Update the model display at each output time step
and contact step. This is the default.
At Integration Step - An update of your model display at every integration
time step that Adams Solver requires to provide a solution to your specified
level of accuracy. This option only applies to dynamic simulations since they
are the only type requiring numerical integration. It is helpful for debugging
purposes but can lead to significantly longer simulation times. For more
information, see Solver Settings - Dynamics.
At Iteration - Update your model display at every iteration. This option is
most useful when debugging static simulations because they are purely
iterative in nature since there is no integration required. This option is also
available for dynamic simulations, in which case Adams View displays the
model at every corrector step associated with each predictor step.
Using the At Every Iteration option with dynamic simulations can result in
significantly longer simulation times.
Icons To see all your model icons as your model is updated, set to On. Keeping your icons
on as your model is updated can help you understand how model objects behave,
especially constraints and forces. By default, icons are not visible during animations.
1146 Adams View
Solver Settings - Dynamics
tool to display this table at any time, write it to a file, and control its format
(see Generating a Table).
Solver can use several numerical algorithms to calculate an approximate solution to the equations of motion
it formulates for your mechanical system.
Learn more About Dynamic Simulations.
I3
SI2
SI1 - only available in Adams Solver (FORTRAN)
See Equation Formulation Comparison and the INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams Solver
online help, for more on the integrators.
Note: Unknown appears if your model uses an integration method that is not used
or no longer supported. If you try to select Unknown, Adams View defaults to
I3.
1148 Adams View
Solver Settings - Dynamics
Original - Specifies that the corrector available in the previous releases of Adams
Solver be used. This is the default. This implementation of the corrector
requires that at convergence, the error in all solution variables be less than the
corrector error tolerance. Note that sometimes when achieving convergence
becomes difficult during a simulation, Adams Solver will switch to the Modified
corrector and mention this in the message file (.msg).
Modified - Specifies that a modified corrector is to be used. This
implementation of the corrector requires that at convergence, the error in only
those variables for which integration error is being monitored, be less than the
corrector error tolerance. This is a slightly looser definition of convergence, and
you should use proper care when using this. The modified corrector is helpful
for models containing discontinuities in the forcing functions. Problems with
contacts belong in this category.
Original (Constant) - Specifies that during the simulation Adams Solver cannot
switch from the original corrector to the modified corrector.
For additional information, see Extended Definition in the INTEGRATOR statement in the
Adams Solver online help.
Error Specify the relative and absolute local integration error tolerances that the integrator
must satisfy at each step. For BDF, HHT, and Newmark integrators, Adams Solver
monitors the integration errors in the displacement and state variables that the other
differential equations (differential equations, linear state equations, general state
equations, and transfer functions) define. ABAM, SI1, and SI2 formulations also
monitor errors in velocity variables. The larger the error, the greater the error per
integration step in your solution.
Note that the value for error is units-sensitive. For example, if a system is modeled in
mm-kg-s units, the units of length must be in mm. Assuming that all the translational
states are larger than 1 mm, setting ERROR=1E-3 implies that the integrator monitors
all changes of the order of 1 micron.
When setting the Interpolate option, the integration step size is limited to the value that is
specified for Hmax. If Hmax is not defined, no limit is placed on the integration step
size. If you do not set the Interpolate option, the maximum step size is limited to the
output step.
Note: In the dialog box, click More to see Interpolate, Hinit, and Hmin options.
More Click to set more advanced options.
Hmin Specify the minimum time step that the integrator is allowed to take.
Default is 1.0E-6*HMAX for GSTIFF and WSTIFF integrators, and machine precision
for ABAM, SI1, and SI2 formulations and HHT and Newmark integrators.
When setting a value for Adaptivity, begin with a small number, such as 1E-8. Note that
this relaxes the tolerance of the corrector, which can introduce additional error into the
dynamic solution. The corrector tolerance must be at least a factor of 10 stricter than the
integration tolerance. The ratio advocated in theoretical literature ranges from .1 to .001
and is a function of the integrator order and step size. The ratio that Adams Solver uses
varies with the integrator chosen, but is within the range specified above. If you use an
Adaptivity value to relax the corrector tolerances, be sure to validate your results by
running another simulation using a different integration error tolerance.
The Adaptivity value affects only the GSTIFF, WSTIFF, and Constant BDF integrators.
For problems involving discontinuities, such as contacts, setting Kmax to 2 can improve
the speed of the solution. However, we do not recommend that you set the Kmax option
unless you are a very experienced user. Any modification can adversely affect the
integrator’s accuracy and robustness.
We recommend that you do not set Maxit larger than 10. This is because round-off
errors start becoming large when a large number of iterations are taken. This can cause
an error in the solution.
The scale applies to only WSTIFF and ABAM. It is does not apply to GSTIFF and
Constant BDF. The use of scale factors is not supported in Adams Solver (C++).
Beta One of the two defining coefficients associated with the Newmark method. Learn more
about the Newmark integrator with INTEGRATOR statement help.
Range is defined in conjunction with Gamma. Together they must satisfy the stability
condition.
Gamma One of the two (together with Beta) defining coefficients associated with the Newmark
method.
Range is defined in conjunction with Beta. Together they must satisfy the stability
condition.
Learn more about the Fixed Step Integrator Option in the INTEGRATOR statement help.
Hratio Specify the number of times the step size goes into the output sampling rate (that is,
hratio=dtout/h) for the GSTIFF and HHT method. Hratio is relevant if fixed_iterations
is specified.
Default value is 1.
Learn more about the Fixed Step Integrator Option in the INTEGRATOR statement help.
Max Error Specifies the amount of error above which the user would like Adams Solver to stop
trying to solve the problem for the GSTIFF and HHT method. Value is positive real and
it is relevant if fixed_iterations is specified.
Learn more about the Fixed Step Integrator Option in the INTEGRATOR statement help.
The default is 1.0E-06 and the range is 0.0 ≤ atol < 1.0
1156 Adams View
Solver Settings - Equilibrium
For all solvers, except ORIGINAL and ORIGINAL+Krylov, the tolerance is defined
as : TOL=ATOL+||xIC||*RTOL.
The default is 0.0 and the range is 0.0 ≤ rtol < 1.0 .
Maxitl Specifies the maximum number of allowed inner loops in all the solvers, except
ORIGINAL, ORIGINAL+Krylov and ORIGINAL+UMF. For Hooke-Jeeves
method, allowed budget of function evaluations is set to MAXITL*N, where N is the
size of the problem (number of unknowns).
The default is 0.9 and the range is 0.0 ≤ etamax < 1.0 .
If you selected Aggressive or All, along with the above options (i.e Atol, Rtol, Maxitl and Etamax) following
additional options will also be available:
Eta Specify the initial residual tolerance for the linear Krylov Solver for Tensor_Krylov
method. The Tensor-Krylov ETA parameter is maintained adaptively by the Krylov
algorithm but ETA is the indicated starting value, while ETAMAX is the maximum
threshold for ETA.
Default: 1.0e-4
Range: 0.0 < ETA < 1.0
Specify the dimensionless radius of the trust-region for Trust-region method. The
smaller the value, the more the refinement of Trust-region solution (hence more
work).
The default is 1.0E-02 and the range is Kinetic Energy Error > 0.
Skin - Adams Solver C++ will check the deformation of all the nodes on the
skin to see whether they exceed the linear limit. To use this option, MNF_FILE
or DB_FILE need to be specified in FLEX_BODY statement.
Selnod - Adams Solver C++ will only check the nodes specified in SELNOD
section in MTX file.
None
The linear limit is defined as 10% of the characteristic length of the flexible body.
You can use CHAR_LEN in FLEX_BODY statement to specify the characteristic
length. If CHAR_LEN is not specified, Adams Solver C++ will calculate the
characteristic length using MNF or MD DB if MNF_FILE or DB_FILE is
specified. Otherwise, Adams Solver C++ issues a warning.
Limit Action Select the action to be performed when flexible body exceeds its linear limit.
Internal - Run Adams Solver from within Adams View and animate the
results as they are calculated, which is the default
External - Perform a Simulation with Adams Solver while in Adams View, but
without seeing the model update on your screen during the simulation.
Adams View automatically plays an animation of the simulation when the
simulation is complete.
Write Files Only - Instruct Adams View to write out the files that are needed
to run a simulation using Adams Solver from outside of Adams View. The
files include the:
• Dataset (.adm) file
• Command (.acf) file, which contains the commands necessary to run the
desired simulation.
If you select Internal, you can perform either an Interactive Simulation or a Scripted
simulation. If you select External or Write Files Only, you can only perform a scripted
simulation. Adams View issues an error if you try to perform an interactive simulation
after choosing either of these options.
If you selected Internal or External, you can set the following options:
Solver Library Set it to use the standard Adams Solver executable (leave it blank) or a user-defined
or customized Adams Solver library. A customized Adams Solver library is required if
you used subroutines to define any objects in your model, such as motions or forces.
For more information, see the following:
If you set Hold License to Yes, then Adams View checks out the necessary
licenses when you perform a model verify operation (because of the degrees
of freedom calculation, which uses Adams Solver) or any type of simulation
using the internal Adams Solver. It only releases the licenses when you exit
Adams View or when you run a simulation using the external Adams Solver.
If you set Hold License to No, Adams View releases all Adams Solver licenses
(static, kinematic, and dynamic) in these cases:
• You run a simulation using the external Adams Solver (as before).
• After a model verify operation.
• When you reset after a single simulation using the internal Adams
Solver.
• After a parametric analysis (licenses are held throughout the parametric
analysis)
More Select to display options for setting the remote computer on which to run Adams
Solver.
P - Z 1161
Solver Settings - Executable
Specify the number of parallel threads that Adams Solver (C++) uses when
performing the simulation. The number of threads, n, must be an integer in the range
of 1 to 128. The default value is 1. This value will be applied even if the field is left
blank. Also, this field will not reset to its default value of 1 when one clicks the
Defaults button. By executing multiple threads in parallel across multiple processors,
Adams Solver (C++) can reduce the walltime required for a simulation.
Typically, the optimal number of threads is between N and 2N, where N is the
number of processors (including virtual processors in the case of Pentium processors
with HyperThreading enabled, refer below note for more information).
The default is 1.0E10 (no limit) and the range is Tlimit > 0.
P - Z 1163
Solver Settings - Kinematic
The default is 1.0E10 (no limit) and the range is Tlimit > 0.
Alimit Specifies the maximum angular increment Adams Solver is to allow per iteration. The
default units for Alimit are radians. To specify Alimit in degrees, add a D after the
value.
If the solver preference is C++ then solver type should be Auto and UMF.
If the solver preference is FORTRAN then solver type should be Harwell and
Calahan.
Stability The default is 1.0E-02 and the range is Stability ≥0
http://www.vrand.com/
http://www.vrand.com/products/dot-optimization/
Like other Adams Solver tolerances, you may need to experiment with this tolerance
to find the right value for your application. Display the objective versus iteration Strip
chart. (See Solver Settings - Display) If the optimizer quits even though the last iteration
made noticeable progress, try reducing the tolerance. If the optimizer continues
iterating even after the objective has stopped changing very much, make the tolerance
larger.
Max. Iterations Set how many iterations the optimization algorithm should take before it admits
failure. Note that a single iteration can have an arbitrarily large number of analysis
runs.
Rescale Enter the number of iterations after which the design variable values are rescaled. If
you set the value to -1, scaling is turned off.
P - Z 1167
Solver Settings - Optimizations
Smaller increments may give more accurate approximations of the gradient, but are
also more susceptible to random variations from run to run. Larger increments help
minimize the effects of variations, but give less accurate gradients.
Debug Set to display messages from the optimizer. Turning on debugging output sends
copious optimizer diagnostics to the window that launched Adams View. Keep an eye
on that window anyway, as some important warnings might be written there. The
debugging output shows you the data the optimizer is receiving from Adams View,
among other things. If the optimizer is behaving erratically, this may help you
determine the source of the problem.
User Adams View passes the user parameters to a user-written optimization algorithm.
Realizing that there may be parameter information that is not conveyed through the
existing parameter set, this parameter was added to allow you to pass any real numeric
data to your algorithm.
Min. Converged The number of consecutive iterations for which the absolute or relative convergence
criteria must be met to indicate convergence in the DOT Sequential Linear
Programming method.
1168 Adams View
Solver Settings - Output
Files
Database Storage
Results (.res) Options
Results (.res) Content
Output (Out) Content
Message (.msg) Content
Durability Files - For more information, see Adams Durability online help.
RPC File(s) - turn On or Off the output of request data to RPC III file
format
DAC Files - turn On or Off the output of request data to DAC file format
Component Loads - Specify the output format of rigid/flex body loads. Valid
options are:
• None - disable the output of component load FEMDATA
• NASTRAN
• ABAQUS
• ANSYS
• MARC
• DAC
• RPC3
Modal Deformation - Specify the output format of modal deformation states
of flex body. Valid options are:
• None - disable the output of modal deformation FEMDATA
• Generic - output modal deformations to asci text file format
• ANSYS
• NASTRAN - Nastran INPUT2 binary format
• PUNCH - Nastran INPUT2 asci format
• DAC
• RPC3
• FEMFAT
1170 Adams View
Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian
Solver is to evaluate the Jacobian at the jth iteration. If necessary, Adams Solver repeats the pattern of
evaluations until it reaches the maximum number of iterations (set by the option Amaxit or Maxit).
The default setting for Pattern varies base on the choice of integrator:
Sorting Settings
Tools → Table Editor → Sorting
Allows you to sort the type of objects and category information after you have set it up in the Filter menu of
the Table Editor.
You can sort the information by object name or by a particular column. You can set the type of sorting. You
can select:
Alphanumeric sorting - Sorts the information so that alphabetic characters are first followed by
numeric characters
Numeric sorting - Sorts objects based on their numeric values. It sorts any alphanumeric characters
as zeros.
1172 Adams View
Sphere Tool
Note: When you sort the Table Editor, Adams View sets the values displayed in cells back to those
stored in the Modeling database. Therefore, you lose any changes you made to cells and did not
apply to your modeling database.
Sphere Tool
or
Note: After you draw the sphere, three hotpoints appear on it that let you reshape the radii of the
sphere. For example, you can elongate the sphere into an ellipsoidal shape. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify
Geometry.
1174 Adams View
Spherical Joint Tool
or
Learn about:
Creating Idealized Joints
Adding Friction to Idealized Joints
P - Z 1175
Spherical Joint Tool
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
and have Adams View determine the two parts that should be
2 Bodies - 2 Locations connected. Adams View selects the parts closest to the joint location.
If there is only one part near the joint, Adams View connects the joint
to that part and ground.
2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more
on exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see About Connecting Constraints to
Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:
Pick Geometry Feature Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
First Body/Second Body (only Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
appears if you select to
explicitly define the bodies Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
using the options 2 Bodies - 1 Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach
Location or 2 Bodies - 2 the joint to a curve, Adams View creates a curve marker, and the joint
Locations explained above) follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with
Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is
only available with Adams Solver (C++). Learn about switching solvers.
1176 Adams View
Spline Tool
Spline Tool
or
Note: You can extrude a closed spline into solid geometry that has mass. For
more information, see the Extrusion Tool.
Create by Picking Select:
Points to select the locations on the screen where you want the spline to
pass through. You must specify at least eight locations for a closed spline
and four locations for an open spline.
Curve to select the curve to define the spline.
Edge to select the edge to define the edge.
If you selected Curve or Edge for Create by Picking, you have one additional option:
Spread Points Set how many points you want used to define the curve or clear the selection and
let Adams View calculate the number of points needed.
Note: If you are using this tool from the Main toolbox, the Spread Points text box
is called # of Points.
Notes: Adams View places hotpoints at locations on the spline as you draw it. The hotpoints let you
reshape the spline. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using
Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
You can also modify the spline by editing the point locations directly or by changing the
curve and matrix data elements that Adams View creates to support the spline. In addition,
you can change the number of segments that Adams View creates through the spline. For
more information on modifying splines, see Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry.
1178 Adams View
Split Tool
Split Tool
or
Stereo Viewing
Settings → Stereo Viewing
Sets options for using Adams View with stereo viewing. Stereo viewing is available on all Linux platforms but
not Windows.
Before running Adams View in stereo-viewing mode, you need to set the MDI_STEREO environment
variable MDI_STEREO (setenv MDI_STEREO 1). Learn more about setting Adams View Environment
Variables.
P - Z 1179
Stereo Viewing
Stereo viewing is only available when running Native OpenGL graphics with the
OpenGL_Software_Assisted registry setting set to disabled. You use the Registry Editor.
1. From the Adams Toolbar, right-click the Toolbar tool , and then select Registry Editor.
The Registry Editor appears.
2. Select AView → Preferences → Graphics → OpenGL_Software_Assisted.
Ribbon menu Elements tab → Controls Toolkit → Standard Control Blocks → New/Modify →
or
Summing junction blocks add or subtract the outputs from other standard blocks. You can select whether the
positive or negative value of an input to a summing junction is used by single-clicking on the +/- sign button.
A summing junction block takes any valid controls block output as its input.
P - Z 1181
Swap a flexible body for an external system
Alignment
Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding axis:
X axis - Rotate external system 180° about its largest principal inertia
direction.
Y axis - Rotate external system 180° about its second largest principal
inertia direction.
Z axis - Rotate external system 180° about its smallest principal inertia
direction.
View parts only Select to display only the flexible body and its replacement external system.
View topology Select to display a flexible representation of the body and its connections to other
parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.
Copy original part Leave a copy of the flexible body in the modeling database. This is helpful if you
want to reactivate the flexible body.
1184 Adams View
Swap a flexible body for an external system
Connections
For the
option: Do the following:
Update Table Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you have made.
Reset Table Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.
Node Finder Select to display the Node Finder Dialog Box and search for nodes.
Node Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of the Marker
ID/Apply and Node table with the node ID you entered.
Move to node Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table to the location of
the specified node.
Preserve Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and
expression Node table. The parameterization would be specified through Adams View expressions. This
will keep the marker at its parameterized position.
Preserve Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table.
location If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node, Adams Flex preserves the offset.
This is helpful if you have defined a joint location on the marker. It keeps the joint from
breaking.
Note: Adams Solver (FORTRAN) does not support markers offset from their
attachment nodes. Therefore, Adams Flex (FORTRAN) automatically
introduces a massless link between the marker and the flexible body. Learn more.
P - Z 1185
Swap a flexible body for an external system
For the
option: Do the following:
Number of Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the Marker and Node
digits table.
Sort by Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the columns. For
example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most distant from its selected
node.
For the
option: Do the following:
Marker and Displays the markers on the existing body and the node to which the marker will be
Node Table transferred on the replacement external system. See the Picture of Marker and Node Table. Note
that if a marker is attached to more than one node, the marker is listed in the table for each
node to which it is attached. You need to change the marker individually for each of the
nodes.
Marker - All the markers on the flexible body that will be transferred to the
external system.
Connections - All the forces and joints on the flexible body that use the marker
for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the external
system.
Old Node - The nodes the marker is attached to on the replacement external
system.
Interface - The existing or replacement node may or may not be an interface
node. An asterisk appears if the node is an interface node.
Old Relative Location - The x, y, and z coordinates of the old node relative to the
marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system.
Old Distance - The magnitude of the old relative location vector.
New Node - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is transferred to
the external system. When Adams Flex initially creates the table, it chooses the
closest node. You can change the chosen node using the Node ID text box.
New Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
New Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment node
relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate
system. A perfect match is 0.
Move column - Indicates how Adams Flex will position the marker. The three
options are:
• move - When Adams Flex transfers the marker to the external system, it will
move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will be moved is
given in the Distance column.
• loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the marker's
position was defined by an Adams View expression, the parameterization will
be lost.
• expr - If the marker's position is defined by an Adams View expression, the
parameterization will be preserved. Otherwise, the marker's current position
will be preserved. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location using the
marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.
Use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve expression buttons to set the Move
column value.
P - Z 1187
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
or
Alignment
Note: The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB, using
the “…” button provided beside the index. The desired flexible body
can be selected by double-clicking on the displayed list.
Flex body positioning
Node ID Method Select this method to automatically align the flexible body based on the locations
of three Markers with identical Node ID specified in both the original and
swapped bodies. Three markers that are not collinear are selected for the swap,
and the swap is performed automatically if the triangle formed by the three
markers of both bodies are identical. If no Markers with Node ID specified can
be found that meet this criteria, an error message is issued and the swap is
aborted.
1188 Adams View
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding axis:
X axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its largest principal inertia direction
Y axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its second largest principal inertia
direction
Z axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its smallest principal inertia
direction
View parts only Select to display only the original flexible body and its replacement.
View topology Select to display a flexible representation of the body and its connections to
other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.
Copy original part Leave a copy of the original flexible body in the modeling database. This is
helpful if you want to reactivate the original flexible body.
P - Z 1189
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
Connections
Note: Adams Solver (FORTRAN) does not support markers offset from their
attachment nodes. Therefore, Adams Flex (FORTRAN) automatically
introduces a massless link between the marker and the flexible body. Learn more.
Move Node to Select to move the node to marker's location in the selected row of the Marker and Node table
Marker to the location of the marker. The node must be an attachment node. This option will
invoke Adams Flex in the background and generate a new MNF with the node(s)'
positioned edited. This MNF will then be used for the swap.
Note that the modal content of the MNF is not changed by this action. The modal
response of the flex body may be approximate, depending on how much the attachment
node has been moved from its original location. Moving a node to a marker location
removes the need for a rigid offset to be maintained by Adams Flex between node and
marker location during the simulation.
Comparing this option to preserving the marker location: both result in an approximate
solution. If the offset is significantly far from zero, the 'move node' option may be better
since no artificial moments are introduced. If offset is close to zero, the artificial moment
may be negligible.
Number of Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the Marker and
digits Node table.
1190 Adams View
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to the flexible
body.
Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the marker for their
definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the flexible body.
Marker Location - Marker's current location.
Old Node - The nodes the marker is attached to on the replacement flexible body.
Interface - Whether or not the existing or replacement node is an interface node. An
asterisk appears if the node is an interface node.
Old Relative Location - The x, y, and z coordinates of the old node relative to the
marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system.
Old Distance - The magnitude of the old relative location vector.
New Node - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is transferred to the
flexible body. When Adams Flex initially creates the table, it chooses the closest node.
You can change the chosen node using the node id cell itself.
New Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
New Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment node relative
to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system. A perfect
match is 0.
P - Z 1191
Swap a rigid body for an external system
Alignment
Connections
Alignment
Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the
flexible body CM.
Oriented such that its principal inertia directions are coincident with
the part's principal inertia directions.
If the inertia properties of the two bodies are similar, this method closely
aligns the external system with the rigid body. If the bodies are symmetric
about a plane, this method may rotate the external system 180° from the rigid
body. In this case, you can use the Flip about buttons to rotate the rigid body
180° back into position.
Launch Precision Move Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects either by
Panel increments or to precise coordinates.
3 Point Method Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of the
external system. A point pair consists of a point on the original rigid body and
a point on replacement external system. The three points on each body must
uniquely define a plane. The first point pair defines the location of the rigid
body and the second and third points define the orientation. The external
system is positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It is then
oriented by making points 2 and 3 on the External System reside in the plane
defined by points 2 and 3 on the rigid body.
P - Z 1193
Swap a rigid body for an external system
Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding
axis:
X axis - Rotate external system 180° about its largest principal inertia
direction.
Y axis - Rotate external system 180° about its second largest principal
inertia direction
Z axis - Rotate external system 180° about its smallest principal
inertia direction.
View parts only Select to display only the rigid body and its replacement external system.
View topology Select to display a representation of the rigid body and its connections to
other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.
Copy original part Leave a copy of the rigid body in the modeling database. This is helpful if you
want to reactivate the rigid body.
Connections
Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to the
external system.
Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the
marker for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to
the external system.
Node ID - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is
transferred to the external system. When Adams Flex initially creates the
table, it chooses the closest node. You can change the chosen node using
the Node ID text box.
Interface - An asterisk (*) in this column indicates that the chosen
attachment node is an interface node.
Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment node
relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's
coordinate system. A perfect match is 0.
Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
Move column - Indicates how Adams Flex will position the marker. The
three options are:
• move - When Adams Flex transfers the marker to the external system, it
will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will be
moved is given in the Distance column.
• loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the marker's
position was defined by an Adams View expression, the parameterization
will be lost.
• expr - If the marker's position is defined by an Adams View expression,
the parameterization will be preserved. Otherwise, the marker's current
position will be preserved. This is helpful if you have defined a joint
location using the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.
Use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve expression buttons to set
the Move column value.
1196 Adams View
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body
or
Alignment
Note: The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB,
using the “…” button provided beside the index. The desired
flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the displayed
list.
Load The load button needs to be/can be used only when the user specifies a MD
DB option, to create the replacement flexible body from. Pressing the load
button, after specifying a valid MD DB file (and index if specified), loads the
appropriate flexible body from the MD DB.
For the flex-body and MNF option, the load button stays disabled and cannot
be used.
Flex Body Positioning
Node ID Method Select this method to automatically align the flexible body based on the
locations of three Markers with identical Node ID specified in both the
original and swapped bodies. Three markers that are not collinear are selected
for the swap, and the swap is performed automatically if the triangle formed
by the three markers of both bodies are identical. If no Markers with Node ID
specified can be found that meet this criteria, an error message is issued and
the swap is aborted.
1198 Adams View
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body
Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the
rigid body CM.
Oriented such that its principal inertia directions are coincident with
the part's principal inertia directions.
If the inertia properties of the two bodies are similar, this method closely
aligns the flexible body with the rigid body. If the bodies are symmetric about
a plane, this method may rotate the flexible body 180° from the rigid body.
In this case, you can use the Flip about buttons to rotate the flexible body 180°
back into position.
Launch Precision Move Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects either by
Panel increments or to precise coordinates.
3 Point Method Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of the
flexible body. A point pair consists of a point on the rigid body and a point
on the flexible body. The three points on each body must uniquely define a
plane. The first point pair defines the location of the flexible body and the
second and third points define the orientation. The flexible body is positioned
by making the first point pair coincident. It is then oriented by making points
2 and 3 on the flexible body reside in the plane defined by points 2 and 3 on
the rigid body.
Flip about Only available if you used Align Flex Body CM with CM of Current Part.
Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding
axis:
X axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its largest principal inertia
direction
Y axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its second largest principal
inertia direction
Z axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its smallest principal inertia
direction
View Parts Only Select to display only the rigid body and the replacement flexible body.
View Topology Select to display a representation of the rigid body and its connections to
other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.
Copy original part Leave a copy of the original rigid body in the modeling database. This is
helpful if you want to reactivate the rigid body.
Connections
Note: Adams Solver (FORTRAN) does not support markers offset from
their attachment nodes. Therefore, Adams Flex (FORTRAN)
automatically introduces a massless link between the marker and
the flexible body. Learn more.
Move Node to Marker Select to move the node in the selected row of the Marker and Node table to the
location of the marker location. The node must be an attachment node. This
option will invoke Adams Flex in the background and generate a new MNF
with the node(s)' positioned edited. This MNF will then be used for the swap.
Note that the modal content of the MNF is not changed by this action. The
modal response of the flex body may be approximate, depending on how
much the attachment node has been moved from its original location. Moving
a node to a marker location removes the need for a rigid offset to be
maintained by Adams Flex between node and marker location during the
simulation.
Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to
the flexible body.
Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the
marker for their definitions. These joints and forces will be
transferred to the flexible body.
Marker Location - Marker's current location.
Node ID - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is
transferred to the flexible body. When Adams Flex initially creates
the table, it chooses the closest node. You can change the chosen
node using the node id cell itself.
Interface - An asterisk (*) in this column indicates that the chosen
attachment node is an interface node.
Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment
node relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the
marker's coordinate system. A perfect match is 0.
Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
P - Z 1201
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body
Switch Block
Ribbon menu → Elements tab → Controls Toolkit → Standard Control Blocks → New/Modify →
or
The switch is a convenient means to “zero” the signal into any block. Connect the switch at a point in the
feedback loop to quickly see the change from open loop control to closed loop control. The switch takes any
control block as its input.
Table Editor
Tools → Table Editor
Allows you to enter values for all types of objects. It displays the objects in your Modeling database in table
format so you can compare, update, and manage the objects. The object information you can view and
update depends on the type of object. You can create and delete object.
To set the type of objects displayed:
Select a check box of the desired object type from along the bottom of the Table Editor.
Adams View updates the Table Editor to display the selected type of object.
Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
P - Z 1203
Table Editor Filters
(Insert tool) Select to insert text from the input cell into the selected cells.
(Object Name & Field tool) Select to insert the database name for the next selected cell into the input
box. Learn about entering database names into cells.
(Cell Variable tool) Select to insert the self-reference operator into the input cell. Learn about
entering modifying cells based on their current contents.
Input cell Enter text to add to more than one cell at a time and quickly update the
values in the cell. Learn more about Working with Cells in the Table Editor.
Apply Click to execute the object table's commands.
OK Click to execute the object table's commands and close the Table Editor.
Create Select to create a new object for the current table type.
Filters Displays the Table Editor Filters dialog box.
Sorting Displays the Sorting Settings dialog box.
Write Select to write out the contents of this object table.
Reload Select to reload the values in the database into the Table Editor.
ground. For forces, you cannot change the information displayed, only the types of forces displayed. For
joints, you can change the information displayed as well as the type of joints displayed.
Learn more about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
For example, enter .model_1 to display all objects under your entire model or enter
.model_1.PART_3 to display objects belonging only to PART_3.
Ribbon menu → Design Exploration tab → Temporary Settings container → Temporary Settings Files
The Temporary Settings File dialog is required to export/write and read/apply temporary settings files.
Object Properties - Tab for specifying model object properties. It has data table with two columns.
Object Property This column contains objectName.PropertyName. Add properties here via right-
click - Browse or via the Import button which imports a set of properties from an
existing temporary settings file.
Value In this column specify the corresponding object property values.
Solver Settings - Tab for specifying Adams Solver settings. It has data table with two columns.
Solver Setting This column contains setting.property. Add properties here via right-click - Browse
or via the Import button which imports a set of properties from an existing
temporary settings file.
Values In this column specify the corresponding solver setting values.
Update Nominal Applies the values in the dialog box to the model in the session overwriting the
Model values in the Adams View Database. Typically this option is used after simulations
have already been run using various temporary settings files, file’s values are favored
and it’s desired to update the model with that file’s values.
Property Browser
The property browser is for you to browse for objects belonging to the model specified in the Temporary
Settings File dialog box, and to select (one or more at a time) from a list of that object's properties as well as
solver properties.
P - Z 1207
Temporary Settings Files
Notes: When you browse the Database Navigator object, the Property Browser contains
some properties that are read-only properties which cannot be modified using TSF
dialog box.
The Temporary Settings file only supports those properties which are supported by
the Adams Python interface. So, this property browser will show only those
properties.
Some Adams Solver settings are not supported by the temporary settings
functionality. They mostly deal with things related to output formatting and display
during simulation. All settings in the following categories or sub-categories in the
Solver Settings dialog are unsupported by temporary settings:
Display
Output
• Files
• Database Storage
• Results (.res) Options
• Results (.res) Contents
• Output (.out) Content
• Message (.msg) Content
Durability Files
Debugging (also the "Debug" option under Optimization)
Advanced
1210 Adams View
Three-Component Force tool
or
1 Location
2 Bodies - 1 Location
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:
Constant force - Lets you enter a constant force value or let Adams View
use a default value.
Bushing Like- Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and lets
Adams View create a function expression for damping and stiffness based
on the coefficient values.
Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you, which, in effect,
creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force, you modify
it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a User-written subroutine
that is linked to Adams View. You can also specify an alternative library
and name for the user subroutine. Learn about specifying routines with
ROUTINE Argument.
P - Z 1211
Three-Component Torque tool
Ribbon menu → Forces tab → Applied Forces container → Three-Component Torque Tool
or
1 Location
2 Bodies - 1 Location
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:
Constant - Lets you enter a constant force value or let Adams View use a
default value.
Bushing Like- Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and lets
Adams View create a function expression for damping and stiffness based
on the coefficient values.
Custom - Adams View does not set any values for you, which, in effect,
creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force, you modify
it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a User-written subroutine
that is linked to Adams View. You can also specify an alternative library
and name for the user subroutine. Learn about specifying routines with
ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant , the following option appears:
Torque Enter a constant torque value.
If you selected Bushing Like, the following two options appear:
KT Enter the stiffness coefficients.
CT Enter the damping coefficients.
P - Z 1213
Tool Settings
Tool Settings
View → Toolbox and Toolbars
Turns on and off the Model Browser, Ribbon Capability and Standard toolbar. You can also set where the model
browser and status toolbars appear. By default, the model browser appears at the left of the main window and
the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.
Toolbar Settings
View → Toolbars → Settings
Allows you to turn the display of toolbars on and off. The toolbars are:
Main toolbar - The Main toolbar appears by default. It contains tools for setting options and
performing operations. The contents of the toolbar change depending on the Adams PostProcessor
mode. Learn About the Main Toolbar.
Curve Edit toolbar - Lets you manipulate curve data. Learn about using the Curve Edit toolbar.
Statistics toolbar - Lets you view statistics about curves, such as the minimum and maximum values.
Learn about viewing statistics.
Status bar - Displays information messages and prompts while you work. The right side of the status
bar displays the number of the displayed page and the total number of pages.
1214 Adams View
Topology By Connections
You can also set where the toolbars appear—either at the top of the window under the menu bar or at the
bottom of the window. You can also turn on and off the dashboard and treeview. By default, the dashboard
and treeview are displayed, the Main toolbar appears at the top of the window, the Curve Edit and Statistics
toolbars are turned off, and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.
Topology By Connections
Database Navigator → Topology By Connections
Allows you to display information about a selected constraint or force with the parts that they connect and
act on.
Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.
Topology By Parts
Database Navigator → Topology By Parts
Allows you to display information about a selected part of your model. It displays information of the selected
part and shows its connections to other parts.
Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.
or
Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-click
in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear the select
list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.
Torsion SpringTool
or
1 Location
2 Bodies - 1 Location
2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature
Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes of
the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-axes of
the screen.
Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector you
select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams View automatically calculates
the x- and y-axes.
KT Enter the torsional stiffness coefficients.
CT Enter the torsional damping coefficients.
Torus Tool
or
You can also specify the minor and major radii before you draw.
Learn about Creating a Torus.
Note: Two hotpoints appear on a torus after you draw it. One controls the centerline of the torus’
circular shape and the other controls the radius of the circular cross-section. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify
Geometry.
P - Z 1219
Translate Test Modal Model to Modal Neutral File
or
Icon Link
Dynamically Translating a View
or
When you create a translational joint, you specify its location and orientation. The location of a translational
joint does not affect the motion of the joint. It simply determines where Adams View places the joint. The
orientation of the translational joint, however, determines the direction of the axis along which the parts can
slide with respect to each other. The direction of the motion of the translational joint is parallel to the
orientation vector and passes through the location.
P - Z 1221
Translational Motion Tool
Learn about:
Creating Idealized Joints
Adding Friction to Idealized Joints
Ribbon menu → Motions tab → Joints Motions container → Translational Motion Tool
or
1222 Adams View
Translational Spring Damper Tool
or
ude attributes
Sets appearance and activity of a User Defined Element (UDE) instance.
Format:
ude attributes
instance_name = an existing UDE instance
scale_of_icons = real
size_of_icons = length
visibility = on/off/no_opinion/toggle
name_visibility = on/off/no_opinion/toggle
transparency = integer
lod = integer
color = an existing color
entity_scope = fill_color/edge_color/outline_color/text_color/all_color
active = on/off/no_opinion
dependents_active = on/off/no_opinion
Example:
ude attributes &
instance_name = .MODEL_1.my_ude_inst1 &
size_of_icons = 20 &
visibility = on &
name_visibility = on &
transparency = 50 &
lod = 100 &
color = .colors.CYAN &
entity_scope = all_color &
active = on &
dependents_active = on
1224 Adams View
ude autoconnect
Description:
ude autoconnect
This command has been deprecated. It will be ignored by Adams View.
ude build
This command launches a dialog to add objects/parameters to a User Defined Element (UDE) definition.
P - Z 1225
ude connect
Format:
ude build
ude connect
Connects the output parameters of one User Defined Element (UDE) instance to the input parameters of
another. The UDE instances need not be instances of the same UDE definition.
Format:
ude connect
instance_name = an existing UDE instance
to_instance_name = an existing UDE instance
Example:
Description:
ude copy
Copies a User Defined Element (UDE) definition or instance.
1226 Adams View
ude create definition
Format:
ude copy
definition_name = an existing UDE definition
new_definition_name = a new UDE definition
instance_name = an existing UDE instance
new_instance_name = a new UDE instance
Example:
Description:
Format:
Example:
Description:
Format:
Example:
Description:
ude delete
Deletes a User Defined Element (UDE) definition or instance.
Format:
ude delete
definition_name = an existing UDE definition
instance_name = an existing UDE instance
Example:
Description:
ude disassemble
Moves the basic Adams elements (for example: parts, force and so on.) that compose a User Defined Element
(UDE) instance from the UDE instance and into the model in which the instance resided. The now emptied
instance is then deleted from the model.
Format:
ude disassemble
instance_name = an existing UDE instance
top_level_only = yes/no
Example:
Description:
ude disconnect
Disconnects the output parameters of one User Defined Element (UDE) instance to the input parameters of
another.
1232 Adams View
ude modify definition
Format:
ude disconnect
instance_name = an existing UDE instance
from_instance_name = an existing UDE instance
Example:
Description:
Format:
Example:
Description:
Format:
Example:
Description:
Format:
Example:
Description:
Format:
Example:
Description:
ude sync
Copies the parameter settings from one UDE instance to another so, when done, the two instances are
identical.
Format:
ude sync
instance_name = an existing UDE instance
from = an existing UDE instance
Example:
Description:
Unite Tool
or
Learn about Creating One Part from the Union of Two Solids
1240 Adams View
Units
Units
Settings → Units
Changes the default units Adams View uses in modeling, importing, and exporting files. You can select
individual units or select a set group of units.
Learn about:
Units of Measurement in Adams View
Unit Labels
Entering Unit Measurements in Text Boxes
Note: In all the unit systems, time is in seconds and angle is in degrees.
P - Z 1241
Update Design Variables
or
Allows you to set the design variable values to those of a trial or iteration. This is helpful if you want to:
Update your model to match the best trial of a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE).
Visualize the variable settings of a particular trial or iteration.
Use an intermediate iteration in an optimization instead of the final values.
Learn more about Updating Variables.
Note: When using the Temporary Settings Sweep option, the "set variables to
values used in trial or iteration" button is disabled because it is specific to
setting a single set of variables used across all trials. The Temporary Settings
Sweep is richer, allowing one to perturb different properties per trial, this
button does not apply. If you want to update your baseline model to the
state used in a given Temporary Settings Sweep trial, use the Temporary
Settings dialog to select the same set of temporary settings files and apply
them to your model.
Ribbon menu → Elements tab → Controls Toolkit → Standard Control Blocks → New/Modify →
or
The user-defined transfer function block creates general rational polynomial blocks by specifying the
polynomial coefficients. Specify the coefficients in the order n0, n1, n2 for the numerator.
1242 Adams View
View Accessories
View Accessories
View → View Accessories
Sets the display of the following in the currently active View window:
Working grid
Screen icons
View triad
View title
Note: You can also use the tools in the Main toolbox to set the display of these items. If you use the
tools, you can change the accessories for all view windows at once but you cannot change the
view title.
P - Z 1243
View Orientation Tools
View Rotation
or
Icon Description
Rotate view about the screen’s z-axis
Welcome to Adams
Lets you start your Adams session by creating a new model or opening an existing one. It also lets you to
specify your working directory.
New Model - Lets you start a new modeling session with a new
modeling database.
Window Layout
View → Layout
You select the layout you’d like for your main window from a palette of layouts or from the Window Layouts
tool stack on the Main toolbox. The palette and tool stack contain the same set of view layouts. If you display
the palette, you can keep it open so that you can quickly select another layout.
1248 Adams View
Working Grid
Working Grid
Settings → Working Grid
Spacing For a rectangular grid only, enter the spacing between each point in the grid
in the x and y directions in length units.
Maximum Radius For polar grid only, enter the radius of the working grid from its origin to its
outermost circle.
1250 Adams View
Working Grid
θ = 360×/N
In the picture above 8 lines are specified for an angle increment between the
lines of 45.
Dots, Axes, Lines, and Select the color and weight (thickness) of each object in the grid. You can also
Triad set the color of the objects to Contrast, which indicates that Adams View
should select a color that contrasts with the color currently set for the view
background. Setting the color to Contrast is particularly helpful when you set
each of your view windows to a different background color or when you
frequently change the view background.
The colors listed for the working grid elements are the same colors provided
for setting the color of objects. The colors do not include any new colors that
you created.
Global Origin to set the center location of the working grid to the
center of the view window.
Pick and click a location on the screen to set as the center of the
working grid.
Set Orientation Select how you want to orient the working grid. You can set its orientation by
picking points or by aligning it with the screen plane. Note that if you select
Pick for orientation, you will also set the location of the working grid.
Appendix
A-C
ABAM integrator
The Adams-Bashforth and Adams-Moulton (ABAM) integrator reduces the full set of differential and
algebraic equations to a set of ordinary differential equations during a Dynamic simulation. The ABAM
integrator uses a Predict-Evaluate-Correct-Evaluate scheme to integrate the ordinary differential equations.
The ABAM integrator is better for simulations of models undergoing sudden changes or with high, active
(excited, but not damped out) frequencies.
See Integrator.
Accuracy tolerance
The accuracy tolerance is the number of decimal digits required at each Integration step to solve the Dynamic
simulation. In general, the more decimal digits of accuracy you select, the slower the Simulation but the better
the results. You can select a range of 1 to 7 for the decimal digits. The default is 3.
Action marker
A marker belonging to the body to which Adams View applies a multi-component applied force (see Applied
forces). Action Markers are also referred to as I markers.
Activation status
Determines whether or not an object is included in a Simulation.
Adams Toolbar
The Adams Toolbar is your starting point to using Adams products on Linux. It gives you access to the major
products you installed. It uses a registry service that maintains values and settings that you need when running
Adams.
1226 Adams View
Adams Flex Toolkit
Adams Insight
Adams Insight lets you design sophisticated experiments for measuring the performance of your mechanical
system. It also provides a collection of statistical tools for analyzing the results of your experiments so that you
can better understand how to refine and improve your model. For more information on Adams Insight, see
the Adams Insight online help.
Adams Linear
Adams Linear is a module to Adams Solver that linearizes Adams models. Linearized Adams models can be
represented by complex-valued eigendata (eigenvalues, mode shapes) or by a state-space representation in the
form of real-valued state matrices (A,B,C, and D). Adams uses a condensation scheme to reduce an Adams
model to a minimal realization linear form for efficient solution.
A - C 1227
Adams PostProcessor
Adams PostProcessor
Adams PostProcessor is a powerful post-processing tool that lets you view the results of simulations you
performed using other Adams products. Your Adams product launches it when you select Postprocessing
from the Review menu.
For more information, see the Adams PostProcessor online help.
Adams Solver
MSC’s software program for kinematically and dynamically analyzing mechanical systems. For more
information, see the Adams Solver online help.
Adams Solver ID
An Adams Solver ID is an integer used to identify the element in the Adams Solver dataset files (.adm). You only
need to specify an ID number if you have User-written subroutine.
Enter a 0 to have Adams Solver assign the ID for you.
Adams View
A powerful modeling and simulating environment you use to build, simulate, and refine virtual models of
any mechanical system that has moving parts, from automobiles and trains to VCRs and backhoes.
Command Window or Command Navigator. They are used to automate the creation of a model or in the
investigation of Simulation results. For example, you can import a command file that contains all the
commands to build a latch in Adams View.
A command file is the fastest and easiest way to issue the same sequence of commands repeatedly. It is in
ASCII format and you can transfer it between most computer platforms. Command files usually have the
extension .cmd, although that extension is not required.
Adaptivity value
Loosens or tightens the convergence tolerance for the corrector phase of the Integration step when solving a
Dynamic simulation.
Analytical Method
The analytical method uses the curves of the path and profile you specify for the revolution or extrusion and
uses the curves to define the revolution or extrusion. Unlike the Non-analytical Method, for a revolution, it
maintains the relationship of the profile and axis. When you edit the revolution or extrusion, you edit the
curves making up the object, not the individual points of the profile as you do for non-analytical.
Comparision of revolutions created with analytical and non-analytical methods
Comparision of extrusions created with analytical and non-analytical methods
Animation
An Adams View tool that allows you to replay the frames from your Simulation, and helps you review and study
the part movements within your model.
Applied forces
Forces that define loads and compliances on parts (see Part (also called Bodies)). They allow you to write your
own equations to represent a wide variety of force relationships. To help you write force equations, we’ve
provided a Function Builder, which steps you through writing a function and evaluates the function before
adding it to your model. For more information on the Function Builder, see Adams View Function Builder online
help.
Array
A list of input variables, state variables, output variables, and initial conditions associated with System
elements, such as general state equations, linear state equations, and transfer functions. You can also use
general arrays to define lists of constants. You can access the values in function Expressions or User-written
subroutines.
A - C 1229
Assemblies
Assemblies
Assemblies, also referred to as user-defined elements, let you collect generic modeling elements into a single
object that you can easily duplicate. Assemblies are accessible only from the command line or through macros.
Examples of assemblies are the Adams View Controls tool kit; some forces, such as the spring damper; and
general motions. To see assemblies in Adams View, display the Database Navigator and select to view assemblies.
Basic Type
Includes the following:
real, integer, location, orientation, string, function, list(str1, str2, str3,...), file(path wildcard)
The list type must be followed by the list of allowed values.
The file type can optionally be followed by a wildcard with or without a path. The File Selection dialog box
uses the specified path and wildcard as the defaults for the parameter. If you do not specify a wildcard, the
File Selection dialog box lists all files.
Notes: Adams View reads the BDF and if it does not contain units data, then the user must
specify it in the flexible body creation dialog. If the BDF units differ from those of the
Adams model, Adams View will scale the geometry and mass properties appropriately in
session; however, it does not edit the values within the BDF to reflect the Adams model
units.
Abaqus input files can be converted to MSC Nastran SOL400 BDF's via the Adams Flex
Toolkit's ABQ2NAS command .
1230 Adams View
Beam
Beam
A linear translational and rotational force between two locations.
Beam example
Binary format
The format of the Adams View Modeling database that saves all aspects of your modeling session, including
Models, Simulation results, defaults, and changes to the interface. You can save your work to a binary file and
later reload it and resume working where you left off.
Bode plot
Helps you study frequency response functions (FRFs) for linear systems and linearized representations of
nonlinear systems. The frequency response function measures the response at the outputs due to unit
harmonic excitation at the inputs at various frequencies. A Bode plot shows the amplitude gain and the phase
shift between input to output for all output/input combinations of the linear system.
A - C 1231
Body-fixed rotation
Body-fixed rotation
To apply rotations about axes that move with the body as it rotates. As Adams View applies each rotation to
an axis, it produces a new set of axes.
Boss
Raised circular protrusions on the face of solid objects.
Bushing
Spring and damper forces acting between two parts. You define the force and torque magnitudes using six
Cartesian components (Fx, Fy, Fz, Tx, Ty, and Tz), which are a linear function of the translational and
rotational displacement between two coordinate systems moving with the two parts.
Chamfer
A beveled edge or corner on a solid object.
1232 Adams View
Check button
Check button
A small square button in a dialog box that selects an option. You can select more than one check box in a
group.
Clearance study
A clearance study reports the minimum distance between objects in your model at each frame of an animation
in Adams PostProcessor. For example, you might want to perform a clearance study to ensure packaging
requirements are satisfied.
When you view an animation of the clearance study, Adams PostProcessor displays a line between the two
objects in the study to track the minimum distance. You can also plot the data and generate reports.
Click
To press and quickly release the mouse button.
Command Navigator
The Command Navigator displays a list of all Adams View command keywords. A plus (+) in front of a
keyword indicates that the command has more keywords below it but they are hidden. A minus (-) indicates
that all keywords below the keyword are displayed. No indicator in front of a keyword indicates that there
are no more keywords below the object. When you select an object with no indicator, a dialog box appears
in which you enter parameters for executing the command.
Command Window
An Adams View window that lets you enter Adams View commands directly instead of using menus. The
commands correspond to menu selections and the parameters correspond to Dialog box choices. You can either
enter the full command or an abbreviation to the command.
Learn more about the Command Window.
Comments
For comments, you can enter any alphanumeric characters. The comments that you create appear in the
Information window when you select to display information about the object, in the Adams View Log file, and in
a Adams View command file or Adams Solver dataset files when you export your model to these types of files. (Note
that Design variables are not output to datasets; therefore, neither are their comments.)
A - C 1233
Comparision of extrusions
Comparision of extrusions
1234 Adams View
Comparision of revolutions
Comparision of revolutions
Constraint
An Adams View object that defines how two parts are attached and how they can move with respect to one
another. There are four different types of constraints: Idealized joints, Primitive joints, Contacts, and motions.
Construction geometry
Primitive objects that have no mass. They include Points and Markers as well as wire geometry, such as lines,
arcs, and splines. You can use construction geometry to define other Geometry.
Contacts
Objects that model how parts meet at points and how points on parts follow curves. They also model how
curves on one part follow curves on another part.
A - C 1235
Coordinate window
Coordinate window
Displays the coordinate location of the cursor in the main window. It updates the coordinates as you move
the cursor. You can also use the coordinate window to find the distance between two Points.
Curve
A line representing data on a plot.
D-F
DAC Format
nCode International created the DAC file format. This DAC format supports single-parameter (time series),
two-parameter (x-y), and three-parameter (histogram) files. Adams Durability supports the time series
format. With this DAC format, you can input data from durability test machines and output data to nSoft
and other DAC-compatible programs. This topic contains an overview of the DAC format. For a detailed
description of the DAC format, see the nSoft data File Formats document from nCode International.
D - F 1237
Database Object Type
DAC files are binary, sequential, and fixed-length with 512-byte records. The data represent a fixed sample
rate or time step. Real numbers are single-precision (4-byte) values. Each file has header, data, and footer
regions. Adams Durability supports both old (pre version 5.0) and new (version 5.0+) DAC formats with a
single channel of time series data.
In general, DAC files are not portable from platform to platform. For example, files created by Adams
Durability on a Windows platform are not readable by Adams Durability or other programs on Linux
platforms. nCode provides an nSoft utility to convert DAC files from one platform to another. However, this
utility does not have a specification for the Linux platform. When using Adams Durability or Adams View
on a Linux platform, use DAC files that have been converted to Windows or INTEL (Windows DAC files
are compatible with Linux). Note that Linux-generated DAC files can be processed on Windows and the
reverse.
ADAMS_Output_File Measure_Vector
Body Modeling
Constraint Old_Graphic_User_Interface
Data_Element Optimization_Function
Equation Plotting
Expression_primitive Point_to_Point_Force
Feature Position
Force Reference_Frame
Frame_Display Runtime_Measure
Function_Container Solid_Geometry
Geometry Triad
Graphic_User_Interface Variable_Class
Higher_Pair_Contact Wire_Geometry
Measure
Data elements
Elements that store alpha-numeric information in your model. Data elements include Arrays, curves, splines,
matrixes, and strings.
Note that data elements by themselves do nothing. They simply hold supporting data for other Adams
elements or for your user function Expressions or User-written subroutines. For example, you reference matrices
in the definition of a linear state equation. In addition, a linear state equation uses arrays of variables to define
input, output, and state characteristics. You can also use curves to create contact constraints.
Data point
Represents data that Adams View created at an output step during a Simulation or test data that you’ve
imported.
D - F 1239
Database Navigator
Database Navigator
An Adams View tool that lets you view and select objects in your Modeling database.
Learn more about Database Navigator.
Default
Selects a simulation for you depending on your model:
If your model contains zero Degrees of freedom (DOF), performs a Kinematic simulation.
If your model has one or more DOF, Adams View performs a Dynamic simulation.
Degrees of freedom
The amount a part is free to move in space (see Part (also called Bodies)). A part free in space has six degrees of
freedom: three translational, three rotational. A constraint removes degrees of freedom between two parts,
causing them to remain positioned with respect to one another.
Delta mode
A mode in which the Coordinate window displays the differences between Points. The coordinate window is in
delta mode when you are moving an object or drawing the selection box.
When Adams View starts delta mode, it displays the distance between the current location of the cursor and
its original location. Adams View adds the distance information to the coordinate window below the
coordinate values. It places a D in front of the coordinate values to differentiate them.
Adams View also displays a MAG field near the bottom of the window, which displays the magnitude of the
cursor displacement. The magnitude is the square root of the sum of the squares of the three coordinate
values.
1240 Adams View
Design of experiments (DOE)
Design study
A set of Simulations that help you adjust a parameter in your Model to measure its effect on the performance of
your model. For example, you can run a design study to determine the optimal length required for a driving
link in a stamping machine required to make a stamp hit a box.
See Design of experiments (DOE) and Optimization.
Design variables
Design variables represent elements in your model that can change. For example, a design variable can
represent a location for a design point, a magnitude for a force, or spring stiffnesses. After you enter a design
variable in your model, you can run automated simulations that vary the values of the variable over specified
ranges to understand the sensitivity to the variable or to find the optimum values. See Design of experiments
(DOE), Design study, and Optimization.
Dialog box
A panel that appears when you select a command. It requests more information.
D - F 1241
Dialog-Box Builder
Dialog-Box Builder
Dialog-Box builder
An Adams View tool that helps you create and modify Dialog boxes. For example, you can use it to add a new
button to a dialog box or create a new dialog box to execute a special procedure you run often.
Dimensions
Any measurable extent, such as velocity, length, mass, and torque.
Double-click
To quickly click the mouse button twice without moving the mouse.
1242 Adams View
Drag
Drag
To press and hold down the mouse button while moving the mouse.
Dynamic simulation
A time-history solution for all displacements, velocities, accelerations, and internal reaction forces in your
Model driven by a set of external forces and excitations. A dynamic simulation is also known as a kinetic
simulation.
During a dynamic simulation, Adams Solver solves the full set of non linear differential and algebraic equations
(DAEs). It is the most complex and computationally demanding type of Simulation and is meant to be used
with models that have one or more Degrees of freedom.
A dynamic simulation provides a time-history solution for displacements, velocities, accelerations, and
internal reaction forces in your model driven by a set of external forces and excitations.
Learn more About Dynamic Simulations.
Elements of an arc
This example shows a 60-degree angle with a starting angle of 15 degrees and an ending angle of 75 degrees.
D - F 1243
Entering a marker name
Eprint
Eprint prints a block of information for each Kinematic simulation, Static equilibrium , or Dynamic simulation step to
a Command Window and to your Adams View Log file. The information helps you monitor the simulation
process and locate the source of the error if there is a problem. Each step consists of two phases:
A forward step in time (the predictor for dynamics).
The solution of the equations of motion (the corrector for dynamics).
Eprint displays the same information that the DEBUG command does when used with the argument
EPRINT. For more information, see DEBUG in the Adams Solver online help.
When you select Eprint, a command window appears. It displays the most recent commands that Adams
View executed.
Note: You can close the command window and use your log file to view the debugging information.
Example of Extrusion
D - F 1245
Example of Extrusion Directions
Expression language
You use the Adams View expression language to write expressions. Expressions are combinations of constants,
operators, functions, and database object references, all enclosed in parentheses. In Adams View you can use
expressions to specify parameter values, such as locations of markers or functions of motions.
Adams View uses expressions for two purposes:
To compute values for you, such as when you are entering the radius of a cylinder and the value is
not a simple number, but is the result of a mathematical computation.
To parameterize your model.
D - F 1253
Expression mode
Expression mode
Function Builder mode in which you create expressions, which are the basis of all parameterization.
Expressions
Groups of standard constants, operators, functions, and data references. You use expressions to specify
parameters in your model or to allow Adams View or Adams Solver to calculate values.
Extrusion
A three-dimensional object defined by its profile and depth. An extrusion can be either solid or hollow.
Field element
A translational and rotational force between two locations. The field element can apply either linear or
nonlinear force depending on the values that you specify after you create the field.
Fillet
A rounded edge or corner on a solid object.
Fixed joint
A constraint that allows no translation or rotation between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)).
Flexible bodies
A part (see Part (also called Bodies)) that vibrates and bends as Forces are applied to it.
1254 Adams View
Flexible connectors
Flexible connectors
Flexible connectors let you connect two bodies in a compliant way. In contrast to Joints, which are rigid
connectors, flexible connectors do not absolutely prohibit any part movement and, therefore, do not remove
any Degrees of freedom from your model. Flexible connectors do typically resist movements between parts (see
Part (also called Bodies)), however, by applying spring and damper forces to the connected bodies. These forces
are proportional to the displacement and rate of change in displacement between two parts, respectively.
Flexible links
A discrete link consisting of two or more rigid bodies (see Rigid body) connected by beam force elements.
Floating marker
Specifies a site for applying Forces or Constraints to parts. The force or constraint dictates the location and
orientation of the floating marker. Therefore, you do not specify a position for a floating marker. This allows
the floating marker’s location and orientation to change with respect to its body coordinate system during the
simulation, as dictated by the force or constraint.
Force
An effect that has magnitude and direction and that causes motion of a part (see Part (also called Bodies)) when
there is no other external effect on the part. In Adams View, force can refer to both translational and rotational
forces.
Force graphics
Arrows whose magnitudes and directions reflect the scaled, relative magnitudes and directions of the force
vectors acting on your Model during a Simulation.
Frame
A single step of an Adams View Simulation applied to a Model.
Function
An operand that takes a list of arguments and computes a value based on the values in the list. Each argument
in the list is an expression that is evaluated and given to the function. Common examples are SIN( ), SQRT(
), and ABS( ).
Function Builder
An Adams View tool that helps you build and modify Function expressions and Measures. For more
information, see the Adams View Function Builder online help.
D - F 1255
Function Builder in Expression Mode
G-M
G - M 1257
Gear Stiff (GSTIFF) integrator
Geometric entities
The following is complete list of entities that can be translated into outlines and markers or polylines.
In addition to the entities listed in the table, you can create outlines for any geometry or annotation entity
that results in a linear approximation of two points. In this case, a line is created. You can also create outlines
for surfaces that are polygonalized.
Geometry
Graphical elements that make up a Rigid body or Flexible bodies. These elements include curves, such as arcs,
and shapes, such as cylinders. A rigid or flexible body can have one or more geometric elements. Note that a
part (see Part (also called Bodies)) can have no geometry associated with it.
Note: There is also command language help in this help system. From the help table of contents,
select Adams Package -> Adams View -> View Command Language.
Graphics file
An Adams Solver file that contains graphics output from a Simulation. Has a .gra extension.
G - M 1259
Group
Group
A set of objects that make up a unit or subsystem of your Model. You can work on them as a single object.
Once you’ve grouped the objects, you can add them to the Select list all at once so that you can perform editing
operations on them, such as move or copy them. You can also set up their Activation status and deactivation
status during Simulations.
Highlighting
To display an object, and any objects related to that object, in a specified color so you can see the relationship
between the objects in your Model. For example, you can highlight a Joint and the parts it constrains (see Part
(also called Bodies)) .
Hotpoints
Small squares that appear on geometric elements and plot Curves when selected. They enable you to reshape
and resize the Geometry. Each type of geometry has a different number of hotpoints.
Hotspot
A hotspot is a node or region on the flexible body that experienced one of the highest values of stress/strain
during the simulation.
IGES files
Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) files containing the geometry from Adams View or a CAD
software package. You can import and export IGES files using Adams View. When you import an IGES file,
you associate the geometry in the file with any Rigid body in the current Model.
1260 Adams View
IMPACT-Function-Based Contact
IMPACT-Function-Based Contact
In this method, Adams Solver computes the contact force from the IMPACT function available in the Adams
function library. The force is essentially modeled as a nonlinear spring damper.
Idealized joints
Mathematical representations of joints that have physical counterparts, such as a revolute (hinge) or
translational joint (sliding dovetail). See Primitive joints.
Information window
Displays many different types of information about your Model, Simulation, or motions, including:
Topology on the different objects in your model
Object information, such as information about a part or a view
Model verification results
Measurements from one marker to another (see Markers)
Result set component information
View attributes
Results from a system command you run using the Execute System Command
G - M 1261
Initial conditions simulation
Integration step
The time step that Adams Solver takes internally to solve the equations of motion to the specified accuracy
tolerance. Adams Solver uses variable-step Integrators that constantly increase or decrease the size of the
integration steps as needed. By default, the size of the integration step is proportional to the size of the Output
step.
1262 Adams View
Integrator
Integrator
An algorithm that solves the differential equations of motion over an interval of time during a Dynamic
simulation. Adams View lets you select four types of integrators when you customize how Adams Solver solves
equations of motion. The default is the Gear Stiff (GSTIFF) integrator.
Interactive Simulation
An interactive Simulations lets you run a single simulation and experiment with different simulation
parameters and options. Simulating interactively is helpful when you are not sure exactly what your model
will do or which options you need.
When you perform an interactive simulation, Adams View submits one or two simple commands to Adams
Solver based on the type of simulation, how long the simulation will last, and the frequency with which you
want data to be output. For example, for an interactive Dynamic simulation for which you set the end time to
5.0 seconds and the frequency of output to 0.1 seconds, Adams View sends the following command to Adams
Solver:
SIMULATE/DYNAMIC, END=5.0, DTOUT=0.1
Interface objects
The database objects that make up the Adams View interface. All standard interface objects are stored under
the library GUI in your Modeling database.
Learn more about Adams View Interface Objects.
Jacobian matrix
Specifies the pattern Adams Solver should use to check that the Integration step is moving closer to the desired
accuracy. Adams Solver repeats the pattern of checks until it reaches the maximum number of iterations. The
default is to check the process after every iteration.
Joint
A mechanical element that connects two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)) and allows relative motion of one
object with respect to another.
See Idealized joints and Primitive joints.
Joint motion
Prescribes translational or rotational motion on a translational, revolute, or cylindrical joint. Each joint
motion removes one degree of freedom (DOF) from your model (see Degrees of freedom). Joint motions are
very easy to create, but they limit you to motions that are applied to the above listed joints and movements
in only one direction or rotation.
G - M 1263
Keywords
Keywords
A word that represents a command or parameter.
Kinematic simulation
Determines the range of values for the displacement, velocity, and acceleration of any point of interest in the
model, independent of Forces applied to it. During a kinematic simulation, Adams Solver solves only the
reduced set of algebraic equations. This type of simulation, therefore, is only available for models with zero
Degrees of freedom.
If you specify the mass and inertial properties of bodies in your Model, a kinematic Simulation also calculates
the corresponding applied and reaction forces required to generate the prescribed motions.
Libraries
A collection of Adams View objects, such as a collection of interface objects. Libraries help organize the
Adams View Modeling database because they collect related objects into one area. For example, there is a library,
called GUI, that collects all standard Adams View interface objects. You can use the Database Navigator tool to
find libraries within the standard Adams View interface for materials, interface objects, Forces, and controls
elements.
You can create libraries of your own. You add objects to a library by creating them as children of the library
object. A library can hold windows and Dialog boxes, groups, macros, materials, Models, plots, assembly
definitions and instances, Views, and other libraries.
Linear Modes
Calculates eigenvalues and eigenvectors, which give you a better understanding of your system’s natural
frequencies and mode shapes, respectively. You have the option of calculating these eigenvalues and
eigenvectors with or without damping (undamped).
After the calculation is complete, you can choose to view an animation or a table of the values. If you select
an animation, the Linear Modes Controls dialog box appears, letting you make other changes.
For additional information, see the LINEAR command in the Adams Solver online help.
Linear simulation
Linearizes your nonlinear dynamic equations of motion about a particular operating point in order to
determine natural frequencies and corresponding mode shapes. You must purchase Adams Linear to perform
a linear simulation.
1264 Adams View
Link
Link
An extrusion of a rectangle with semi-circular ends.
Location table
The Location Table lets you view the points in lines, polylines, splines, Extrusions, and revolutions and edit
them. You can also save the location information to a file or read in location information from a file.
Log file
An ASCII file called aview.log containing all of the commands that you entered during the current modeling
session, as well as all the error, warning, and fatal messages that you received. Adams View generates a log file
during each Adams View session.
Macro
A macro is a single command that you create to execute a series of Adams View commands.
Main toolbox
Displays tools and Tool stacks that assist you in creating and simulating your Model.
Main window
The Adams View window in which you build and simulate your Model.
Learn about Adams View Main Window (Classic).
1266 Adams View
Markers
Markers
Define a local coordinate system on any part (flexible, rigid, curve, or ground) in your model (see Part (also
called Bodies)) . A marker has a location (the origin of the coordinate system) and an orientation. Adams View
automatically creates markers at the center of mass of all solid Geometry and at anchor points on geometry that
define the location of the object in space. For example, a link has three markers: two at its endpoints and one
at its center of mass. Adams View also automatically creates markers for you when you constrain objects, such
as add a joint between parts. Adams View displays markers as triads.
Measures
Gauge particular quantities in your Model during a Simulation. For example, you can measure the Force in a
spring throughout a simulation or the angle between two Points or axes.
Menu Builder
An Adams View tool that lets you modify and create menus. For example, you can use the Menu Builder to
change the Main window’s menu bar so that it includes a Tire menu for adding tires to your Model. You can
build menus for a particular model or for an entire application.
Menu bar
Contains the headings of each menu. The menus contain all the Adams View commands for creating,
simulating, and improving your model.
Message file
Can contain Adams Solver messages and topology information. Has an .msg extension.
Modal Deformation
Outputs modal deformations as a function of time of the specified flexible body. Adams View will only export
coordinates of the active modes in the simulation.
By default an MNF is platform-independent, however, you can obtain a platform-dependent MNF, which
can improve flexible body animation performance in the Adams products.
Learn more About the Flexible Body Description File (MNF).
Model
A complete description of your virtual prototype in Adams View, including parts (see Part (also called Bodies))
, Joints, Forces, and Geometry.
Model topology
A view of your Modeling database to determine what Constraints your Model owns and what parts the constraints
connect (see Part (also called Bodies)) .
Modeling database
Contains all your work in the current session of Adams View. It contains any Models you create, their
attributes, Simulation results, plots, customized menus and Dialog boxes, and any preferences you set. You can
view the contents of a modeling database using the Database Navigator.
Move Toolstack
Contains tools for moving objects and setting the Working grid and default coordinate system.
Multi-Component force
A translational and/or rotational Force between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)) in your Model defined by
three or more orthogonal components.
1268 Adams View
Nodal Deformation
N-R
Nodal Deformation
Outputs nodal deformations as a function of time of the specified flexible. Adams View writes the
deformations in the simulation set of units.
N - R 1269
Non-analytical Method
Non-analytical Method
The non-analytical method digitizes the profile and path you specify for the the revolution or extrusion and
uses these points to create the revolution or extrusion. For a revolution, it also moves the profile making it
perpendicular to the path along which you are revolving the profile, and then performs the revolution. The
resulting solid geometry for both a revolution and extrusion are sharp edges where the points of the profile
were. The geometry is not smoothed.
When you modify an extrusion or revolution created using the non-analytical method, you move the original
profile points to change the solid.
Comparision of revolutions created with analytical and non-analytical methods
Comparision of extrusions created with analytical and non-analytical methods
Learn about Analytical Method
Non-Manifold
Extrusions that have mixed dimensions, edge or faces shared by another face, or intersecting lines. These types
of extrusions are not allowed in Adams View.
Numeric data
Files that contain numerical results generated during an Adams View session.
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
22
23
.24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
>>>>>> end of file <<<<<<<
Note: Numbers can be separated by a comma (,) and they do not have to be lined up in even
columns.
If a paragraph of text contains a line that begins with a number, Adams View tries to read the line. To avoid
this, precede lines that are to be ignored with a non-numeric character. Do not use +, -, or . because these
characters are valid as the first characters in a real number.
This sample file contains only one component but contains the number 3 at the beginning of a line in this
header paragraph. Adams View will try to read this line because it is not considered a comment.
1.5
3.0
4.5
6.0
>>>>>> end of file <<<<<<<
N - R 1271
Object position handle
The same file, without a numerical character, ensuring that Adams View does not try to read the paragraph
of text.
1.5
3.0
4.5
6.0
>>>>>> end of file <<<<<<<
Optimization
Helps you find an optimal design. You define the design objective and specify the parameters of the Model
that can change.
Orientation angles
Angles that define three rotations about the axes of a coordinate system. These can be Space-fixed rotations or
Body-fixed rotations.
Orientations
Outline
An outline is a sketch you create to substitute the more complex graphics from an Modal Neutral File (MNF) with
a simpler version. An outline on a flexible body deforms like the flexible body would. A flexible body can
have multiple outlines. The outline is only visible during animations of Simulations, linear system modes, and
when modeling. You cannot use the outline to investigate the component modes of a flexible body.
Learn more about Substituting Outline Graphics for the Finite Element Mesh.
1274 Adams View
Output step
Output step
The time step at which Adams Solver supplies data for you to investigate the results of a Simulation. Adams View
displays each output step as an animation frame and as a point of data on a plot.
Palette
A Dialog box of tools. You display a palette by selecting the Display Palette tool from a Tool stack or selecting a
modeling command on the Build menu.
Picture of a palette
Parametric analyses
Parametric analyses help you investigate the influence of Design variables on model performance. During a
parametric analysis, Adams View runs a series of Simulations with different values for the design variables and
gives you feedback on the effects of the changes.
Adams View has following types of parametric analyses:
Design study
Design of experiments (DOE)
Optimization
Temporary Settings Sweep
Parasolid
A standard CAD file format that you can import and export using Adams View.
Picture of a palette
N - R 1277
Picture of Color Picker
Pin-in-slot mechanism
Plate
Point Measures
Point measures provide an easy way to determine the kinematic and force characteristics of any marker (see
Markers), not just center-of-mass markers. For example, you can use point measures to resolve a force at a
specific location on a flexible body (see Flexible bodies), or you can determine the acceleration of the end
marker of a pendulum with respect to the ground reference frame.
Point Motion
Prescribes the movement between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)). When you create a point motion, you
specify the direction along which the motion occurs. You can impose a point motion on any type of idealized
joint, such as a spherical or cylindrical.
1284 Adams View
Point mass
Point mass
Part that has mass but no inertia properties or angular velocities.
Point-to-Point Measures
Point-to-point measures let you measure the kinematic relationship between any two Markers in your model.
For example, you can use a point-to-point measure to calculate the global y-component of distance between
any two specified markers.
You can also obtain point-to-point characteristics for geometric vertices. When you select vertices for the
markers, Adams View automatically creates a marker at each vertex and uses it in the point-to-point measure.
Points
Locations (x, y, and z) that define a point in space. You can attach other objects in your Models to points to
establish parametric relationships. If you move a point to which other objects have been attached, the objects
move accordingly.
You can also define the location of points using Design variables so that Adams View can vary the location of
the coordinates to understand the sensitivity of the design to the variable or to find its optimum values.
Primitive joints
A Joint that places a restriction on relative motion, such as restricting one part (see Part (also called Bodies)) to
always move parallel to another part. The joint primitives do not have physical counterparts as the Idealized
joints do.
Pull-down menu
An element in a Dialog box that displays a list of choices when you select it.
Push buttons
Buttons in a Dialog box that execute a command or display another dialog box.
Quasi-static simulation
Sequence of static Simulations performed for different configurations of the Model. Typically, Static equilibrium is
computed at fixed time intervals throughout a prescribed motion for a model.
can input data from durability test machines and output data to any RPC III-compatible programs. This
topic contains an overview of the RPC III format. For a detailed description of the RPC III format, see
www.mts.com.
RPC III files are sequential and fixed-length with 512-byte records. The files begin with a standard header
that describes the file contents. The header includes a FORMAT flag that specifies one of four data formats:
BINARY_IEEE_LITTLE_END - used on Windows systems
BINARY_IEEE_BIG_END - used on Linux systems
BINARY - used on VAX systems
ASCII
Adams View and Adams Durability can read any of the binary formats, so from the point of view of an Adams
user, these files are portable between platforms. These products can also write RPC III files in the
BINARY_IEEE_LITTLE_END format because MTS only provides RPC III software for the Windows
platform.
The RPC III file format supports multi-channel time history data with a fixed sample rate or time step.
Adams View and Adams Durability support an unlimited number of channels. These binary files map real
data into a short (2-byte) signed integer with the header providing a scaling factor for each channel. Because
the scaling factor essentially determines where the decimal point appears in these signed numbers, the
maximum resolution of data in an RPC III file is 0.0000305 () when the scaling factor is 1.
A key point to remember is that data that varies less than the magnitude of the channel resolution won’t be
reflected in an RPC III file. For example, with a scaling factor of 1, changes less than ±0.0000305 won’t
register in the RPC III data file.
The time history format of RPCIII files is limited to fixed time step and fixed size frames. Some of the effects
of these limitations as they pertain to Adams results are explained on the following two sections.
In this example, the RPC file contains 4 channels of time history data, and each group or block of data has
four frames. Each frame contains 1024 points. Figure 1 plots the last two blocks (groups) of the channel data.
It assumes 2304 data points of the time history data remain in the last group, labeled Block m. It shows how
the data is stored in the four frames. Frame 1 and 2 are filled with 1024 points each. This leaves 256 data
points stored in frame 3 and zero (0) in frame 4. However, because the RPC file format requires all frames to
be filled, Adams Durability will repeat the last value of each channel to fill the remaining 768 data points in
the third frame and all 1024 data points in the fourth frame. Note that repeating the last value of each channel
is a slight variation from what the MTS RPC specification suggests doing. The spec suggests setting the extra
points to zero, but doing this could be misleading since a zero value could have some significance.
Figure 1 Extra Data Points in RPC File; taken with permission from MTS RPC® FILE FORMATS, page 19, with some
minor modifications.
Radio buttons
One of a series of buttons in a Dialog box that display alternative choices. You can only select one button at a
time.
N - R 1289
Reaction markers
Reaction markers
A marker (see Markers) belonging to the body to which Adams View applies the reaction Force of a multi-
component applied force. Reaction markers are also referred to as J markers.
Reference markers
A marker (see Markers) that indicates the direction of a multi-component applied Force.
Reflections Example
No Reflections Reflections
Render files
Render files are polygonal representation of surfaces that you create using Parametric Technology’s
Pro/ENGINEER. The format of the render files is almost identical to the Stereolithography (SLA) format but it
includes material information, such as color, with the polygonal surfaces.
N - R 1291
Rendering mode
Rendering mode
The application of shading and light to the objects in your Model. Adams View provides you with six rendering
modes.
Request file
Contains requests for standard displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force information. You can also define
other quantities (such as pressure, work, energy, momentum, and more) that you want output during a
Simulation.
Requests
Requests contain standard displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force information that will help you
investigate the results of your simulation. You can also define other quantities (such as pressure, work, energy,
momentum, and more) that you want output during a Simulation.
Adams stores the requests in Request files (.req).
Restitution-based contact
In this method, Adams Solver computes the contact force from a penalty parameter and a coefficient of
restitution. The penalty parameter enforces the unilateral constraint, and the coefficient of restitution
controls the dissipation of energy at the contact.
vx vy vz wx wy wz
Results file
A file containing the set of state variable information that Adams Solver calculates during a Simulation. By
default, Adams Solver does not create a results file when working with Adams View.
Right-click
To hold the right mouse button down over an object, such a text box or part on the screen.
N - R 1293
Rigid body
Rigid body
A part (see Part (also called Bodies)) with inertial properties and mass that cannot deform. Every time you add
a rigid body to your Model, it adds six Degrees of freedom to your model. Rigid bodies can move relative to other
parts and can be used as a reference frame to measure another part's velocity or acceleration.
Adams View provides you with geometric constructions and solids with which you can create rigid bodies.
You can also refine the part geometry by adding features and performing Boolean operations to combine
bodies.
By default, Adams View uses the geometry of the rigid body to determine its mass and inertia properties. You
can also enter your own values for mass and inertia properties.
Run-time mode
Function Builder mode in which you define the functions Adams Solver uses during a Simulation.
1294 Adams View
SI2 integrator
S-Z
SI2 integrator
The SI2 Integrator uses the Stabilized Index-2 formulation, in conjunction with the Gear Stiff (GSTIFF) integrator,
for formulating and integrating differential equations of motion.
STEP file
A standard CAD file format that you can import and export using Adams View.
Saturation
Saturation is the strength or purity of a color in a specified hue, up to a maximum of 240. The higher the
saturation, the purer the color.
Saves the model to the database at a simulated position, and under a new name.
Learn more about Saving a Simulation Frame as New Model.
Screen icons
Graphical representations of various modeling objects that do not have a geometric representation, such as
force application points and directions.
S - Z 1295
Script
Script
A list of commands that Adams Solver executes during a Scripted simulation. Scripts give you access to capabilities
that are not available interactively. For example, you can use a simulation script to activate and deactivate
portions of your model or change solution settings during the simulation. Simulation scripts can do
everything that the interactive controls can.
Scripted simulation
A Simulation that uses a set of commands stored in a Script instead of the standard simulation commands.
Simulation scripts are useful when you have come up with a good set of simulation parameters that you want
to repeat again and again. They are also needed for Design study, Design of experiments (DOE), and Optimization
simulations.
Select list
A list of all the objects that you have selected. You can view the list in the Select List Manager.
1296 Adams View
Shaded rendering mode
Shell
The remains of a solid object once you’ve hollowed out one of its faces.
Shortcut menus
Menus that appear when you place the cursor over an object and hold down the right mouse button (Example
of shortcut menu). The commands in the menus differ depending on the object that the cursor is currently over.
Learn more about Using Shortcut Menus.
To use the Up and Down arrow keys to select a continuous set of objects:
1. In the tree list, click on the first object, hold down the Shift key, and then use Up or Down arrows
to select a block of objects.
2. Select OK.
Sim_controls
Simulation
A prediction of how your physical prototype will behave. When you run a simulation, Adams Solver verifies
the Model and applies Forces and motion to it. It displays an animation of the simulation in the Main window
by default.
You can select the types of simulation that Adams Solver runs on your model as well as set the level of output.
You can also supply a Script of commands to be performed.
S - Z 1299
Simulation Debugger
Simulation Debugger
The Simulation Debugger provides both graphical and tabular feedback on how hard Adams Solver is
working to simulate your model. For example, during a simulation, the Simulation Debugger provides a table
of those objects with the greatest simulation error. The Simulation Debugger can also highlight trouble areas
during a simulation and provide measures of integrator progress, such as step size and integrator order.
The graphical and tabular feedback helps you determine:
Which modeling elements (forces, constraints, and so on) are causing numerical difficulties. Often,
the information directly points out modeling elements that you should change. You should always
carefully inspect any modeling elements to which the Simulation Debugger calls attention.
Determine what simulation events are causing numerical difficulties. For example, if your model
simulates fine until there is an impact between two parts, you should closely monitor simulation
performance before, during, and after the impact.
The Simulation Debugger has several options for how you want to view its debugging information. During
an interactive simulation, you can:
Step through the simulation one output step, time step, or iteration at a time, depending on your
output preference. Adams View pauses after each simulation output step so that you can closely
inspect the behavior of the simulation.
View a table of objects that list the objects that have the most error or the greatest change,
acceleration, or force. You can also view Adams Solver integrator progress.
Highlight objects that have the most error or the greatest change, acceleration, or force.
Display strip charts of Adams Solver settings.
You can select to view any or all of these options during a single simulation. Note, however, that the options
significantly slow down your simulation.
Single-component force
A Force defined as one resultant magnitude along a direction.
Snap
To lock geometry so it aligns with the Working grid.
Solid fill
To show both the faces and edges of objects. Uses flat shading.
Solid geometry
Geometric objects that have mass. Adams View comes with several types of predefined solid geometry,
including boxes, cylinders, and links. You can also create solid geometry from Construction geometry by
extruding it.
Space-fixed rotation
To apply rotations about axes that remain in their original orientation.
Spec lines
A line that represents a constant baseline value in a plot.
Sphere
A solid ellipsoid whose three axes are of equal length.
is the angle in the zx plane of the coordinate system to a location, as in cylindrical coordinates.
is the angle between the y-axis of the coordinate system and the line connecting the origin of the
coordinate system and the location.
S - Z 1301
Spline Editor
Spline Editor
An Adams View tool that provides a tabular or plot view of spline data for editing and plotting. You can drag
points on the spline plots and see the effect of different curve-fitting techniques on your spline. You can also
select linear extrapolation and view its effect.
Standard toolbar
Contains tools for performing basic file and edit operations. We have not filled the entire toolbar with tools
so you can add your own tools to customize your work environment.
Start at Equilibrium
Performs a Static equilibrium before performing a Dynamic simulation.
State variables
State variables define scalar algebraic equations for independent use or as part of the plant input, plant output,
or Array elements.
1302 Adams View
Static equilibrium
Static equilibrium
Finds the state of the Model in which all internal and external forces are balanced in the absence of any system
motions or inertial Forces. It sets all system velocities and accelerations to zero, so inertial forces are not taken
into consideration. A static simulation is for use with models that have one or more Degrees of freedom so
Adams Solver can move parts around as it seeks to balance all the forces acting on the model.
You can request to perform a static equilibrium before a Dynamic simulation to remove unwanted system
transients at the start of the Simulation. (Unbalanced forces in the initial configuration can generate undesirable
effects at the beginning of a dynamic analysis).
Status bar
A line at the bottom of the Main window that displays information about the element your cursor is currently
on, the action you should perform, or an error message. The following shows the status bar in Adams View.
Stereolithography (SLA)
Files containing triangularized polygon information representing the surface of geometry. You specify the
quality of surface representation when you produce the SLA files in your CAD program. You usually specify
the error tolerance, chord height, or quality factor. When you import the files, Adams transfers the surfaces
to shells.
Strain
Outputs strain information if strain modes are available in the modal neutral file (MNF) of the specified
flexible body. Adams View outputs all six components of strain (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY,
shear-YZ, and shear-ZX). It outputs strains in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body. In the
Flex Body text box, enter the flexible body whose data Adams View outputs. Adams View outputs the data
in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.
Stress
Outputs stress information if modal stresses are available in the MNF of the flexible body. Adams View
outputs all six components of stress (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, and shear-ZX). It
outputs stresses in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body. In the Flex Body text box, enter the
S - Z 1303
Stress/strain flags
flexible body whose data Adams View outputs. Adams View outputs the data in the FE model basic
coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.
Stress/strain flags
You specify the value of stress or strain to be evaluated in the HOT_SPOTS, MAX_STRESS, or
TOP_SPOTS function using the Value argument. The following settings are supported for the Value
argument:
0 - Von mises
1 - Normal x
2 - Normal y
3 - Normal z
4 - Shear xy
5 - Shear yz
6 - Shear zx
7 - Maximum principal
8 - Minimum principal
9 - Maximum shear
Strip chart
A monitoring device in which Adams View plots a measure (See Measures). The strip chart monitors the
measure during a Simulation.
You can transfer a Curve in a strip chart to Adams PostProcessor so you can further manipulate it, such as zoom
in on it or view its statistical data. In addition, you can view multiple curves from successive simulations in a
single strip chart to chart changes.
System elements
System elements let you create one or more general differential and/or algebraic equations that enable you to
model system components that are not as easily represented by standard Adams View modeling objects, such
as parts (see Part (also called Bodies)), Constraints, and Forces.
Table
Displays the Maximum Equation Error (Debug Table) dialog box, which contains a running count of the iterations
needed to solve the equations of motion.
Table Editor
An Adams View tool that displays the objects in your Modeling database in table format so you can compare
the objects and quickly update them.
Learn more about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
1304 Adams View
Tabular output file
Template-Based products
The template-based products expand MSC's virtual prototyping to provide you with standard building
blocks so you can rapidly prototype your real system, such as engine parts, car suspensions, and rail cars. They
offer fully parametric modeling techniques so if you move one entity, its dependents move accordingly.
The template-based products include Adams Car and Adams Driveline.
Text box
A field in a Dialog box in which you enter text.
Three-component torque
A rotational force between two parts in your model using three orthogonal components.
Tic marks
Short lines that mark the axis at regular intervals to define the scale of the axis on a plot. You can set how the
tic marks are placed along the axis and their color.
To select objects:
To select a single object, click the part.
To use the mouse to select a continuous set of objects, drag the mouse over the objects that you want
to select or click on one objects, hold down the Shift key, and click the last object in the set. All the
objects between the two selected parts are highlighted.
To use the up and down arrow keys to select a continuous set of objects, click on the first part, hold
down the Shift key, and then use the up or down arrow to select a block of objects.
To select a noncontinuous set of objects, click on an object, hold down the Ctrl key, and click on the
individual object that you want.
To clear any object in the selected list, hold down the Ctrl key and then click the selected object to
clear its selection.
Tool stack
A collection of tools in a toolbox or Toolbar. For example, the Main toolbox has a View Layout tool stack that
contains all the ways in which you can display the views in the main window. The last selected or default tool
appears on top of the stack. A small triangle in the lower right corner of the top tool indicates that there are
additional tools.
1306 Adams View
Tool tips
Tool tips
Boxes that display information about the command or Toolbar button that the cursor is currently over. Use
the Tips On/Off command on the Help menu to turn the tips on and off.
Toolbar
An area of a window that contains icons that represent Adams View commands for creating and viewing your
Model.
S - Z 1307
Torsion spring
Torsion spring
A rotational spring-damper applied between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)).
Transient simulation
During a transient simulation, Adams Solver performs either a:
Kinematic simulation if your model has zero Degrees of freedom.
Dynamic simulation if your model has one or more degrees of freedom.
Tree list
The tree list is a hierarchical listing of objects in your model. It appears on the left side of the Database
Navigator.
A plus (+) appears in front of an object to indicate that the object has children below it but they are
hidden.
A minus (-) indicates that all objects immediately below the object are displayed.
The text (OFF) appears next any object that has been deactivated.
1308 Adams View
Treeview
Treeview
The treeview is a hierarchical listing of objects in your current session of Adams PostProcessor. It appears
along the left side of the Adams PostProcessor window. A folder appears in front of each page in the tree to
indicate that there are objects stored on the page.
S - Z 1309
User-written subroutine
User-written subroutine
Subroutines that you link into Adams Solver through dynamic link libraries that allow you to customize Adams
Solver to:
Define your own modeling elements.
Make Adams work in your preferred environment, such as a control system design package.
For more information, See the Subroutines section of the Adams Solver online help.
View
The position of the model in a View window. There are six standard views of a Model. They include the front,
back, top, bottom, left, and right views.
View title
Title of View window, which, by default, displays the name of the model currently displayed in the window.
On the Main toolbox, from the Toggle Tool Stack, click the View Title tool .
Double-click to apply the change to all view windows. The tool must be on top of the tool stack to
double-click it.
1310 Adams View
View triad
View triad
A triad that displays the orientation of the global coordinate system axes. It appears in the lower left corner
of each view window. As you move the view of a window, the triad displays the changes to the coordinate
system orientation.
On the Main toolbox, from the Toggle Tool Stack, click the View Triad tool .
Double-click to apply the change to all view windows. The tool must be on top of the tool stack to
double-click it.
View window
A portion of the Main window that displays different aspects of your Model.
Picture of main window divided into two view windows:
S - Z 1311
Wavefront files
Wavefront files
Set of files that contain a description of the model graphics. Their format is suitable for the Wavefront®
visualization system so you can create network broadcast quality animations of your Simulations.
1312 Adams View
Window Layout Tool Stack
Working grid
A grid of points that defines the plane on which you are creating objects. Initially, it is aligned with the global
coordinate system but you can move it as desired. When you turn on the grid, objects automatically Snap to
the grid points whenever you create, move, or reshape them. You can select a Rectangular working grid or Polar
working grid.
Picture of working grid.
Zoom
To change the magnification of your Model on the screen.
S - Z 1313
Zoom
1314 Adams View
Zoom
Links to Command Language and Function Builder
Help
View Command Language Help
View Function Builder Help
618 Adams View